VNX - Su Clio 2 PDF

General
SPECIFICATIONS
LIFTING
TOWING
LUBRICANTS, CONSUMABLES
DRAINING, FILLING
VALUES AND SETTINGS
BB0A - BB0C - BB0D - BB0E - CB0A - CB0C - CB0D - CB0E

77 11 197 289
DECEMBER 1997
"The repair methods given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
technical specifications current when it was prepared.
Edition Anglaise
All copyrights reserved by Renault.

Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part
reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of
Renault.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the

manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories
from which his vehicles are constructed."
Renault 1997
http://vnx.su
General
Contents
Page
01 SPECIFICATIONS
Engine - Clutch - Gearbox
Vehicle identification
05 DRAINING FILLING
01-1
01-2
02 LIFTING
Trolley jack - Axle stands
Vehicle lifts
Page
Engine
Gearbox
Power assisted steering
07 VALUES AND SETTINGS

02-1
02-2
03 TOWING
All types
03-1
04 LUBRICANTS CONSUMABLES
Packaging
05-1
05-3
05-4
04-1
Dimensions
Capacity - Grades
Belt tension
Accessories belt tension
Timing belt tension
Tightening the cylinder head
Wheels and Tyres
Brakes
Brake limiter
Underbody heights
Values for checking the front axle
geometry
Values for checking the rear axle
geometry
07-1
07-2
07-5
07-7
07-12
07-13
07-15
07-16
07-17
07-18
07-20
07-21
The CLIO Workshop Repair Manual has been prepared by repair and diagnostic methods
specialists.
The document contains the methods and diagnostic procedures required in order to obtain
high quality repairs on this vehicle.
However, if removal - refitting involves no special features, difficulties or special tooling requirements, then the method is considered to be very simple for a car repair specialist and
is not described in the manual.
The labour times are the result of operations timings carried out in real time in our workshops, even though certain methods are not described in the Workshop Repair Manual.
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
All dimensions are given in millimetres (mm) unless otherwise indicated.

Tightening torques are given in deca Newton metres (daN.m ).
Pressures are in bars (reminder: 1 bar = 100 000 Pa ).
Electrical resistance values are in ohms ().
Voltages are in Volts (V).
TOLERANCES
The following tolerances must be observed for tightening torques given without tolerance:
In degrees : 3 .
In daN.m : 10 %.
EQUIPMENT AND TOOLING
The repair methods described for vehicles made by RENAULT require special equipment
and tooling in some cases. A wide range of such items may be found in the specialist equipment and tooling catalogues.
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine- Clutch - Gearbox
01
Engine
Vehicle type
Clutch type
Type
Capacity
(cm3)
B/C B0A
D7F
1149
180 CP 3300
B/C B0C
E7J
1390
180 CP 3300
B/C B0D
K7M
1598
200 CPOV 3500
B/C B0E
F8Q
1870
200 CPOV 3250
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Example : BB0A
B : Body type (5 doors)
B : Project code
0A : Engine suffix
01-1
Manual gearbox type
JB1
SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle identification
01
LOCATION OF VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
13491R2
6
7
A
RENAULT S.A.
9
e0-00/00-0000-000-000-00
1
10
VF000000000000000
0000 kg
0000 kg
1 - 0000 kg
2 - 0000 kg
11
12
13
000000000000000
1 The type mines of the vehicle and the serial

number
2 MTMA (Maximum permitted all up weight)
3 MTR (Maximum permitted total train weight vehicle loaded with trailer)
4 MTMA front axle
5 MTMA rear axle
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
01-2
The technical features of the vehicle

The paint code
The equipment level
The vehicle type
The trim code
Additional equipment definition
Fabrication number
The interior matching trim code
LIFTING
Trolley jack - Axle stands
02
Safety symbol (special precautions to be taken when carrying out operations).
SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED
Cha. 280 -02

Cha. 408 -01
or
Cha. 408 -02
Adaptable cross piece for trolley jack

Adaptable socket for trolley jack
If a trolley jack is used, appropriate axle

stands must always be used.
AXLE STANDS
When putting the vehicle on axle stands, they

must be positioned:
- either under the reinforcements provided for
lifting the vehicle with its jack,
- or under the jacking points located behind the
reinforcements.
It is forbidden to lift the vehicle by supporting its

weight under the front suspension arms or under
the rear axle assembly.
The axle stands are positioned at the rear by

lifting the vehicle at the side.
Depending on the type of trolley jack, use sockets

Cha. 408-01 or Cha. 408-02 in order to fit the cross
piece Cha. 280-02.
To lift at the front or the rear, take the weight
under the vehicle jacking points.
TROLLEY JACK AT THE SIDE
Use the cross piece Cha. 280-02.

Take the weight under the sill, level with the front
door.
Position the sill flange correctly in the cross piece
groove.
14275-1R
85679-1G15
02-1
13491G
LIFTING
Vehicle lifts
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
02
FRONT
Various cases may be considered:
1 - REMOVING COMPONENTS
In general, never use a 2 post lift whenever a 4
post lift may be used.
If this cannot be avoided, place lifting pads
underneath the sill flange, level with the vehicle
jacking points.
2 - REMOVING - REFITTING THE ENGINE AND
98703S
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
In these cases, the vehicle body must be secured to

the arms of the 2 post lift using special pads.
REAR
98704S
These must be placed underneath the vehicle

jacking points. They must click into the slots in the
sill flanges.
02-2
TOWING
All types
03
OBSERVE THE LEGAL TOWING REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY YOU ARE IN.
NEVER USE THE DRIVESHAFTS AS ATTACHMENT POINTS.
The towing points may only be used for towing the vehicle on the road. They should never be used for removing the vehicle from a ditch or for any other similar breakdown operation or to lift the vehicle, either directly or indirectly.
FRONT
REAR
13565S
13646S
03-1
LUBRICANTS CONSUMABLES
Packaging
DESCRIPTION
PACKAGING
04
PART NUMBER
LUBRICANTS
1 kg tin
77 01 421 145
MOLYKOTE "33 Medium"

tubular rear axle bushes
anti-roll bar bushes.
100 g tube
77 01 028 179
ANTI-SEIZE
(high temperature grease) Turbo etc.
80 ml tube
77 01 422 307
"MOBIL CVJ" 825 Black star
180 g sachet
77 01 366 100
Aerosol
77 01 422 308
MOLYKOTE "BR2"
for main bearing journal faces, thrust pad
guide tubes, clutch fork pads, lower
suspension arm bearings, torsion bar splines,
steering rack, driveshaft splines.
or MOBIL EXF57C
for driveshaft joints

MULTIPURPOSE LUBRICANT
wheel sensor
MECHANICAL SEALANTS
Perfect-seal "LOWAC"
coating fluid for seals.
Mastic
for sealing exhaust pipe unions.
RHODORSEAL 5661
100 g tube
77 01 417 404
1.5 kg tin
77 01 421 161
100 g tube
77 01 421 042
77 01 404 452
Kit
HARDENER KIT (RHODORSEAL 5661)

for sealing sides of bearing caps
100 g tube
AUTO joint blue

sealing paste.
04-1
77 01 421 080
77 01 396 227
Packaging
DESCRIPTION
PACKAGING
04
PART NUMBER
MECHANICAL SEALANTS
AUTO joint grey
sealing paste.
LOCTITE 518
for sealing the gearbox housing.
Leak detector
100 g tube
77 01 422 750
24 ml syringe
77 01 421 162
Aerosol
77 11 143 071
ADHESIVES
"LOCTITE - FRENETANCH"
stops bolts slackening and allows them to be
released
24 cc bottle
77 01 394 070
"LOCTITE - FRENBLOC"
locks bolts
24 cc bottle
77 01 394 071
"LOCTITE SCELBLOC"
for bonding bearings
24 cc bottle
77 01 394 072
"LOCTITE AUTOFORM"
for bonding the flywheel to the crankshaft
50 cc bottle
77 01 400 309
LUBRICANT CLEANING AGENTS

Aerosol - 150 g
77 01 408 464
Carburettor cleaner
300 ml can
77 11 171 437
Injector cleaner
355 ml can
77 01 423 189
Aerosol - 500 ml
77 01 408 466
Aerosol
77 01 405 952
Aerosol - 400 ml
77 11 170 801
"NETELEC"
unseizes, lubricates
Super concentrated unseizing agent

"DECAPJOINT " (FRAMET) for cleaning the
gasket faces of aluminium cylinder heads
Brake cleaner
04-2
Packaging
DESCRIPTION
PACKAGING
04
PART NUMBER
VARNISHES
"CIRCUIT PLUS"
varnish for repairing heated screens
Bottle
77 01 421 135
Kit
77 01 422 752
0.5 litre bottle DOT4
77 01 421 940
"CONTACT PLUS"
varnish for repairing rear screen supply terminals
BRAKES
Brake fluid
04-3
DRAINING - FILLING
Engine
05
TOOLING REQUIRED
Engine drain plug spanner
DRAINING: plug (1)
FILLING: plug (2)
D7F ENGINE
13369R
13567R
E7J and K7M ENGINES
13367R
13642R
05-1
DRAINING - FILLING
Engine
DRAINING: plug (1)
05
FILLING : plug (2)
F8Q ENGINE
13368R
13568R
05-2
DRAINING - FILLING
Gearbox
05
DRAINING: plug (1)

FILLING: plug (2)
D7F ENGINE
E7J and K7M ENGINES
13369R1
13367R1
F8Q ENGINE
13368R1
05-3
DRAINING - FILLING
Power assisted steering
05
CHECKING THE LEVEL

POWER ASSISTED STEERING PUMP LEVEL
For topping up or filling, use ELF RENAULTMATIC

D2 or MOBIL ATF 220 oil.
The level, when correct, should be visible between
the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir (1).
D7F - E7J - K7M and F8Q ENGINES
12422R1
F8Q ENGINE with air conditioning
14281R
05-4
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Dimensions
07
Dimensions in metres
13491R3
07-1
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Capacity - Grades
Components
Capacity in
litres
(approx.)*
Petrol engine
(oil)
When
draining
07
Grade
E.E.C. countries
-15 C
-30 C -20 C
-10 C
+25 C
0 C +10 C +20 C +30 C
15W40-15W50
ACEA A2/A3
ACEA A1*/A2/A3
D7F
3.5
3.7 (1)
E7J
2.7
2.9 (1)
K7M
3.5
3.7 (1)
10W30-10W40-10W50
ACEA A1*/A2/A3
0W30-5W30
ACEA A1*/A2/A3
0W40-5W40-5W50
ACEA A1-98 standard

Except turbo - biturbo - F7R - F7P
* Oil for fuel economy
Other countries
-15 C
-30 C -20 C
-10 C
0 C
API SH/SJ
+10 C +20 C +30 C
15W40-15W50
API SH/SJ
10W40-10W50
API SH/SJ
10W30
API SH/SJ
5W30
API SH/SJ
5W40-5W50
Oil for fuel economy:

API SJ-IL SAC GF2 standard
* Check with the dipstick

(1) After replacing the oil filter
07-2
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Capacity - Grades
Components
Capacity
in litres
(approx)*
Diesel engine
(oil)
When
draining
07
Grade
E.E.C. countries
-15 C
-30 C -20 C
+25 C
-10 C
0 C +10 C +20 C +30 C
ACEA B2/B3
ACEA B2/B3
15W40-15W50
10W40-10W50
ACEA B2/B3
5W30
ACEA B2/B3
5W40-5W50
ACEA B1 oils must never be used for diesel

engines.
F8Q
4.7
5.2 (1)
Other countries
-15 C
-30 C -20 C
+15 C
-10 C
0 C
+10 C +20 C +30 C
API CF
15W40-15W50
API CF
10W40-10W50
API CF
10W30
API CF
5W40-5W50
* Check with the dipstick

(1) After replacing the oil filter
07-3
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Capacity - Grades
Components
Capacity
in litres
Manual
gearbox
JB1
Brake circuit
Grade
07
Notes
All countries: TRANSELF TRX 75 W 80 W

( API GL5 or MIL-L 2105 C or D standards)
3.4
Normal : 0.7
SAE J 1703
ABS : 1
and DOT 4
Brake fluids must be approved by the Technical

Department
Fuel tank
approx.
50
Unleaded
petrol / diesel
Power assisted
steering
Separate
reservoir
1.1
ELF RENAULT MATIC D2
Cooling circuit
or
MOBIL ATF 220

GLACEOL RX
D7F
5
(type D)
Only add coolant
of the same type
E7J and K7M

5.5
F8Q
7.4
07-4
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Belt tension
07
Mot.
1273
Tool for checking belt tension
96601R
A
B
C
D
Sensor
Display
Connecting cable
Calibration checking plate
Calibrating the device

The device is set in the factory; however it must be
recalibrated every six months.
Principle
Procedure
The sensor, through the adjusting button (1), the

pressure device (2) and the outer lugs (3), applies a
constant force to the belt.
Resetting to zero:
- switch the device on (button E) with the adjusting button (1) fully screwed in,
- if 0 is displayed, do not touch anything,
- if nothing is displayed, check the condition of
the 9 volt battery in the device ,
- if a value other than 0 is displayed, adjust screw
(F) until 0 is obtained.
The reaction from the belt is measured using a

test piece (4) fitted with strain gauges.
Any movement on the gauges creates a variation
in their electrical resistance. This variation, once it
has been converted by the device, is displayed in
SEEM units (US).
07-5
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Belt tension
07
Checking the calibration

Switch the device on (button E).
Position the calibration spring plate (Z) on the sensor as shown on the diagram (control value engraved towards the top, (A) minimum value, (B) maximum value).
Tighten the adjusting button (1) until it goes "CLICK - CLICK - CLICK".
Check that a value X between the values (A and B) (A X B) is displayed.
Note: it may be necessary to perform several preliminary tests in order to obtain the correct value.
If the correct value if still not obtained after several attempts, contact SEEM.
NOTE : each device has its own calibration spring plate and they are not interchangeable.
96602R
1 Knurled button
A
Calibration plate control value
B
Z Calibration plate
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
- Never refit a belt which has been removed, replace it.

- Never retighten a belt for which the tension
reading is between the fitting value and the
minimum operating value.
SEEM
Contact your After Sales Head Office for further

information.
- When checking, if the tension is below the minimum operating value, change the belt.
07-6
VALUES AND SETTINGS

MULTI "V" BELT
Tensioning process
Engine cold (ambient temperature).
Fit the new belt.
Position the sensor of Mot. 1273.
Turn the wheel of the sensor until it disengages (three "CLICKS").
Tension the belt until the recommended fitting value is displayed on Mot. 1273 .
Lock the tensioner, check it, adjust the value.
Turn the crankshaft over three times.
Check that the tension value is within the fitting tension tolerance, otherwise readjust it.
NOTE :
Never refit a belt which has been removed.

Replace the belt, if the tension is below the minimum operating tension.
Small cuts or cracks do not mean that the belt has to be replaced.
07-7
07
VALUES AND SETTINGS

D7F
ENGINE
07
Mot.
1273
ALTERNATOR BELT
POWER ASSISTED STEERING BELT
A
B
C
D
G
T
10071R2
97267R4
14263R1
97267R5
Crankshaft
Alternator
Power assisted steering pump
Air conditioning compressor
Roller
Tensioner
Point for checking belt tension
unit)
Alternator
belt
multi "V"
Power assisted
steering belt
multi "V"
Air conditioning
compressor belt
multi "V"
Air
conditioning/
power assisted
steering belt
multi "V"
Fitting
102 7
96 5
1046
1016
Minimum
operating
53
43
56
51
Tension
(US=SEEM
07-8
VALUES AND SETTINGS

E7J and K7M

ENGINES
07
Mot.
1273
ALTERNATOR BELT
POWER ASSISTED STEERING BELT
13511R1
A
B
C
T
13510R
Crankshaft
Alternator
Tension roller
Bolt A: alternator belt tension

Bolt B: power steering belt tension
NOTE : after tensioning, tighten the nuts of bolts
(A) and (B).
Tension
unit)
Alternator
belt
multi "V"
Power assisted
steering belt
multi "V"
Fitting
101 6
106 6
Minimum
operating
52
59
(US=SEEM
13363R1
07-9
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
VALUES AND SETTINGS

07
POWER ASSISTED STEERING PUMP AND AIR

CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT
14276R
The belt may be slackened and tensioned by

means of bolt (A).
07-10
VALUES AND SETTINGS

F8Q
ENGINE
07
Mot.
1273
ALTERNATOR BELT
ALTERNATOR AND POWER ASSISTED STEERING

BELT
13512R
13509R
A
B
C
D
T
Crankshaft
Alternator
Air conditioning compressor
Tension roller
14262R1
unit)
Alternator
belt
multi "V"
Power assisted
steering belt
multi "V"
Air
conditioning
compressor
belt
multi "V"
Fitting
115 5
116 6
115 6
Minimum
operating
70
68
82
Tension
(US=SEEM
07-11
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Timing belt tension
Tensioning process
07
E7J and K7M engines
Engine cold (ambient temperature).

Fit the new belt.
Position the sensor of Mot. 1273.
Turn the wheel of the sensor until it disengages
(three "CLICKS").
Tension the belt until the recommended fitting
value is displayed on Mot. 1273.
Lock the tensioner, check it and adjust the value.
Turn the crankshaft over four times .
Check that the tension value is within the fitting
tension tolerance ( 10%), otherwise readjust it
by repeating the above operations.
13361R
NOTE :
Belt tension (in SEEM units)
For the F8Q engine, remove the pin Mot 1054

before fitting the sensor of Mot 1273 and
press hard on the piece of belt between the
intermediate shaft sprocket (or idle sprocket)
and the tension roller, then carry out the measurement.
Never refit a belt which has been removed.
Replace the belt if the tension is below the minimum operating tension.
Fitting: 30 U.S. 5 %
Minimum operating : 26 U.S.
F8Q engine
D7F engine
There are special notes for the timing belt tension
of this engine. Therefore refer to section 11.
13094R
Belt tension (in SEEM units)

Fitting: 29 U.S. 5 %
Minimum operating : 25 U.S.
07-12
VALUES AND SETTINGS

07
METHOD FOR TIGHTENING THE CYLINDER HEAD

REMINDER:
To ensure that the bolts are correctly tightened, use a syringe to remove any oil which may be in the cylinder
head mounting holes.
All the cylinder head bolts must be systematically replaced after any removal.
There is no cylinder head retightening operation.
Using engine oil, lubricate the threads and under the heads of the bolts.
D7F ENGINE
E7J ENGINE
Preseating the gasket
Tighten all the bolts to 2 daN.m, then angle tighten to 90 in the order indicated below.
Tighten all the bolts to 2 daN.m, then angle tighten to 97 2 in the order indicated below.
10
10
90775S
90775S
Wait 3 minutes settling time.
Tightening the cylinder head:
- The cylinder head is tightened in stages, applying the following procedure successively to
bolts 1-2 then 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10.
bolts 1-2 then 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10.
- Slacken bolts 1-2 until they are completely free.
- Tighten bolts 1-2 to 2 daN.m, then angle tighten to 200.
- Tighten bolts 1-2 to 2 daN.m, then angle tighten to 97 2.
- Repeat the slackening and re-tightening operation for bolts 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10.
07-13
VALUES AND SETTINGS

K7M ENGINE
07
F8Q ENGINE
10
10
90775S
90775S
bolts 1-2 then 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10.
bolts 1-2 then 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 and 9-10.
- Tighten bolts 1-2 to 2 daN.m, then angle tighten to 110 6.
- Tighten bolts 1-2 to 2.5 daN.m, then angle tighten to 213 7.
07-14
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Wheels and tyres
Vehicle
Rim
Tyres
B/C B0A
07
Cold inflation pressure
(in bars) (1)
Front
Rear
2.2
2.1
2.3
2.1
5 B 13
165/70 R 13 T
B/C B0D
5 B 13
5,5 J 14
165/70 R 13 T
165/60 R 14 T
165/65 R 14 T
2.4
2.1
B/C B0E
5 B 13
165/70 R 13 T
175/70 R 13 T (2)
2.3
2.1
B/C B0C
(1) Fully laden and motorway use.

(2) With air conditioning.
Wheel nuts tightening torque : 9 daN.m
Rim run-out : 1.2 mm
07-15
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Brakes
07
Drum diameter or disc thickness (in mm)

Max. disc run-out
(in mm)
Vehicle
Front
Rear
Normal
Min.
Normal
Max. (1)
Front
Rear
B/C B0A
12 no ABS
10.5 no ABS
180.25
181.25
0.07
B/C B0E
B/C B0C
B/C B0D
12 no ABS
20 with ABS
10.5 no ABS
17.7 with
ABS
203.2
204.2
0.07
20.6
17.6
203.2
204.2
0.07
B/C B0E (2) (3)

B/C B0D (2)
(1) Drum: maximum wear diameter.

(2) With ABS and without underbody protection.
(3) With air conditioning.
Lining thickness (in mm) (including backing plate)

Vehicle
Front
Rear
Brake fluid
New
Min.
New
Min.
B/C B0A
18.2
4.85
B/C B0C
18.2
4.6 (1)
3.3 (2)
B/C B0E
18.2
4.6 (1)
3.3 (2)
B/C B0D
18.2
4.6 (1)
3.3 (2)
(1) Primary lining.

(2) Secondary lining.
07-16
SAE J1703
DOT 4
SAE J1703
DOT 4
SAE J1703
DOT 4
SAE J1703
DOT 4
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Brake limiter
07
BRAKING PRESSURE
Vehicle
Test pressure (1) (in bars)
Fuel tank level

(driver aboard)
Front
B/C B0A
B/C B0C
B/C B0D
B/C B0E
100
90966S
(1) The checking is carried out with two pressure gauges arranged in an X layout.
07-17
Rear
56
0
- 18
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Underbody heights
07
Vehicle
At the front
H1 - H2 = ... mm
At the rear
H4 - H5 = ... mm
Dimension X (in mm)
B/C B0A
B/C B0C
90.6
- 29
B/C B0D
98.2
- 23
B/C B0E
96
- 23
R-H and L-H
Tolerance : 10.5 mm
The difference between the right-hand side and the left-hand side on the same axle of a vehicle must not exceed 5 mm, with the drivers side always being the higher.
Any work carried out on the underbody height requires adjustment of the brake limiter and of the headlights.
07-18
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Underbody heights
07
MEASURING POINTS
13491R4
NOTE : dimension H5 is measured from the axis of the rubber bush.
07-19
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Values for checking the front axle geometry
POSITION OF
VALUES
ANGLES
07
ADJUSTMENT
FRONT AXLE
CASTOR
4
330
3
230
30
H5-H2
H5-H2
H5-H2
H5-H2
=
=
=
=
32 mm
51 mm
70 mm
89 mm
H1-H2
H1-H2
H1-H2
H1-H2
= 17 mm
= 89 mm
= 115 mm
= 179 mm
H1-H2
H1-H2
H1-H2
H1-H2
= 17 mm
= 89 mm
= 115 mm
= 179 mm
NOT
ADJUSTABLE
Maximum left / right

difference = 1
93012-1S
CAMBER
D7F
E7J/K7M
F8Q
016
- 110
- 120
- 045
93013-1S
054
- 025
- 034
005
30
30
NOT
ADJUSTABLE

difference = 1
KING PIN INCLINATION
830
1050
1120
1200
30
NOT
ADJUSTABLE

difference = 1
93014-1S
PARALLELISM
Adjustable by
(For 2 wheels)
rotating track
toe-out
+ 016 20
UNLADEN
rod sleeves.
1 turn= 30
(3 mm)
+ 1.6 mm 2 mm
93011-1S
RUBBER BUSHES
81603S1
07-20
UNLADEN
VALUES AND SETTINGS

Values for checking the rear axle geometry
VALUES
ANGLES
POSITION OF
07
ADJUSTMENT
REAR AXLE
CAMBER
- 042 20
UNLADEN
NOT ADJUSTABLE
UNLADEN
NOT ADJUSTABLE
UNLADEN
93013-2S
PARALLELISM
(For 2 wheels)
Toe-in
- 30 30
- 3 mm 3 mm
93011-2S
RUBBER BUSHES
81603S1
07-21
Engine and Peripherals

ENGINE AND PERIPHERALS
TOP AND FRONT OF ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
FUEL SUPPLY DIESEL EQUIPMENT
ANTIPOLLUTION
STARTING - CHARGING
IGNITION - INJECTION
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK SUSPENDED ENGINE MOUNTINGS

77 11 197 366
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

from which his vehicles are constructed"
Copying or translating, in part or in full , of this document or use of the service part
Renault.
Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH1001
Engine and
peripherals
Contents
Page
13 FUEL SUPPLY -
10 ENGINE AND PERIPHERALS

Consumables
Identification
Oil consumption
Oil pressure
Engine - Gearbox
Engine and transmission assembly
Sump
Crankshaft seal, timing end
Oil pump
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-9
10-24
10-28
10-29
11 TOP AND FRONT OF ENGINE

Timing belt
Cylinder head gasket
Replacement of valve adjusters
11-1
11-11
11-29
12 FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
Throttle body
Inlet manifold
Exhaust manifold
Inlet-exhaust manifolds
Page
12-1
12-10
12-12
12-15
12-17
Fuel supply
Fuel cut out on impact
Fuel gallery
Fuel filter
Pump flow
Fuel pressure
Antipercolation device
Diesel equipment
General
Specifications
Location of components
Advance solenoid valve
Altimetric corrector
Fast idle LDA
Coded solenoid valve
Load potentiometer
Computer configuration
Injector with sensor (needle
lift)
Injection warning light
Pre-postheating control
Fast idle control
Injection/air conditioning
programming
Computer
Defect modes
Micrometric pulley
Pump
Pump - Timing
Pump - Checking the timing
Pump - Adjusting the timing
Adjusting the idle speed
Unions
13-1
13-2
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-15
13-18
13-21
13-24
13-25
13-27
13-31
13-33
13-34
13-35
13-37
13-38
13-39
13-40
13-41
13-43
13-45
13-46
13-48
13-52
13-53
Contents
Page
17 IGNITION - INJECTION
14 ANTIPOLLUTION
Test for the presence of lead
Fuel vapour rebreathing
Oil vapour rebreathing
Exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR)
Page
(continued)
14-1
14-2
14-7
14-11
Injection/air conditioning
programming
Idle speed correction
Adaptive idle speed
correction
Richness regulation
Adaptive richness correction
17-16
17-17
17-18
17-19
17-21
16 STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
Starter motor
16-1
16-9
19 COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK ENGINE SUSPENSION

Cooling
Specifications
Filling and bleeding
Testing
Water pump
Diagram
17 IGNITION - INJECTION
Ignition
Static ignition
Spark plugs
Injection
General
Centralised coolant temperature
management
Injection fault warning light
Immobiliser function
depending on gearbox type
17-1
17-3
17-4
17-8
17-12
17-13
17-14
17-15
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-6
Exhaust
General
Exhaust pipe assembly
19-10
19-12
Fuel tank
Fuel tank
Sender unit
Pump and sender unit assembly
19-14
19-23
19-24
Engine mountings
Suspended engine mountings
19-26
ENGINE AND ENGINE PERIPHERALS

Consumables
Type
Quantity
RHODORSEAL 5661
Loctite FRENBLOC
Locking and sealing resin

Loctite FRENETANCH
Locking and sealing resin

Exhaust pipe paste
10
Components
Coat
Driveshaft roll pin holes
Coat
Brake caliper mounting bolts
Coat
Crankshaft pulley mounting bolts
Coat
For sealing the exhaust
Identification
Vehicle type
Engine
Manual
gearbox
Capacity
(cm 3)
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Ratio
B/C B0A
D7F 720
JB1
1 149
69
76.8
9.65/1
B/C B0C
E7J 780
JB1
1 390
75.8
77
9.5 /1
B/C B0D
K7M 744
JB1
1 598
79.5
80.5
9.5 /1
B/C B0E
F8Q 630
JB1
1 870
80
93
21.5 /1
Engine Workshop Repair Manuals to be consulted depending on the type of engine:

Engine
Document
Mot. D
Mot. E
D7F
E7J
K7M
F8Q
X
X
Mot. K
Mot. F (D)
10-1

Oil consumption
10
OIL CONSUMPTION MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE
a) Filling to the maximum level

The operation must be carried out with the engine hot (cooling fan cutting in once) and after settling for
15 minutes to allow all the oil to drain into the sump.
Check visually using the dipstick.
Top up to the maximum level.
Seal the drain plug (with a paint mark on both the filler plug and the sumps drain plug) in order to be
able to check later that it has not been removed.
b) Customer driving
Ask the customer to drive the vehicle for a period corresponding to about 1250 miles (2,000 km) or before
the minimum level is reached.
c)
Refilling to the maximum level

The operation must be carried out with the engine hot (cooling fan cutting in once) and after a settling
time of 15 minutes.
Check visually using the dipstick.
Top up to the maximum level.
Note the quantity of oil and the mileage covered since the last filling to the maximum level.
d) Measurement of the oil consumption
OIL CONSUMPTION =
Quantity of topping up oil (in litres)

---------------------------------------km (in thousands)
10-2

Oil pressure
Mot. 836-05
Oil pressure measuring kit

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
22 mm long socket
CHECKING
ENGINE CHECKING
The oil pressure should be checked when the engine is warm (approximately 80C).
D7F engine
Idling
4 000 rpm.
Contents of kit Mot. 836-05.
0.8 bar
3.5 bars
E7J / K7M engines

Idling
3 000 rpm.
1 bar
3 bars
F8Q engine
1 000 rpm.
3 000 rpm.
87363R1
USE
D engine
E engine
F engine
C+F
C+E+F
B+F
10-3
1.2 bar
3.5 bars
10
D7F engine

Engine - Gearbox
10
B. Vi.
31-01
Set of three punches for roll

pins
Mot.
1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot.
1448
Hose clip pliers extension
Mot.
1273
Mot.
1311-06
Tool for removal of fuel pipe
Mot.
1379
Tool for retaining engine on

sub-frame
T. Av. 476
Ball joint extractor
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Load positioner
REMOVAL
TIGHTENING TORQUES (in daN.m)
Brake caliper guide bolt
Put the vehicle on a two post lift.
Shock absorber base bolts
18
Driveshaft gaiter mounting bolt
2.5
Remove the battery and the engine undertray.

Drain:
- the cooling circuit (bottom hose of the
radiator),
- the gearbox and engine oil (if necessary),
- the air conditioning circuit (if fitted) using a
filling station.
Left-hand suspended engine mounting bolt

on gearbox
6.2
Left hand suspended engine mounting bolt on

body
2.1
Remove:
- the wheels,
- the air intake pipe,
- the expansion bottle and fix it to the engine.
Right hand suspended engine mounting bolt on

engine
6.2
Right hand suspended engine mounting bolt on

body
Wheel bolt
6.2
9
10-4
D7F ENGINE

Engine - Gearbox
Left-hand side of the vehicle
Remove:
- the brake caliper mounting bolt then fix it to
the shock absorber spring,
- the three driveshaft gaiter mounting bolts,
- the track rod end using tool T. Av. 476,
- the shock absorber base bolts.
Tilt the hub to disconnect the driveshaft from the
gearbox.
Right-hand side of the vehicle
Remove:
- the driveshaft roll pins with the punches
B. Vi. 31-01,
- the brake caliper mounting bolt then fix it to
the shock absorber spring,
- the shock absorber base bolts.
Tilt the hub to disconnect the driveshaft from the
gearbox.
Remove the earth strap mounting bolt (gearbox
side).
10-5
10
D7F ENGINE

Engine - Gearbox
Disconnect the gear selector rod at the gearbox,

after releasing the gaiter.
10
the relay board (4), the connector (5) and the

fuse mounting (6) by removing the fuse holders (7),
93912R1
13034R
Slacken bolt (A) without removing it and remove

bolt (B) from the engine tie-bar.
the heater hose (there are two types of assembly to be disconnected as shown in the diagrams below),
92661R1
Disconnect:
- the accelerator cable,
- the canister pipe,
- the brake servo vacuum pipe,
- the upper hose on the radiator,
13085R
10-6
D7F ENGINE

Engine - Gearbox
-
10
the AC pipe mountings (if fitted), and the

flange (8) and rest the assembly on the engine,
13084R
the connectors of the oxygen sensor and fan,

the fuel pipes.
14174R
Remove:
- the injection computer support plate having
disconnected the 55 track connector and the
impact switch connector,
the power assisted steering pipe mountings

on the engine,
the power assisted steering pump belt,
the power assisted steering pulley,
the power assisted steering pump bolts.
Release the power assisted steering pump unit.

Attach the load positioner to the engine lifting
rings.
13088R2
99893S
10-7
D7F engine

Engine - Gearbox
Remove:
- the gearbox side support,
10
REFITTING (Special notes)
Refitting is the reverse of removal.

Tighten the suspended engine mounting bolts to
the recommended torque (see section 19
"Suspended engine mounting").
Put RHODORSEAL 5661 on the driveshaft roll pin
hole.
Press the brake pedal several times to bring the
pistons into contact with the brake pads.
Refit the power assisted steering pump belt (see
section 07 "Accessories belt tension").
Carry out the following operations:
- fill the gearbox with oil,
- top up the engine oil level (if necessary),
- fill and bleed the coolant circuit (see section
19 "Filling and bleeding").
12924R1
the mounting bolts (2) of the engine rubber

mounting pad (1).
Note the position of the engine mounting pad(1)

in relation to the body.
12924R2
Remove the engine and transmission assembly

after taking the power assisted steering unit out
of the engine compartment and protecting the
radiator.
10-8
D7F engine

10
B. Vi.
31-01
Set of punches for roll pins
Mot.
1040-01
Dummy sub-frame for

removing and refitting engine
and transmission assembly
Mot.
1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot.
1448
Mot.
1311-06
Tool for removing the fuel

pipe
Mot.
1379
Tool for retaining engine on

sub-frame
T. Av. 476
T. Av. 1233-01
Tool for sub-frame and axle

assembly
REMOVAL
18
Track rod end
3.7
Front sub-frame mounting bolt
6.2
Rear sub-frame mounting bolt
10.5
Driveshaft gaiter mounting bolt
Drain:
- the coolant circuit (disconnect the lower
radiator hose ),
- the gearbox oil (if necessary),
- the engine oil (if necessary).
2.5
Mounting nut for rubber engine mounting

pad on left suspended engine mounting
6.2
Remove:
- the wheels,
- the air intake pipe,
- the upper radiator mountings,
- the expansion bottle and fix it to the engine,
- the power assisted steering fluid reservoir,
and secure it onto the engine.
Mounting bolt for front right suspended

engine mounting on the engine
6.2

engine mounting on the body
6.2
Steering shaft yoke bolt
2.5
Wheel bolt
10-9
D7F ENGINE

10
Disconnect:
- the accelerator,
- the canister pipe,
- the brake servo pipe,
- the oxygen sensor connector,
- the fuel pipes,
- the relay board (4), the connector (5) and the
fuse mounting (6) by removing the fuse
holders (7),
13084R
Remove:
- the shock absorber base bolts ,
- the steering shaft yoke bolt.
SPECIAL NOTES FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH

DRIVERS AIR BAG
13034R
WARNING
the heater hoses (there are two types of assembly which must be disconnected as shown
in the diagrams below),
In order to avoid any risk of damage to the rotary

switch beneath the steering wheel, the following
instructions should be followed:
Before disconnecting the steering column from
the rack, the steering wheel MUST be immobilised with the wheels straight with the aid of a
"steering wheel lock" throughout the operation.
If there is any doubt about the rotary switch
being properly centred, the steering wheel
must be removed in order to apply the centring
method described in the Technical Note covering the 2nd generation air bag.
REMINDER: this kind of work must only be carried
out by properly trained and qualified staff.
Remove:
- the tie-rods between sub-frame and body,
- the earth strap mounting bolt on the body
side,
- the exhaust downpipe mountings.
13085R
10-10
D7F ENGINE

the AC pipe mountings (if fitted) and the

10
Fit tool Mot. 1379 onto the sub-frame and take

the weight off the right-hand engine mounting,
using the threaded rod (1).
14174R
10267R1
Fit tool Mot. 1040-01 under the sub-frame having

already fitted the shims Mot. 1379 onto this tool.
the heat shield (A) and the gearbox selector

rod.
Insert a wooden block between the gearbox and

the sub-frame.
Diagram showing the holes drilled in tool Mot.
1040-01 (dimensions in mm).
14215R2
10621R
10-11
D7F ENGINE

10
Use tool T. Av. 1233-01 to position the engine and

transmission assembly in relation to the body.
Correctly refit the heat shields.
Tighten the suspended engine mounting nuts and
bolts to the correct torque (see section 19
"Suspended engine mounting").
92442-1R2
Apply Rhodorseal 5661 to the driveshaft roll pin

hole.
Remove:
- the gearbox suspended engine mounting nut,
then tap it with a copper hammer to release
the suspended engine mounting stud,
- the suspended engine mounting bolts on the
engine.

Fill:
- the gearbox with oil (if necessary),
- the engine with oil (if necessary),
- the cooling circuit and bleed it (see section 19
"Filling and bleeding").
Lower the lift until the tool touches the ground.
98755R
Remove the four mounting bolts of the subframe.

Take out the engine and transmission assembly by
lifting the body.
10-12
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

10
Mot. 1040-01
Dummy sub-frame for removing

and refitting engine and
transmission assembly
Mot. 1159
Tool for retaining engine on subframe
Mot. 1202
Hose clip pliers

-
6.2
10.5
the heat shield (A) and the geabox selector

rod,

engine mounting cover on engine
6.2
Mounting nut for front right suspended

engine mounting cover
4.4
Mounting nut for rubber engine mounting pad

on front left-hand side member support
6.2
18
Wheel bolt
REMOVAL
14215R3

-
Drain:
- the cooling circuit through the lower hose on
the radiator,
- the gearbox and the engine (if necessary),
filling station.
the exhaust pipe clamp (B) between the catalytic converter and the expansion chamber,
the earth strap on the gearbox,
the front bumper,
the air intake pipe from the air filter,
Remove:
- the front wheels and the wheel arch protectors,
- the radiator grille,
- the front bumper,
- the brake calipers (and the ABS sensors if fitted) and attach them to the suspension
springs,
- the shock absorber base bolts,
10-13
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

10
the injection computer support after disconnecting the 55 track connector and that of
the impact switch.
13085R
13088R2
the fuse mounting (4) by removing the mounting (5) and the relay board (6) and the
connector (7),
Disconnect:
- the hoses on the expansion bottle,
- the heater hoses (there are two types of assembly which must be disconnected as shown
in the diagrams below),
14176R
the canister pipe on the solenoid valve,

the accelerator and clutch cables.
Unclip the power assisted steering reservoir and

place it on the engine.
13084R
10-14
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Remove:
- the air filter assembly and disconnect fuel injection pipes on the gallery ,
- the accelerator and clutch cables,
- the upper mountings of the radiator and attach it to the engine,
- the AC pipe mountings (if fitted) and the
10
Fit tool Mot. 1159 between the sub-frame and the

cylinder block.
99024R2
Insert a shim between the multi-function support

and the sub-frame.
14174R
the nut and the eccentric bolt of the steering

shaft yoke, after pushing back the guard.

DRIVERS AIR BAG
WARNING
In order to prevent any risk of damage to the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel, the following instructions should be observed:
Before disconnecting the steering column and
the rack, the steering wheel MUST be immobilised with the wheels straight, using a "steering wheel lock", throughout the operation.
If there is any doubt that the rotary switch is
properly centred, the steering wheel must be
removed in order to apply the centring method
described in section 88 "Air bag".
14172S

10-15
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Remove the suspended engine mounting cover.
10
the tie rods (3).
13359R
14175R
Insert a shim between the gearbox and the subframe.
Fix tool Mot. 1040-01 underneath the sub-frame.
Remove:
- the nut (1), then tap it with a copper hammer
to release the suspended engine mounting
stud,
98755R1

Remove the sub-frame mounting bolts and take
out the engine and transmission assembly by lifting the body.
13086R
NOTE : for any operation requiring separation of
the engine, gearbox and sub-frame assembly,

take care to mark the position of Mot. 1159 on the
sub-frame.
10-16
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

REFITTING
The alignment of the sub-frame with the body

will be made easier by positioning two threaded
rods Mot. 1233-01 in the two front mountings of
the sub-frame on the body.
Tighten the sub-frame mounting bolts to a torque
of:
6.2 daN.m at the front,
- 10.5 daN.m at the rear.
Fit the heat shields correctly.
Apply Loctite FRENBLOC to the caliper mounting
bolts and tighten them to the recommended torque.
Fill:
- the engine and gearbox with oil, if necessary,
the cooling circuit and bleed it (see section 19
10-17
10
F8Q ENGINE

10
Mot. 1040-01

and refitting engine and
transmission assembly
Mot. 1159
Mot. 1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot. 1448
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing fuel pipe
6.2
10.5
the heat shield (A) and the gearbox selector

rod,

engine mounting cover on engine
6.2
Mounting nut for front right suspended

engine mounting cover
4.4
Mounting nut for rubber engine mounting pad

on front left-hand side member support
6.2
Shock absorber base bolt
18
Wheel bolt
REMOVAL
14215R2

Drain:
- the cooling circuit through the lower hose on
the radiator,
- the gearbox and the engine (if necessary),
filling station.
Remove:
- the front wheels,
- the brake calipers (and the ABS sensors if fitted) and attach them to the suspension
springs,
10-18
F8Q ENGINE

10
the exhaust downpipe,

the earth strap on the gearbox,
the front bumper,
the air intake pipe from the air filter,
the fuel supply and return unions (A) and (B),
the connectors (2), (3), (4) and (5).
Unclip the fuel pipes from the air filter unit and the timing cover and unclip the diesel filter from its support and move the assembly to one side.
13083-1R
10-19
F8Q ENGINE

For the locking of the quick release unions, refer

to the diagrams below:
10
Remove the computer support.
11734R
13088R1
Disconnect:
- the hoses on the expansion bottle,
- the heater hoses (there are two types of assembly to be disconnected, as shown in the
diagrams below),
11733R
13085R
10-20
F8Q ENGINE

10
Remove:
- the upper mountings of the radiator and attach it to the engine,
- the nut and the eccentric bolt of the steering
shaft yoke, after pushing back the guard,
- the AC pipe mountings (if fitted) and the
flange (8) and rest the assembly on the engine.
13084R
the fuse mounting (4) by removing the nut (5)

and the relay board (6) and the connector (7),
14174R

DRIVERS AIR BAG
WARNING
In order to prevent any risk of damage to the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel, the following instructions should be observed:
Before disconnecting the steering column and
the rack, the steering wheel MUST be immobilised with the wheels straight, using a "steering wheel lock", throughout the operation.
If there is any doubt that the rotary switch is
properly centred, the steering wheel must be
removed in order to apply the centring method
described in section 88 "Air bag".
14176R
the accelerator and clutch cables.
Unclip the power assisted steering reservoir and

place it on the engine.

10-21
F8Q ENGINE


cylinder block.
10
Remove the suspended engine mounting cover.
99024R2
13086R1
Fit tool Mot. 1159 in place of the coolant pipe

mounting on the cylinder block.
Insert a shim between the gearbox and the subframe.

Remove the nut (1), then tap it with a copper
hammer, to release the suspended engine mounting stud.
99310R
13086R
10-22
F8Q engine

Remove the tie rods (3).
10
REFITTING
The alignment of the sub-frame with the body

will be made easier by positioning two threaded
rods Mot. 1233-01 in the two front mountings of
the sub-frame on the body.
Tighten the sub-frame mounting bolts to a torque
of:
6.2 daN.m at the front,
- 10.5 daN.m at the rear.
Fit the heat shields correctly.
Apply Loctite FRENBLOC to the caliper mounting
bolts and tighten them to the recommended torque.
14175R
Fill :
- the air conditioning circuit (if fitted),
- the engine and gearbox (if necessary),
- the cooling circuit and bleed it (see section 19
"Filling and bleeding"),
- the power assisted steering circuit (if fitted).
Fit tool Mot. 1040-01 under the sub-frame.
98755R1

Remove the sub-frame mounting bolts and take
out the engine and transmission assembly by lifting the body.
NOTE : for any operation requiring separation of
the engine, gearbox and sub-frame assembly,

take care to mark the position of Mot. 1159 on the
sub-frame.
10-23
D7F ENGINE

Sump
Sump bolt
Put the vehicle on a 2 post lift.

Disconnect the battery and remove the engine undertray.
Drain the engine.
Remove:
- the oil level sensor using a 19 mm half-moon
wrench,
- the gearbox - engine guard,
99900S
the sump bolts.
Rotate the sump towards the rear of the vehicle in

order to release the oil pump strainer from the
sump partitioning.
Clean the sealing surfaces without scratching the
aluminium.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order of removal and fit a

new gasket.
10-24
10
E7J/K7M & F8Q

ENGINES

Sump
10
Mot. 1233-01
Threaded rods for lowering the

sub-frame
6.2
10.5
E7J and K7M sump bolt

F8Q sump bolt
Engine tie-bar bolt
Wheel bolt
the bumper lower mountings,

the exhaust downpipe for the F8Q engine.
Special notes for the E7J and K7M engines
1
Remove:
- the exhaust manifold heat shield,
- the catalytic converter,
- the power assisted steering pipe mountings
on the cylinder block and the multifunction
mounting.
1.5
3
6.2
9
REMOVAL
All engine types
Remove:
- the tie rods (3),
- the sub-frame mounting bolts, inserting the
threaded rods Mot. 1233-01 as you go.

Drain the engine.
Remove:
- the front right hand wheel and thewheel arch
protector,
- the nut and the eccentric bolt of the steering
shaft yoke, after pushing back the guard,
- the lower ball joint mountings and the track
rod ends for the E7J and K7M engines,
- the gear control on the gearbox side,
- bolt (1), and slacken engine tie-bar bolt (2),
without removing it,
14175R
13359R1
10-25
E7J/K7M & F8Q

ENGINES

Sump
10
Gradually lower the sub-frame with the aid of the threaded rods Mot. 1233-01 until
dimensions X 1 and X 2. are reached approximately.
13507R1
E7J and K7M engines
F8Q engine
X 1 = 9 cm
X 1 = 7 cm
X 2 = 13 cm
Remove the sump.
10-26
X 2 = 9 cm
E7J/K7M & F8Q

ENGINES

Sump
REFITTING
Clean the sump.

E7J and K7M engines
Apply an approximately 3 mm wide bead of
RHODORSEAL 5661 as shown in the diagram below.
99179S
Do not forget to replace the two half-moon gaskets on each side of the sump.
F8Q engine
Fit a new after-sales gasket.
10-27
10
D7F ENGINE

Crankshaft seal, timing end
10
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1273
Mot. 1355
Tool for fitting pump seal
Mot. 1374
Pump seal extractor
Mot. 1379
REFITTING
TIGHTENING TORQUES (in daN.m and/or )
Crankshaft output mounting bolt
Refit the new seal onto the crankshaft output without damaging it when passing the timing
sprocket drive groove.
2 + 90

6.2
Position it using tool Mot. 1355.

6.2
Timing belt tension wheel nut
REPLACEMENT
REMOVAL
Remove the timing belt (see section 11 "Timing

belt").
Use tool Mot. 1374 to remove the crankshaft seal.
99788R
Refit the new timing belt (see the method described in section 11 "Timing belt").
99787R
Screw the body of the tool into the seal using nut
(1), then use bolt (2) to extract the seal.
10-28
D7F ENGINE

Oil pump
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1273
Mot. 1355
Tool for fitting oil pump
Mot. 1379
REFITTING
Replace the oil pressure seal (3).
2 + 90

6.2

6.2
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the timing belt (see method described in
section 11 "Timing belt"),
- the oil level sensor using a 19 mm half-moon
wrench,
- the oil dipstick,
- the crankshaft pulley and sprocket,
- the engine flywheel guard.
99790R
Lift the engine and gearbox assembly with the aid

of tool Mot. 1379.
Remove the sump bolts.
Rotate the sump towards the rear of the vehicle in
order to release the oil pump strainer from the
sump partitioning.
Remove:
- the oil pump strainer,
- the oil pump.
Clean the sealing surfaces without scratching the
aluminium.
10-29
10
D7F ENGINE

Oil pump
Apply a bead of RHODORSEAL 5661 to the sealing

surface.
10
Refit:
- the oil pump onto the engine and tighten it to
a torque of 0.9 daN.m,
- the new seal onto the crankshaft output without damaging it when passing the timing
sprocket drive groove.
Position it with the aid of tool Mot. 1355.
98964S
99788R
IMPORTANT: the oil pump is driven by two studs
Refit the strainer with a new O-ring.
located on the crankshaft.

Clean the sealing surfaces (cylinder block, sump).
Refit the sump.
Tighten the bolts to a torque of 1 daN.m.
Refit:
- the new alternator and power assisted steering pump belts (see tension values in section
07 "Accessories belt tension").
10-30
D7F ENGINE

Timing belt
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1135-01
Tool for tensioning timing

belt
Mot. 1273
Mot. 1379
Tool for securing engine to

sub-frame
Mot. 1386
Tool for pre-tensioning the

timing belt
Fit tool Mot. 1379.
Crankshaft accessories pulley

mounting bolt
2 + 90

engine mounting on engine
6.2
Mounting bolt for the right hand suspended

6.2
REMOVAL

Disconnect the battery.
Remove :
- the front right hand wheel,
- the accessories belts,
- the crankshaft pulley.
10267R
11-1
11
D7F ENGINE

Timing belt
11
Remove the suspended engine mounting.
11463S
12924S1
Remove the timing cover and the timing belt.
Use tool Mot. 1054 to pin the engine at TDC by aligning the crankshaft and camshaft sprocket markings with the fixed markings.
IMPORTANT: The camshaft sprocket bears five

markings, of which only the rectangular one on
the surface of one of the teeth represents TDC;
the other markings are intended as an aid for adjusting the valve rockers.
99795R
10072S
11-2
D7F ENGINE

Timing belt
REFITTING
11
a) Fit tool Mot. 1273 and, using tool

Mot. 1135-01, turn the tension wheel anticlockwise until the value of 20 US is obtained
(turn the sensor wheel until it is released, as
indicated by three clicks).
Line up the markings of the timing belt with

those of the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
PROCEDURE FOR TENSIONING TIMING BELT
Remove pin Mot. 1054.

Fit the spacer (1) of tool Mot. 1386 and tighten
the crankshaft sprocket bolt.
10479R1
Tighten the tension wheel nut.

Turn the engine at least twice (never in the opposite direction to normal operation).
Pin the engine at TDC, then remove the pin .
10881R
Check that the timing is correctly adjusted on the

crankshaft and camshaft side.
Slacken the tension wheel nut and turn it slightly
clockwise using tool Mot. 1135-01 until the two
holes of the tension wheel are lined up
horizontally.
Retighten the tension wheel nut.
11-3
D7F ENGINE

Timing belt
b) Turn the engine at least twice (never in the

opposite direction to normal operation).
11
IMPORTANT
Following each variation of the tension wheel

position, turn the engine at least twice before
proceeding to measure the tension .
Pin the engine at TDC, then remove the pin .

Using tool Mot. 1386 and a torque wrench,
apply a pretensioning torque of 1 daN.m between the crankshaft sprocket and the water
pump.
Apply the pretensioning of 1 daN.m which allows

all belt play to be eliminated.
Fit the suspended engine mounting .
10881R
Fit tool Mot. 1273 and note the tension value,

which should be 203 US (fitting tension), or
simply adjust by varying the position of the tension wheel using Mot. 1135-01 and repeat the tensioning process in (b).
12924S1
Refit the accessories belts (see section 07

"Accessories belt tension").
Tighten the tension wheel nut to a torque of

5 daN.m.
11-4
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Timing belt
11
Mot. 591-02
Index
Mot. 591-04
Angle tightening wrench
Mot. 1135-01
Tool for tensioning timing

belt
Mot. 1273
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Engine support tool

Angular tightening wrench
Remove :
- the front right hand wheel and thewhel arch
protector,
- the suspended engine mounting cover,
Wheel bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Tension wheel nut
9
2 + 68 6
5
Bolt for suspended engine mounting cover 6.2

Nut for suspended engine mounting cover 4.4
REMOVAL

Fit the engine support tool.
13359R
the alternator and power assisted steering

pump belts,
14279S
11-5
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Timing belt
the crankshaft pulleys and hub,

the timing covers.
11
IMPORTANT: The camshaft sprocket has five mar-
kings, of which only the rectangular one on the

surface of one of the teeth represents TDC; the
other markings are intended as an aid for adjusting the valve rockers.
13362S
Bring the engine to the setting point.
10072S
The markings (N) and (M) on the camshaft and

crankshaft sprockets must be vertical, as shown
below.
Slacken the nut (O) and and release the tension
wheel , then remove the belt.
13506-1R
(1) Tensioner direction of rotation.
11-6
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Timing belt
REFITTING
An arrow indicating the direction of rotation and

two dashes for setting are marked on the surface
of the belt.
Check that the engine is at the setting point.
Bring the belt markings in line with the sprocket
markings .
Observe the mounting direction for the belt and
begin to position it on the crankshaft sprocket.
Carry out the tensioning of the belt using tool
Mot. 1135-01, until the fitting value is obtained
(see section 07 "Timing belt tension").
Tighten the nut (O) of the tension wheel to a torque of 5 daN.m.
It is essential to tighten the nut of the tension
wheel to a torque of 5 daN. to avoid any slackening which may damage the engine .
Refit the crankshaft pulley, being sure to tighten
the bolt to a torque of 2 daN.m then apply an angle of 68 6.
Refit and tension the accessories belts (see section
07 "Accessories belt tension").
Never refit a belt once it has been removed.
Replace it.
11-7
11
F8Q ENGINE

Timing belt
11
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1273
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Engine support tool

14mm torx socket
Remove :
- the accessories belt,
- the suspended engine mounting cover.
Wheel bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolts
Tension wheel nut
9
2 + 115 15
5

REMOVAL

Remove :
- the front right hand wheel and thewheel arch
protector,
- the protective plastic covering over the suspended engine mounting cover.
13086R1
14279S
11-8
F8Q ENGINE

Timing belt
11
Remove :
- the timing covers,
Adjusting the timing

Turn the crankshaft so that the camshaft timing
reference mark is visible through the timing window .
12518R
13095S
the crankshaft pulley.
Slacken the tension wheel and remove the belt.
Remove the TDC pin plug.
NOTE : Slackening the tension wheel nut by more
Fit the TDC pin, tool Mot. 1054.
than one turn may cause the tensioner to become disengaged.
12419R
11-9
F8Q ENGINE

Timing belt
11
REFITTING
Check that the pin Mot. 1054 is in place.

Fit the timing belt by aligning the belt markings
with those of the camshaft, injection pump and
crankshaft sprockets.
13094R
Tighten the tension wheel nut to 5 daN.m.

NOTE : It is essential to tighten the tension wheel
nut to a torque of 5 daN.m to avoid any slackening which may damage the engine.
Check the injection pump timing (see section 13
"Pump- Checking the timing").
13096R
Tension the timing belt by tightening a bolt ( A )

on the inner timing housing.
Replace the crankshaft pulley bolts.
Fit tool Mot. 1273 and tension the belt until the
fitting value is reached (see section 07 "Timing
belt tension").
Refit the crankshaft pulley , being sure to tighten

the bolt to a torque of 2 daN.m then apply an angle of 115 15.
Refit the accessories belt (see section 07
NOTE : Never refit a belt once removed, but re-
place it.
11-10
D7F ENGINE

11
Mot. 591-02
Index
Mot. 591-04
Angle wrench for tightening

cylinder head and index
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot. 1448
Mot. 1273
Mot. 1379

sub-frame
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
12mm torx socket

Remove :
- the dipstick,
- the air filter,
- the fuel supply and return pipes level with the
timing belt cover on the cylinder head.
2 + 90

engine mounting on engine
6.2
Mounting bolt for the right hand suspended

6.2
Wheel bolts
Slacken the compressor mounting bolts for

vehicles fitted with AC.
REMOVAL

Drain the cooling circuit.
Fit the engine support tool Mot. 1379.
11-11
D7F ENGINE

Disconnect:
- the spark plug leads using tool (3) which is integrated to the plastic cover (4),
99894R1
99940R
the canister pipe along with the fuel vapour

rebreathing hoses on the solenoid valve,
the connectors :
of the ignition module,
of the injectors,
of the idle speed regulation stepping
motor,
of the throttle position potentiometer,
of the air temperature sensor.
Extract the hose connecting the water pump to

the heater matrix, and the electrical wiring loom
from the heat shield on the rocker cover.
11-12
11

D7F ENGINE
Remove :
- the mounting bolts (5) for the throttle body retaining bracket on the
cylinder head,
- the mounting nuts (3) for the manifold on the cylinder head
- the mounting bolts (4) of the manifold on the valve rocker cover
- the inlet manifold, throttle body and fuel gallery assembly.
99937R1
the thermostat hoses,

the valve rocker covers,
the cylinder head mounting bolts,
the cylinder head.
11-13
11
D7F ENGINE

Use a syringe to remove any oil which may have

entered the cylinder head mounting bolt holes.
11
CHECKING THE GASKET FACE
Check for gasket face bow using a straight edge

and a set of feeler gauges.
This is necessary, in order to obtain the correct

tightening of the bolts.
Maximum deformation : 0.05 mm.

Care must be taken whilst carrying out this operation in order to avoid any foreign bodies entering the oil supply pipes in the cylinder head.
Regrinding of the cylinder head is not permitted.

Check the cylinder head for any possible cracks.
Failure to follow to this advice could lead to the

blocking of the jets and thus cause damage to
the camshaft.
REFITTING
The cylinder head is centred by two dowels at the

rear of the engine.
CLEANING
REMINDER: in order to obtain the correct tightening of the bolts, use a syringe to remove any oil
which may have entered the cylinder head mounting bolt holes .
It is very important not to scratch the gasket faces

of the aluminium components.
Use the Dcapjoint product to dissolve any part of
the gasket which remains attached.
Lubricate the threads and under the bolt heads

with engine oil.
Apply the product to the parts to be cleaned; wait

about ten minutes, then remove it using a
wooden spatula.
Adjustment of the valve rockers and tightening

of the cylinder head should be carried out when
the engine is cold.
92076S
Gloves should be worn during this operation.
11-14
D7F ENGINE

Tighten the cylinder head using an angular tightening wrench (see section 07 "Tightening the cylinder head").
11
ADJUSTING THE VALVE ROCKERS IF NECESSARY
Adjustment values (cold engine) (in mm) :

- Inlet
- Exhaust
Remove the TDC pin (Mot. 1054).

Refit:
- the timing belt (see method described in section 11 "Timing belt"),
- the accessories belt (see section 07
IMPORTANT: The camshaft sprocket has five markings, of which only the rectangular one on the
surface of one of the teeth represents TDC; the
other markings are intended as an aid for adjusting the valve rockers.
0.10
0.20
"Tilt" method
Place the valves for the

cylinder concerned in
the "end of exhaustbeginning of
inlet"position
Adjust the valve rocker

clearance for the
cylinder concerned
10072S
11-15
D7F ENGINE

11
Open exhaust valve method

Bring the exhaust valve of cylinder n 1 to the fully open position, then adjust the inlet valve clearance for cylinder n 3 and the exhaust valve clearance for cylinder n 4.
Follow the same method for the other cylinders, in the order shown by the table below.
Exhaust valve to be opened.
Inlet valve to be adjusted
Exhaust valve to be adjusted.
78373R
Proceed with re-assembly in the reverse order to removal.

Remove the tool for securing the engine to the sub-frame Mot. 1379.
NOTE : tightening the inlet manifold :
progressively hand tighten the six nuts until the inlet manifold comes into contact with the cylinder head,
then tighten them to a torque of 1.5 daN.m,
fit the upper bolts and tighten them to a torque of 0.9 daN.m.
Fill and bleed the cooling circuit (see section 19 "Filling and bleeding").
Adjust the accelerator cable.
11-16
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

11
Mot. 588
Retaining bracket
Mot. 591-02
Index
Mot. 591-04

Mot. 1159

sub-frame
Mot. 1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot. 1273

Engine support tool
55mm torx socket

cylinder block then remove the engine support
tool.
Tension wheel nut

5
2 + 68 15

Wheel bolts
REMOVAL

Remove :
- the bonnet,
section 11, "Timing belt").
99024R2
Drain the cooling circuit through the lower radiator hose.
11-17
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Remove :
- the connector and the pipe on the absolute
pressure sensor,
- the stepping motor connector,
11
the connectors of the ignition coils, along

with the connector at (1),
the coil (2),
the pipes (3) and the connector (4),
the pipe (5),
the lifting bracket(6),
the fuel supply and return pipes (7),
the injector connectors,
the cylinder head cover,
13339S
the cover on the air filter assembly,

the air filter assembly,
the throttle position potentiometer
connector,
the accelerator cable,
the air intake pipe, having disconnected the
air temperature sensor connector,
13360R
the connectors and the hoses on the thermostat support,
13338S
13365S
11-18
the heat shield and the exhaust downpipe

mountings,
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

11
Vehicles without air conditioning
Vehicles fitted with air conditioning
Remove :
- the alternator ,
- the pressostat mounting (8) and connector (9),
- the power assisted steering mounting bolts
and move it to one side,
- the multi-function support mounting bolts
Remove :
- the left hand wheel arch protector,
- the front bumper,
- the upper cross member (by slackening the
two lower mounting bolts) and put it on the
engine,
14280R
the power assisted steering pump mounting

bolts and move it to one side,
the compressor mounting bolts and move it to
one side,
13364R1
13995-1R
11-19
the multi-function support mounting bolts

E7J and K7M

ENGINES

the intermediary support(A),
11
Remove :
- the cylinder head bolts, except for bolt (F)
which must simply be released, then pivot the
cylinder head around the bolt,
14177R
All vehicle types
92106R
Remove :
- the mounting (10),
- the bolt of the strut (11) and slacken the
nut (12),
- the mounting nut (13) of the dipstick guide
tube.
the cylinder head.
Fit the cylinder liner retaining brackets, tool

Mot. 588 (E7J engine).
92062R
13336-1R1
Unhook the wiring loom at (14).
11-20
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

Use a syringe to remove any oil which may be in

the cylinder head mounting holes.
11
Remove the cylinder liner brackets Mot. 588 (E7J

engine).

Check for the presence of the centring dowel(G).

Care must be taken whilst carrying out this operation in order to avoid any foreign bodies entering the oil supply pipes in the cylinder head.
Failure to follow to this advice could lead to the
blocking of the jets and thus cause rapid
deterioration of the camshaft.
CLEANING
It is very important not to scratch the gasket

faces of the aluminium components.
98713R1

wooden spatula.
Position the cylinder head gasket.
Lubricate the threads and under the bolt heads

with engine oil.
Refit the cylinder head (shortest bolts on the inlet

side ).

Tighten the cylinder head (see section 07

"Tightening the cylinder head").
Maximum deformation: 0.05 mm.
Refit the timing belt , (see section 11 "Timing

belt").
Fill and bleed the cooling circuit, (see section 19
"Filling and Bleeding").
11-21
E7J and K7M

ENGINES

11
ADJUSTING THE VALVE ROCKERS IF NECESSARY
Adjustment values (cold engine) (in mm) :

- Inlet
- Exhaust
0.10
0.25
"Tilt" method
Place the valves of the

cylinder concerned in
the "end of exhaustbeginning of
inlet"position
Adjust the valve rocker

clearance for the
cylinder concerned
Open exhaust valve method

Bring the exhaust valve of cylinder n 1 to the fully open position, then adjust the inlet valve clearance for cylinder n 3 and the exhaust valve clearance for cylinder n 4.
Follow the same method for the other cylinders, in the order shown by the table below.
Exhaust valve to be opened.
Inlet valve to be adjusted.
Exhaust valve to be adjusted.
78373R
11-22
F8Q ENGINE

11
Mot. 251-01
Dial gauge support tool
Mot. 252-01
Plate for measuring piston

protrusion
Mot. 591-02
Index
Mot. 591-04

Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1159
Tool for securing engine to subframe
Mot. 1202
Hose clip pliers
Mot. 1273
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing fuel pipe
Engine support tool

55mm torx socket
Fit tool Mot. 1159 between the sub-frame and

the cylinder block.
Tension wheel nut

5
2 + 115 15
Bolt for suspended engine mounting cover
6.2
Nut for suspended engine mounting cover
4.4
Wheel bolts
9
REMOVAL

Remove the timing belt (see method described in
section 11 "Timing belt").
Drain the cooling circuit through the lower radiator hose.
99024R2
11-23
F8Q ENGINE

11
Place bracket Mot. 1159 at the mounting of the

coolant pipe on the cylinder block, then remove
the engine support tool.
99461R
99310R
Remove :
- the exhaust downpipe,
- the hoses and connectors of the cylinder head
coolant pipe housing outlet,
- the connection at (1) using tool Mot. 1311-06,
the air filter assembly by disconnecting the

EGR solenoid valve and the air temperature
sensor connectors (unclip the fuel supply pipes
from the air filter housing),
the air inlet pipe,
the accelerator cable,
the feeds for the heater plugs,
the connector of the injector with sensor,
along with the fast idle solenoid valve connector (5),
the fuel supply and return unions at (A) and
(B).
Disconnect connector (6) from the diesel fuel filter, remove it from its support and move the diesel fuel filter pipe assembly to one side.
13097R
11-24
F8Q ENGINE

11
13083-1R1
11-25
F8Q ENGINE

To release the quick release unions, refer to the

following diagrams.
11
Remove the fuel pipe support (7).

Slacken, but do not remove, the lower timing
cover mounting bolts.
11734R
13093R
Remove :
- the accessories belt tensioning system,
- the cylinder head bolts.
Release the cylinder head by separating the lower
part of the inner camshaft housing. Do this
without pivoting the cylinder head, as this is
centred by the two dowels at ( C ).
11733R
99173-1R
11-26
F8Q ENGINE

Using a syringe, extract any oil which may have

entered the cylinder head mounting holes .
11


Maximum deformation: 0.05 mm.

Care must be taken whilst carrying out this
operation in order to avoid any foreign bodies
entering the oil supply pipes in the cylinder head.

Failure to take this advice could lead to the

blocking of the oilways, resulting in damage to
the camshaft.
CLEANING
It is very important not to scratch the gasket

faces of the aluminium components.
wooden spatula.
99180S
11-27
F8Q ENGINE

DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF THE CYLINDER

HEAD GASKET
11
REFITTING (special notes)
Refit the cylinder head gasket selected previously. This is centred by two dowels at (C).
Checking piston protrusion

Clean the piston crowns in order to eliminate any
traces of deposits.
Turn the crankshaft in its direction of rotation
once, to bring piston n 1 close to TDC .
Fit tool Mot. 252-01 on the piston.
Fit tool Mot. 251-01, complete with dial gauge
Mot. 252-01. on the plate. Ensure that the dial
gauge measuring pin is in contact with the cylinder block; then locate the piston TDC.
NOTE : All measurements are to be carried out in
the longitudinal axis of the engine, in order to eliminate any errors due to tilting of the piston.
99173-1R
Bring the pistons to mid-stroke position to

prevent them from coming into contact with the
valves during the tightening of the cylinder head .
Centre the cylinder head on the dowels.
Lubricate the threads and under the heads of the
mounting bolts.
Tighten the cylinder head (see section 07
"Tightening the cylinder head").
Refit the timing belt, (see method described in
section 11 "Timing belt").
99173R
Fill and bleed the cooling circuit , (see section 9

Measure the piston protrusion.

ONLY TAKE INTO CONSIDERATION THE
DIMENSIONS OF THE PISTON WITH THE
GREATEST PROTRUSION.
For a maximum piston protrusion:

- lower than 0.868 mm, use a gasket marked by
a tab with two holes ,
- included between 0.868 mm and 1mm, use a
gasket marked by a tab with one hole,
- greater than 1mm, use a gasket marked by a
tab with three holes.
11-28
F8Q ENGINE

Replacing the tappet shims
11
Mot. 1366-01
Tool for removing valve adjusters

(additional item to Mot. 1366)
Studs for mounting manifolds on

cylinder head
Nut for mounting manifolds on

cylinder head
2.7
Mounting bolt for strut on inlet manifold
2.5
Mounting bolt for strut on cylinder block
2.5
86911-1S
CHECKING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
Remove the air filter housing along with the cylinder head cover.
Compare the two dimensions noted to the recommended dimensions, and replace the shims
concerned.
Placer the valves of the cylinder concerned at the

"end of exhaust - beginning of inlet" position and
check the clearance .
Clearance ( in mm ), when the engine is cold :

-
11-29
Inlet:
0.10
Exhaust : 0.25
F8Q ENGINE

Replacing the tappet shims
11
REPLACING THE TAPPET SHIMS
For inlet valves
In order to carry out this operation it is necessary

to remove the inlet and exhaust manifolds (see
section 12 Inlet/Exhaust Manifolds) .
Turn the engine in the operating direction,in

order to bring the valve into contact with tool
Mot. 1366-01 (rotate the camshaft by 90 in
relation to the fully open position).
Fully open the valve concerned (by turning the

engine in its operating direction).
For the exhaust valves
Insert tool Mot. 1366-01 into the port concerned .
It is vital to turn the engine in the opposite direction to normal operation (in order to avoid the
locking of the engine), until the valve comes into
contact with tool Mot. 1366-01 (rotate camshaft
by 90 in the relation to the fully open position).
Extract the tappet shim using a screwdriver and a
magnetic tool.
NOTE : during the refitting of the tappet shim,
extract any oil which may be in the bottom of the

pushrod bore ( C ) .
11231R
98895R1
REFITTING
11232-1R
11-30
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
D7F ENGINE
12
Engine
Vehicle
Gearbox
Type Suffix
XB0A
JB1
D7F
720
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Capacity
(cm 3)
Ratio
69
76.8
1 149
9.65/1
Suffix
D7F
720
C53
EU 96
Tests at idle speed*
Engine
Type
Catalytic
converter
Depollution
standard
Engine
speed
[rpm]
740 50
Fuel***
[minimum octane
rating]
Pollutant emission **
CO (%) (1)
CO 2 (%)
HC (ppm)
0.5 max
14.5 min
100 max
Lambda ()
0.97<<1.03
Unleaded (OR95)
(1) at 2500 rpm, CO must be a maximum of 0.3
*
**
***
For a coolant temperature above 80C and after stable speed of 2500 rpm, for about 30 seconds. Test to
be carried out after return to idle speed.
For legal values refer to your country specification.
OR 91 unleaded compatible.
Temperature in C ( 1)
20
40
80
90
Air temperature sensor

CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
5000 to
7000
1 700 to
3300
800 to 1550
Coolant temperature sensor

CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
6700 to
8000
2 600 to
3 000
1 100 to
1 300
270 to 300
200 to 215
12-1
D7F ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Computer
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
MAKE/TYPE
SAGEM or
MAGNETI MARELLI
Injection
Fuel filter
Tracks
Resistance
1-2
1.5
1 - 4 |1 - 3
2-3 |2-4
3-4
0.6
HT - HT
8 K
Resistance 220
EYQUEM
RFC50LZ2E
Gap: 0.9 mm
Tightening torque: 2.5 to 3 daN.m
Mounted under vehicle in front of fuel tank

Replaced during major service
Fuel pump
-
Submerged in fuel tank

Flow: at least 80 litres/hour at a regulated pressure
of 3 bars and a voltage of 12 V
Regulated pressure
Zero vacuum:
Vacuum of 500 mbars :
Pressure regulator
Solenoid injectors
35 tracks on manual gearbox vehicles without option

55 tracks on air conditioning vehicles
Static with 2 dual output

monobloc coils
Power module integral
in computer
One pinking sensor
tightening torque : 2.5 daN.m
Plugs
SPECIAL NOTES
Multipoint with semi-sequential regulation
Ignition
TDC sensor
12
SIEMENS or
BOSCH
Voltage:
Resistance :
12-2
12 Volts
14.5 1
3 0.2 bars
2.5 0.2 bars
D7F ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Throttle body
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
12
MAKE/TYPE
SPECIAL NOTES
MAGNETI MARELLI
36 mm diameter
873 633
Idle speed regulation stepping

motor
AIR PAX
Throttle potentiometer
Voltage: 12 V (at high frequency)

Resistance : Tracks A-D100 10
Tracks B-C 100 10
Voltage: 5 V
Resistance :
-

canister
Solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor
Voltage:
Resistance :
BOSCH
or
DELPHI
Diagnostic function
FICHE n 27
CODE D13
SELECTOR S8
Track
No load
Full load
AB
AC
BC
1 300
1 360
2 300
1 300
2 350
1 260
12 Volts
35 5
Voltage at 850 C
Rich mixture > 625 mvolts
Lean mixture : 0 to 80 mvolts
Heating resistance, tracks A-B : 3 to 15
Tightening torque : 5 daN.m
Throttle potentiometer :
Regulated idle speed :
Full load :
Idle speed R.C.O. :
10 # 17 50
185 # 17 240
4 % # 12 14 %
Adaptive idle speed R.C.O. :- 4.3 % # 21 +3.9 %

Adaptive richness operation :106 # 30 150
Adaptive idle speed richness :
106 # 31 150
12-3
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
E7J ENGINE
12
Engine
Vehicle
Gearbox
Type Suffix
XB0C
BVM
E7J
780
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Capacity
(cm 3)
Ratio
75.8
77
1 390
9.5/1
Suffix
E7J
780
C63
EU 96
Engine
Type
Catalytic
converter
Depollution
standard
Engine
speed
[rpm]
750 50
Fuel***
[minimum octane
rating]
CO (%) (1)
CO 2 (%)
HC (ppm)
0.5 max
14.5 min
100 max
Lambda ()
0.97<<1.03
Unleaded (OR 95)
*
**
***
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
20
40
80
90
7470 to
11970
3060 to 4045
1315 to 1600
6700 to 8000
2600 to 3000
1100 to 1300
270 to 300
200 to 215
12-4
E7J ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Computer
Injection
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
MAKE/TYPE
SIEMENS
FENIX 5
Plugs
Fuel filter
55 Tracks
Static with two coils

in computer
One pinking sensor
Tracks
Resistance
1-2
0.5
1-3
2-3
HT - HT
10 K
Resistance 220
CHAMPION : RC10PYC Gap: 0.9 mm

RC10YCL Tightening torque: 2.5 to 3 daN.m

Fuel pump
-

Regulated pressure
Zero vacuum:
Pressure regulator
Solenoid injectors
SPECIAL NOTES
Ignition
TDC sensor
12
SIEMENS
Voltage:
Resistance :
12-5
12 Volts
14.5 1
3 0.2 bars
2.5 0.2 bars
E7J ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Throttle body
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
12
MAKE/TYPE
PIERBURG
SPECIAL NOTES
diameter 41 mm
714 227

motor

Tracks B-C 52 5
Voltage: 5 V
Resistance :
-

canister
Solenoid valve
Diagnostic function
DELCO REMY
Voltage:
Resistance :
Track
no load
full load
1-2
1-3
2-3
5 440
4 500
2 160
2 200
4 460
5 340
12 Volts
35 5
Voltage at 850 C
Rich mixture > 625 mVolts
Lean mixture : 0 to 80 mVolts
Tightening torque : 4.5 daN.m
NGK
FICHE n 27
CODE D13
SELECTOR S8
Full load :
Idle speed R.C.O. :
16 # 17 50
185 # 17 243
2 % # 12 15 %
Adaptive idle speed R.C.O.: - 2.4 % # 21 +6.2 %

Adaptive richness operation :
64 # 30 192
64 # 31 192
12-6
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
K7M ENGINE
12
Engine
Vehicle
Gearbox
XB0D
BVM
Type Suffix
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Capacity
(cm 3)
Ratio
K7M
79.5
80.5
1 598
9.7/1
744
Suffix
K7M
744
C64
EU 96
Engine
Type
Catalytic
converter
Depollution
standard
Engine
speed
[rpm]
750 50
Fuel***
[minimum octane
rating]
CO (%) (1)
CO 2 (%)
HC (ppm)
0.5 max
14.5 min
100 max
Lambda ()
0.97<<1.03
Unleaded (OR 95)
*
**
***
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
20
40
80
90
7470 to
11970
3060 to 4045
1315 to 1600
6700 to 8000
2600 to 3000
1100 to 1300
270 to 300
200 to 215
12-7
K7M ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Computer
Injection
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
MAKE/TYPE
SIEMENS
FENIX 5
Plugs
Fuel filter
55 Tracks
Static with two coils

in computer
One pinking sensor
Tracks
Resistance
1-2
0.5
1-3
2-3
HT - HT
10 K
Resistance 220
EYQUEM
RFC50 LZ2E
Gap: 0.9 mm
Tightening torque: 2.5 to 3 daN.m

Fuel pump
-

Regulated pressure
Zero vacuum:
Pressure regulator
Solenoid injectors
SPECIAL NOTES
Ignition
TDC sensor
12
SIEMENS
Voltage:
Resistance :
12-8
12 Volts
14.5 1
3 0.2 bars
2.5 0.2 bars
K7M ENGINE
DESCRIPTION
Throttle body
FUEL MIXTURE
Specifications
MAKE/TYPE
12
SPECIAL NOTES
PIERBURG
714 227

motor

Tracks B-C 52 5
Voltage: 5 V
Resistance :
-

canister
Solenoid valve
DELCO REMY
no load
full load
1-2
1-3
2-3
5 440
4 500
2 160
2 200
4 460
5 340
12 Volts
35 5
Voltage at 850 C
Rich mixture > 625 mVolts
Lean mixture : 0 to 80 mVolts
Tightening torque : 4.5 daN.m

-
Diagnostic function
Voltage:
Resistance :
Track
FICHE n 27
CODE D13
SELECTOR S8
Full load :
Idle speed R.C.O. :
19 # 17 51
190 # 17 243
6 % # 12 15 %
Adaptive idle speed R.C.O.:- 2.4% # 21 +6.2 %

Adaptive richness operation :
60 # 30 195
60 # 31 195
12-9
D7F ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
Throttle body
12
Throttle body mounting bolt on

inlet manifold
Throttle body support bracket

mounting bolt on cylinder head
There are no special notes for removal - refitting.
12-10
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
FUEL MIXTURE
Throttle body
Remove the four throttle body mounting bolts (5)

and remove the throttle body.
TIGHTENING TORQUE (in daN.m)
Throttle body mounting bolt
12
REMOVAL

Remove the air filter.
Remove the air intake pipe (1).
13338R
REFITTING
Replace the throttle body seal.

13339R1
Disconnect:
- the connectors :
of the stepping motor (2),
of the throttle potentiometer (3).
12-11
D7F ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
Inlet manifold
12
Fuel gallery mounting bolt on manifold
Manifold mounting nut on cylinder head
1.7
Manifold mounting stud on cylinder head
12-12
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
FUEL MIXTURE
Inlet manifold
Lower the vehicle.
Tightening torque (in daN.m)

Inlet manifold bolt and nut
12
Remove the air intake pipe (A) connecting the

throttle body to the air filter.
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the air filter,
- the fuel gallery (see section 13).
Lift the vehicle.
Remove the strut (1) (to gain access to the bolt
fixing the strut on the right-hand side of the vehicle, remove the wheel arch protector and the
right-hand wheel).
13339R2
Disconnect the accelerator cable and the electrical

connectors (2) connected to the throttle body.
Remove the bolts and nuts (3) securing the manifold.
13130R
13335-1R
12-13
FUEL MIXTURE
Inlet manifold
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
12
Remove the two bolts (4) mounting the retaining

bracket on the cylinder block.
13338R1
Remove the manifold.

REFITTING
Replace the inlet manifold gaskets.

12-14
D7F ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
Exhaust manifold
12
Manifold mounting nut

Manifold mounting stud
Exhaust downpipe mounting bolt
2.5
1
2.2
12-15
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
FUEL MIXTURE
Exhaust manifold
12
Manifold mounting bolt
REMOVAL
Remove the multifunction support (1) (see section

10).
Disconnect the exhaust manifold / exhaust front
pipe (2).
Remove the heat shield (3).
Remove the exhaust manifold.
13239R2
REFITTING
Replace the manifold gasket.

12-16
F8Q ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
Inlet/Exhaust manifolds
Remove the nuts securing the manifolds:
- nuts (A) from above,
- nuts (B) from below.
Manifold mounting studs on cylinder head
12
Manifold mounting nuts on cylinder head 2.7

Inlet manifold strut mounting bolt
2.5
Cylinder block strut mounting bolt
2.5
REMOVAL
Remove the air filter (two upper mounting bolts ,

two lower mounting nuts (1)).
PRO12.1
Special note
To remove nut (C) located above the starter motor, use a small ratchet (6.35 mm square) and a
universal joint.
13047-1R1
Remove, from above, the two nuts fixing the exhaust downpipe to the manifold.
Slacken, without removing it, the nut on the
clamp connecting the downpipe to the exhaust
pipe.
Tilt the exhaust downpipe towards the gearbox.
13047R
12-17
F8Q ENGINE
FUEL MIXTURE
Inlet/Exhaust manifolds
REFITTING
Replace the manifold gaskets (metal part of the

gasket on the manifold side).
Replace the gaskets between the inlet manifold
and the air filter.
Replace the steel gasket between the exhaust manifold and the exhaust downpipe.
For the other operations, refitting is the reverse of
removal.
12-18
12
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel cut out on impact
13
OBJECTIVE
OPERATION
The main function of this feature is to avoid any

fires that may result from the leakage of fuel during an accident. In order to achieve this, all
components pumping fuel from the fuel tank will
automatically stop functioning during and immediately after the impact. They can then only be
made to operate again by a mechanical action carried out by the driver or the repairer.
During the impact, the ball of the inertia switch

moves up and interrupts the electrical connection.
In petrol engines, the + supply of the pump relay
control circuit (236) is cut. Neither the pump or
the injectors will receive any further electrical supply.
The fuel contained in the tank is actually isolated.
DESCRIPTION
The system consists simply of an inertia switch (1),

which:
- detects the impact,
- and thus cuts off the electrical circuit.
In diesel engines, the electrical supply to the

electrical solenoid or the coded solenoid is cut
off.
The pump can no longer take in fuel, as there is no
more high pressure. All risk of fire due to the outlet of diesel fuel at high pressure onto the engine
is removed.
RESETTING AND OPERATING THE SWITCH
In order to reset the inertia switch, it is sufficient

to press it down in order to replace the ball bearing in its original position .
IMPORTANT: for petrol engines, , having reset
the switch, the memory of the computer MUST be
erased, using the XR25 . The injection computer
will memorise a pump relay fault once the system has gone into operation .
13051R
This is fitted:
in petrol engines, between track 1 of the
pump relay (236) and the + supply,
in diesel engines, between the + supply and
the electrical solenoid (or the coded solenoid
valve if the vehicle is fitted with an engine immobiliser).
13-1
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel gallery
D7F ENGINE
13
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing the fuel pipe

unions
Bolt mounting fuel gallery on manifold
IMPORTANT: during the disconnection of the fuel
circuit, be sure to use a cloth to avoid fuel leakage due to the residual pressure.
REMOVAL
Disconnect :
- the battery,
- the pressure/vacuum pipe (1) of the pressure
regulator,
- the fuel return pipe (2),
- the electrical connector of the injectors (3).
99937R3
13-2
D7F ENGINE
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel gallery
Disconnect the fuel supply pipe (4) using the tool

Mot. 1311-06 with the largest section (the fuel
pipe is equipped with a removal tool which is
attached to the connection incorporated in the
vehicle ).
13
Remove the two bolts (5) mounting the fuel

gallery on the manifold.
Slide the fuel gallery , along with the injectors,
between the manifold and the cylinder head.
Extract the fuel gallery from the right hand side
of the vehicle.
NOTES
The fuel pressure regulator (6) is clipped to the

fuel gallery .
There is an intermediate connector (7) between
the injector connector (8) and the computer.
99375R
To disconnect the unions, slip tool Mot. 1311-06

between the two stems (A) and (B).
Press on the tool to lift the two retaining clips,
then pull on the union.
10046R
99461R1
13-3
D7F ENGINE
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel gallery
To remove an injector, remove the clip (9), then

press on the fastener (10) before pulling on the
injector.
13
REFITTING
Replace the O rings at the base of the injector (if

the injector has been removed, also replace the
seal which is level with the injector head).
To ensure that the fuel pipe unions are correctly
fastened, it is necessary to hear a"click" whilst
fastening.
For all other operations, refitting is the reverse of
removal .
10047R
PRC13.1
13-4
E7J AND K7M

ENGINES
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel gallery
13
To remove an injector, remove the clips (8), then

pull on the injector.
circuit, be sure to use a cloth to avoid fuel leakage

due to the residual pressure.
REMOVAL

Disconnect :
- the fuel supply pipe (1),
- the fuel return pipe (2),
- the fuel pressure regulator pipe (3).
Remove the three bolts (4) mounting the fuel gallery (5).
99373R
Remove the fuel gallery.

REFITTING
Replace the O rings at the base of the injector (if

the injector has been removed, also replace the
seal which is level with the injector head).
To ensure that the fuel pipe unions are correctly
fastened, it is necessary to hear a"click" sound
whilst fastening.
removal .
13244R
13-5
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel filter
PETROL
ENGINES
13
Mot. 1265
Pliers for removing quick release

unions
Disconnect the pipes fitted with quick release

unions (2) using tool Mot. 1265.
LOCATION
The fuel filter is located under the vehicle, in

front of the fuel tank.
96420R3
99214R
Remove bolt (3) and remove the fuel filter.

REFITTING
REPLACEMENT
Observe the flow direction of the fuel (marked by

an arrow on the filter).
It is recommended to replace the fuel filter at

each vehicle major service.
Reconnect the pipes by hand (tool Mot. 1265 is

not required ).
Ensure that the quick release unions are correctly

fastened .
REMOVAL
Refit the safety clips (1).
Before removing the filter take precautions to

catch fuel that will run out of the pipes (the pipes
should not be clamped as they would be damaged).
Remove the clips (1).
13-6
FUEL SUPPLY
Pump flow
PETROL
ENGINES
13
Mot. 1265
Pliers for removing quick release

unions
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
2 000 ml measuring cylinder
It is recommended to check the fuel pump flow

through the fuel return pipe connected to the
pump-fuel sender unit assembly.
96093R2
IMPORTANT
During this operation, it is essential :

to refrain from smoking and handling incandescent objects close to the working area,
to take precautions against possible fuel
leakage which may occur due to the residual
pressure in the supply pipes when they are removed.
CHECKING THE PUMP FLOW
Disconnect the fuel return pipe (1) (Mot. 1265).

Connect a piece of pipe to the hose and place this
into a 0-2 000 ml graduated measuring cylinder.
Shunt terminals (3) and (5) on the fuel pump relay
(it is located in the engine fuse box). In one
minute, the pump flow must be a minimum of
1.3 litres for a voltage of 12 volts.
If the fuel flow is low, check the pump feed
voltage (approximately 10 % reduction in flow for
a voltage drop of 1 Volt)
13-7
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel pressure
D7F ENGINE
13
CHECKING THE FUEL PRESSURE

Mot. 1311-01
Fuel pressure test kit (with a

pressure gauge (0 - 10 bar )
Mot. 1311-05
Junction tool (for union K)
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing the fuel pipe

unions
Disconnect the fuel supply pipe using the tool
Mot. 1311-06 with the largest section (see method
described in section 13 "Fuel gallery ").
99375R
Connect tool Mot. 1311-05 to the fuel gallery ,

then reconnect the fuel supply pipe to the tool
itself.
99939S
99934R1
13-8
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel pressure
D7F ENGINE
Connect pressure gauge 0 - 10 bars along with

the flexible hose, Mot. 1311-01.
99938-1R
Shunt terminals (3) and (5) on the pump relay,

which is situated in the engine fuse box.
The pressure must be 3 bars 0.2.
By applying a vacuum of 500 mbars to the
pressure regulator, a fuel pressure of 2.5 bars
0.2 should be obtained.
13-9
13
FUEL SUPPLY
Fuel pressure
E7J AND K7M

ENGINES
13
CHECKING THE FUEL PRESSURE
Mot. 1311-01
Fuel pressure test kit (with a

pressure gauge (0 - 10 bar)
Mot. 1311-04
Junction tool (for union J)
Disconnect the fuel supply pipe.
Connect the junction tool Mot. 1311-04 to the fuel
gallery , then reconnect the fuel supply pipe to
the tool itself.
13244-1R
Shunt terminals (3) and (5) on the fuel pump relay

located in the engine fuse box.
The pressure should be 3 bars 0.2.
By applying a vacuum of 500 mbars to the
pressure regulator, a fuel pressure of 2.5 bars
0.2 should be obtained.
99376R
Connect pressure gauge 0 ; 10 bars along with

the flexible hose, Mot. 1311-01.
13-10
FUEL SUPPLY
Antipercolation device
E7J AND K7M

ENGINES
13
When the ignition is switched off, the coolant temperature monitoring mode begins.
Monitoring mode
Coolant temperature 101C
no
yes
High speed cooling fan command
no
Cooling fan control time 10

minutes
Coolant temperature 96 C
yes
yes
Cooling fan stops
Exit from monitoring mode
Monitoring mode ends 2 minutes (E7J), 3 minutes (K7M) after switching off the engine in cases where the
coolant temperature is not greater than or equal to 101 C or once the coolant temperature falls below 92 C
(E7J), 89 C (K7M).
13-11
no
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
General
13
The use of electronic injection in Diesel engines has allowed the operational power of these engines to be
optimised, thus reducing the emission rate of pollutant gases.
The system consists of a computer, which receives information from:
- the coolant temperature sensor,
- the air temperature sensor,
- the engine speed sensor,
- the vehicle speed sensor,
- the load potentiometer,
- the injection lift sensor, which forms part of the injector of cylinder n 3 (injector with sensor),
- air conditioning mode
It controls:
- the injection pump :
the altimetric corrector via a relay,
the advance solenoid valve,
- the cold start system (plugs and pre-postheating unit),
- the exhaust gas recycling system (EGR),
- the injection fault warning light,
- the preheating warning light,
- the solenoid valve controlling the fast idle speed LDA,
- the relay controlling the power assisted steering electric pump assembly (for vehicles with air conditioning), the pump assembly is supplied once the engine speed exceeds 650 rpm.
- the suppression or operation of the air conditioning.
It carries out a self diagnosis procedure which may be visualised using the XR25.
SPECIAL FEATURES
On the injection pump it is possible to replace:

- the load potentiometer,
- the advance solenoid valve,
- the altimetric corrector,
- the electrical solenoid.
13-12
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Specifications
13
Engine
Vehicles
Gearbox
Type Suffix
XB0E
JB
F8Q
630
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Capacity
(cm 3)
Ratio
Catalytic
converter
80
93
1 870
21.5/1
C55
ENGINE SPEED (rpm)
Depollution
standard
EU96
SMOKE OPACITY
Vehicles
Idle speed
XB0E
850 25
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
CTN type
Resistance in Ohms
no load
maximum
full load
maximum
5 100 100
4 600 100
Homologation value
1.11 m -1 (36 %)
Legal maximum
2.5 m
-1
(64 %)
20
40
80
90
7470 to
11970
3060 to 4045
1315 to 1600
3060 to 4045
1315 to 1600
300 to 370
210 to 270
13-13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Specifications
DESCRIPTION
Computer
Injection
Injection pump
MAKE/TYPE
SPECIAL NOTES
LUCAS
25 track (in case of computer replacement,

programme the new computer to memorise the
full load position of the load potentiometer)
Indirect
LUCAS DIESEL
8448B171 A/231A
(F8Q 630)
Pump setting (obtain TDC
point using 8 mm pin)
Injector holders
13
Rotary pump fitted with :

- an advance solenoid valve,
- an altimetric corrector (F8Q 630).
Dimension ( X ) on pump
LUCAS DIESEL
LCR 6735 405
Tightening torque: 7 daN.m (injector on injector

holder and injector holder in cylinder head )
Holder for injector with sensor

(needle lift)
LUCAS DIESEL
LDCR020011AB1

Resistance 105
Injectors
LUCAS DIESEL
RDN OSDC 6902
Command: 130 +5 bars

-5
Maximum difference: 8 bars
EGR solenoid valve
Voltage: 12 volts
Resistance : 46 5
Return pipes
interior : 2.5 mm
Length: 330 5 mm
Preheating relay housing
With pre-postheating function (command

controlled by the computer)
NAGARES
Resistance : 0.8
Heater plugs
BERU
Pencil type plug
TDC sensor
Resistance : 220
Fast idle solenoid valve
Voltage: 12 V
Resistance : 46
Advance corrector
Voltage: 12 V
Resistance : 11.5
Load potentiometer
Voltage: 5 V
Resistance : (in K approximately)
Track
(10 track connector)
Fault finding
5-4
3-4
3-5
no load
full load
4.5
5.6
2.8
4.5
2.8
5.6
Voltage: 12 V
Resistance : 15.5
Fiche n 43
Code D34
Selector S8
13-14
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
14232R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
EGR valve and solenoid valve

Air temperature sensor (white connector)
Coolant temperature sensor (white connector)
Diesel injection computer
Fuel filter
Pre-postheating plug relay housing
TDC sensor
Fast idle solenoid valve
Electrical solenoid / coded solenoid/ secure housing
Digital DPC injection pump
Load potentiometer
Injector with sensor (needle lift)
13-15
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
8
9
11
12
13
14
Idle speed solenoid valve

Electrical solenoid / coded solenoid valve
Load potentiometer
Injector with sensor
2
3
13

12872R
19
EGR solenoid valve
12869-1R
4
5
6
16
Injection computer
Fuel filter
Pre-postheating plug relay housing
Inertia switch
12871R
13083R
13-16
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
2
3
19
20

EGR solenoid valve
EGR valve
17
18
13
Diesel injection fault warning light

Preheating warning light
Warning light illuminates when ignition is
switched on during preheating phase.
87970R
13047-1R
Engine speed sensor
13048R
13-17
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Advance solenoid valve (1)
13
10314-1R
Mot. 997-01
Tool for removing injector and

advance solenoid valve
REMOVAL
Disconnect the electrical connector from the

pump.
Remove the two terminal connectors for the advance solenoid from the 10 track pump connector.
13-18
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
13342R
To remove the terminals from the pump

connector :
Remove the protective sheath grouping the pump

actuators.
1) Pull the yellow guide to release the terminal

connectors, then press on the two tabs on
each side of the connector.
Remove the protective cover on the solenoid

valve.
Remove the solenoid valve using tool Mot. 99701.
2) Extract the yellow guide.

3) Pull the wire to be removed.
4) The terminal connector is secured by two
tabs, one on each side ; using a screwdriver,
move one of these to one side (the action of
pulling on the wire prevents the tab from
going back into place).
5) Using a screwdriver, move the other tab to
one side.
The terminal connector can now be removed from
the connector.
10579R1
13-19
Connector passage
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
Bleed the diesel circuit using the priming pump

before starting the engine.
REFITTING
The small filter (3) situated at the bottom of the

system, MUST be removed, using a pair of needlenose pliers, and replaced with a new filter.
The computer memory MUST be erased by

pressing G0**.
The outer part serves as a seal and locks on to a

recommended torque, tightening the actuator.
The vehicle must be tested after the operation.
Replace, in the following order : the seal at (4) of

the "banjo" return connection (5) ; the new
actuator (1) fitted with an external filter, along
with the the two seals at (6) and (7).
Tighten the actuator to a torque of 3 daN.m
using socket Mot. 997-01.
Place the new protective cover (2)on the actuator.
Reconnect the two terminals to the connector.
Reconnect the connector itself.
Replace the protective sheath on the wiring,
along with the retaining clip.
ITB191917
13127R
13-20
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
13129R
Mot. 997-01
Mot. 1140
Tool for removing injector

Tool for removing altimetric
corrector
REMOVAL
Remove the high pressure pipes.

Remove the injector with sensor, using tool Mot.
997-01.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the
pump.
Remove the two terminals for the altimetric corrector from the 10 track pump connector.
13-21
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
13342R
To remove the terminals for the pump

connector:
Remove the protective sheath grouping the pump

actuators.
1) Pull the yellow guide to release it from the

terminals, then press the two tabs on either
side of the connector.
Remove the protective cover from the solenoid

valve.
Remove the altimetric corrector (1) using tool
Mot. 1440.
2) Extract the yellow guide.

3) Pull the wire to be removed.
4) The terminal is held in place by two small tabs,
one on each side; using a screwdriver, move
one of the tabs to one side (the action of
pulling on the wire prevents the tab from
going back into place.
5) Using a screwdriver move the other tab to one
side.
The terminal may now be removed from the
connector.
10579R2
13-22
Connector passage
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
REFITTING
Reconnect the connector.
The small filter (2) located at the bottom of the

system, MUST be removed, using a pair of needlenosed pliers, and replaced with a new filter.
Replace the protective sheath on the wiring,

along with the retaining clip.
Bleed the diesel circuit using the priming pump
before starting the engine.
Tighten the actuator (1) to a torque of 3 daN.m

using the socket Mot. 1440.
Place a new protective cover on the actuator.
The computer memory MUST be erased, by

pressing GO**.
Reconnect the two terminals to the connector.
The vehicle MUST be tested after the operation.
13128R
ROLE : it acts on the flow in proportion to altitude ; if the vehicle is running at an al-
titude greater than or equal to 1 000 metres, the computer reduces the flow by
3 mm3/ stroke. The conventional flow is reestablished if the vehicle runs at an altitude lower than 900 metres.
13-23
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Fast idle speed LDA
13
REFITTING AND ADJUSTING THE LDA
Fit the LDA (1) on the rear fitting of the injection

pump (2).
Fit the retaining clip (3) onto the LDA.
13043R
Fit the cable stop (4) on the cable.

Position the cable grip on the cable; the
dimension X must be 2 mm 1. Tighten the
cable grip nut.
13044R
13-24
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
Mot. 1372
Mot. 1372-02
Mot. 1441
Kit for extracting the self-shear

bolts from the electronic unit
Drilling guide tube for slef-shear
bolts
Socket for removing the coded
solenoid valve
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
3.3 mm HSS drill
4 mm tap
Ratchet tap holder
Making an extractor locally:

Self-shear bolt
1.75 0.25
1.2 0.1
Drill a 4 mm hole in a metal block. Insert the

threaded rod into the metal block.
Fit a washer, a nut and a counter nut.
Remove the roll pin using the locally made tool.
The operation to remove the cover giving access

to the coded solenoid valve is to be carried out
with the pump removed.
Drill the five self-shear bolts to a length of 4 mm

using the drilling guide tube Mot. 1372-02 and
the 4 mm drill bit contained in the Mot. 1372
kit.
IMPORTANT: the roll pin thread is very delicate;
use oil during the operation.

Use the extractor and its handle Mot. 1372 to remove the bolts (or any other type of extractor).
REMOVAL
The bolts may also be removed using a hammer

and a small chisel.
Block the high pressure outlets of the pump.

Drill the roll pin using a 3.3 mm HSS drill bit.
NOTE : before removing the diesel fuel inlet rai-
Tap the roll pin with a set of 4 mm screw taps

(IMPORTANT : take great care when carrying out
this operation, use oil when tapping).
sed mounting, ensure that the pump is clean because metal particles from the self-shear bolts or
from the roll pin may be found around it.
Screw a 4 mm , 30 cm long threaded rod into

the roll pin .
Remove the diesel fuel inlet raised mounting.

Remove the protective fitting and the rear mounting fitting.
Remove the coded solenoid valve terminals from
the pump connector.
Use socket Mot. 1441 to slacken the advance solenoid valve.
13-25
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
REFITTING
All seals which are removed must be replaced.

Fit the coded solenoid valve, then tighten it to
the correct torque.
Fit the pump cover.
Check that the coded solenoid valve wire is notpinched.
Fit the diesel fuel inlet raised mounting.
Reposition the five shear bolts, then tighten them
to 1.2 daN.m then remove the bolt heads by bending them using a tube inserted over the bolt
head.
Fit a new roll pin.
Refit the coded solenoid valve terminals
13-26
13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Load potentiometer
13
REMOVAL / REFITTING / ADJUSTING THE LOAD POTENTIOMETER
IMPORTANT: removing the load potentiometer is a delicate operation. The following procedure MUST be
observed.
REMOVAL
Disconnect the injection pump connector.

Remove the three load potentiometer terminals from the connector.
Remove the wires from the plastic sheath.
Remove the two bolts (1) holding the potentiometer.
The potentiometer slide contact is held in the full load lever (2) by a plastic insert (3).
Use a screwdriver to remove the plastic insert from its position in the load lever (Figure 1).
Turn the plastic insert 90o (Figure 2).
FIGURE 1
FIGURE 2
14345R
13-27
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Load potentiometer
13
Put the load lever in the full load position.

Turn the potentiometer 90o anti-clockwise.
Lift the potentiometer from the cable side.
14346S
14347S
13-28
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Load potentiometer
13
REFITTING
Turn the plastic insert 90o in relation to its initial position (Figure 3), bring it as close as possible to the rotation
axis of the load lever .
Put the load lever in the full load position.
Insert the load potentiometer slide contact into the plastic insert.
Fit the load potentiometer.
Release the load lever, set it to no load position.
Turn the plastic insert 90o.
Using a small screwdriver, refit the plastic insert in the load lever.
Retighten the bolts holding the potentiometer without locking them.
Adjust the potentiometer (see below).
FIGURE 3
14348R
13-29
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Load potentiometer
13
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE : In the factory, vehicles are programmed with the full load position. (memorising the voltage delive-
red by the potentiometer in the full load position). This value is used to adjust the load potentiometer after it
has been replaced. It is therefore essential, if the injection computer has to be replaced during the vehicles
lifetime , to carry out this programming (G31*).
If it is necessary to replace the load potentiometer, in order to adjust it we compare the voltage delivered by
the potentiometer in full load position, with the value memorised. The new potentiometer is said to be correctly adjusted when the two voltages are equal. This is displayed on the XR25. G32* indicates the difference in voltage between the value memorised and the one from the potentiometer.The adjustment is correct if this value is between 0.000 and 0.040 in the full load position.
The potentiometer and the computer cannot be replaced at the same time (if necessary, replace the
potentiometer first and then the computer).
IMPORTANT: the load potentiometer can only be replaced if the position "full load" has been memorised in
the injection computer . It is possible that the "full load" programming has not been carried out. As a result,
the potentiometer can only be replaced when bargraph 12 RH side is extinguished (programming carried
out). If bargraph 12 RH side is illuminated (programming not carried out), check that the full load value for
# 17 is between 75.66 and 87.36 :
- if this is the case, carry out the full load position programming (see "computer configuration"), then replace the potentiometer,
- if the value is not between these two figures, the pump must be removed so that it can be adjusted on a
repair bench or replaced.
Remove the two bolts mounting the faulty potentiometer, remove it, and fit the new potentiometer .
Tighten the two bolts mounting the potentiometer but do not lock them - (it should be possible to turn the
potentiometer body ).
Connect the XR25 , and switch on the ignition.
Set the selector to S8.
Enter code
Press down on the accelerator pedal (full load position). Do not act directly on the load lever.
Enter code
Holding the full load position, turn the potentiometer body until the XR25 shows a value between 0.000 and
0.040 (if you are too far from the 0 value, the screen will display HL which means "Hors Limite = "Off limits"). Just turn the potentiometer body to obtain the display of a decimal value.
Tighten the two bolts holding the potentiometer in the full load position when the value read is between
0.000 and 0.040.
13-30
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
PROGRAMMING THE FULL LOAD POSITION
Switch off the ignition.

Replace the computer.
Carry out the programming of the full load position; in order to do this :
Switch on the ignition.
Connect the XR25.
Set the selector to S8.
Enter code
Enter code
When the display flashes "PF", press the accelerator pedal down as far as it will go.
The programming is complete when
the screen displays the following
wording:
then
Bargraph 12 on the right hand side should be extinguished.

DPCN LUCAS injection computers are configured before sale "with air conditioning". If the vehicle does not
have air conditioning, use command G50*4* on the XR25 to carry out the "without air conditioning " pro-
gramming.
DPCN LUCAS are configured before sale "with power assisted steering" (power assisted steering with pump
assembly). If the vehicle is not fitted with a power assisted steering pump assembly, use command G50*9* on
the XR25 to carry out the "no power assisted steering with pump assembly" programming.
13-31
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
COMPUTER CONFIGURATION IN RELATION TO AIR CONDITIONING.
For vehicles with air conditioning, enter G50*3* on the XR25.

For vehicles without air conditioning, enter G50*4* on the XR25.
COMPUTER CONFIGURATION IN RELATION TO THE PAS (POWER ASSISTED STEERING PUMP ASSEMBLY)
The vehicle may have two types of PAS assembly :

- a PAS assembly including a high pressure pump driven by a belt. In this case, the computer must be
configured without PAS : enter G50*9* with the XR25,
- a PAS assembly with a pump assembly which is driven electrically and controlled by the injection computer ( this type of PAS is fitted in all vehicles which are also equipped with AC). In this case, the computer
must be configured with PAS : enter G50*8* with the XR25.
IMPORTANT : according to the above explanations, only two types of combination are possible for the illumi-
nation of bargraphs 18 and 19.
Vehicle with AC
and PAS pump assembly
Vehicle without AC and PAS pump assembly

(with conventional PAS)
18
18
AC
19
19
PAS
NOTE : if the computer has been replaced, remember to carry out the programming of the load potentio-
meter full load position (see "Load potentiometer " section ).
13-32
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Injector with sensor (needle lift)
13
PRM1315
1
2
3
4
5
Pushrod
Spacer
Injector
Spring
Winding
The needle lift sensor is integrated in the injector

holder. It transmits the movements of the injector
needle to the computer. This allows the start of injection to be deduced. The computer processes
this information and uses it to compare the advance requested to the advance corrector on the
pump to the advance actually applied. In this way,
the system works as a closed loop.
Tooling required to remove the injector : Mot.
997-01.
Tightening torque : 7 daN.m.
NOTE : it is possible to modify tool Mot. 997 by
milling the socket at (A), (through which the

connector of the injector with sensor passes (B)).
10579R1
13-33
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Injection warning light
13
OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF THE INJECTION WARNING LIGHT ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the ignition is switched on, the injection fault warning light illuminates. It extinguishes as the engine
begins to run.
Fault in a component of the injection assembly
Faults in the following components may cause illumination of the fault warning light:
- injector with sensor,
- advance solenoid valve,
- engine speed sensor,
- load lever potentiometer,
- pre-postheating (depending on version).
13-34
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
The pre-postheating function is controlled by the
computer.
13
b) Fixed preheating
After the preheating warning light has
extinguished (variable preheating), the
plugs remain fed for 8 seconds before the
engine is started.
This computer controls the preheating plug relayunit.

1) Ignition - Preheating
2) Starting the engine

The preheating process is divided in two
phases :
During the action of the starter motor, the

four plugs are fed continuously.
a) Variable preheating
This is dependent on the coolant temperature, on the battery voltage and on altitude (internal computer sensor) when the
ignition is switched on (the preheating
warning light illuminates).
3) Engine running - Postheating

The postheating also may be divided in to two
phases:
a) Fixed postheating
After starting the engine, the plugs are
supplied simultaneously for a period of 10
seconds.
b) Variable postheating
Variable postheating begins when fixed
postheating ends. The time during which
the plugs are fed (continuously) depends
upon :
- the coolant temperature
- the engine speed ,
- the load (load potentiometer on pump
lever ).
13041S
Maximum preheating limit (battery voltage lower than 9.3 volts and altitude higher than 2 000 m).
Minimum preheating limit (battery
voltage greater than 10.5 volts altitude
lower than 350 m).
13-35
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
time (s)
For an idle speed and load lever
position
180
- 20
20
40
60
Coolant temperature C
Variable postheating may be interrupted :

- permanently, if the coolant temperature is >
60C,
- temporarily, if the unit receives full load
information for more than 3 seconds; the
function is established once again if the
engine returns to idle speed or low load,
- temporarily again if the battery voltage is
>16 V; the function is restored if battery voltage < 15 V.
In all cases, the total duration of the postheating
function will never exceed 3 minutes.
13-36
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Fast idle speed control
The fast idle speed function is controlled by the
computer via a solenoid valve controlling the LDA
(versions with or without air conditioning).
The fast idle speed control is active :
- if the coolant temperature is lower than 10 C,
when the ignition is switched on.
F8Q 630
Coolant temperature
when the ignition is
switched on (C)
Fast idle speed cut off

temperature (C)
15
5
0
- 10
- 20
20
20
25
25
35
if the engine speed falls to 650 rpm and the

vehicle speed is lower than 15 mph (25 km/h)
(starting improvement programming). The
fast idle speed is cut off once the speed
becomes > 850 rpm
NOTE :
Fast idle speed operational :

solenoid valve not operated,
cable loose, and not tensioned.
Nominal idle speed :
solenoid valve controlled,
cable tensioned.
SPECIAL FEATURES: once the AC has been

selected on the instrument panel, the fast idle
speed function is activated.
13-37
13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Injection/air conditioning programming
13
CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING AND INJECTION COMPUTER
Electrical connection :
- from the air conditioning computer to the injection computer consists of one wire. This track only carries
the information that the AC is operating. From this, the injection computer deduces the AC selection
information : track 11,
- from the injection computer to the air conditioning computer consists of one wire. This track carries all
information regarding authorising and preventing operation of the compressor : track 19.
COMPRESSOR OPERATION PROGRAMMING
During certain stages of operation, the injection computer stops the compressor from functioning.
Engine start programming
After the engine has started running, the compressor is prevented from functioning for 3 seconds.
Stalling prevention programming
If the engine speed is lower than 700 rpm., the compressor is automatically cut off. It will only be allowed to
function again if the engine speed exceeds 775 rpm.
13-38
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Computer
13
CONNECTION
PRM1316
1 -<-
Computer supply
14 -->-
Plug relay control
2 -----
Computer earth
15 -->-
Altimetric corrector relay control
3 -----
Sensor earth
16 -->-
Fast idle speed control
4 -->-
Potentiometer lever supply
17 -->-
Load lever position information
5 -->-
EGR solenoid control
18 -->-
Fault finding warning light control
6 -->-
Advance corrector control
19 -->-
AC prevention control
7 -<--
Needle lift signal
20 -->-
8 -<--
Engine speed signal
Power assisted steering pump assembly

relay control
9 -->-
Preheating warning light control
21 -->-
Engine speed information
10 -<--
Fault finding information line L
22
Not used
11 -<--
AC status
23 -<--
Load lever signal
12 -<--
Vehicle speed signal
24 -<--
Air temperature signal
13 -><-
Fault finding information line K
25 -<--
Coolant temperature signal
13-39
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Defect modes
13
If there is a fault in one of the components listed below, the computer enters "defect mode"which means
that it uses replacement values to ensure engine operation.
Set values (for replacement)
Faulty
component
Advance
corrector
Coolant sensor
Running time
function
Air sensor
Temperature
= 22 C
Pre-postheating
time
EGR function
Fast idle speed
AC function
Cut
Running time
function
Cut
Cut
20 % load lever
position
Preheating : 30C
Postheating :
80C
Postheating:
30 % load lever
position
Load
potentiometer
100 % load lever

position
Altitude sensor
Altitude
= 900 m
Altitude
= 900 m
Cut
Battery
16 V < U < 6 V
Battery
Voltage= 13.5V
Not controlled
TDC sensor
Minimum
advance
Solenoid valve
fully open
position
Postheating :
Not controlled
until ignition is
switched off
then on again
Cut
Speed
= 2 000 rpm
Speed
= 2 000 rpm
Needle lift
sensor
Defect mode
advance
Vehicle speed
sensor
Position :
S = 175 km/h
(108 mph)
Position :
S = 175 km/h
(108 mph)
Position :
S = 175 km/h
(108 mph)
Preheating plugs
relay unit
Cut
13-40
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
RAM Pulley
13
OPERATION OF THE RAM PULLEY (micrometrically adjusted pulley)
List of components
1 Aluminium pulley bolt.
It joins the adaptor hub (8) to the pulley rim (4). Pre-tighten the bolt to 2 daNm, then tighten to 9 0.5
daNm.
2 Pulley flange.
3 Collar nut.
It secures the pump shaft to the pulley. Its tightening torque is 4.5 0.5 daNm.
4 Pulley rim.
When making adjustments, this is fixed. Its internal section consists of :
- a thread on which the part is screwed (5),
- three guide vanes (b) into which the part (6) lines up.
5 Micrometric advance ring.

It consists of three grooves (c) into which the three arms of the tool Mot. 1358-01 fit.
Its external section consists of a thread (a) which screws into the pulley (4). It is joined laterally.
6 Angular adjustment ring.

It is locked in rotation. On its external part there are three lugs (e) which slide on the pulley rim (4). On its
internal part there are three helical guide vanes (f) which slide on the adaptor hub (8).
7 Screw locking device.
8 Adaptor hub.
It drives the pump while adjustments are being made. This turns the pump shaft. It consists of three helical
vanes (h).
13-41
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
RAM Pulley
13
13929R
Part (6) is connected to part (5) for lateral movements. On the other hand, it is locked for rotary
motion. In effect, these three lugs slide into the
three vanes on the pulley rim (4). As a result, part
(6) moves towards the bolt (1).
Operating principle
Before adjusting, slacken the bolt at (1).
Fit tool Mot. 1358-01 into the three holes on the
pulley flange (2). The three rods of the tool fit into
the three grooves on the micrometric advance
ring (5).
Part (6) has three helical guide vanes. These fit into the helical vanes of part (8). Following the
transverse movement of part (6), and as part (8)
cannot move transversely, part (6), by moving,
turns part (8) via the helical vanes.
The rotation (A) of tool Mot. 1358-01 rotates the

micrometric advance ring (5).
When this turns, it screws into the pulley rim (4).
As it screws in, the part (5) has a rotary, but also a
lateral movement (B). It becomes closer to the nut
(1).
13-42
Rotary movement made by the operator acting on the tool.
Transverse movement of the rings.
Rotary movement applied to the pump shaft,

divided by 180 in relation to the movement
of A.
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Pump
13
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1200
Pump-pulley retaining tool
Mot. 1317
Special notes regarding removal of the pump
Never unscrew the aluminium nut of the RAM Pulley, to remove the pump, just unscrew the gold-coloured
nut holding the pump shaft.
The central gold-coloured nut is used as an extractor .
The pump can be removed without removing the RAM pulley.
The three bolts holding the pump on the accessories assembly remain on the accessories surface after the
pump has been removed.
Check the pump settings after it has been refitted.
Pin the engine using tool Mot. 1054. For this
operation, turn the engine so that the index of
the camshaft sprocket is in line with the marking
on the timing cover (use a mirror).
Nut mounting the pump shaft

to the RAM pulley
Pump mounting bolt
4.5
2.2
REMOVAL
With the battery disconnected, remove:

- the suspended engine mounting housing (1),
- the injection pump pulley housing (2).
99183R
DI1302-1
13-43
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Pump
Remove :
- the fuel supply pipe (A),
- the fuel return pipe (B),
- the pump connector (C),
- the accelerator cable (D),
- the vacuum pipe(E) connected to the fast idle
speed LDA,
- the high pressure pipe using tool Mot. 1383,
13
Fit tool Mot. 1200 or Mot. 1317 , for retaining the

pump pulley.
12410R
Insert a torx screwdriver in the gaps of the RAM

pulley and slacken:
the three bolts mounting the pump
- the central nut securing the pump shaft to the
RAM pulley.
10578R
Alternately, slacken the central nut and all three

of the bolts mounting the pump until they are
completely free.
the rear support mounting bolt.
Extract the pump.

REFITTING
Clean the pump shaft very thoroughly, using solvent to remove any grease.
Refit the pump.
Tighten the three bolts mounting the pump to the
correct torque.
Pretighten the central nut of the pump to 2
daN.m.
IMPORTANT : a pretightening operation MUST be
carried out before the final tightening; tighten

the central pump nut to a torque of 4.5 daN.m.
12869R
Carry out the timing operations (see "Pump Timing").

removal.
13-44
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Pump - Timing
Mot. 856
Dial gauge mounting (BOSCH

mechanical pump)
Mot. 1054
TDC pin
Mot. 1079
LUCAS pump timing kit
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing diesel fuel

pipe
Mot. 1200-01
Pump pulley retaining tool
Mot. 1358-01
Mot. 1359
Set of tools for operations on a

RAM pulley
IMPORTANT:
tool Mot. 1358-01 MUST be used (tool Mot.

1358 does not work on HTD2 pulleys),
the engine must only be rotated by turning a
wheel, in 5th gear, (turn gently without sharp
movements to avoid the engine moving back
due to compression).
the engine should only be turned in its
operating direction. if it is turned in the
opposite direction, repeat the operations for
checking and adjusting the timing.
13-45
13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
Components of tool Mot. 1079
RAM pulley nut (adjustment locking)
A
B
C
Timing pin
Dial gauge support
30 mm dial gauge
CHECKING THE SETTING OF INJECTION PUMPS

FITTED WITH RAM PULLEYS
Remove the plug (D) located on the pump cover.

Fit tool Mot. 1079 and zero the dial gauge on the
pump cam BDC (this operation will be made easier
by turning the engine in its operating direction).
NOTE : in order to obtain a precise adjustment,
and to avoid bringing the dial gauge to its limit, it

is advisable to adjust it to 1 mm.
Check that the pump piston stroke is less than the
dial gauge stroke.
91285R
Pin the engine using tool Mot. 1054 (two people),

according to the following procedure :
- turn the engine in its operating direction (clockwise from timing end),
- locate the spot on the camshaft pulley where
the reference mark will appear,
- Stop the engine from turning half a tooth
before the two reference marks align
91258R3
DI1303-1R
13-46
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Fit the pin, tool Mot. 1054.
12419R
Maintain pressure on the pin.

Turn the engine slowly until the pin locates into
the slot in the crankshaft.
Check the pump piston lift, which may be read on
the dial gauge.
13-47
13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
ADJUSTING THE TIMING OF INJECTION PUMPS

FITTED WITH RAM PULLEYS (to be carried out af-
ter the setting has been checked, see above).

Remove :
- the pin, tool Mot. 1054,
- the RAM pulleys protective cover.
Fit tool Mot. 1200-01 to immobilise the pulley.
12411R
Fit tool Mot. 1358-01 into the three openings of

flange (B).
Turn the tool - flange assembly so that the three
brackets of the tool fit into the three slots in the
adjusting ring bolt.
10311R1
IMPORTANT: slightly loosen the bolt at (1) using
tool Mot. 1359 (IMPORTANT: left hand thread) so

that the flange (B) can rotate freely.
12312R4
Turn the flange - tool Mot. 1358-01 assembly

clockwise until the pulley stops, which allows the
pulley to be put to the start of timing position.
Remove the immobilising tool Mot. 1200-01.
98694R2
13-48
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Turn the engine twice in the direction of rotation.
13
Fit pin Mot. 1054.
Pin the engine using tool Mot. 1054 (two people) :

- Turn the engine in its operating direction (clockwise from timing end),
- locate the spot on the camshaft pulley where
the reference mark will appear,
- Stop the engine from turning half a tooth
before the two reference marks align.
12419R
Maintain pressure on the pin.

Turn the engine slowly until the pin locates into
the slot in the crankshaft .
Using tool Mot. 1358-01, adjust the setting by
turning the tool anti-clockwise until the correct
setting value is reached on the dial gauge.
DI1303-1R
13-49
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
The value is noted on the load lever.
If the value is not correct, adjust the timing (see
below).
NOTE : if the timing value is exceeded, turn the
engine back two revolutions to regain the
clearance using tool Mot. 1358-01 then restart the
preceding adjustment operation.
Leave the pin Mot. 1054 in place.
Slightly pretighten bolt (1) using tool Mot. 1359
to a torque of not more than 2 daN.m (left hand
thread, the dial gauge needle should not move).
IMPORTANT: the torque wrench used for this

operation must operate to the left .
Remove pin Mot. 1054.
Fit tool Mot. 1200-01 to immobilise the pulley.
Turn the engine by hand anti-clockwise to bring
the locking tool into contact with the pulley.
Tighten bolt (1) to 9 daN.m, using tool Mot. 1359.
Turn the engine over twice and check the pump
timing once again.
If you are unable to set the injection pump, check
the setting of the timing.
Put the camshaft marking opposite that on the
belt cover. The timing is set correctly if
X = 30 teeth on the belt between the camshaft
marking and that of the pump pulley.
When the camshaft marking is opposite the belt
cover marking, the pulley pump marking is not
necessarily horizontal.
13-50
13
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
13
92600R3
13-51
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Adjusting the idle speed
These adjustments MUST be made when the
engine is warm, and after the engine cooling fan
has operated at least twice.
13
IDLE SPEED AND RESIDUAL FLOW ADJUSTMENT
(anti-stall)
a) Ensure that the fast idle speed function is not
operational .
b) Adjust the idle speed to 825 25 rpm. using
screw (1).
c) Place a 4 mm shim between the load lever (2)
and the residual flow screw (3).
d) Adjust the engine speed to 1 250 50 rpm.
using the residual flow screw (3).
e) Remove the 4 mm shim then accelerate
sharply twice.
f)
Check the conformity of the idle speed; if

necessary, repeat the idle speed adjustment
and check the residual flow once more.
12870R
1
2
3
4
5
Idle speed adjustment screw

Load lever
Residual flow adjustment screw (anti-stall
function)
Fast idle lever
Idle speed cable grip
The idle speed adjustment and anti-stall function

adjustment must be carried out correctly, since
these operations directly influence the behaviour
of the engine at idle speed and in the
deceleration phase (hesitation idle speed lasts
too long, etc.).
FAST IDLE SPEED
Without applying a vacuum to the LDA, position

the cable grip (5) at 2 1 mm from the fast idle
speed lever (4).
NOTE : the fast idle speed value is not directly ad-
justable; it is adjusted on the injection bench.

CHECKING THE MAXIMUM SPEED
Whilst the engine is warm, accelerate to full load ;

the engine speed must be between 4 500 and
4 700 rpm (this adjustment can only be carried
out in a Renault Injection Centre workshop).
13-52
DIESEL EQUIPMENT
Unions
13
To unlock the pump quick-release union, see below.

The removal - refitting of the diesel fuel supply quick release union from the injection pump does not require
a tool (DO NOT USE CLAMPS).
IMPORTANT: the union does not require force to be removed (following the method below, it simply needs
to be pulled gently).
11734R1
11734-1S
Push the plastic union (A) on its metal end (B) in the direction the arrow is pointing (1), to bring it into
contact with the six-sides (C) of end piece (B).
Simply hold the notched parts (D), without pushing, whilst maintaining the contact between the plastic
union (A) and the six-sides (C) of end piece (B) in the direction of the arrow (1).
Still keeping the plastic union (A) in contact with the metal end (B), in the direction of the arrow (1), lift
the notched parts in the direction of the arrow (3). (A small screwdriver may be used to hold the notched
section upright).
Remove the union (A) by gently pulling upwards.
NOTE : it can only be unclipped if the notched section is upright.
13-53
ANTIPOLLUTION
Test for the presence of lead
PETROL
ENGINES
14
This test can only be carried out using a lead testing kit supplied by NAUDER.
To obtain a testing kit, contact your local After Sales Head Office.
Part numbers :
- Complete kit : T900

- 40 test papers : T900/1
93703S
METHOD
DETECTING LEAD IN THE EXHAUST
a - Test conditions :
- Engine stopped.
- Exhaust pipes hot but not burning.
- Do not test when the temperature is below 0 C.
b - If necessary, use a soft cloth to clean the inside of the exhaust pipe so any soot deposits are removed.
c - Wearing the gloves, take a test paper and moisten it slightly with distilled water (the paper is not effective if it is too wet).
d - Press the damp paper onto the cleaned exhaust pipe immediately and hold it there firmly for about a minute.
e - Remove the test paper and allow to dry. The test paper will turn red or pink if lead is present.
IMPORTANT
The test for lead should only be carried out on the exhaust pipe, never on the oxygen
sensor.
14-1
E7J AND K7M

ENGINES
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
OPERATING DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT
13123R
1
2
3
4
R
Inlet manifold
Fuel vapour canister
RCO control solenoid valve
Throttle body
Pipe from fuel tank
14-2
ANTIPOLLUTION
D7F ENGINE
14
OPERATING DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT
99933R
1
2
3
4
R
Inlet manifold
RCO control solenoid valve
Cylinder head
Pipe from fuel tank
PRC14.1
14-3
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
CONDITION FOR BLEEDING THE CANISTER (E7J
CONDITION FOR BLEEDING THE CANISTER ( D7F
and K7M engines)
engine)
During richness regulation
Coolant temperature greater than + 15 C
Air temperature greater than + 10 C.
Coolant temperature greater than 50C (E7J

engine), 20 C (K7M engine).
Air temperature greater than 15 C (E7J

No load position not recognised (if there is a
fault in the throttle position sensor, the
condition of no load position not recognised is
replaced by an engine speed condition
R > 1500 rpm.).
No load position not recognised (if there is a

fault in the throttle position sensor, the
condition of no load position not recognised is
replaced by an engine speed condition
R > 1500 rpm.).
It is possible to read the cyclical opening ratio for

the canister bleed solenoid using the XR25 #23.
The solenoid is closed for #23 = 0.7 %
Outside richness regulation
Coolant temperature greater than 50 C (E7J

Air temperature greater than 15 C (E7J
Full load position recognised (function of
engine speed and manifold pressure).
If there is a fault in the oxygen sensor, bleeding is

permitted outside of no load conditions.
It is possible to read the cyclical opening ratio for
the canister bleed solenoid using the XR25, #23 .
The solenoid is closed for #23 = 0.7 % (minimal
value).
14-4
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
At idle speed connect a pressure gauge

(- 3 ; +3 bars) (Mot. 1311-01) to the "CAN" outlet
on the solenoid valve, to check there is no vacuum
(the command value read by the XR25 for #23 remains minimal X = 0.7 % ). Is there a vacuum ?
CHECKING CANISTER BLEED OPERATION
Incorrect operation of the system may cause the

idle speed to be unstable or the engine to stall.
Check the conformity of the circuit (see
operational diagrams)
YES
Be sure to check that the pipe marked "CAN" on

the solenoid valve is correctly connected to the
canister.
Check the condition of the pipes to the fuel tank.
Ignition off, use a vacuum pump to apply a

vacuum of 500 mbars to the solenoid valve
at (C). This should not vary by more than 10
mbars in 30 seconds.
Does the pressure vary?
YES The solenoid valve is faulty, replace it.
Air must be blown into the pipe (A)
connecting the solenoid valve to the
canister to remove any particles of active carbon.
NO There is an electrical fault. Check the
circuit.
NO
97393R6
1
2
3
4
Inlet manifold
Canister bleed solenoid valve
Canister
Fuel tank
14-5
Under bleeding conditions (not at idle

speed, engine warm), the vacuum should
increase (the value for #23 on the XR25
should also be seen to increase).
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
LOCATION - REMOVAL
REMOVAL OF THE FUEL VAPOUR CANISTER (1)
CANISTER BLEED SOLENOID VALVE (1)
This is located in the front right hand wheel arch.
E7J and K7M engines
REMOVAL
It is mounted above the inlet manifold,

underneath the cover.
Disconnect the pipe connecting the canister to the

inlet manifold, from the top of the vehicle.
From the bottom, remove the wheel arch
protector.
Disconnect the pipe at (2) connecting the canister
to the fuel tank.
Remove the three bolts at (3) mounting the
canister (1) then extract it.
13242R2
D7F engine
It is mounted at the front, on the lifting bracket.
13049R
99939-1R3
14-6
ANTIPOLLUTION
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
14
DIAGRAM
13335R
1
2
3
Cylinder head
Manifold
Oil vapour rebreathing pipe connected
upstream from the throttle body (the circuit is
used for medium and high loads).
Oil vapour rebreathing pipe connected
downstream from the throttle body .
CHECKING
To ensure the correct operation of the

antipollution system, it is important to keep the
oil vapour rebreathing system clean and in good
working condition.
14-7
D7F ENGINE
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
DIAGRAM
99932R
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cylinder head cover

Manifold
Oil vapour rebreathing pipe connected upstream from the throttle body (the circuit is used
for medium and high loads)
Oil vapour rebreathing pipe connected downstream from the throttle body
Air pipe
Throttle body
14-8
D7F ENGINE
ANTIPOLLUTION
14
CHECKING
To ensure the correct operation of the

antipollution system, it is important to keep the
oil vapour rebreathing system clean and in good
working condition.
PRC14.2
14-9
ANTIPOLLUTION
F8Q ENGINE
14
13042R
1
2
3
4
Engine
Oil decanter
Air filter
Inlet manifold
14-10
F8Q ENGINE
ANTIPOLLUTION
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
14
13046R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13045R
14-11
EGR valve
EGR solenoid (ON/OFF)
Vacuum pump
Engine
Exhaust manifold
Inlet manifold
Air filter
Injection computer
F8Q ENGINE
ANTIPOLLUTION
To remove the EGR solenoid (2), remove the air
filter .
12871R1
To remove the EGR valve (1), remove the air filter

first, and replace the seal between the solenoid
valve and the manifold after each removal
operation.
13047-1R2
SPECIAL NOTES
In order to remove the steel pipe connecting the

EGR valve to the air filter, it is necessary to
remove the EGR valve .
14-12
14
F8Q ENGINE
ANTIPOLLUTION
The EGR is controlled by the computer via an
ON/OFF solenoid valve.
The operation of the EGR solenoid valve is dependent upon the following parameters:
- the air temperature,
- the coolant temperature,
- the altitude,
- the position of the load lever,
- the vehicle speed,
- the engine speed.
The EGR function is cut if :
- the air temperature < 17C or
- the coolant temperature < 45C or
- the engine speed/ load potentiometer pair is
greater than a certain threshold .
The EGR is cut at idle speed.
Once the vehicle speed reaches > 28 km/h, (17
mph), it becomes operational again.
Bargraph 14 RH is illuminated if the EGR function
is permitted. In order to determine if the EGR is
actually controlled, use #24. If the value is different from 0, the EGR is activated .
14-13
14
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
16
The customer complains of a lack of charge and

the warning light is operating correctly.
OPERATION - FAULT FINDING
These vehicles are fitted with alternators with internal ventilation and integral regulator, also
with a warning light on the instrument panel
which has the following functions :
- when the ignition is switched on, the light illuminates
- when the engine is started the light extinguishes,
- if the light illuminates whilst the engine is
running there is a "charging "fault.
If the regulated voltage is less than 13.5 V, check

the alternator. The fault could be caused by :
- a diode which has been damaged,
- a phase which is cut,
- contaminated or worn tracks.
Checking the voltage
Connect a voltmeter across the battery terminals
and read the battery voltage.
LOOKING FOR FAULTS
Start the engine and increase the engine speed

until the voltmeter needle registers a stable regulated voltage.
The warning light does not illuminate when the

ignition is switched on.
Check:
- all electrical connections are good.
- the bulb has not blown. (Earth the circuit and
the bulb should illuminate).
This voltage should be between 13.5 V and 14.8 V.

Switch on as many consumers as possible, the regulated voltage should be between 13.5 V and
14.8 V.
The warning light illuminates when the engine is

running.
IMPORTANT: if arc welding work is to be carried

out on the vehicle, the battery and regulator
must be disconnected.
This indicates a charging fault which could be caused by :

- the alternator drive belt being broken or the
charging wiring being cut,
- internal alternator damage (rotor, stator,
diodes or brush),
- a regulator fault,
- excess voltage.
16-1
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
16
IDENTIFICATION
ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
CURRENT
D7F
AC Delco
80 A
E7J / K7M
Valo A 11 VI 87
75 A
E7J AC and K7M AC
Valo A 13 VI 188
110 A
F8Q
Valo A 11 VI 88
75 A
F8Q AC
Valo A 13 VI 195
110 A
CHECKING
After 15 minutes warming up at a voltage of 13.5 volts.
Engine rpm
75 amps
80 amps
110 amps
1000
46
54
57
2000
68
75
94
3000
71
80
105
4000
72
82
108
16-2
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
16
FAULT FINDING
OPTIMA 5800 Diagnostic station
CHECKING THE CHARGING CIRCUIT USING THE DIAGNOSTIC STATION
The OPTIMA 5800 diagnostic station allows the alternator to be checked by measuring the voltage and current delivered, with or without electrical consumers.
NOTE : the clamp used for this station is of the inductive type (measurement range: 0 to 1000 A). It is fitted without disconnecting the battery, which allows the the computer memory and adaptive information to
be saved.
Fit the clamp directly at the alternator output, with the arrow pointing towards the alternator (any incorrect
positioning is detected by the station).
The measurement is carried out in three stages :
- measurement of the battery voltage, ignition off,
- measurement of the regulated voltage and of the current supplied, without consumers,
- measurement of the regulated voltage and current supplied, with a maximum number of consumers.
On completion of the test, the values noted will lead to the following fault finding messages :
- Battery voltage, no load < 12.3 V = battery uncharged.
Without consumers :
- Regulated voltage > 14.8 V = > regulator faulty ,
- (regulated voltage, no load < 13.2 V) or (charging current< 2 A) = >charging fault.
With consumers :
- Regulated voltage > 14.8 V = > regulator faulty,
- Regulated voltage < 12.7 V = > it is necessary to check the alternator supply in relation to its specifications :
E7J and K7M

Engine
Current (amps)
D7F
Nominal current
80
Minimum current which the alternator must

supply, all consumers on
60
16-3
F8Q
without
AC
with AC
without
AC
with AC
70
105
70
105
60
75
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
16
FAULT FINDING (continued)
If the electrical supply measured is too low, check:

- the wear of the alternator (brush...),
- the battery connections,
- the engine earth strap,
- the conformity of the alternator,
- the belt tension.
If the electrical supply measured is correct and the regulated voltage is too low, the alternator is not faulty.
The cause of the problem is to be attributed to one of the following sources:
- the vehicle has too many electrical consumers,
- the battery is discharged.
16-4
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
D7F ENGINE
16
Mot. 1273
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Place the vehicle on a two post lift .
Disconnect the battery as well as all electrical

connections leading to the alternator.
Tensioning of the alternator belt is carried out

using the locally manufactured tool shown below (threaded rod 100 mm in length (X) and three
M6 nuts).
Remove :
- the power assisted steering pump belt and / or
the air conditioning compressor (if fitted),
- the alternator belt.
Engine fitted with air conditioning
Remove :
- the upper radiator mountings,
- the fan assembly by slackening the lower
mounting bolts (lift the radiator),
- the alternator.
10617R
See section 07 "Accessories belt tension" for the

tension values.
16-5
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
16
Mot. 1273
Remove :
- the suspended engine mounting cover (to allow the tension of the alternator belt to be
adjusted when it is refitted),
REMOVAL

14279S
13359R
the alternator belt,

the alternator by removing the housing (A)
for a vehicle fitted with air conditioning.
14173R
16-6
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
16
REFITTING

Tension the belt using the bolt at (1) and tighten
the nut at (2), having measured the tension.
13363R

tension values.
16-7
STARTING - CHARGING
Alternator
F8Q ENGINE
16
Mot. 1273
REMOVAL
the belt tensioning system(1),

the oil filter (2),
the connector (3) and the flange (4) and move
the wiring loom to one side,

Remove :
- the engine undertray and the right handwheel arch protector,
- the upper cross member (by slackening the lower mountings),
14282R
the fan assembly (by slackening the lower

mountings),
the alternator.
14280R
REFITTING
the alternator belt,

tension values.
16-8
STARTING - CHARGING
Starter motor
IDENTIFICATION
ENGINE
STARTER MOTOR
D7F
Valo D7 E1
Bosch 0001116001
E7J and K7M
D6 RA 73
F8Q
Bosch 0001108180
16-9
16
STARTING - CHARGING
Starter motor
16
FAULT FINDING
OPTIMA 5800 Diagnostic station
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR USING THE DIAGNOSTIC STATION
Checking of the starter motor is carried out using the OPTIMA 5800 , by measuring the battery voltage and
the current absorbed in the engine starting phase. The following operation faults may be highlighted :
- a fault in the battery ( the voltage falls during the starting phase),
- locking of the starter motor (the current absorbed is too high),
- a fault in the engine starter gear (the current absorbed is too low).
In order to carry out the measurement, it is necessary to prevent the engine from starting:
D7F / E7J and K7M engines: disconnect the engine speed sensor (located on the clutch housing),
- F8Q engine: disconnect the pump electrical solenoid and isolate the terminal.
NOTE :
an open circuit on the engine speed sensor or the ignition creates a fault memorised by the injection
computer, this fault must then be erased from the memory using the XR25 (see "Injection" section),
if the engine is fitted with an immobiliser, it is sufficient to lock the doors using the remote control.
16-10
D7F ENGINE
STARTING - CHARGING
Starter motor
REMOVAL
Place the vehicle on a 2 post lift, and disconnect

the battery.
Disconnect the starter electrical connections.
10076R
Remove the two mounting bolts on the starter

motor.
REFITTING
16-11
16
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
STARTING - CHARGING
Starter motor
16
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Remove :
- the engine undertray ,
- the mounting (1) for the power assisted steering pipe and the strut at (A),
Check for the presence of the centring dowel

which should be located at (B).
14283R
13336-1R
the front right hand wheel,

the driveshaft roll pin using punches B. Vi. 3101,
the upper shock absorber base bolt and
slacken the lower bolt.
Tilt the hub and release the driveshaft assembly

from the gearbox.
Remove the starter motor connections and the
mounting bolts and remove it from below the vehicle.
16-12
F8Q ENGINE
STARTING - CHARGING
Starter motor
16
REMOVAL

Remove :
- the air filter inlet pipe,
- the battery,
- the computer support mounting bolts and the
connectors (1) then move the computer support/ diesel filter assembly to one side,
13087R1
the starter motor connections ,

the starter motor .
REFITTING

Check for the presence of the centring dowel,
which should be located at (B).
13088R3
the engine undertray ,

the starter motor mounting bolts and the heat
shield (A),
16-13
IGNITION
Static ignition
The differences between a static ignition with
two coils and ignition using a distributor are:
- there is no high voltage distributor,
- there are two dual output coils in one unit.
17
D7F Engine
PRESENTATION
The system comprises :

- the injection computer (the ignition power
stage is integrated into the computer),
- two dual output coils, (for the D7F engine,
these are moulded into one unit),
- four spark plugs,
- an anti-interference condenser (4).
DESCRIPTION - OPERATING PRINCIPLE
99931-1R2
COMPUTER
E7J and K7M engines

The injection computer (120), depending on the
information received from various sensors, but
principally depending on the engine speed and
load, determines :
- the number of degrees of advance to be used
and consequently the ignition point,
- which cylinders are at TDC and consequently
the ignition coil to be operated.
The spark is created at the two cylinders at TDC by
cutting the earth to the coil concerned.
COILS (1)
There are two coils. They are of the dual output

type (they cannot be separated in the D7F engine).
They are controlled separately by the computer.
13242R
They create two sparks simultaneously.

Both coils are connected to an anti-interference
condenser.
Special features of the E7J engine

The coil at (2) has a black electrical connector. It
creates a spark simultaneously at cylinders 1 and
4. It is controlled by track 28 of the injection
computer.
The coil at (3) has a grey electrical connector. It
creates a spark simultaneously at cylinders 2 and
3. It is controlled by track 29 of the injection
computer.
17-1
IGNITION
Static ignition
17
D7F Engine
E7J and K7M engines
Electrical connector
Electrical connector
Track
Allocation
Track
Allocation
coil control for cylinders

1-4
+ anti-interference
condenser
coil control for cylinders

3-2
+ after ignition
+ after ignition
coil control by
computer
+ anti-interference
condenser
Test to be made
between tracks
Resistance
Test to be made
between tracks
Resistance
1-2
1.5
1-2
0.5
1-3
1-3
1-4
2-3
2-3
HV - HV
10 K
2-4
3-4
0.6
HV - HV
8 K
17-2
IGNITION
Plugs
D7F / E7J & K7M

ENGINES
17
Engine
Make
Type
D7F
K7M
EYQUEM
RFC 50 LZ 2E
E7J
CHAMPION
RC 10 PYC
RC 10 YCL
Flat base with seal

Gap: 0.9 mm
Tightening torque : 2.5 to 3 daN.m
D7F Engine
To disconnect the spark plug leads, use the tool (3), which is integrated in the plastic cover (4) on the cylinder head.
99894R1
99940R
NOTE : to remove the plugs, use the tool kit, Ele. 1382.
17-3
D7F ENGINE
INJECTION
General
17
SPECIAL NOTES FOR MULTIPOINT INJECTION
35 track SAGEM or MAGNETI MARELLI computer for vehicles without options.
55 track SAGEM computer, SAFIR or MAGNETI MARELLI type for versions with air conditioning.
Semi-sequential multipoint injection. Injectors controlled two by two (injectors for cylinders 1 and 4 followed by injectors for cylinders 2 and 3).
Static ignition with dual single unit coils.
Canister bleed solenoid valve controlled by RCO signal.
Computer configuration depending on gearbox type (manual gearbox or automatic transmission).
The maximum engine speed permitted is 6 200 rpm.
Idle speed correction depending on :

- battery voltage,
- air conditioning,
- power assisted steering pressostat.
Injection warning light on instrument panel not operational.
Use fault finding fiche n 27.
FITTING A 2ND GENERATION ENGINE IMMOBILISER REQUIRES A SPECIAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACING THE
COMPUTER.
17-4
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
INJECTION
General
17
SPECIAL NOTES FOR MULTIPOINT INJECTION
55 track SIEMENS FENIX 5 computer.
Semi-sequential multipoint injection. Injectors are controlled two by two (injectors for cylinders 1 and 4
followed by cylinders 2 and 3).
Static ignition with dual coils.
Canister bleed solenoid controlled by RCO signal.
Computer configuration depending on gearbox type (manual gearbox or automatic transmission)
Idle speed correction depending on :

- air conditioning,
- power assisted steering pressostat,
- battery voltage.
Injection warning light on instrument panel operational.
Use fault finding fiche n 27.
Maximum speed:
- 6 200 rpm if 1st , 2nd or 3rd gears (E7J),
- 6 000 rpm if 4th,or 5th gears (E7J),
- 6 000 rpm . (K7M).
FITTING A 2ND GENERATION ENGINE IMMOBILISER REQUIRES A SPECIAL PROCEDURE FOR REPLACING THE
COMPUTER.
17-5
D7F ENGINE
INJECTION
General
17
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
14231R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Coil
Air filter
Oxygen sensor
Absolute pressure sensor
Throttle position potentiometer
Idle regulation stepping motor
Injection computer
Inertia switch
Locking relay
Fuel pump relay
TDC sensor
Fuel vapour recycling solenoid valve
Tool for removing spark plug leads
Pinking sensor
PAS pressostat
Pressure regulator
Anti-interference condenser
Fuel vapour absorber canister
17-6
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
INJECTION
General
17
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
14230R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Air filter
Pinking sensor
Injection computer
Inertia switch
Fuel pump relay
TDC sensor
Oxygen sensor
Coil for cylinders 2 - 3
PAS pressostat
Coil for cylinders 1 - 4
17-7
D7F Engine
8
9
INJECTION
Injection computer
Inertia switch
16 Pinking sensor
(tightening torque : 2.5 daN.m)
13051R1
4
5
6
7
11311R1

13 Fuel vapour recycling solenoid valve

14 Coolant temperature sensor
11313R4
99939-1R2
17-8
17
D7F ENGINE
INJECTION
1 Coil
19 Anti-interference condenser
17
17 PAS pressostat
99931-1R1
Oxygen sensor
(tightening torque : 5 daN.m)
13050R
12993R
17-9
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
8
9
INJECTION
Injection computer
Inertia switch
12 Coolant temperature sensor
13240R
17
13239R
Pinking sensor
1
14
16
18
13336R

Coil for cylinder 2 - 3
Coil for cylinder 1 - 4
13242R1
17-10
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
4
5
7
INJECTION

17
13 Oxygen sensor
13339R
13243R
6 Throttle position potentiometer

11 TDC sensor
15 PAS pressostat
13337R
13241R
17-11
INJECTION
Central coolant temperature management
D7F Engine
17
244
Injection coolant temperature sensor and

coolant temperature indication on
instrument panel.
3 track sensor, of which two tracks are
allocated to the injection coolant
temperature information, and one to the
indication of the coolant temperature on
the instrument panel.
259
Warning coolant temperature switch for

instrument panel.
Operating principle
Sensor 244 allows:
- the coolant temperature to be shown on the
instrument panel,
- the injection computer to receive constant
information on the engine coolant temperature .
11634R2
The injection computer, depending on the coolant temperature, controls :

- the injection system,
- the cooling fan assembly.
The engine cooling fan assembly is controlled
at fast speed (both slow and fast speeds are
controlled by the air conditioning system) if
the temperature is greater than 99C. If the
temperature falls below 96C, it cuts off
automatically ( if a check has to be carried
out, ensure that the air conditioning is not
operational).
E7J and K7M engines
13239R1
17-12
INJECTION
Injection fault warning light
17
PRINCIPLE FOR ILLUMINATION OF INJECTION FAULT WARNING LIGHT ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles not equipped with the immobiliser function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light illuminates constantly for 3 seconds , then extinguishes.
Vehicles with immobiliser function deactivated:

When the ignition is switched on, the injection warning light illuminates constantly for 3 seconds and
then extinguishes.
When the doors are unlocked, the red immobiliser light, which was previously flashing, extinguishes.
When ignition is switched on, it illuminates for 3 seconds , then extinguishes.
Vehicles with immobiliser function activated:

When the ignition is switched on, the computer does not recognise the code, and prevents the engine
from starting. The injection warning light remains illuminated for 3 seconds and then extinguishes.
Before the ignition is switched on, the red immobiliser light flashes. On switching the ignition on, it
flashes more rapidly.
If a fault is detected in the immobiliser system whilst the engine is running, the injection warning light
flashes in the engine speed range between idle speed and 1 500 rpm approximately .
Fault in a component of the injection system

The warning light is illuminated if a fault has been detected in:
- the pressure sensor,
- the vehicle speed
- the throttle potentiometer,
- the idle regulation stepping motor,
- the automatic transmission connection,
- the injector.
17-13
INJECTION
Immobiliser function
17
This vehicle is fitted with a 2nd generation immobiliser system.

REPLACING THE INJECTION COMPUTER
All computers are supplied uncoded, but can be programmed with a code.
When replacing the computer, the vehicle code must be programmed in and then a check must be made to
ensure that the immobiliser system is operational.
To do this, it is sufficient to carry out the following operations:
- turn the ignition on for a few seconds and turn it off again,
- remove the key to operate the immobiliser function.
CHECKING THE IMMOBILISER FUNCTION
Remove the key from the ignition switch. After 10 seconds the red immobiliser warning light will flash.
For special notes on testing an injection computer (test part), refer to section 82: "Immobiliser".
17-14
INJECTION
Computer configuration depending on gearbox type
17
COMPUTER CONFIGURATION DEPENDING ON GEARBOX TYPE (MANUAL GEARBOX OR AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION)
Each time the injection computer is replaced, it must be programmed with the type of gearbox (manual or
automatic) which is fitted in the vehicle. The computers are designed to function with either type of gearbox.
Method for configuring the computer
Connect the XR25
Select S8
Switch on the ignition
Enter D13 then
For vehicles fitted with manual gearbox :
Enter G50* 2*
For vehicles fitted with automatic transmission :
Enter G50* 1*
The screen will display :
if the configuration has not been made
then
if the configuration is complete.
To ensure that the computer has memorised the data correctly, switch the ignition back on , using fault finding fiche n 27; the fault bargraph 20 LH should be extinguished, whilst the 19 LH or RH status bargraph
should be illuminated.
17-15
INJECTION
Injection/air conditioning programming
17
THIS VEHICLE IS FITTED WITH A VARIABLE COMPRESSOR

AIR CONDITIONING/INJECTION COMPUTER CONNECTION
The electrical connection:

- between the air conditioning computer and the injection computer consists of a single wire (track 5).
This track carries two types of information :
the fast idle speed request information . For this information to be transmitted to the injection
computer , two conditions must be fulfilled :
- the air conditioning function must have been selected on the instrument panel,
- the pressure in the air conditioning circuit must be greater than a certain threshold.
If this information is transmitted, the fast idle speed is obtained (it is therefore normal that
sometimes, when the air conditioning is switched on, engine idling, there is no fast idle speed ).
the Absorbed Power information. This information has no influence on the idle speed. It simply
informs the injection computer of the torque value taken up by the compressor; the computer, in
turn, acts on the idle speed regulation solenoid to anticipate this torque requirement. The absorbed
power may be read using the XR25. When the air conditioning is switched on , #44 should be
between 300 and 5 000 watts.
IMPORTANT: the value at #44 at idle speed is never equal to 0, whatever the status of the compressor,
off or on . The minimum value which may be read using #44 is approximately 250 watts.
- the link between the the injection computer and the air conditioning computer consists of a single wire
(track 51). This track carries the information regarding the authorisation or prevention of compressor
operation.
COMPRESSOR OPERATION PROGRAMMING
During certain operating phases, the injection computer prevents the compressor from operating.
Programming when starting engine
The compressor is prevented from functioning for 10 seconds after starting the engine .
Recovery of performance ( D7F engine)
Depending on the torque required by the driver and on the power absorbed by the air conditioning
compressor, the injection computer stops or allows the operation of the compressor .
Anti-stalling function (D7F and K7M engines)
If the no load position is not recognised, if the engine speed is lower than 550 rpm . (D7F) and 480 rpm .
(K7M) and the power absorbed by the compressor is greater than 300 watts (D7F) and 1 000 watts (K7M),
then the compressor disengages.
It engages again if (D7F) :
- if the no load position is recognised,
- if the no load position is not recognised when the engine speed reaches 1 800 rpm.
It is reengaged (K7M) if the no load position is recognised when the engine speed reaches 640 rpm.
Thermal protection programming ( E7J engine )
The compressor does not engage in cases where the coolant temperature is greater than or equal to +
115C.
17-16
INJECTION
Idle speed correction
17
CONNECTION BETWEEN THE POWER ASSISTED STEERING PRESSOSTAT AND THE INJECTION COMPUTER
The injection computer receives information from the power assisted steering pressostat . This varies
depending on the pressure present in the hydraulic circuit. The higher the pressure, , the more energy is
absorbed by the power assisted steering pump.
To compensate for this energy absorption, the injection computer increases the opening ratio of the idle
speed regulation stepping motor.
The information is received on track 13 of the injection computer. If the pressostat is closed, the computer
receives an earth. The idle speed is adjusted to:
- 800 rpm for the D7F and E7J engines,
- 850 rpm for the K7M engine.
IDLE SPEED CORRECTION DEPENDING ON THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
The objective of this correction is to compensate for the drop in voltage, due to consumer operation when
the battery is poorly charged. To correct this, the idle speed is increased, allowing the alternator to speed up
and increase the charging voltage.
The lower the voltage, the greater the degree of correction. Correction of the engine speed is therefore
variable. It begins when the voltage drops to below 12.7 Volts. Correction begins at the nominal engine
speed and may reach a maximum of:
- 880 rpm for the D7F engine,
- 930 rpm for the E7J engine,
- 910 rpm for the K7M engine.
IDLE SPEED CORRECTION DEPENDING ON AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION
The injection computer increases the idle speed to 850 rpm for the D7F / K7M engines and to 850 rpm for
the E7J engine, provided it receives the fast idle speed information from the air conditioning computer.
17-17
INJECTION
Adaptive idle speed correction
17
PRINCIPLE
Under normal warm engine operating conditions, the R.C.O. idle speed value at #12 varies between a high
value and a low value, until the nominal idle speed is obtained .
It is possible that during variations in the operation of the vehicle (running in, engine contamination..), that
the R.C.O. idle speed value could become close to the highest or lowest values.
The adaptive correction (#21) of the R.C.O. idle speed (#12) allows the slow variations in the engine air requirement to be corrected, so that the R.C.O. (#12) is recentred to an average nominal value.
This correction only becomes effective if the coolant temperature is higher than 75C, 20 seconds after
starting the engine and if the nominal idle speed regulation phase has been reached.
VALUES FOR THE R.C.O. IDLE SPEED AND ITS ADAPTIVE CORRECTION
Nominal idle speed (#06)
R.C.O. idle speed (#12)
Adaptive idle speed (#21)
D7F 710
engine
E7J 780
engine
K7M 744
engine
X = 740 rpm.
X = 750 rpm.
X = 750 rpm.
4 % X 14 %
2 % X 15 %
6 % X 15 %
Limit value:
- minimum : - 4.3 %
- maximum :+3.9 %
Limit value:
- minimum : - 2.4 %
- maximum :+6.2 %
Limit value:
- minimum : - 2.4 %
- maximum :+6.2 %
INTERPRETATION OF THE GATE VALUES
In the case of excess air (air leak or throttle stop incorrectly adjusted ..) the idle speed increases, and the
R.C.O. idle speed value at #12 decreases, in order to return to the nominal idle speed; the value of the
R.C.O. idle speed adaptive correction at #21 decreases to re-center the R.C.O. idle speed at #12.
In the case of a lack of air (contamination, etc.), the process is inverted : the R.C.O. idle speed at #12 increases and the adaptive correction at #21 also increases, in order to re-center the #12 to an average nominal value.
IMPORTANT : It is vital, after erasing the memory from the computer (disconnecting the battery), to let the
engine run at idle speed before returning the vehicle to the customer, so that the adaptive correction can be
correctly reset.
17-18
INJECTION
Richness regulation
17
OXYGEN SENSOR VOLTAGE (#05)
Reading #05 on the XR25 : the value read is the voltage sent to the computer by the oxygen sensor; it is expressed in volts (the value actually varies between 0 and 1 000 millivolts).
When the engine is in the loop phase, the voltage value should oscillate rapidly and should be between
5050 mV (lean mixture) and 850 50 mV (rich mixture) and vice versa.
The smaller the gap between the upper and lower values, the poorer the information from the sensor (the
gap is usually at least 500 mV).
RICHNESS CORRECTION (#35)
The value given under # 35 on the XR25 represents the average value of richness corrections made by the
computer depending on the richness of the burnt mixture as seen by the oxygen sensor (the oxygen sensor actually analyses the oxygen content of the exhaust gases directly from the richness of the burnt mixture).
The richness correction has a centre point of 128 with thresholds of 0 and 255 (experience has shown that under normal operating conditions # 35 is located close to 128 with only a small amount of variation).
- Value less than 128 : request for mixture to be made leaner.
- Value greater than 128 : request for mixture to be made richer.
ENTRY INTO RICHNESS REGULATION MODE
Loop phase
Richness regulation begins after the timed starting period :
-
for no load, if the coolant temperature has reached :
46 C for the E7J engine,

30 C for the D7F engine,
45 C for the K7M engine,
outside no load conditions, if the coolant temperature is greater than:

+ 20 C for the E7J engine,
+ 20 C for the D7F engine,
+ 20 C for the K7M engine,
The timed starting period is dependent on the coolant temperature:

-
at 20 C it is a maximum of:
3 minutes for the E7J engine,
1 minute 20 seconds for the D7F engine,
4 minutes for the K7M engine,
at 80 C it is a maximum of:
1 minute 30 seconds for the E7J engine,
35 seconds for the D7F engine,
1 minute for the K7M engine,
If richness regulation has not yet started, #35 = 128
17-19
INJECTION
Richness regulation
17
Non-loop mode
When richness regulation is occurring, the operating phases when the computer ignores the voltage information from the oxygen sensor are:
- Full load: #35 = variable and greater than 128,
- Sharp acceleration: #35 = variable and greater than 128,
- Deceleration with no load information (injection cut) : #35 = 128,
- Oxygen sensor fault: #35 = 128
DEFECT MODE IN THE EVENT OF AN OXYGEN SENSOR FAULT
If the voltage from the oxygen sensor is incorrect (# 05 varies only slightly or not at all) during richness regulation, the computer will only enter defect mode (# 35 = 128 ) if the fault has been present for 3 to 5 minutes.
The fault will be memorised in this case only.
If an oxygen sensor fault is present and recognised and if the fault has already been stored, the system enters
the open loop mode directly (# 35 = 128 ).
17-20
INJECTION
17
PRINCIPLE
In the loop mode (see section 17 "Richness regulation"), richness regulation (# 35 ), corrects the injection timing to give fuel metering which is as close as possible to richness 1. The correction value is close to 128, with
limit values of 0 and 255.
Variations may affect the components of the injection system and the correction may drift towards 0 or 255,
to ensure richness 1 is obtained.
Adaptive correction allows the injection mapping to be adjusted to re-centre the richness regulation to 128
and to ensure a constant authority of correction to make the mixture leaner or richer.
Adaptive correction to richness regulation has two parts:
- Adaptive correction for average and high engine loads (#30)
- Adaptive correction for idle speed and low engine loads (#31).
Adaptive corrections take 128 as the average value after initialisation (erasing the memory) and have the
following threshold values:
D7F
E7J
Engine
Engine
K7M
Engine
106 #30 150
64 #30 192
60 #30 195
106 #31 150
64 #31 192
60 #31 195
Adaptive correction only takes place when the engine is warm, in the loop phase (#35 variable) and for a
specified manifold pressure range.
The engine must have operated in the loop mode for several pressure zones in order that adaptive correction begins to change to compensate for the variations in engine operating richness.
Following reinitialisation of the computer (return to 128 for # 30 and # 31 ) a special road test must therefore
be carried out.
17-21
INJECTION
17
ROAD TEST
Conditions :
-
Engine warm (coolant temperature > 75 C).
Do not exceed engine speed

and
and
4 400 rpm for the D7F engine,

4 800 rpm for the E7J engine,
4 000 rpm for the K7M engine.
For this test, it is advisable to start from a fairly low engine speed , in 3rd or 4th gear using progressive acceleration to stabilise the required pressure for 10 seconds in each zone (see table).
NOTE : for the D7F engine, for example, for zone n 1, attempt to maintain the average of 320 mbars for
at least 10 seconds.
Pressure zones to cover during the test (reading #01)

Zone n 1
(mbars)
260
Zone n 2
(mbars)
390
Zone n 3
(mbars)
510
Zone n 4
(mbars)
620
Zone n 5
(mbars)
740
870
E7J
Average 325
260
Average 450
400
Average 565
520
Average 680
650
Average 805
770
970
D7F
Average 330
250
Average 460
390
Average 585
500
Average 710
620
Average 870
730
930
K7M
Average 320
Average 445
Average 560
Average 675
Average 830
Following this test the corrections will be operational.

# 31 varies more significantly for idle speed and low loads and # 30 for average and high loads, but both
are operational over all of the manifold pressure ranges.
The test should be followed by a normal, smooth and varied drive, covering a distance of 3 to 6 miles (5 to
10 km).
After the test, read the values for #30 and #31. Initially 128, they should have changed. If not, repeat the
test ensuring that the test conditions are observed.
17-22
INJECTION
17
INTERPRETATION OF INFORMATION GATHERED DURING A ROAD TEST
If there is a lack of fuel (injectors dirty, fuel pressure and flow too low...), richness regulation # 35 increases to
obtain the richness as close as possible to richness 1 and adaptive correction # 30 and # 31 increases until the
richness correction returns to oscillate around 128.
If there is an excess of fuel, the situation is reversed : Richness regulation # 35 reduces and adaptive
correction # 30 and # 31 also reduces to re-centre the richness correction (# 35) around 128.
NOTE : the analysis which may be made using # 31 remains difficult since this correction mainly operates for
idle speed and low loads and is also very sensitive.
Hasty conclusions should not therefore be drawn from this gate value, rather the position of # 30 should be
examined.
The information from these two gates gives an idea about the engine operation richness, and may be used as
a guide for fault finding. In order for these to be put to good use during fault finding, no conclusion may be
drawn from their value unless they are at the minimum or maximum correction limit, and if both gate values
were offset in the same direction.
IMPORTANT : # 30 and # 31 should only be examined and analysed after a customer complaint, an operating fault and if they are at the threshold with the value for # 35 also offset (# 35 varies above 175 or below 80).
17-23
COOLING
Specifications
19
VOLUME AND GRADE OF COOLANT
Engine
Volume (in litres)
D7F
Grade
Special notes
Protection down to - 20 2C , warm,
temperate and cold countries
GLACEOL RX (type D)
E7J and K7M
F8Q
7.5
recommended coolant
only
Protection down to - 37 2C for

extreme cold countries
THERMOSTAT
Engine type
Starts opening (in C)
Fully open (in C)
Travel (in mm)
D7F / E7J / K7M / F8Q
89
101
7.5
19-1
COOLING
Filling and bleeding
There is no heater matrix coolant control valve.
Coolant flow is continuous in the heater matrix,
which contributes to the cooling of the engine.
FILLING
Check the tightening of the drain plug(s).

Open the bleed screw(s).
Fill the circuit through the opening in the expansion bottle.
Tighten the bleed screws as soon as the liquid
flows in a continuous jet.
Start the engine (2 500 rpm).
Adjust the level by overflow for a period of about
4 minutes .
Close the bottle.
BLEEDING
Allow the engine to run for about 10 minutes at

2 500 rpm, until the fan(s) operate (time necessary
for automatic degassing ).
Check the liquid level is at the "Maximum" marker.
DO NOT OPEN THE BLEED SCREW(S) WHILST THE
ENGINE IS RUNNING.
RE-TIGHTEN THE EXPANSION BOTTLE CAP WHILST
THE ENGINE IS WARM.
19-2
19
COOLING
Testing
19

M.S. 554-01
M.S. 554-06
M.S. 554-07
Adapter for M.S. 554-05

Adapter for M.S. 554-05
Kit for testing cooling circuit
sealing
1 - Testing the sealing of the circuit
2 - Checking the rating of the valve.
Replace the expansion bottle valve with adapter

M.S. 554-01.
If liquid passes through the expansion bottle

valve, the valve must be replaced.
Connect this to tool M.S. 554-07.
On pump M.S. 554-07 fit tool M.S. 554-06 and fit

the assembly on the valve to be checked.
Let the engine warm up then turn it off.

Increase the pressure which should stabilise at the
valve rating pressure with a test tolerance of
0.1 bar.
Pump to put the circuit under pressure.

Stop pumping at 0.1 bar less than the valve is
rated.
Valve rating :
The pressure should not drop, otherwise look for

the leak.
Slowly unscrew the union of tool M.S. 554-07 to
decompress the cooling circuit, then remove tool
M.S. 554-01 and refit the expansion bottle valve
with a new seal.
Engines
Colour of valve
Valve rating (in

bars)
D7F / E7J /
K7M / F8Q
Brown
1.2
97871R
19-3
COOLING
Water pump
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
19
Mot. 591-02
Mot. 591-04
Mot. 1135-01
Mot. 1202
Mot. 1273
Index
Angle tightening wrench
Tool for tensioning the timing
belt
Hose clip pliers
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Engine support tool
Apply the product to the part to be cleaned, wait

approximately 10 minutes, then remove it using a
wooden spatula.
TIGHTENING TORQUES (in daN.m and / or )
Tension wheel nut

5
2 + 68 + 6
Water pump bolt
2.2
Water pump nut
1
Wheel bolts
9
Gloves should be worn during the operation.

REFITTING
The sealing of the water pump is carried out using

the product LOCTITE 518; the bead (H) must be
applied following the diagram below.
E7J engine
REMOVAL
Place the vehicle on a two post lift.

Drain the cooling circuit from the lower radiator
hose.
Remove:
- the timing tension wheel,
- the water pump, and extract this from above.
CLEANING
It is very important not to scratch the gasket faces

of all aluminium components.
Use the product Dcapjoint to dissolve the part
of the gasket which remains attached.
92068R
19-4
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
COOLING
Water pump
19
K7M engine
10063R1
Refit the timing belt (see method described in section 11 "Timing belt").
Fill and bleed the cooling circuit (see section 19
19-5
D7F engine
without AC
COOLING
Diagram
19
10070-2R
1
2
3
4
5
Engine
Radiator
Hot bottle with permanent degassing
Heater matrix
3 mm diameter restriction
Water pump
Thermostat
Bleed screw
The fan is controlled at high speed by the injection computer if the coolant temperature is greater than 99C.
The expansion bottle valve is brown, and its rating

is 1.2 bar.
If the coolant temperature is lower than 96C, the

fan stops operating.
19-6
D7F engine
with AC
COOLING
Diagram
19
10070-3R
1
2
3
4
5
Engine
Radiator
Heater matrix
Water pump
Thermostat
Bleed screw
The expansion bottle valve is brown, and its rating

is 1.2 bar.

19-7
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
COOLING
Diagram
19
13508R
1
2
3
4
5
6
Engine
Radiator
Heater matrix
Thermostat mounting
Water pump
Thermostat
Bleed screw
Temperature switch
The expansion bottle valve rating is 1.2 bar

(colour; brown).

19-8
F8Q ENGINE
COOLING
Diagram
19
13504-1R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Engine
Radiator
Heater matrix
Thermostat mounting
Oil heat exchanger
Water pump
Thermostat
Bleed screw
Temperature switch
The expansion bottle valve rating is 1.2 bar
(colour:brown).
19-9
EXHAUST
General
During operation, the catalytic converter reaches
high temperatures, and consequently, it is vital
not to park the vehicle in a place where combustible materials could come into contact with it, and,
as a result, ignite.
19
MARKING THE AREA TO BE CUT
The area to be cut is defined by two punch marks

on the exhaust pipe.
IMPORTANT:
the seal, between the exhaust manifold gasket face and the catalytic converter (inclusive), must be in perfect condition,
- it is imperative that every gasket which is removed should be REPLACED,
- during removal and refitting, the catalytic
converter must not undergo repeated mechanical shocks, as it will be damaged.
CUTTING THE EXHAUST PIPE
The exhaust pipes are of the monobloc type.

There is no join from the beginning of the catalytic converter or the expansion box, to the end of
the silencer.
99226-1R
There are a maximum (depending on engine) of

two cutting areas on the exhaust pipe, situated
between the catalytic converter and the
expansion box and between the expansion box
and the silencer.
The distance between the two markings is 90 mm.
To cut the pipe, mark the central point (D) between the two markings (P1 and P2).
It will therefore be necessary, when replacing one

of the components in After Sales, to cut the
exhaust pipe.
For this, it is absolutely essential to accurately :
- mark the area to be cut,
- use the cutting tool Mot. 1199-01,
- fit the after sales sleeve .
P1
P2
90 mm
DI1901
IMPORTANT: to cut the exhaust pipe, it is essential to use tool Mot. 1199-01; this tool allows
2mm thick pipes to be cut.
19-10
EXHAUST
General
19
Do not reuse an old clip.
FITTING THE AFTER SALES SLEEVE
95478R1
99227S
To avoid any leaks in the exhaust pipe, the sleeve

must be correctly positioned over the two exhaust
pipe sections. The pipe must be against the stops
inside the sleeve.
The nut on the collar has a groove (A) to ensure it

is tightened to the correct torque. When the nut is
tightened and the groove disappears, it causes a
distinct clicking sound and the nut is then tightened to the correct torque (2.5 daN.m).
Begin by positioning the sleeve over the used section of the pipe, adjust the collar by tightening
gently.
NOTE: there are different sleeve diameters availa-
ble.
Check the position of the pipe in relation to the

stops.
IMPORTANT:
Fit the new section of the pipe.
Before fitting the sleeve on the pipe, apply a little

paste to the inner ring on the sleeve to prevent
leaks.
check that there is no point of contact between the exhaust pipe and the vehicle body,
check for the presence and correct positioning
of all heat shields for the exhaust pipe,
check that the two cutting marks are correctly
aligned.
(Exhaust paste, Part Number. 77 01 421 161

SODICAM).
IMPORTANT : the bolt and nut used for tighte-
ning the sleeve must be aligned vertically to

avoid any risks of touching the underside of the
body.
19-11
EXHAUST
Pipe assembly
19
DIAGRAM OF EXHAUST PIPES AND LOCATION OF CUTTING AREAS
E7J engine
D7F Engine
13823R
13824R
1
Expansion box
2
Silencer
ZC Pipe cutting area
19-12
EXHAUST
Pipe assembly
19
DIAGRAM OF EXHAUST PIPES AND LOCATION OF CUTTING AREAS
F8Q engine
K7M engine
13821R
1
2
3
ZC
13822R
Catalytic converter
Silencer
Expansion box
Pipe cutting area
19-13
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
INTAIRCO pneumatic siphoning pump, for

petrol or diesel tank draining system (see
EQUIPMENT catalogue).
IMPORTANT : during all the fuel tank removal

and refitting operations, refrain from smoking
and be sure not to handle incandescent objects in
the vicinity of the working area.
Attach to the outlet at (A), a pipe long enough to

be placed into a container outside the vehicle .
DRAINING THE FUEL TANK (Petrol version)
talogue).
Remove the pump - sender unit assembly access

cover.
Put the battery on a charger so that it does not

lose its charge.
Remove the clip which shows if the assembly has

been pushed in (if fitted).
In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel

pump relay, which is located in the engine
connection unit.
NOTE : Alternatively, an INTAIRCO pneumatic siphoning pump may be used (see EQUIPMENT ca-
Disconnect the quick release union at (1).

Shunt tracks 3 and 5 and let the fuel flow until it
runs out in intermittent jets.
Disconnect the shunt.
Reconnect the relay.
14058R1
19-14
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
DRAINING THE FUEL TANK (Diesel version)
19
REMOVING THE FUEL TANK (Petrol or diesel ver-
sion)
Since diesel versions are not fitted with an electrical fuel pump, an external pump must be used to
drain the tank.

Place the vehicle on a two post lift.
For example, the INTAIRCO pneumatic siphoning

pump can be used (see EQUIPMENT catalogue).
Disconnect the electrical connector (2) and the

quick release unions.
99641S
Remove the pump - sender unit access cover.

Remove the clip which shows if the assembly has
been pushed in (if fitted).
14058R2
Disconnect the quick release union.

Lift the vehicle.
Separate the exhaust pipe from the exhaust
down pipe.
Remove the exhaust mounting bracket from the

middle of the vehicle.
Tilt the exhaust pipe.
Disconnect the petrol filter and the union with
the fuel gallery.
Remove the heat shield located below the fuel
tank and below the handbrake cables.
14058R1
Connect the rubber hose from the pneumatic

pump to the outlet union (A).
Drain the fuel tank.
19-15
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
Disconnect cables (3)and (4) from the handbrake
lever. The system which allows the handbrake
cables to be released is located within the
passenger compartment. The method is described
in section 37. Carefully release the plastic cable
stops (6).
19
REFITTING
The fuel tank has three oblong positioning holes :

- two next to the fuel tank lateral mounting
bolts
- one next to the rear fuel tank mounting bolt.
To ensure that the fuel tank is correctly positioned, the three positioning holes must be aligned
with the three holes in the body sub-frame.
Take care not to pinch any pipes (risk of leaks).
Fit the quick release unions by hand and ensure
they connect correctly.
Take care to ensure the heat shields are correctly
refitted.
99091R2
Tighten the fuel tank mounting bolts to a torque

of 2.1 daN.m.
Disengage the adjuster to release the cables.

Disconnect the pipes going from the fuel tank to
the fuel gallery.
Disconnect the overflow pipe from the fuel tank.
Separate the tank from the filler neck.
Unclip the handbrake cables from under the tank.
Position a component jack under the fuel tank.
Remove the four bolts mounting the tank.
Tilt the tank to the right hand side, then remove
it.
19-16
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
Petrol version
13038R1
19-17
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
Petrol version
13036R
19-18
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
Diesel version
13040R1
19-19
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
Diesel version
13035R
The tank breathes through the top opening of the fuel breather/sender unit assembly.
19-20
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
27
29
30
32
34
A
B
C
D
E
F
R
V
Tank
Bolts (x 4)
Filler neck
Filler neck bowl
Rivet (x 3)
Sleeve mounting clip
Fuel cap
Fuel supply pipe
Fuel return pipe
Clip
Clip
Canister pipe
Canister pipe
Canister
Bolt
Clip
Damper pad
Captive nut
Connection between filler neck outlet and
fuel passage pipe
Degassing - filling
Canister connection (fuel vapours)
Over-pressure - under - pressure safety valve
Restriction valve
Over - filling prevention valve and leak prevention valve in case vehicle turns over
Breathing assembly
Quick-release union
Quick-release union
Quick-release union
End piece (not quick-release)
Opening for air outlet during filling
Air volume allowing the fuel to expand
Fuel inlet for filling (with anti-overflow
valve)
Maximum fuel volume allowed
19-21
19
FUEL TANK
Fuel tank
19
PURPOSE OF THE VALVES
The tank has a sealed cap.
29 Over-pressure-under-pressure safety valve
The filler neck for unleaded petrol has the following special features :
- a filling opening with a smaller diameter and
not compatible with a conventional filling
nozzle (the lead would have the effect of polluting the depollution system: oxygen sensor
and catalytic converter),
- a valve blocking the filing opening (30) (to
avoid fuel evaporating or the reverse passage
of fuel).
If the fuel vapour recirculation circuit is

blocked, this valve prevents the fuel tank
being subject to excess pressure (the tank
would inflate) or lack of pressure (as fuel is
used, the tank would be crushed).
30 Restriction valve
This valve prevents leaded or diesel fuel being
put into the tank.
32 Overfill and leak prevention valve in case vehicle turns over
The overfill prevention valve operates using
the ball at (33).
When the vehicle is stationary, during filling,
the ball rests in its seat, retaining a certain volume of air in the reservoir .
When the vehicle is moving, the ball (33)
moves out of its seat, thus allowing the tank
to be connected to the canister.
When the tank is full, it is vital that a
sufficient volume of air to allow the fuel
contained within it to expand is retained
inside the tank, but not too much, otherwise
there is a risk of the tank exploding .
99212R2
If the vehicle turns over, this valve prevents

the tank from emptying, either through the
pipe leading to the canister, or through the
breather pipe (in Diesel versions).
19-22
FUEL TANK
Pump - Sender unit
In petrol versions, the pump and sender unit cannot be separated.
In diesel versions, there is no pump immersed in
the tank, and there is only a sender unit.
For the removal of the sender unit, please refer to
subsections "Tank", "Pump-sender unit".
Checking the sender unit
Value between
terminals
A1 and B1 (in )
Height H
(in mm)
3.5 3.5
164
61 7
143
110 10
110
190 16
81
280 20
52
310 10
47
Check for a variation in resistance by moving the

float.
Measuring the height
Remove the sender unit and place it on a flat surface. H is the height measured between the float
pin and the work plane.
NOTE : all the above values are given merely as
an indication.
19-23
19
FUEL TANK
Sender unit
19
Mot. 1397
Wrench for removing

pump-sender unit assembly nut
Remove mounting nut (5) using tool Mot. 1397

(unlock the nut, remove the tool, slacken the nut
by hand then remove it).
IMPORTANT :
During all operations on the fuel tank or on the

fuel supply circuit , it is vital :
- to refrain from smoking and handling incandescent objects in the vicinity of the working
area,
- to avoid fuel leakage, due to the residual
pressure present in the pipes during removal .
Extract the pump - sender unit assembly.

NOTE : if several hours have to pass between the
removal and refitting of the fuel pump-sender

unit assembly, refit the nut on the tank, to avoid
deforming it.
REMOVAL
To remove the pump-sender unit assembly, it is

not necessary to remove the tank, as it is accessible through the inside of the vehicle. To do this :
- disconnect the battery,
- lift the rear bench seat ,
- remove the steel access cover,
- disconnect the electrical connection at (1),
14058R
the fuel supply pipe (3) (which is marked by a

green quick release union and an arrow (M)),
the fuel return pipe (4) (marked by a red quick
release union and by an arrow (B)).
19-24
FUEL TANK
Pump - sender unit
REFITTING
Replace the seal.

Position the pump - sender unit assembly (the
arrow (F) must be facing the three lines and the
arrow (P) moulded on the fuel tank).
Position the nut and tighten it (the nut is correctly
tightened when the marking (O) on it is in line
with the three lines on the fuel tank).
Connect the fuel pipes.
Reconnect the electrical connection.
Refit the steel cover.
ALLOCATION OF CONNECTOR TRACKS
TRACK
ALLOCATION
A1
Earth
A2
Not used
B1
Sender unit information to instrument

panel
B2
Not used
C1
Pump
C2
Pump
19-25
19
D7F ENGINE
ENGINE MOUNTING
19
13359S
12924G
19-26
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
ENGINE MOUNTING
19
13359R3
19-27
F8Q ENGINE
ENGINE MOUNTING
19
13086R2
19-28
Fault- Finding
LUCAS DIESEL INJECTION
INJECTION
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED HYDRAULIC
SYSTEMS
AIR CONDITIONING
IMMOBILISER
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
AIR BAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

AND WIRING

77 11 197 384
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
Fault-Finding
Contents
Page
13 LUCAS DIESEL INJECTION

F8Q 630 engine
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Interpretation of XR25 bargraphs
Checking conformity
Aid
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Page
17 INJECTION (cont)
D7F 720 engine - 55 tracks
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Status and parameter check
Status and parameter interpretation
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Aid
Checking conformity
13-1
13-2
13-5
13-31
13-36
13-37
13-38
17-147
17-152
17-155
17-175
17-181
17-202
17-203
17-208
17-209
17 INJECTION
E7J 780 / K7M 744 engine
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Aid
Checking conformity
17-1
17-6
17-9
17-30
17-36
17-56
17-57
17-62
17-63
D7F 720 engine - 35 tracks

Introduction
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Aid
Checking conformity
17-75
17-80
17-83
17-103
17-109
17-129
17-130
17-135
17-136
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
38 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Checking conformity
Aid
Customer complaints
Fault charts
38-1
38-2
38-4
38-18
38-19
38-20
38-22
62 AIR CONDITIONING
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Aid
62-1
62-2
62-4
62-15
62-17
62-49
Fault-Finding
Contents
Page
82 IMMOBILISER
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints (petrol
version)
Fault charts (petrol version)
Customer complaints (diesel
version)
Fault charts (diesel version)
Checking conformity
Aid
88 AND WIRING
82-1
82-2
82-4
82-11
82-12
82-21
82-22
82-30
82-34
87 MULTI-TIMER UNIT
Introduction
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Checking conformity
Aid
87-1
87-2
87-4
87-31
87-33
87-57
87-60
Air bag and pretensioners

Introduction
XR25 fiche
Checking conformity
Aid
88-1
88-2
88-3
88-19
88-20
Remote control for door locking

Introduction
Recommendations
XR25 fiche
Customer complaints
Fault charts
Checking conformity
Aid
88-23
88-24
88-25
88-27
88-32
88-33
88-35
88-40
F8Q 630 ENGINE
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
..............................................................
05
.........................................................................
31
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Customer complaints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Checking conformity
CLIO
XB0X

Fault finding - Introduction
F8Q 630
13
CONDITIONS FOR APPLYING THE TESTS DESCRIBED IN THIS FAULT FINDING DOCUMENT
The tests described in this fault finding section should only be applied to the vehicle if the title of the fault
treated corresponds exactly to the display noted on the XR25 when the ignition is switched on.
If a bargraph is interpreted when flashing, the conditions for confirming the presence of an actual fault (and
the necessity of applying the fault finding) are shown in the "Notes" section or at the start of the bargraph
interpretation.
If a bargraph is only interpreted if it is permanently illuminated, the application of these tests recommended
in the fault finding document when the bargraph is flashing will not allow the cause of the memorised fault
to be determined. In this case, only checking of the wiring and connections of the faulty component should
be carried out (the fault is simply memorised as it was not present at the moment of testing).
NOTE:
The ignition should be switched off before the XR25 is used.
SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED FOR OPERATIONS ON THE DPC DIGITAL INJECTION SYSTEM
- XR25 test kit.

- XR25 cassette N 17 minimum.
- 25 track bornier El. 1332 for testing using the computer connector.
DPCF011.0
13-1
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

Fault finding - XR25 fiche
13
PRESENTATION OF FICHE XR25 N 60 SIDE 1/2
FI21760-1
DPCF011.0
13-2
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

13
FI21760-2
DPCF011.0
13-3
CLIO
XB0X

F8Q 630
13
BARGRAPH SYMBOLS
FAULTS (always on a coloured background)
If illuminated, there is a fault with the product tested. The associated text
defines the fault.
The bargraph may be :
- Permanently illuminated
: fault present.
- Flashing
: fault memorised
- Extinguished
: no fault or not diagnosed
STATUS (always on a white background)
Bargraph always at the top right hand side.

If illuminated dialogue has been established with the computer for the product.
If it remains extinguished:
- The code does not exist.
- There is a fault with the tool, the computer or the XR25 / computer connection.
The representation of the following bargraphs indicates their initial status:
Initial status: (ignition on, engine stopped, no operator action)
or
Indefinite
- illuminated when the function or condition on the fiche is met.
Extinguished
Illuminated - extinguishes when the function or condition on the fiche is no

longer met
ADDITIONAL NOTES
Certain bargraphs have a *. The *.. command, when the bargraph is illuminated,
allows additional information on the type of fault or status to be displayed.
DPCF011.0
13-4
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13
Fault finding - Interpretation of XR25 bargraphs
Fiche n 60 1/2
1
Bargraph 1 RH extinguished
Code present
NOTES
Use bornier El. 1332 for any operations on the computer connector.
Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with the computer on
another vehicle. If the XR25 is not the cause of the fault and dialogue is not established with another
computer on the same vehicle, a faulty computer may be causing interference on the K and L fault
finding lines. Disconnect connections successively to determine which computer is at fault.
Check the ISO selector is on position S8, that you are using the latest XR25 cassette and the correct access
code (D34).
Check the battery voltage and carry out any necessary operations to ensure the correct voltage (U battery
> 10.5 volts).
Check the two 15 Amp fuses on the engine connection unit have not blown.
Check the connection and condition of the connections on the computer connector and the intermediate
connections R107 dashboard / front of engine and R67 front / engine.
Check the computer is correctly fed:
- Earth on track 2 of the computer connector (check the condition and tightness of the engine earth
strap and the engine earth MH near to the gearbox housing).
- + after ignition feed on track 1 of the computer connector.
Check the diagnostic socket is correctly fed:

- Earth on track 5.
- + before ignition feed on track 16.
Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the lines in the connection diagnostic socket/
computer:
- Between track 10 of the computer connector and track 15 of the diagnostic socket.
If fault finding is not established after these operations, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section
for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
When communication is established, deal with any fault bargraphs which may be
illuminated.
DPCF011.0
13-5
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

1
13
Fiche n 60 1/2
Bargraph 1 LH illuminated
Computer
NOTES
None
Replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory (G0**), switch the ignition off, then carry out a road
test.
Finish the operation by checking using the XR25.
DPCF011.0
13-6
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

2
Coolant temperature sensor circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
*02 :
co.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to 12 volts

cc.0 : Short circuit or short circuit to earth
co.1
NOTES
If bargraphs 2RH and 3LH are also illuminated, look for a CO of the
sensor common earth (track 3 of the computer connector)
Also check the condition and tightness of the engine earth strap and
the gearbox engine earth.
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to + 12 volts of the connection between track 25 on the
computer connector and track 2 on the coolant temperature sensor connector.
Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 3 on the computer connector and track 1 on the
coolant temperature sensor connector.
Test the connections on the 2 connectors.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the coolant temperature sensor then erase the computer
memory.
If the "coolant temperature sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid"
section for this operation).
cc.0
NOTES
None
Ensure insulation from earth of the connection between track 25 on the computer connector and track 2
on the coolant temperature sensor connector.
Check to see if the sensor circuit (or the sensor) is in short circuit (resistance at 60C = 1.2 Kohms).
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the coolant temperature sensor then erase the computer
memory.
If the "coolant temperature sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid"
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-7
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

2
Bargraph 2 RH illuminated
Air temperature sensor circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.1
Fiche n 60 1/2
*22 :

cc.0 : Short circuit or short circuit to earth
NOTES
If bargraphs 2LH and 3LH are also illuminated, look for a CO of the
common sensor earth (track 3 of the computer connector)
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to + 12 volts of the connection between track 24 on the
computer connector and track 2 of the air temperature sensor connector.
Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 3 on the computer connector and track 1 of the air
temperature sensor connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the air temperature sensor then erase the computer memory.
If the "air temperature sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section
cc.0
NOTES
None
Ensure insulation from earth of the connection between track 24 on the computer connector and track 2
of the air temperature sensor connector.
Check to see if the sensor circuit (or the sensor) is in short circuit (resistance at 20C = 3.5 Kohms).
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the air temperature sensor then erase the computer memory.
If the "air temperature sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-8
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

3
Load potentiometer circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
Fiche n 60 1/2
*03 :
co.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

cc.1 : Short circuit to 5 volts or to 12 volts
dEF : Sensor feed fault
NOTES
None
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to earth of the connection between track 23 on the
computer connector and track 3 on the pump connector (10 tracks).
Also ensure the insulation of this connection in relation to the connection between track 3 on the computer connector and track 5 on the pump connector (potentiometer earth).
Also ensure the continuity of the connection between track 4 on the computer connector and track 4 on
the pump connector.
Look for a possible potentiometer short circuit (between tracks 4 and 5 on the 10 track connector) or a
short circuit in its feed.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the load potentiometer ( consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
If the "load potentiometer circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
cc.1
NOTES
If BG2LH and 2RH are also illuminated, look for a CO on the sensor
earth (track 3 of the computer connector).
Ensure insulation from 5 volts and from 12 volts of the connection between track 23 on the computer
connector and track 3 on the pump connector (10 tracks).
Also ensure the insulation of this connection in relation to the connection between track 4 on the
computer connector and track 4 on the pump connector(+ 5 volts potentiometer).
pump connector.
operation).
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-9
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13
CONT
dEF
NOTES
None
Ensure the insulation (+12 Volts and earth) of the connection between track 4 on the computer
connector and track 4 of the pump connector (10 tracks).
operation).
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-10
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

3
NOTES
Bargraph 3 RH flashing
Fiche n 60 1/2
Engine speed sensor circuit
The engine speed sensor circuit fault is present if the bargraph illuminates when
the engine is running.
Measure the resistance of the flywheel signal sensor at its connector. Replace the sensor if the resistance
is not approximately 250 ohms.
Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following lines:
- Between track 8 on the computer connector and track B on the flywheel signal sensor connector.
- Between track 3 on the computer connector and track A on the flywheel signal sensor connector.
Also check the insulation between these two connections.
Carry out a visual inspection of the general condition of the wiring and its routing for possible
interference.
Check the positioning and condition of the sensor.

Check the condition of the target (deformation, mounting, noise....).
Check the conformity of the target: 2 gaps at 180.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the flywheel signal sensor.
If the "engine speed sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-11
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

4
Bargraph 4 LH flashing
Vehicle speed sensor circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
cc.0
Fiche n 60 1/2
*04 :
cc.0 : Short circuit to earth

The vehicle speed sensor circuit fault is present if the bargraph illuminates during
a road test. Use bornier El. 1332 for any operations on the computer connector.
NOTES
None
Ensure the insulation from earth of the connection between track 12 on the computer connector and
track B1 on the vehicle speed sensor connector.
Also ensure the insulation of this connection in relation to the connection between track 3 on the computer
connector and track B2 on the vehicle speed sensor connector.
Check the vehicle speed sensor feed:
- +after ignition feed on track A of the sensor connector
- Earth on track B2 of the sensor connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the vehicle speed sensor, then erase the computer memory.
If the "vehicle speed sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
co.1
NOTES
None
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to 12 volts of the connection between track 12 on the
computer connector and track B1 on the vehicle speed sensor connector.
Also ensure the insulation of this connection in relation to the vehicle speed sensor+ after ignition feed line
(track A of the sensor connector).
Check the vehicle speed sensor feed:
- +after ignition feed on track A of the sensor connector
- Earth on track B2 of the sensor connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the vehicle speed sensor, then erase the computer memory.
If the "vehicle speed sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-12
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

4
NOTES
13
Fiche n 60 1/2
Atmospheric pressure sensor circuit
None
Replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-13
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

5
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
Needle lift sensor circuit
The needle lift sensor circuit fault is present if the bargraph illuminates when the
engine is running. Use bornier El. 1332 for any operations on the computer
connector.
Measure the resistance of the needle lift sensor at its connector.

Replace the injector with the sensor if the resistance is not approximately 105 ohms.
Ensure the continuity of the following connections:
- Between track 7 on the computer connector and track 1 on the needle lift sensor connector.
- Between track 3 on the computer connector and track 2 on the needle lift sensor connector.
Ensure the insulation of the connection between track 7 on the computer connector and track 1 on the
needle lift sensor connector .
Also ensure the insulation between the 2 lines on the needle lift sensor.
Also check the condition of the wiring between the sensor connector and the sensor.
The "needle lift sensor circuit" fault may be connected to absence of injection at the cylinder with the
sensor.
Check the condition of the injector and its fuel supply.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the injector with the sensor.
If the "needle lift sensor circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-14
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

5
Bargraph 5 RH illuminated (co.0) or flashing (cc.1)
Altimetric corrector control circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*25 :
Fiche n 60 1/2

cc.1 : Short circuit to 12 volts
NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the altimetric corrector relay coil (in the engine connection unit). Replace the
relay if the resistance is not approximately 85 ohms.
Ensure the continuity and the insulation from earth of the connection between track 15 of the computer
connector and terminal 2 of the corrector relay mounting.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 1 of the corrector relay mounting.
Test the connections on the computer connector and the relay mounting.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the altimetric corrector relay.
If the "altimetric corrector circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
cc.1
NOTES
Even if present at the moment of testing, this fault is declared by a

flashing BG 5RH side. To confirm its presence and the necessity of
following the fault finding below, erase the computer memory
then start command mode G19*.
The fault is present if the bargraph flashes again.
Measure the resistance of the altimetric corrector relay coil (in the engine connection unit). Replace the
relay if the resistance is not approximately 85 ohms.
Ensure the insulation from +12 volts of the connection between track 15 on the computer connector
and terminal 2 on the corrector relay mounting.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the altimetric corrector relay.
If the "altimetric corrector circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-15
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

6
Bargraph 6 LH illuminated (co.0/cc.1) or flashing (1.dEF)
Advance corrector circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*06 :
Fiche n 60 1/2

1.dEF : Pump hydraulic control
NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the advance corrector at the 10 track pump connector (between tracks 2 and 7).
Replace the advance corrector if the resistance is not approximately 12 ohms.
pump connector.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 2 of the corrector connector, wiring side.
Ensure the insulation from earth of the connection between track 6 on the computer connector and track 7
on the pump connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the advance corrector .
If the "advance solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
cc.1
NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the advance corrector at the 10 track pump connector (between tracks 2 and 7).
Replace the advance corrector if the resistance is not approximately 12 ohms.
Ensure the insulation from +12 volts of the connection between track 6 on the computer connector and
track 7 on the pump connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the advance corrector .
If the "advance solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-16
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13
CONT
1.dEF
NOTES
The fault is present if the bargraph is illuminated when the engine is

running.
This fault indicates that the advance corrector is seized, the injection pump has been incorrectly set or
there is a fuel supply fault.
It is taken into account when the advance noted by the needle lift sensor differs by more than 5 from the
advance value requested by the computer.
NOTE :
If there is a fault where the advance corrector is seized, there will be a characteristic noise when
the ignition is switched on (irregular clicking of the corrector).
- Check the condition of the needle lift sensor cable and its connector.
- Check the condition of the fuel supply to the pump and the injectors (filter blocked, pipe kinked, air
leak, ...).
Check the type of diesel fuel used in extreme cold weather (a "summer " type diesel fuel may cause
this fault at -15 C).
- Check the pump timing and check the tightness of the pump pulley.
If the fuel supply, the needle lift sensor and the pump timing are correct, replace the advance corrector.
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-17
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

6
Fast idle solenoid valve circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*26 :
Fiche n 60 1/2

NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the fast idle solenoid valve at its connector. Replace the fast idle solenoid valve
if the resistance is not approximately 45 ohms.
Ensure continuity of the connection between track 16 on the computer connector and track 1 on the fast
idle solenoid valve connector.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 2 on the fast idle solenoid valve connector, wiring side.
on the fast idle solenoid valve connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the fast idle solenoid valve.
If the "fast idle solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
cc.1
NOTES
Even if present at the moment of testing, this fault is still declared by

a flashing BG 6RH side. To confirm its presence and the necessity of
following the fault finding below, erase the computer memory then
start command mode G16*.
Measure the resistance of the fast idle solenoid valve at its connector. Replace the fast idle solenoid valve
if the resistance is not approximately 45 ohms.
Ensure insulation from +12 volts of the connection between track 16 on the computer connector and
track 1 on the fast idle solenoid valve connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the fast idle solenoid valve.
If the "fast idle solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for
this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-18
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

7
EGR solenoid valve circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*27 :
Fiche n 60 1/2

NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the EGR solenoid valve at its connector. Replace the EGR solenoid valve if the
resistance is not approximately 45 ohms.
Ensure continuity of the connection between track 5 on the computer connector and track 1 of the EGR
solenoid valve connector.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 2 of the EGR solenoid valve connector, wiring side.
of the EGR solenoid valve connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the EGR solenoid valve.
If the "EGR solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
cc.1
NOTES

following the fault finding below, start the engine.
The fault is present if the bargraph illuminates when the engine is
running.
Measure the resistance of the EGR solenoid valve at its connector. Replace the EGR solenoid valve if the
resistance is not approximately 45 ohms.
Ensure insulation in relation to +12 volts of the connection between track 5 on the computer connector and
track 2 of the EGR solenoid valve connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the EGR solenoid valve.
If the "EGR solenoid valve circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section for this
operation).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-19
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

8
Bargraph 8 LH illuminated (co.0) or flashing (cc.1)
Preheating relay N 1 control circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*08 :
Fiche n 60 1/2

None
NOTES
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to earth of the connection between track 14 on the
computer connector and track B1 on the relay unit connector.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track A1 on the relay unit connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the relay unit.
If the "preheating relay No. 1 control circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid"
cc.1
NOTES

a flashing BG 8LH side. To confirm its presence and the necessity of
start command mode G10*1*.
Ensure insulation in relation to 12 volts of the connection between track 14 on the computer connector
and track B1 on the relay unit connector.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the relay unit.
If the "preheating relay No. 1 control circuit" fault reappears, replace the computer (consult the "Aid"
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-20
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

9
PAS pump assembly relay control circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*29 :
Fiche
n 60 1/2

If the vehicle is not fitted with air conditioning, ensure the computer is
configured to "without air conditioning" (for without PAS pump assembly).
NOTES
None
Measure the resistance of the PAS pump assembly relay coil (in the engine connection unit). Replace the
relay if its resistance is not approximately 80 ohms.
Ensure the continuity and insulation from earth of the connection between track 20 on the computer
connector and terminal 2 on the pump assembly relay mounting.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed at terminal 1 of the pump assembly relay mounting.
Check the connections on the computer connector and the relay mounting.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the PAS pump assembly relay.
If the "PAS pump assembly relay control circuit" fault reappears, replace the injection computer (consult
the "Aid" section for this operation).
cc.1
NOTES

start command mode G36*.
Measure the resistance of the PAS pump assembly relay coil (in the engine connection unit). Replace the
relay if its resistance is not approximately 80 ohms.
Ensure the insulation from + 12 Volts of the connection between track 20 of the computer connector and
terminal 2 on the pump assembly relay mounting.
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the PAS pump assembly relay.
If the "PAS pump assembly relay control circuit" fault reappears, replace the injection computer (consult
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-21
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

10
Fault warning light circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
*10 :
Even if present at the moment of testing, this fault is still declared by a flashing
BG 10LH side. To confirm its presence and the necessity of following the fault finding below, erase the computer memory then start command mode G21*1*.
cc.1
NOTES
None
Ensure insulation in relation to 12 volts of the connection between track 18 of the computer connector
and the instrument panel warning light (track 6 on connector MA).
Test at the warning light bulb (bulb in short circuit).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-22
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

10
Bargraph 10 RH illuminated (Co.0) or flashing (cc.1)
Preheating warning light circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
co.0
*30 :
Fiche n 60 1/2
cc.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

NOTES
None
Check the condition of the preheating warning light bulb then the presence of +after ignition feed at
the warning light.
Ensure the continuity and insulation in relation to earth of the connection between track 9 of the
computer connector and the instrument panel preheating warning light (track 5 on CY connector).
Test the connections on the computer connector.
cc.1
NOTES

start command mode G21*2*.
Ensure insulation in relation to 12 volts of the connection between track 9 of the computer connector and
the instrument panel preheating warning light (track 5 on connector CY).
Test at the preheating warning light bulb (bulb in short circuit).
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-23
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

12
Battery voltage
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
*12 :
1.dEF : Battery voltage low

2.dEF : Battery voltage too high
Carry out a complete check of the charging circuit using the Optima 5800
diagnostic station.
Carry out the operations required to ensure correct voltage feed to the computer:
8 volts < correct voltage< 16 volts.
- Check the battery charge.
- Check the charging circuit.
- Check the tightness and condition of the battery terminals.
- Check the computer earth.
Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 1 of the computer connector.
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-24
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

12
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
Full load or no load not programmed
None
Programme the full load position of the accelerator pedal using command G31* (do not adjust the load
lever directly).
Enter code G31* on the XR25 (engine speed zero).
- Press the accelerator pedal when the display flashes "PF".
The display then shows "bon", "Fin" then "6/7.dIE" when the procedure has been completed correctly. Bargraph 12 RH side must be extinguished.
- Switch off the ignition.
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-25
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
13

13
Bargraph 13 LH flashing (cc.1)
Air conditioning cut out information circuit

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 60 1/2
*13 :
None
cc.1
NOTES

a flashing BG 13LH side. To confirm its presence and the necessity of
start the engine. The fault is present if the bargraph flashes when
the engine is running.
Ensure insulation in relation to 12 volts of the connection between track 19 on the computer connector
and track 18 on the air conditioning computer CY connector.
Test the connections on the 2 connectors (+ intermediate connection engine / dashboard).
If the fault persists after these tests, replace the air conditioning control module.
If the "air conditioning cut out information "fault reappears, replace the diesel injection computer (consult
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-26
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

2
13
Bargraphs 2 RH and LH sides and bargraph 3 RH side
Solenoid valve control
Fiche n 60 2/2
NOTES
None
These bargraphs visualise the control of the various solenoid valves:

- Advance solenoid valve (bargraph 2 LH side is always illuminated).
- Fast idle solenoid valve .
- EGR solenoid valve.
Bargraph 4 LH side
Fiche n 60 2/2
Erase stored faults

XR25 aid :
BG 4LH is illuminated if command mode G0** to erase the memory
has been used since the last XR25 dialogue began.
NOTES
None
Bargraph 4 RH side
Fiche n 60 2/2
Preheating prevented
XR25 aid :
BG 4RH is illuminated if command mode G59*1* to prevent control
of the heater plugs has been used since the last XR25 dialogue began.
NOTES
AFTER REPAIR
None
Ensure the bargraphs operate correctly

DPCF011.0
13-27
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

5
Bargraphs 5 and 6 RH and LH sides
13
Fiche n 60 2/2
Relay control
NOTES
None
These bargraphs visualise the control of the various relays:

- Preheating relay N 1.
- Preheating relay N 2 (not used).
- Power assisted steering pump assembly relay (for AC + PAS).
- Altimetric corrector relay.
Bargraphs 9 RH and 9 LH side
Air conditioning
XR25 aid :
NOTES
10
Fiche n 60 2/2
BG 9LH illuminated if AC requested

BG 9RH illuminated if AC authorised
If BG 9LH is extinguished when AC is requested, ensure the continuity and

insulation of the connection between track 11 of the diesel computer connector
and track 20 of the AC computer CY connector.
Bargraph 10 LH side
Fiche n 60 2/2
Warning light control

XR25 aid :
BG 10LH is illuminated if the warning light on the instrument panel
is controlled. This bargraph is normally illuminated; it extinguishes

when the engine is running if there is no fault.
NOTES
AFTER REPAIR
None

DPCF011.0
13-28
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

10
Bargraph 10 RH side
11
11
Bargraph 11 LH side
AFTER REPAIR
Fiche n 60 2/2
Load information output

This bargraph allows visualisation of the emission of the load lever
position information (this information is not used for this application). It is permanently illuminated.
None
Bargraph 11 RH side
Fiche n 60 2/2
Engine speed information output

XR25 aid :
NOTES
BG 10RH illuminated during the preheating phase
None
XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 60 2/2
Preheating warning light control

XR25 aid :
NOTES
13
This bargraph allows visualisation of the emission of engine speed

information. It is permanently illuminated.
None

DPCF011.0
13-29
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

18
13
Bargraphs 18 and 19 RH and LH
Computer configuration for with and without air conditioning/

with and without power assisted steering pump assembly
19
NOTES
Vehicles fitted with power assisted steering but without air conditioning must be
configured to "without PAS".
These bargraphs show the computer configuration for the air conditioning and pump assembly power
assisted steering options.
Computers sold by the Parts Department are systematically configured for vehicles with air conditioning
and with the PAS pump assembly.
If the vehicle does not have air conditioning, use the command mode G50*4* to reverse the computer
configuration (the opposite command exists for configuring to "with AC": G50*3*).
If the vehicle is not fitted with a PAS pump assembly (vehicle without air conditioning), use command
mode G50*9* to reverse the computer configuration (the opposite command exists for configuring to
"with PAS": G50*8*).
NOTE : Vehicles fitted with power assisted steering but without air conditioning must be configured to
"without PAS".
AFTER REPAIR
test.
DPCF011.0
13-30
CLIO
XB0X

Fault finding - Checking conformity
F8Q 630
NOTES
Order of
operations
13
Engine cold, ignition on
Function to check
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D34
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
6. dlE
Use fiche n 60
fault test side
1
Fault test
Interpretation of
normally illuminated
bargraphs
1
Code present
7. dlE
3
Change to status test

mode
Interpretation of
bargraphs
G01*
Use fiche n 60
status test side
1
Code present
2
Advance corrector fed
4
Illuminated if command mode
G0** has been used since
dialogue was started
9
Illuminated if AC requested
10
Fault warning light fed
10
Illuminated in preheating
phase
DPCF011.0
13-31
CLIO
XB0X

F8Q 630
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
Engine cold, ignition on
Function to check
Action
Bargraph
11
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
11
13
Computer
configuration
Display and notes
Injection computer may give

load lever position to other
computers (not used)

engine speed information to
other computers
18
G50*3*
With AC
19
with AC
G50*8*
With PAS with pump
18
G50*4*
Without AC
without AC
19
G50*9*
With conventional PAS
Absolute pressure
sensor
# 16
Coolant temperature
sensor
# 02
X = Ambient temperature
5 C
Air temperature
sensor
# 03
5 C
EGR solenoid valve
X = local atmospheric pressure
# 24
X=0
DPCF011.0
13-32
CLIO
XB0X

F8Q 630
NOTES
13
Engine warm at idle speed after at least one operation of the engine cooling fan
assembly (air conditioning not selected).
Order of
operations
Function to check
Action
G01*
Bargraph
Display and notes
7. dlE
Use fiche n 60
status test side
20
2
No faults
Battery voltage
# 04
Ensure this bargraph is not

flashing, otherwise enter
G02* and turn the fiche over.
Repair the faulty component
then erase the memory (G0**)
and return to status testing
(G01*)
13 volts < X < 14.5 volts
DPCF011.0
13-33
CLIO
XB0X

F8Q 630
NOTES
Order of
operations
13
Function to check
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Code present
2
Advance corrector fed
2
Illuminated if fast idle solenoid
valve is fed
3
Illuminated for 40 seconds at

idle speed after starting phase
Illuminated if command mode

G0** has been used since the
last dialogue took place
5
Illuminated for post heating
Illuminated if altimetric
corrector is fed
Illuminated if vehicle has a PAS

pump assembly
(AC version only)
9
Illuminated if AC requested
Illuminated if computer
authorises operation of AC
compressor
DPCF011.0
13-34
CLIO
XB0X

F8Q 630
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
Function to check
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
Action
Bargraph
11
11
13
EGR solenoid valve
After starting
phase for
40 seconds
Display and notes

load lever position to other
computers (not used)

engine speed information to
other computers
3
EGR solenoid valve fed
X=0
# 24
3
After
40 seconds
X=0
# 24
Computer
configuration
18
G50*3*
With AC
with AC
19
G50*8*
With PAS with pump
18
G50*4*
Without AC
without AC
19
G50*9*
With conventional PAS
DPCF011.0
13-35
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

Fault finding - Aid
13
REPLACING THE COMPUTER
A) On these computers it is necessary to programme the load lever full load position (this value is required to
replace and adjust the load lever position potentiometer).
Programming procedure:
Enter code G31* on the XR25 (engine speed zero)
Press the accelerator pedal until the display flashes "PF".
The display then shows "bon", "Fin" then "6/7.dlE" when the procedure has been carried out correctly.
Bargraph 12 RH side must be extinguished.
B) Lucas digital DPC injection computers are sold pre-configured to "with air conditioning".
If the vehicle does not have air conditioning, use command G50*4* on the XR25 to programme "without
air conditioning".
Lucas digital DPC injection computers are sold pre-configured to "with power assisted steering" (with power assisted steering pump assembly).
If the vehicle does not have a power assisted steering pump assembly (vehicle without air conditioning),
use command G50*9* on the XR25 to programme "without power assisted steering".
Vehicles fitted with power assisted steering but without air conditioning must be configured to "without
power assisted steering".
REPLACING THE LOAD LEVER POSITION POTENTIOMETER
The load lever position potentiometer may only be replaced in After Sales if the full load position has been
programmed into the computer before the fault with the potentiometer.
Procedure for replacing and adjusting the load lever position potentiometer:
Fit the new potentiometer into position without locking the mounting bolts.
Connect the potentiometer and set up the XR25 (S8 code D34).
Start command G32* on the XR25, keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed (do not touch the load lever
directly) and turn the potentiometer until the display on the XR25 shows a value other than H.L (outside limits). Adjust the setting by turning the potentiometer to obtain 0.000 on the display (adjustment correct if
value < 0.040).
Tighten the mounting bolts with the potentiometer in this position then press * to complete the adjustment procedure.
DPCF011.0
13-36
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
NOTES

Fault finding - Customer complaints
13
Only consult these customer complaints after a complete check using the XR25.
No dialogue from the computer to the XR25.
Chart 1
Idle speed too high (approximately 900 50 rpm when air conditioning compressor
is not operating)
Chart 2
No fast idle when air conditioning compressor is operating
Chart 3
Starting fault (engine will not start or is difficult to start).
Chart 4
Warning light illuminates with no fault shown by the XR25.
Chart 5
Vehicle produces black smoke at altitude
Chart 6
No engine speed information at instrument panel
Chart 7
Air conditioning compressor does not engage
Chart 8
DPCF011.0
13-37
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 1
NOTES

Fault finding - Fault charts
13
NO DIALOGUE FROM THE COMPUTER TO THE XR25.
another vehicle. If the XR25 is not the cause of the fault and dialogue is not established with another
computer on the same vehicle, a faulty computer may be causing interference on the K and L fault
finding lines. Disconnect connections successively to determine which computer is at fault.
Check the ISO selector is on position S8, that you are using the latest XR25 cassette and the correct access
code (D34).
Check the battery voltage and carry out any necessary operations to ensure the correct voltage (U battery
> 10.5 volts).
Check the two 15 Amp fuses on the engine connection unit have not blown.
Check the connection and condition of the connections on the computer connector and the intermediate
connections R107 dashboard / front of engine and R67 front / engine.
Check the computer is correctly fed:
- Earth on track 2 of the computer connector (check the condition and tightness of the engine earth
strap and the engine earth MH near to the gearbox housing).
- + after ignition feed on track 1 of the computer connector.
Check the diagnostic socket is correctly fed:

- Earth on track 5.
- + before ignition feed on track 16.
Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the lines in the connection diagnostic socket/
computer:
If fault finding is not established after these operations, replace the computer (consult the "Aid" section
AFTER REPAIR
Carry out a road test then check using the XR25.

Deal with any illuminated fault bargraphs.
DPCF011.0
13-38
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 2
NOTES

13
IDLE SPEED TOO HIGH WHEN AIR CONDITIONING NOT OPERATING

(approximately 950 rpm)
Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the XR25.
This fault may be connected to fast idle operation.

Check the sealing of the pneumatic circuit for the fast idle control (LDA and solenoid valve).
Look for a short circuit to + 12 volts of the connection between track 11 on the injection computer and
track 20 on the CY connector for the air conditioning computer ("AC Inj. / fast idle" information).
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-39
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 3
NOTES

13
NO FAST IDLE WHEN AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR IS

OPERATING
Look for an open circuit or a short circuit to earth on the connection between track 11 on the injection
computer and track 20 on the CY connector for the air conditioning computer ("AC Inj. / fast idle"
information).
This fault causes the absence of illumination of bargraph 9 LH side "air conditioning requested".
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-40
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 4
NOTES

13
Starting fault without illumination of the warning light

(engine will not start or is difficult to start)
If no fault is shown by the XR25, ensure that the fault is not caused by a faulty immobiliser system.
Check the operation of the preheating system:

Start command mode G10*1* and check for a voltage at the plugs.
If the plugs are not fed, check the connection of the 3 track connector on the relay unit and the condition
of the 70 Amp fuse on the engine connection unit.
If the fault persists, check the fuel supply circuits (for the pump and the injectors).
If necessary, carry out a complete check of the engine (starter drive speed, pump timing, condition of
injectors, rocker arm clearances, compression, .....).
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-41
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 5
NOTES

13
WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES WITH NO FAULT SHOWN BY THE

XR25.
If no fault is shown by the XR25, look for a short circuit to earth of the heater plug feed wiring or a plug
short circuit fault.
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-42
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 6
NOTES

13
VEHICLE PRODUCES BLACK SMOKE AT ALTITUDE
Measure the resistance of the altimetric corrector at the 10 track pump connector (between tracks 1 and
6). Replace the altimetric corrector if the resistance is not approximately 15 ohms.
Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 on the pump connector, wiring side, and track 5
on the altimetric connector control relay mounting in the engine connection unit.
Ensure the presence of earth on track 6 of the pump connector, wiring side.
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-43
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630
Chart 7
NOTES

13
NO ENGINE SPEED INFORMATION ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 21 on the diesel injection computer
connector and track 7 on the black instrument panel connector (engine speed information).
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-44
CLIO
XB0X
F8Q 630

Chart 8
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTES
13
Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 19 of the diesel injection computer
connector and track 18 of the air conditioning CY computer connector (AC prevention connection).
AFTER REPAIR

DPCF011.0
13-45
E7J 780 / K7M 744 ENGINES
FAULT FINDING
MULTIPOINT INJECTION
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
06
..............................................................
09
...................................................................
30
...........................................................
36
56
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Checking conformity
63
.........................................................................
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
Fault finding- Introduction
ENGINES
17
SETTING UP DIALOGUE BETWEEN THE XR25 AND THE COMPUTER
Connect the test kit to the diagnostic socket.
Put the selector on S8
Enter D13
9.NJ
COMPUTER IDENTIFICATION
The computer is not identified by reading a fault code but by reading the Part Number directly from the
computer. After having set up a dialogue with the computer:
ENTER
G70*
7700
XXX
XXX
The Part Number will then appear on the central display in three sequences.
Each sequence is displayed for approximately two seconds. The display is repeated twice .
ERASING THE MEMORY (ignition on)
After an operation on the injection system the computers memory can be erased by using the code G0** .
JF5121.0
17-1
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
If the information obtained by the XR25 requires electrical continuities to be checked, connect bornier Sus.
1228.
97434S
Bornier Sus. 1228 is a 55 track base with a printed circuit on which are 55 copper coated surfaces, numbered
from 1 to 55.
Using the wiring diagrams, the tracks connecting the components to be tested can be easily identified.
IMPORTANT :
All tests using bornier Sus. 1228 must be carried out with the battery disconnected.
The bornier is only designed to operate with an ohmmeter. Under no circumstances should 12 Volts be
applied to the test points.
JF5121.0
17-2
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
DESCRIPTION OF THE FAULT-FINDING PHASES
The process described below is to be carried out in all cases of faults.

XR25 FAULT-CHECKING
This phase is the essential starting point for any intervention on the vehicle.
There are several constraints to the treatment of the bargraphs :
- A priority in the order of treatment when several bargraphs are illuminated.
- The interpretation of a bargraph depending on whether it is constantly illuminated or flashing .
Faults must be checked using the XR25 as described below:
- Switch on the ignition and deal with any faults.
- Run the engine (or run at starter speed for 10 seconds) and deal with any faults.
- Carry out a road test and deal with any faults.
1 - Order of priority
A series of illuminated bargraphs corresponding to the sensors with the same 12 V or having the same
earth, indicates a fault in this source. These priorities are dealt with in the "NOTES" section of the
fault-finding of the bargraph concerned.
2 - Input / output fault bargraphs

a) Illuminated :
The fault is present : treat the fault following the method described in the "INTERPRETATION OF XR25
BARGRAPHS" section.
b) Flashing :
Note the bargraphs displayed on the XR25.
Erase the memory of the computer and attempt to re-illuminate the bargraph: ignition on, idle speed
(or at starter speed) or by means of a road test (the "NOTES" section in the fault finding for the
bargraph concerned may help to determine the conditions under which the bargraph will illuminate).
If the bargraph has re-illuminated (fixed or flashing) :
The fault is present once again. In this case, treat the fault bargraph.
If the bargraph has not re-illuminated, check :
-
the electrical lines which correspond to the flashing fault,

the connectors of these lines (for rust, bent pins...).
the resistance of the component found to be faulty.
the cleanliness of the wires (insulation melted or cut, friction..).
NOTE : If the customer complaint does not correspond to the fault bargraph which is flashing
(example : Air temperature sensor fault bargraph flashing, but no customer complaint) ignore
this memorised fault and erase it.
JF5121.0
17-3
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
3 - No bargraphs illuminated
If no bargraphs are illuminated on the XR25, carry out a status and parameter check. This may help in
detecting a problem.
XR25 CHECKING STATUSES AND PARAMETERS
The status and parameter check is aimed at checking the statuses and parameters which do not illuminate
any fault bargraphs if they are outside of permitted tolerance values . This phase allows :
- Faults to be found without the illumination of fault bargraphs which may correspond to a customer
complaint (example : absence of no load information causing an unstable idle speed).
- The correct operation of the injection to be checked and the risk of faults appearing shortly after the
repair to be eliminated.
This section contains fault-finding for statuses and parameters, under their test conditions
(example : fault finding for # 01 ignition on and fault finding for # 01 engine running).
If a status does not operate normally or a parameter is outside of permitted tolerance values, consult the
fault-finding page indicated in the "Fault-finding" column.
XR25 CHECK CORRECT
If the XR25 check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, the problem must be dealt with through
customer complaints.
Treatment of customer complaints
This section has fault charts, which suggest a series of possible causes of the problem.
These lines of enquiry must only be used in the following cases :
- No fault bargraph appears on the XR25.
- No faults are detected during the checking of statuses and parameters.
- The vehicle is not operating correctly
POST-REPAIR CHECK
This operation is a simple check of the repair (by a command, or by an XR25 command mode ...).
This makes it possible to check that the system upon which the intervention has been carried out is correct
electrically.
It is an introduction to the road test.
JF5121.0
17-4
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
ROAD TEST
A road test is essential in order to guarantee the correct operation of the vehicle and to test the quality of the
repair. Its role is to make sure that no faults occur (or will occur) when driving.
In order to be significant, the road test is subject to special driving conditions.
Driving conditions for programming the adaptive variables:
During the road test, the engine speed must be stabilised for a few moments between:
260
then 390
then 510
then 620
then 740
<
<
<
<
<
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
<
<
<
<
<
390 mbars
510 mbars
620 mbars
740 mbars
870 mbars
E7J 780 engine
250
then 390
then 500
then 620
then 730
<
<
<
<
<
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
<
<
<
<
<
390 mbars
500 mbars
620 mbars
730 mbars
930 mbars
K7M 744 engine
Do not exceed an engine speed of 4800 rpm for the E7J 780 engine and 4000 rpm for the K7M 744 engine.
The engine must be warm (coolant temperature > 75 C).
For this test, start from a fairly low engine speed, in 3rd or 4th gear, and apply progressive acceleration to
stabilise at the pressure required for 10 seconds in each zone.
The test must then be continued by driving normally, in a varied manner for 3 to 6 miles (5 to 10 km).
JF5121.0
17-5
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
PRESENTATION OF XR25 FICHE N 27 SIDE 1/2
FI21727-1
JF5121.0
17-6
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
FI21727-2
JF5121.0
17-7
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
REPRESENTATION OF THE BARGRAPHS
Illuminates when a dialogue has been established with the product computer. If it remains
extinguished:
- the code does not exist,
- there is a fault in the tool, the computer or the line
REPRESENTATION OF THE FAULTS (always on a coloured background)

If illuminated, indicates a fault on the tested product, the associated text defines the fault.
If flashing, there is a fault memorised for the product tested, the associated text defines the fault.
If extinguished, indicates that the fault has not been found on the tested product.
REPRESENTATION OF THE STATUSES (always on a white background)

Engine off, ignition on, no operator action
The status bargraphs on the fiche are represented as the status which they should have when the engine is
off, the ignition is on and there is no operator action
- If on the fiche the bargraph is represented as
the test kit should give as

information

information
the test kit should give as information
either
or
Engine running
Extinguishes when the function or condition given on the fiche is no longer performed.
Illuminates when the function or condition given on the fiche is performed
Fiche n 27 is a generic fiche used for several engines.

The different engines do not use all the bargraphs. To find out the bargraphs dealt with by the injection
computer, after having set up a dialogue with the computer, press the V and 9 buttons simultaneously.
The bargraphs dealt with will:
-
illuminate permanently for non memorisable fault bargraphs or status bargraphs,

flash for memorisable fault bargraphs.
To return to fault finding mode, press button D.
JF5121.0
17-8
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Bargraph 1 RH side extinguished
XR25 CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
No connection, CO, CC-, CC+
This bargraph must be illuminated for fault finding
Test the XR25 on another vehicle.

Check:
- the injection, engine and passenger compartment fuses,
- the connection between the XR25 and the diagnostic socket,
- the position of the ISO selector (S8),
- the conformity of the cassette.
Repair if necessary.
Check the presence of + 12 V on track 16 and earth on track 5 of the diagnostic socket.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line:
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
2
3
11
38
24
32
28
29
Earth
Earth
7 Diagnostic socket
15 Diagnostic socket
Fuse F6
15 A
Fuse F3
5A
3 Coil 1-4
3 Coil 2-3
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory using G0**.

Use the XR25 to check for faults (see Introduction).
Remember to carry out a status and parameter check.
JF5121.0
17-9
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Bargraph 2 LH side illuminated
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
COMPUTER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
17
Computer faulty
None
The computer is incorrect or faulty.

AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-10
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Bargraph 2 RH side illuminated
IMMOBILISER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*22 = 1 dEF CO, CC- or CC+ line 37 on the computer

*22 = 2 dEF Refer to the immobiliser fault finding
Ignore this bargraph if the vehicle is not fitted with an immobiliser.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation, continuity and that there is no
interference resistance on the wiring on track 37 of the computer.
If the fault persists, refer to the immobiliser fault finding.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-11
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+line 20 or 46 on the computer
If BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 46 of the computer.
Computer
Computer
20
46
2
1

Check the resistance of the sensor. Replace it if necessary.
The fault persists! Replace the injection computer.
IMPORTANT: The computer has probably been damaged by an electric shock. The cause of the damage
must be found before fitting a new computer.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-12
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Bargraph 3 RH side illuminated or flashing
OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+line 17 on the computer
If BG 3RH is flashing, increase the engine speed to 2500 rpm for 5 minutes
If BG3RH becomes permanently illuminated, deal with the fault.
Check the connection and the condition of the connector on the oxygen sensor.
Check, ignition on during the timed phase, for :
- earth on track B of the oxygen sensor,
- + 12 V after the fuel pump relay on track A of the oxygen sensor.
Computer
17
C
Oxygen sensor
The fault persists. Replace the oxygen sensor.

AFTER REPAIR
Run the engine for 5 minutes, then erase the computer memory using G0**. Use
the XR25 to check for faults (see Introduction).
JF5121.0
17-13
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 6LH or BG 5LH or 4 RH is also illuminated, check line 44 of the computer.
Computer
44
B1 Coolant temperature sensor
Computer
15
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-14
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17

Fiche n 27 side 1/2
VEHICLE SPEED CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
CO, CC- or CC+ line 12 on the computer
If BG 4LH or BG 5LH or BG 6LH is also illuminated, check line 44 on the computer.

Carry out a road test and check #18 if BG 4 RH is flashing. Deal with this fault if BG
4 RH illuminates permanently during the road test or #18 = 0.
Check on the vehicle speed sensor for:

- earth on track B2,
- + 12 after ignition feed on track A.
Check the sensor is correctly positioned.
interference resistance on the line:
Computer
12
B1
Vehicle speed sensor
The fault persists! Replace the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-15
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CO, CC- or CC+ line 45, 44 or 16 on the computer
If BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 45 on the computer.

If BG 6LH or BG 4LH or BG 4 RH is also illuminated, check line 44 on the computer.
Check that the pressure sensor is connected correctly both electrically and pneumatically.
Check the conformity of the pressure sensor pipe (it must not be holed or blocked...).
Computer
45
C Pressure sensor
Computer
44
A Pressure sensor
Computer
16
B Pressure sensor
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-16
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17

5
FLYWHEEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
*25 = In
=>
=>
=>
CO or CC- line 33 or 34
CC- line 33 or 34 on the computer
sensor incorrectly connected
If BG 5RH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.

Try to start the vehicle.
If BG 5RH becomes permanently illuminated or flashes, deal with this fault.
Check the condition of the flywheel, especially if it has been removed.

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation,
continuity and that there is no interference resistance on the line:
Computer
33
B Target sensor
Computer
34
A Target sensor
IMPORTANT: The computer has probably been damaged by an electric shock.
The cause of the damage must be found before fitting a new
computer.
*25 = In
Check the target sensor has been correctly connected (the sensor connector must
not be inverted).
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-17
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Bargraph 6 LH side illuminated or flashing
PINKING SENSOR CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 8 or 44 on the computer
If BG 6LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**. Run the engine at
3000 rpm for 3 min. If BG 6LH becomes permanently illuminated or flashes, deal
with this fault. If BG 4LH or BG 4 RH or BG 5LH is also illuminated, check line 44 on
the computer.
Computer
8
2 Pinking sensor
Computer
44
1 Pinking sensor
Computer
31
Pinking sensor screening
The fault persists! Replace the pinking sensor in question.
AFTER REPAIR

JF 5121.0
17-18
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
THROTTLE POTENTIOMETER CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 5LH is also illuminated, check line 45 on the computer.

If BG 3LH is also illuminated, check line 46 on the computer.
Computer
Computer
Computer
19
45
46
2
1
3
Check the resistance of the throttle potentiometer.
The fault persists! Replace the throttle potentiometer.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-19
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17

8
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*08 = ignore this information

CO line 52 on the computer
If BG 8LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.

Try to start the engine.
If BG 8LH is now permanently illuminated or flashing, deal with this fault.
If BG 13RH is illuminated, deal with BG 8 LH first.
Enter the fuel pump relay command mode : G10*.

Does the fuel pump relay click?
The fuel pump
relay does not
click
Check the presence of 12 volts on track L1 on the fuel pump relay mounting.
If necessary, repair the line to the fuse.
Check the insulation, continuity and that there is no interference resistance on the line:
Computer
48
Fuel pump relay
If the fuel pump relay still does not click, replace the fuel pump relay.

computer.
The fuel pump

relay clicks
Check the presence of 12 volts on track 3 on the fuel pump relay mounting.
If necessary, repair the line to the 30 A fuse.
Check the insulation and continuity of the line:

Computer
52
5
Fuel pump relay
NOTE : If there is a short circuit on this line, check all the users of this feed.
If the fault persists, replace the fuel pump relay.

computer.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-20
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
11
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*11 = XX.CO
*11 = XX.CC
=> CO or CC- line 30 or 4 on the computer

=> CC+ line 30 or 4 on the computer
XX = 14 => Cylinder 1 or 4 line 30 on the computer

If BG 11LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**. Try to start the
engine. If BG 11LH is now permanently illuminated or flashing, deal with this fault.
When the ignition is switched on and during the timed phase, check for 12 V on track 1 of the faulty
injector.
If necessary, repair the line from track 1 injector to track 5 fuel pump relay.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line :
Computer
Computer
30
4
2
2
Injectors 1 and 4
Injectors 2 and 3
The fault persists! Replace the faulty injector.
NOTE : Check the insulation and continuity of the lines for the other injectors and also check the
resistance of these injectors.
AFTER REPAIR
Turn the engine then erase the computer memory using G0**.
JF5121.0
17-21
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
11
AT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
INJECTION CIRCUIT
None
None
This vehicle currently has no AT.

Check that the vehicle is correctly configured for a manual gearbox (status bargraph 19 RH side
illuminated).
If this is not correct, use command mode G50*1* to configure the vehicle with a manual gearbox.
Erase the computer memory using G0** and ignore this bargraph.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-22
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
13
MEMORY CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
Loss of computer feed
None
This bargraph only illuminates when the computer feed has been cut (disconnection of the battery, the
computer, ...).
Check the computer feed hygiene:
Computer
24
Fuse
15 A
F6
Computer
32
Fuse
5A
F3
Turn the engine.
Switch the ignition off.
Switch the ignition on.
Enter dialogue with the computer.
NOTE :
memorised faults are erased. It would therefore be useful to carry out a road test to check there
are no faults on the injection system.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-23
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
13
ADAC CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*33 = CC.0
*33 = CC.1
CO, CC- line 50 on the computer

CC+ line 50 on the computer
If another bargraph is illuminated, refer to the fault finding for that bargraph.
If your vehicle does not have ADAC, ignore this bargraph.
interference resistance on track 50 on the computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-24
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
14
IDLE SPEED REGULATION CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 40 or 35 or 9 or 36 on the computer
If BG 14LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**. Try to start the
engine (if the engine will not start, keep trying with the starter motor). If BG 14LH
becomes permanently illuminated or flashes, deal with this fault.
Following G59*1* and trying to start the engine, BG 14 LH may illuminate. In this
case, ignore it and erase it.
Computer
40
B idle speed regulation stepping motor
Computer
35
A idle speed regulation stepping motor
Computer
9
D idle speed regulation stepping motor
Computer
36
C idle speed regulation stepping motor
NOTE : This operation can be carried out without having to remove the throttle body.
Check the resistance of the idle speed regulation stepping motor.
Check the idle speed regulation valve if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-25
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
14
CANISTER BLEED CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*34 = CO.0
*34 = CC.1
CO, CC- line 42 on the computer

If BG 14RH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**. Start the engine. If
BG 14RH becomes permanently illuminated when the engine is running, deal with
this fault.
Check the resistance of the canister bleed valve.

Replace the valve if necessary.
Check, ignition on and during the timed phase, for 12 V on track A of the canister bleed.
Computer
42
Canister bleed valve
AFTER REPAIR
Turn the engine then erase the computer memory using G0**. Use the XR25 to
check for faults (see Introduction).
JF5121.0
17-26
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
15
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
AC CONNECTION CIRCUIT
*15 = 1dEF : injection / AC connection fault (track 51)

*15 = 2dEF : AC connection fault (track 5)
Check that the vehicle has air conditioning and if it is not fitted with air
conditioning, deal with the other bargraphs first.
Engine running, select the air conditioning function.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line for track
5 and track 51 on the computer.
If the fault persists, refer to the air conditioning fault finding.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-27
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17

15
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
EGR CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
None
None
NOTES
Ignore the illumination of this bargraph as the vehicle is not fitted with EGR.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-28
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
16
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
MPA CONNECTION CIRCUIT

=> CO line 28 or 29 on the computer
=> CC+ or CC- line 28 or 29 on the computer
*16 = XX.CO
*16 = XX.CC

NOTE : If there is an open circuit, it is possible for *16 = XX.CC instead of *16 =
XX.CO.
Check the + after ignition feed to the coil concerned on track 2.

Check the resistance of the faulty coil.
Replace the coil if necessary.
Check the hygiene of the anti-interference condenser on track 1 of the coil.
Computer
Computer
29
28
3
3
Coil 2-3
Coil 1-4
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-29
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Engine stopped, ignition on.
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Fault finding - Status and parameter checks
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue
with XR25
D13
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
1
Fault test
9.NJ
Use fiche 27
1
Deal with
fault
bargraph
Code present
Change to
status test
10.NJ
None
G01*
Status test
Battery
voltage
11.8 < X < 13.2 V
# 04
DIAG 1
19
Computer configured to
manual gearbox
4
Computer
configuration
19
See Fiche
"Reminder C"
to configure
vehicle
automatic transmission
Immobiliser
Ignition on
This status bargraph must

be extinguished when
the ignition is on to
indicate that the
immobiliser is not active.
DIAG 12
JF5121.0
17-30
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
2
16 < X < 50 (E7J 780)
19 < X < 51 (K7M 744)
No load
# 17
Throttle
position
potentiometer
2
Accelerator
pedal
slightly
depressed
DIAG 2
2
185 < X < 243 (E7J 780)
190 < X < 243 (K7M 744)
Full load
# 17
Pressure sensor
Coolant
temperature
sensor
Air
temperature
sensor
# 01
X = Atmospheric
pressure
DIAG 9
# 02
X = Engine temperature
5 C
DIAG 3
# 03
X = Temperature under
bonnet 5 C
DIAG 4
DIAG 17
10
Fan assembly
G17*
Fan must operate
11
Fault warning
light
Switch
ignition on
Fault warning light must

illuminate then
extinguish
12
AC
AC selected
AC compressor should be
heard
G12*
DIAG 19
DIAG 16
JF5121.0
17-31
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Carry out the actions below if the engine does not start.
NOTES
Otherwise, refer to the following pages.
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
3
1
Flywheel signal
sensor
Illuminated if TDC
information is detected
Starter
DIAG 5
Fuel pump
2
G10*
Ignition
Connect
Optima
Station
Fuel pressure
Connect
pressure
gauge to
fuel inlet
and activate
starter
motor
Injector
command
Fuel pump should be

heard to operate
Starting test.
Complete guide on
Optima Station
DIAG 6
Use Optima
5800 Station
Pressure gauge must

show
2.5 bars
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
Starter
Fuel must come out of

the injector
DIAG 11
Engine
compression
Connect
Optima
Station
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Flywheel
Connect
Optima
Station
Oscilloscope.
Use Optima
5800 Station
Use Optima
5800 Station
Complete guide on
Optima Station
JF5121.0
17-32
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Carry out the actions below (engine warm, at idle speed, no consumers)
if the engine starts.
Otherwise refer to the previous pages.
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Charging
circuit
# 04
Throttle
potentiometer
No load
Bargraph
6
Idle speed
regulation
Display and notes
13 < X < 14.5 V
# 06
3
17
Illuminated (does not

flash!)
DIAG 1
DIAG 2
700 < X < 800 rpm

2 % < X < 15 % (E7J 780)
6 % < X < 15 % (K7M 744)
# 12
Fault finding
DIAG 7
# 21
- 2.4 % < X < 6.2 %
Anti-pinking
circuit
# 13 (at
3500 rpm,
no load)
X variable and not zero
300 X 400 mb
(E7J 780)
250 X 350 mb
(K7M 744)
# 01
5
Pressure circuit
# 35
6
Richness
regulation
DIAG 9
X = atmospheric pressure
# 16
DIAG 8
# 05
0 < X < 255

X varies around 128
DIAG 10
0.050 X 0.900 V
DIAG 15
See also
JF5121.0
17-33
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Fuel pressure
Action
Bargraph
Connect a
pressure
gauge to the
gallery and
activate the
starter
motor
Display and notes
Pressure gauge must

show
2.5 bars
10
AC selected
Fault finding
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
Illuminated when AC
requests compressor
operation
10
Illuminated when
injection authorises
operation of compressor
8
AC
DIAG 16
800 < X < 900 rpm

X0
# 06
# 44
13
9
Power assisted
steering
pressostat
Illuminated when wheels

turned to full lock
Turn wheels
to full lock
DIAG 18
JF5121.0
17-34
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Check during road test.
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Vehicle speed
information
Action
Bargraph
# 18
Display and notes
Fault finding
X = speed read on
speedometer in km/h
DIAG 13
Programming
2
Adaptive
richness
# 30
64 X 192 (E7J 780)

60 X 195 (K7M 744)
# 31
64 X 192 (E7J 780)

60 X 195 (K7M 744)
CO < 0.3 %
CO2 > 13.5 %
O2 < 0.8 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
2500 rpm
after driving
3
Emission of
pollutants
DIAG 14
At idle
speed, wait
for
stabilisation
DIAG 15
see also
DIAG 10
CO < 0.5 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
JF5121.0
17-35
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
Fault finding - Status and parameter interpretation
17
Fiche n 27
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DIAG 1
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Battery voltage, ignition on, Minimum < # 04 < Maximum

Battery voltage, idle speed, Minimum < # 04 < Maximum
No fault bargraphs should be illuminated.

No consumers
Ignition on
If # 04 < Minimum, the battery is discharged:

Check the charging circuit to determine the cause of this fault.
If # 04 > Maximum, the battery may be overcharged:
Check the charging voltage is correct with and without consumers.
At idle speed
If # 04 < Minimum, the charging voltage is too low:

If # 04 > Maximum, the charging voltage is too high:
The alternator regulator is faulty. Repair this fault and check the electrolyte level in the battery.
NOTE:
The battery and the charging circuit may be checked using the OPTIMA 5800 station (measurement does
not require the battery to be disconnected, which retains the memories of the computers).
AFTER REPAIR
Start the status and parameter check again from the beginning.
JF5121.0
17-36
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES

THROTTLE POTENTIOMETER
XR25 aid:
DIAG 2
NOTES
17
Fiche n 27
# 17 outside tolerances
# 17 does not vary when throttle moves
Status BG 2LH or 2RH, incorrect illumination

Ignition on or engine running.
Status bargraph 2RH

incorrect illumination
None
NOTES
Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the line:
Computer
Computer
Computer
19
45
46
2
1
3
If the fault is still present, replace the throttle potentiometer.
# 17 is fixed
NOTES
None
Check the resistance of the throttle potentiometer when the throttle butterfly is moved.
If the resistance varies, check the electrical lines of the sensor.
If the resistance does not vary, check that the sensor is connected mechanically to the throttle.
If necessary, replace the sensor.
NOTES
None
Check the upper and lower stops of the throttle butterfly.

Check the accelerator control (points of resistance and friction).
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-37
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
DIAG 3
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 02 = Engine temperature 5 C
If the value read is incoherent, check the sensor is correctly following the standard table of values for
"resistance as a function of temperature".
Replace the sensor if the values are incorrect (NOTE : If a sensor is incorrect, this is often due to an electric
shock).
Check the insulation, continuity and that there is no interference resistance on the electrical line :
Computer
15
Computer
44
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-38
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
AIR TEMPERATURE
DIAG 4
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 03 = Temperature under the bonnet 5 C
shock).
Computer
20
2
Computer
46
1
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-39
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
TDC DETECTION
DIAG 5
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Status BG 3 LH incorrect illumination

When the starter motor is activated.
Check the sensor is correctly mounted.

Check the condition of the target (if it has been removed).
Computer
33
B
Flywheel signal sensor
Computer
34
A
Repair. If necessary, replace the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-40
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
FUEL PUMP
DIAG 6
The command mode should cause the fuel pump to operate
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Check the impact sensor is correctly clipped in.

Check the fuel pump fuse.
Check the insulation and continuity of the wiring:
Fuel pump fuse
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump relay
Impact sensor
Impact sensor
C1 Fuel pump
Check the hygiene and presence of earth on track C2 of the fuel pump.
If + 12 V is not reaching the fuel pump, replace the fuel pump relay.
If + 12 V is reaching the fuel pump, replace the fuel pump.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-41
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17

IDLE SPEED REGULATION
XR25 aid:
Fiche n 27
Engine speed , Minimum < # 06 < Maximum
DIAG 7
NOTES
Computer
9
D
Idle speed regulation motor
Computer
35
A
Computer
40
B
Computer
36
C
Repair if necessary and continue fault finding using the value for # 06.
# 06 < Minimum
NOTES
The idle speed is too low
Idle speed regulation is not maintaining the idle speed.

- Clean the air supply circuit (throttle body, idle regulation valve), since it is probably contaminated.
- Check the engine oil level (too high ---> splashing).
- Check and ensure correct fuel pressure.
- Using the OPTIMA 5800 station, check the engine compression.
- Check the valve clearances and the timing.
If all these points are correct, replace the idle regulation motor.
# 06 > Maximum
NOTES
The idle speed is too high
An air leak may be affecting the idle speed regulation programming.

- Check the connections on the manifold.
- Check the hygiene of the pipes on the manifold.
- Check the pneumatically controlled solenoid valves.
- Check the manifold gaskets.
- Check the throttle body gaskets.
- Check the sealing of the brake servo.
- Check the restrictions are present in the oil vapour rebreathing circuit.
- Check the fuel pressure.
If all these points are correct, replace the idle speed regulation motor.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-42
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
ANTI-PINKING CIRCUIT
DIAG 8
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 13 is not zero and variable for fast idle or under load
The pinking sensor should give a signal which is variable and not zero, to prove that it is recording the
mechanical vibrations of the engine.
If the signal is zero:
- Check the sensor is correctly screwed in.
- Check the insulation and continuity of the wiring:
Computer
8
2
Pinking sensor
Computer
44
1
Pinking sensor
Computer
2
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-43
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
PRESSURE CIRCUIT
DIAG 9
XR25 aid:
NOTES
# 01 not coherent
ignition on
# 01 < Minimum at idle
speed
# 16 not coherent
Ignition on # 01 not coherent

At idle speed # 01 < Minimum or # 01 > Maximum
# 16 not coherent
Check the insulation, continuity and that there is no interference resistance

on the line:
Computer
45
C
Pressure sensor
Computer
44
A
Pressure sensor
Computer
16
B
Pressure sensor
If all these points are correct, replace the sensor.
A vacuum pump with a pressure gauge may be used to check coherence with
# 01 and to show a faulty sensor.
# 01 > Maximum at idle

speed
The manifold pressure is often a sign of incorrect engine operation. Check

- the sealing of the pipe between the manifold and the sensor,
- the valve clearances,
- the canister bleed valve which should be closed at idle speed,
- cylinder compression using the OPTIMA 5800 station.

AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-44
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
RICHNESS REGULATION
DIAG 10
Richness regulation faulty
XR25 aid:

Ignition correct (a check may be made using the OPTIMA 5800 station).
No other status bargraph should show a fault.
NOTES
Check the connection and condition of the oxygen sensor connector.

Ignition on, during the timed phase, check for:
- earth on track B of the oxygen sensor.
Computer
17
Oxygen sensor
Check the resistance of the injectors and that there is no interference resistance on the lines:
Computer
Computer
4
30
2
2
Injectors 2 and 3
Injectors 1 and 4
Check the sealing of the canister bleed valve (a leak can disrupt the richness considerably).
Check the sealing of the exhaust pipe upstream from the oxygen sensor.
Check the sealing of the inlet manifold.
If the vehicle has only been driven in town, the sensor is contaminated (try driving under load).
Check the fuel pressure.
If the idle speed is unstable, check the valve clearances.
Check the injectors (flow and shape of the jet).
If necessary, replace the oxygen sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-45
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
INJECTOR
DIAG 11
NOTES
XR25 aid:
CO or CC - line 30 of the computer for injectors 1 and 4

Check the resistance of the faulty injector. Replace it if necessary.

injectors 1 and 4
Computer 30
injectors 2 and 3
Computer
4
2 injectors
2 injectors
During command mode operation, check for + 12 Volts on track 1 of the faulty injector.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-46
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
IMMOBILISER
DIAG 12
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Status BG 3RH illuminated, ignition on
Check the insulation and continuity of the wiring for track 37 on the injection computer.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-47
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
VEHICLE SPEED
DIAG 13
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 18 = Speed read on speedometer in km/h

Check on a road test.
If the value read is incoherent:

- Check that the sensor is correctly mounted and supplied:
+12 V on A1
Earth on B2
- Check the insulation, continuity and that there is no interference resistance on the line:
Computer
12
B1 vehicle speed sensor
NOTE : Check the different functions that use this information.
Repair.
The fault persists! Replace the speed sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-48
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
ADAPTIVE RICHNESS
DIAG 14
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Minimum < # 30 < Maximum


Carry out the programming operations.
Ensure the canister bleed valve is sealed.

Erase the computer memory.
Engine warm , running at idle speed, check the values for # 30 and # 31.
- If # 30 or # 31 is at a MAXIMUM, there is not enough fuel .
- If # 30 or # 31 is at a MINIMUM, there is too much fuel.
Ensure the hygiene, cleanliness and correct operation of :
- filter.
- fuel pump.
- fuel circuit.
- fuel tank.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-49
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Fiche n 27
EMISSION OF POLLUTANTS
DIAG 15
NOTES
0.97 1.03
at 2500 rpm.
XR25 aid:
None
NOTES
The oxygen sensor loops correctly at 2500 rpm.
If CO > 0.3 % at 2500 rpm.

The catalytic converter is faulty.
NOTE : it is vital to determine the cause of the catalytic converter damage to
avoid a new converter also being damaged.
If < 0.97 or > 1.03 at idle speed

Check the sensor earth and heating.
Check there is no air leak at the manifold.
0.97 1.03
at 2500 rpm.
NOTES
The oxygen sensor does not loop correctly at 2500 rpm.
There is a fault with the injection or the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-50
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 15
CONT
NOTES
> 1.03
at 2500 rpm.
NOTES
None

Check there is no leak at the exhaust.
Check that an injector has not seized.
Check the fuel pressure is not too low.

Check there is not an injection fault.
Check there is not an ignition fault.
Check the sensor is not faulty.
< 0.97
at 2500 rpm
NOTES
The oxygen sensor does not loop correctly at 2500 rpm. CO >
0.3 % at 2500 rpm.
Check the pressure sensor.

Check the sensor.
Check that an injector is not faulty.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-51
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
AIR CONDITIONING
DIAG 16
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Status BG 10LH or 10 RH, incorrect illumination
Check the insulation and continuity of the lines for track 5 and track 51 on the injection computer.
Refer to the fault finding for the air conditioning.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-52
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
ANTIPERCOLATION RELAY
DIAG 17
NOTES
The antipercolation relay

does not click when its
command mode is used
XR25 aid:
The fan assembly must operate when command mode G17* is used.
Ignition on, check for 12 V on track 1 of the fan assembly relay.
There is not 12 V
on track 1
There is 12 V
on track 1
Check the line for track 1 of the relay to the fuse.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and

check the insulation and continuity of the line:
Bornier 14
2
Relay
Repair.
The fault persists, replace the relay.
The fault persists!
Replace the injection computer.

does click when its
Fan assembly relay in place, check, during operation of the command mode,
for 12 V on track 5 of the fan assembly relay.
There is not 12 V
on track 5
Check the insulation and continuity of line 3 on the

relay to the fuse.
The fault persists, replace the fan assembly relay.
There is 12 V
on track 5

Relay
5
2 Fan assembly
Fan assembly
1
Earth
Repair.
If the fan assembly still does not operate, replace the
fan assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-53
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
POWER ASSISTED STEERING PRESSOSTAT
DIAG 18
NOTES
XR25 aid:
None
Check the correct operation of the power assisted steering (oil level, ...).
Check the insulation and continuity of the line for track 13 on the injection computer.
Check the power assisted steering pressostat is correctly connected.
If all these points are correct, replace the power assisted steering pressostat.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-54
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
FAULT WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT
DIAG 19
NOTES
XR25 aid:
None
Check the condition of the warning light and its feed.

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line for track
43 on the computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-55
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
NOTES
INJECTION
17
Only refer to this customer complaint after a complete check using the XR25.
STARTING FAULTS
Chart 1
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Chart 2
BEHAVIOUR WHILE DRIVING
Chart 3
JF5121.0
17-56
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
Chart 1
NOTES
INJECTION
17
STARTING FAULTS
Check the fuel
Check there is fuel present

(fuel gauge faulty).
Check the fuel is of the correct type.
Check the hoses
Check no hoses are pinched

(especially after a removal operation).
Check the injectors
Check no injectors are in open circuit.
Check the canister bleed
Disconnect the pipe connecting the canister bleed solenoid valve

to the inlet manifold.
Plug the pipe to prevent an air leak.
If there is no other effect, the canister bleed is faulty.
Check the engine

compression
Connect the OPTIMA 5800 station to carry out the compression

test and follow the instructions.
Check the flywheel
Connect the OPTIMA 5800 station to carry out the flywheel test
and follow the instructions.
Check the idle speed

regulation valve
Tap gently to release the valve.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory using G0** and carry out a road test.
JF5121.0
17-57
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Chart 2
NOTES
17
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level
Use the dipstick to check if the

oil level is too high.
Check the injectors
Check no injectors are in open circuit.
Check the flywheel

regulation valve
Check the manifold
Check the condition of the manifold gaskets.
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-58
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Chart 2
CONT
NOTES
Check the injectors
Check, after removal, that the injectors do not drip.
Check the throttle body
Check the throttle body is not contaminated.
Check the brake servo
Check the brake servo is not leaking (noise).
Check the engine

compression


AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-59
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Chart 3
NOTES
17
Check the air filter
Check the air filter is not deformed.
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level

Check the inlet

manifold
Check the exhaust

manifold
Check the exhaust manifold is not leaking.
Check the injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JF5121.0
17-60
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
17
Chart 3
CONT
NOTES
Check the flywheel
Check the axle assemblies
Check the calipers, drums and bearings are not seized.

Check that the tyres are not under-inflated.
Check the cooling
Check that cooling is not insufficient.
AFTER REPAIR

JF5121.0
17-61
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
Fault finding -Aid
ENGINES
17
For further details, refer to section 12

Injector resistance
14.5
Idle regulation stepping

motor resistance
A-D
B-C
Canister bleed valve resistance
35
Ignition coil resistance
Primary
1-3 ; 2-3 = 1
1-2
= 0.5
Secondary
10 k
= 52
= 52
Oxygen sensor heating resistance
3 to 15
Throttle potentiometer resistance
no load 1-2 = 5440

1-3 = 4500
2-3 = 2160
Flywheel signal resistance
220
Fuel pressure
3 bars ignition on/ 2.5 bars at idle speed
CO
0.3 % maximum
HC
100 ppm maximum
CO2
14.5 % minimum
Lambda
0.97 < < 1.03
Value for:
full load
1-2 = 2200
1-3 = 4460
2-3 = 5340
Sensor resistance
Temperature in C
20
40
80
90

Resistance in ohms
7470
to
11970
3060
to
4045
1315
to
1600

Resistance in ohms
6700
to
8000
2600
to
3000
1100
to
1300
270
to
300
200
to
215
JF5121.0
17-62
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
Engine cold, ignition on.
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D13
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
9.NJ
Use fiche n 27
fault test side
1
Fault test
Interpretation of
bargraphs
1
Code present
2
3
Immobiliser
If the vehicle does not have an

immobiliser, this bargraph may
be illuminated.
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
JF5111.0
17-63
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Code present
2
No load recognition
3
Illuminated if immobiliser
active
4
+ after ignition information
received
9
Always illuminated if AC
option is present
12
Illuminates after erasing the
memory to indicate that the
operation has been carried out
correctly
19
Computer configured for:
manual gearbox (G50*2*)
19
(G50*1*)
JF5111.0
17-64
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
2
6
Throttle position
potentiometer
No load
# 17
16 < X < 50 (E7J 780)

19 < X < 51 (K7M 744)
Accelerator
pedal slightly
depressed
Full load
# 17
185 < X < 243 (E7J 780)

190 < X < 243 (K7M 744)
Absolute pressure
sensor
# 01
Coolant temperature
sensor
# 02
5 C
Air temperature
sensor
# 03
5 C
10
11
12
Idle speed regulation

stepping motor
Engine speed
Canister bleed
X = Local atmospheric pressure
The value read is variable

depending on the coolant
temperature :
7 % X 100 %
# 12
# 06
X = 0 rpm
# 23
X = 0.7 %
JF5111.0
17-65
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
17
Engine warm, at idle speed, after fan assembly has operated at least once (air
conditioning not selected).
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked

mode
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
2
No fault present

G02* and turn over the fiche.
IMPORTANT: This bargraph
may flash if the vehicle has no
immobiliser. Ignore this
bargraph if fault bargraph 2 RH
side is illuminated and *22 = 2
dEF.
the erase the memory (G0**)
and return to the status test
(G01*)
# 04
if in # 04
X < 12.7 volts
Battery voltage
3
then # 06
E7J 780 engine

Engine speed < X < 930
rpm nominal
K7M 744 engine
rpm nominal
Interpretation of
bargraphs
1
Code present
2
No load recognition
JF5111.0
17-66
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
17
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes

received
4
received
6
Idle speed regulation active
6
Richness regulation active
7
Fuel pump active
8
Illuminated if fan assembly is
controlled
(K7M 744 only)
9
Always illuminated if AC
option is present
12

correctly
JF5111.0
17-67
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
17
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes

19
19
(G50*1*)
Idle speed
Without air
conditioning
operating
X = 750 50 rpm
# 06
6
# 12
2 % < X < 15 % (E7J 780)

6 % < X < 15 % (K7M 744)
# 44
X 250 W
Air
conditioning
selected
10
Illuminated depending on
status of air conditioning
250 X 4000 W
if AC requests fast idle speed
# 44
X = 88050 rpm (E7J 780)

X = 85050 rpm (K7M 744)
# 06
13
PAS pressostat
# 06
X = 80050 rpm (E7J 780)

X = 85050 rpm (K7M 744)
JF5111.0
17-68
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
Engine warm, at idle speed, after fan assembly has operated at least once.
Function to be
checked
Anti-pinking noise
measurement
Manifold pressure
7
17
Richness regulation
Action
Bargraph
# 13
(3500 rpm, no
load)
Display and notes
X variable or not zero
X is variable and
approximately 350 50 mb
(E7J 780)
or 300 50 mb (K7M 744)
(this pressure varies with
altitude)
# 01
no consumers
Stable engine
speed of 2500
rpm then idle
speed
Adaptive idle speed

correction
# 05
X varies in the range from 50 to

900 mV approximately
# 35
X is close to 128 and varies

slightly
with a maximum of 255
and minimum of 0
- 2.4 % < X < 6.2 %
(average value after erasing
the memory: 0)
# 21
7
Canister bleed
10
Canister bleed is prevented.

The solenoid valve remains
closed. X = 0.7 %
# 23
13
11
PAS pressostat
X = 800 rpm (E7J 780)

X = 850 rpm (K7M 744)
# 06
JF5111.0
17-69
E7J 780
K7M 744
INJECTION
ENGINES
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Checks to be carried out during a road test.
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
2
No fault present
Canister bleed
# 23
Vehicle speed
information
# 18
Pinking sensor
11

dEF.
(G01*)
Canister bleed is authorised

X = variable and > 0.7
X = vehicle speed read on

speedometer
Vehicle under
load and
engine speed
2000 rpm
X = variable and not zero
# 13
0X7
(if there is a sensor fault, the
advance is retarded
systematically by 3 , which is
not visible using # 15 )
# 15
JF5111.0
17-70
E7J 780
K7M 744
ENGINES
NOTES
INJECTION
17
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Adaptive richness
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
After
programming
phase
# 30
64 X 192 (E7J 780)

60 X 195 (K7M 744)
the memory: 128)
# 31
64 X 192 (E7J 780)

60 X 195 (K7M 744)
the memory: 128)
JF5111.0
17-71
D7F 720 ENGINE - 35 tracks
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
..............................................................
83
..................................................................
103
Status and parameter checks
...........................................................
109
129
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Checking conformity
136
.........................................................................
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Enter D13
9.NJ
ENTER
G70*
7700
XXX
XXX
JSA061.0
17-75
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
If the information obtained by the XR25 requires electrical continuities to be checked, connect bornier MS
1048.
89024S3
Bornier MS 1048 is a 35 track base with a printed circuit on which are 35 copper coated surfaces, numbered
from 1 to 35.
IMPORTANT :
All tests using bornier MS 1048 must be carried out with the battery disconnected.
JSA061.0
17-76
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 FAULT-CHECKING

a) Illuminated :
BARGRAPHS" section.
b) Flashing :
-

JSA061.0
17-77
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
XR25 CHECK CORRECT
POST-REPAIR CHECK
electrically.
JSA061.0
17-78
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
ROAD TEST
260
then 385
then 510
then 635
then 760
<
<
<
<
<
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
<
<
<
<
<
385 mbars
510 mbars
635 mbars
760 mbars
970 mbars
Do not exceed an engine speed of 4400 rpm

JSA061.0
17-79
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
FI21727-1
JSA061.0
17-80
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
FI21727-2
JSA061.0
17-81
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
extinguished:
If flashing, there is a fault memorised for the product tested, the associated text defines the
fault.


information

information
either
or
Engine running

-

JSA061.0
17-82
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
XR25 CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2

Check:
- the connection between the XR25 and the diagnostic socket (condition of the XR25 cable)
- the conformity of the cassette.
- the injection, engine and passenger compartment fuses,
Check, ignition on, for 12 V on track:
- 1 on the main relay,
- 1 on the fuel pump relay.
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
4
16
34
9
10
18
26
20
Earth
Earth
Earth
7 Diagnostic socket
5 Main relay
2 Main relay
2 Fuel pump relay
Ignition on, check for 12 V on track 5 of the main relay:

- If there is 12 V on track 5 of the main relay: replace the fuel pump relay.
- If there is not 12 V on track 5 of the main relay: replace the main relay.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-83
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
COMPUTER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
17
Computer faulty
None

AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-84
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
IMMOBILISER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*22 = 1 dEF CO, CC- or CC+ line 30 on the computer

*22 = 2 dEF Refer to the immobiliser fault finding
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-85
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
For certain faults BG 6RH may be flashing

If BG 4LH or BG 5LH or BG 6LH or BG 6RH are also illuminated,check line 15 on the
computer.
Computer
Computer
2
15
2
1

AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-86
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+line 22 on the computer

CO line 4 on the computer
If BG 3RH is flashing, increase the engine speed to 2500 rpm for 5 minutes
If BG 3RH becomes permanently illuminated, deal with the fault.
Check for the presence of earth on track 4 on the injection computer.
Computer
22
C
Oxygen sensor
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-87
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 3LH or BG 5LH or BG 6LH or BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 15 on the

computer. For certain faults, BG 4LH is only permanently illuminated when the
engine is running.
Computer
15
Computer
6
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-88
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

Fiche n 27 side 1/2

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Carry out a road test checking #18 if BG 4 RH is flashing. Deal with this fault if BG 4
RH illuminates permanently during the road test or #18 = 0

- + 12 after ignition feed on track A.
Computer
B1
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-89
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 5 on the computer.

If BG 4LH or BG 3LH or BG 6LH or BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 15 on the
computer.
Check the conformity of the pressure sensor pipe (it must not be holed or blocked...).
Computer
5
C Pressure sensor
Computer
15
A Pressure sensor
Computer
23
B Pressure sensor
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-90
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

5

XR25 aid:
NOTES
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
*25 = In
=>
=>
=>
CO or CC- line 13 or 31 on the computer

CC- line 13 or 31 on the computer
BG 5RH is often seen to flash if *25 = dEF as its illumination is very quick. In
certain cases BG 5RH may illuminate then extinguish.
In this case enter *25 and try to illuminate BG 5RH under starter speed.
Check the resistance of the target sensor.

Replace the sensor if necessary.
Computer
13
B Target sensor
Computer
31
A Target sensor
computer.
*25 = In
not be inverted).
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-91
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 1 or 15 on the computer
For certain faults BG 6LH will only illuminate permanently at 3000 rpm. for 1
minute. If BG 4LH or BG 5LH or BG 3LH or BG 6RH is also illuminated, check line 15
on the computer.
Computer
1
2 Pinking sensor
Computer
15
1 Pinking sensor
Computer
16
The fault persists! Replace the pinking sensor.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-92
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 6RH is flashing and BG 3LH is fixed, deal with BG 3LH. If BG 5LH is also
illuminated, check line 5 on the computer. If BG 4LH or BG 5LH or BG 6LH or BG
3LH is also illuminated, check line 15 on the computer .

Replace the throttle potentiometer if necessary.
Computer
Computer
Computer
3
5
15
C
B
A
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-93
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
Just detection of CC+ on line 20 of the computer
CO or CC- on line 20 of the computer prevents dialogue with the computer.

In certain cases of faults, BG 11 LH or BG 14 RH may also be illuminated.
Check the insulation from 12 V of line :

Computer
20
2 Fuel pump relay
The fault persists! Replace the fuel pump relay.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-94
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
11
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*11 = XX.CO
*11 = XX.CC
=> CO or CC- line 32 or 33 of the computer

=> CC+ line 32 or 33 of the computer
XX = 14 => Cylinder 1 or 4 line 33 of the computer

If BG 8LH or BG 14 RH is also illuminated, refer to BG 8LH
Check the resistance of the valve for the two faulty injectors.
Replace the injector/s if necessary.
injector.
Computer
Computer
33
32
2
2
Injectors 1 and 4
Injectors 2 and 3
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-95
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
11
AT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
INJECTION CIRCUIT
None
None.
Ignore the illumination of this bargraph with this computer.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-96
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

12

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*12 = CC.1 : CC+ line 19 on the computer

*12 = CO.0 : CO or CC- line 19 on the computer
None

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of line 19 of the
computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-97
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
13
MEMORY CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
Loss of computer feed
None
computer, ...).
Computer
Main relay
18
3
5 Main relay
Fuse
Computer
Main relay
26
1
2 Main relay
Fuse
Computer
Fuel pump relay
20
1
2 Fuel pump relay

Fuse
Turn the engine.
Switch the ignition off and wait for the loss of dialogue between the XR25 and the computer.
NOTE : memorised faults are erased. It would therefore be useful to carry out a road test to check there
are no faults on the injection system.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-98
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
14

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 11 or 12 or 28 or 29 on the computer
If BG 14 LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.

Turn the engine.
If BG 14 LH is now permanently illuminated or flashing, deal with this fault.

Computer
11
Computer
12
Computer
28
Computer
29
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-99
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
14

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
If BG 8 LH or BG 11 LH is also illuminated, refer to BG 8 LH.

Check, ignition on , for 12 V on track A of the canister bleed.
Computer
24
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-100
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
15
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
None
None
Ignore the illumination of this bargraph with this computer.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-101
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
16
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*16 = XX.CO
*16 = XX.CC


If BG 16 LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.Turn the engine. If
BG 16 LH illuminates permanently or flashes, deal with this fault.

Check the resistance of the coil.
Computer
Computer
17
35
2
1
Coil
Coil
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-102
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue
with XR25
D13
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
1
Fault test
9.NJ
1
1
Use fiche 27
Code present
Change to
status test
G01*
10.NJ
Deal with
fault
bargraph
None
Status test
Battery
voltage
11.8 < X < 13.2 V
# 04
DIAG 1
19
manual gearbox
4
Computer
configuration
19
Immobiliser
(if option)
Ignition on

indicate that the
See Fiche
"Reminder C"
to configure
vehicle
DIAG 12
JSA061.0
17-103
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
2
No load
# 17
Throttle
position
potentiometer
Accelerator
pedal
slightly
depressed
10 < X < 50
2
DIAG 2
Pressure sensor
Coolant
temperature
sensor
Air
temperature
sensor
Full load
# 17
185 < X < 245
# 01
X = Atmospheric
pressure
DIAG 9
# 02
5 C
DIAG 3
# 03
bonnet 5 C
DIAG 4
Fan must operate
DIAG 16
10
Fan assembly
G17*
11
Fault warning
light
G21*1*
12
Canister bleed
Fault warning light must

illuminate then
extinguish
Canister bleed valve must

be heard to operate
G16*
DIAG 18
DIAG 19
JSA061.0
17-104
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Flywheel signal
sensor
Action
Bargraph
Ignition
Fuel pressure
Fault finding
3
Starter
Illuminated if TDC
information is detected
DIAG 5
G10*
Fuel pump should be

heard to operate
DIAG 6
Connect
Optima
Station
Starting test.
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Fuel pump
2
Display and notes
Connect
pressure
gauge to
fuel inlet
and activate
starter
motor
Pressure gauge must

show
2.5 bars
Injector
command
Starter

the injector
Engine
compression
Connect
Optima
Station
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Flywheel
Connect
Optima
Station
Oscilloscope.
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Use Optima
5800 Station
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
DIAG 11
Use Optima
5800 Station
Use Optima
5800 Station
JSA061.0
17-105
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Charging
circuit
# 04
Throttle
potentiometer
No load
Idle speed
regulation
Bargraph
Anti-pinking
circuit
# 13 (at
3500 rpm,
no load)
Pressure circuit
# 01
DIAG 1
DIAG 2
690 < X < 790 rpm
DIAG 7
DIAG 8
270 X 500 mb
# 16
Fault finding
- 4.3 % < X < 3.9 %
# 35
Illuminated (does not

flash!)
4 % < X < 14 %
# 12
# 21
Display and notes
13 < X < 14.5 V
# 06
3
17
Richness
regulation
# 05
DIAG 9
0 < X < 255

X varies around 128
DIAG 10
0.050 X 0.900 V
DIAG 15
See also
JSA061.0
17-106
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Fuel pressure
Power assisted
steering
pressostat
Action
Bargraph
Connect a
pressure
gauge to the
fuel inlet
and activate
the starter
motor
Turn wheels
to full lock
Display and notes
Pressure gauge must

show
2.5 bars
13

turned to full lock
Fault finding
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
DIAG 17
JSA061.0
17-107
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Vehicle speed
information
Action
Bargraph
# 18
Display and notes
Fault finding
X = speed read on
speedometer in km/h
DIAG 13
Programming
2
Adaptive
richness
Emission of
pollutants
# 30
106 X 150
# 31
106 X 150
CO < 0.3 %
CO2 > 13.5 %
O2 < 0.8 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
2500 rpm
after driving
DIAG 14
DIAG 15
see also
DIAG 10
CO < 0.5 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
At idle
speed, wait
for
stabilisation
JSA061.0
17-108
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DIAG 1
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Battery voltage, ignition on, Minimum < # 04 < Maximum

Battery voltage, idle speed, Minimum < # 04 < Maximum

No consumers
Ignition on

At idle speed
NOTE:
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-109
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
XR25 aid:
DIAG 2
NOTES
17
Fiche n 27

Status bargraph 2RH

None
NOTES

Check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance of the line:
Computer
Computer
Computer
3
5
15
C
B
A
# 17 is fixed
NOTES
None
Check the resistance of the throttle potentiometer when the throttle butterfly is moved.
NOTES
None
Check the upper and lower stops of the throttle butterfly.

Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-110
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 3
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
XR25 aid:
NOTES
# 02 = Engine temperature 5 C
shock).
Computer
6
Computer
15
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-111
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
AIR TEMPERATURE
DIAG 4
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 03 = Temperature under the bonnet 5 C
shock).
Computer
2
2
Computer
15
1
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-112
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
TDC DETECTION
DIAG 5
NOTES
XR25 aid:
Status BG 3LH, incorrect illumination

Check the resistance of the TDC sensor.

Computer
13
B
Computer
31
A
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-113
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
FUEL PUMP
DIAG 6
The command mode should cause the fuel pump to operate
XR25 aid:
NOTES

Fuel pump fuse
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump relay
Impact sensor
Impact sensor
C1 Fuel pump
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-114
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
Fiche n 27
Engine speed , Minimum < # 06 < Maximum
DIAG 7
NOTES

Replace the idle speed regulation valve if necessary.
Computer
11
D
Computer
12
A
Computer
28
B
Computer
29
C
# 06 < Minimum
NOTES

- Clean the air supply circuit (throttle body, idle regulation valve), since it is probably contaminated.
# 06 > Maximum
NOTES

- Check the throttle body gaskets.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-115
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 8
NOTES
XR25 aid:
# 13 is not zero and variable for fast idle or under load
Computer
1
2
Pinking sensor
Computer
15
1
Pinking sensor
Computer
16
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-116
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
PRESSURE CIRCUIT
DIAG 9
XR25 aid:
NOTES
# 01 not coherent
ignition on
speed
# 16 not coherent

# 16 not coherent
Check the insulation, continuity and that there is no interference resistance

on the line:
Computer
5
C
Pressure sensor
Computer
15
A
Pressure sensor
Computer
23
B
Pressure sensor

speed


AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-117
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
RICHNESS REGULATION
DIAG 10
NOTES
XR25 aid:

Using a vacuum pump fitted with a pressure gauge, check the coherence of # 01.
If incoherence is present, refer to "DIAG 9 # 01 incoherent, ignition on".
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-118
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
INJECTOR
DIAG 11
NOTES
XR25 aid:

Check the resistance of the faulty injector.

Replace it if necessary.
Repair.
injectors 1 and 4
Computer 33
injectors 2 and 3
Computer 32
2 injectors
2 injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-119
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
Fiche n 27
IMMOBILISER
DIAG 12
NOTES
XR25 aid:
17
Status BG 3RH, incorrect illumination
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-120
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
VEHICLE SPEED
DIAG 13
NOTES
XR25 aid:

Check on a road test.

- Check that the sensor is correctly mounted and supplied:
+12 V on A1
Earth on B2
Computer
8
B1 vehicle speed sensor
NOTE : check the various functions using this information.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-121
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27 side 2/2
ADAPTIVE RICHNESS
DIAG 14
NOTES
XR25 aid:



- If # 30 or # 31 is at a MAXIMUM, there is not enough fuel .
- filter
- fuel pump
- fuel circuit
- fuel tank.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-122
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 15
NOTES
0.97 1.03 at 2500

rpm
XR25 aid:
None
NOTES
If CO > 0.3 % at 2500 rpm


0.97 1.03
at 2500 rpm
NOTES
There is a fault with the injection or the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-123
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 15
CONT
NOTES
> 1.03
at 2500 rpm
NOTES
None


< 0.97
at 2500 rpm.
NOTES
The oxygen sensor does not loop correctly at 2500 rpm., CO >
0.3 % at 2500 rpm.

Check the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-124
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 16
NOTES

XR25 aid:
There is not 12 V
on track 1
There is 12 V
on track 1

Bornier 27
2
Relay
Repair.
The fault persists!

does click when its
There is not 12 V
on track 5

relay to the fuse.
There is 12 V
on track 5

Relay
5
1 Fan assembly
Fan assembly
2
Earth
Repair.
fan assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-125
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 17
NOTES
XR25 aid:
None
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-126
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 18
NOTES
XR25 aid:
None

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line track 19
on the computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-127
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
CANISTER BLEED
DIAG 19
G16* = Canister bleed command
XR25 aid:
NOTES

Ignition on, check during the timed phase for the presence of 12 V on track A of the canister bleed valve.
Computer
24
Replace the canister bleed solenoid valve.
NOTE : when replacing the valve, shake it over a sheet of white paper, and also shake the adjacent pipes.
If pieces of carbon fall out, the canister must also be replaced.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-128
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
NOTES
INJECTION
17
STARTING FAULTS
Chart 1
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Chart 2
Chart 3
JSA061.0
17-129
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
STARTING FAULTS
Chart 1
NOTES
Check the fuel

Check the hoses


Check the engine

compression

Check the flywheel

regulation valve
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-130
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
Chart 2
NOTES
17
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level

Check the flywheel

regulation valve
Check the manifold
Check the injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-131
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Chart 2
CONT
NOTES
Check the
engine
compression

AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-132
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
Chart 3
NOTES
17
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level

Check the inlet

manifold
Check the exhaust

manifold
Check the injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JSA061.0
17-133
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
17
Chart 3
CONT
NOTES
Check the flywheel

Check that the tyres are not under-inflated.
Check the cooling
AFTER REPAIR

JSA061.0
17-134
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
Fault finding -Aid
17

Injector resistance
14.5

motor resistance
A - D= 100
B - C = 100
35
Primary
1-4 ; 1-3 ; 2-3 ; 2-4

3-4
Secondary
8 k
= 1.5
= 0.6
3 to 15
no load A-B
A-C
B-C
220
Fuel pressure
CO
0.3 % maximum
HC
100 ppm maximum
CO2
14.5 % minimum
Lambda
0.97 < < 1.03
Value for:
= 1300
= 1360
= 2300
full load
A-B= 1300
A-C= 2350
B-C = 1260
Sensor resistance
Temperature in C
20
40
80
90

Resistance in ohms
5000
to
7000
1700
to
3300
500
to
1550

Resistance in ohms
6700
to
8000
2600
to
3000
1100
to
1300
270
to
300
200
to
215
JSA061.0
17-135
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D13
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
9.NJ
Use fiche n 27
fault test side
1
Fault test
Interpretation of
bargraphs
1
Code present
2
3
Immobiliser

immobiliser, this bargraph
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
JSA061.0
17-136
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Code present
2
No load recognition
3
active
4
received
5
Locking relay control effective
12
correctly
12
19
(G50*1*)
JSA061.0
17-137
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
2
6
Throttle position
potentiometer
No load
# 17
10 < X < 50
2
Accelerator
pedal slightly
depressed
2
Full load
# 17
185 < X < 245
Absolute pressure
sensor
# 01
Coolant temperature
sensor
# 02
5 C
Air temperature
sensor
# 03
5 C
10
11
12

stepping motor
Engine speed
Canister bleed
X = Local atmospheric pressure

temperature :
11 % X 100 %
# 12
# 06
X = 0 rpm
# 23
X = 0.7 %
JSA061.0
17-138
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
17
Engine warm, at idle speed, after fan assembly has operated at least once
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked

mode
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
2
No fault present
Battery voltage

dEF.
(G01*)
# 04
if in # 04
X < 12.7 volts
then # 06

rpm nominal
JSA061.0
17-139
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Code present
2
No load recognition
3
received
4
received
6
6
JSA061.0
17-140
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
17
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fuel pump active
12

correctly

19
19
(G50*1*)
Idle speed
# 06
4 % < X < 14 %
# 12
Anti-pinking noise
measurement
X = 740 50 rpm
# 13
(3500 rpm, no
load)
JSA061.0
17-141
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Manifold pressure
Richness regulation
Action
Bargraph
Stable engine
speed of 2500
rpm then idle
speed

slightly
and minimum of 0
# 35
Adaptive idle speed

correction
Display and notes
X is variable and is
approximately
270 X 430 mb
altitude)
# 01
no consumers
# 05
17
- 4.3 % < X < 3.9 %

the memory: 0)
# 21
11
10
Canister bleed

closed. X = 0.7 %
# 23
PAS pressostat
11
12
Fan assembly
13
# 06
X = 800 rpm
# 02
The fan should operate when

the temperature exceeds 99 C.
JSA061.0
17-142
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
No fault present
2
Canister bleed
# 23
Vehicle speed
information
# 18
Pinking sensor
11

dEF.
(G01*)


speedometer
Vehicle under
load and
engine speed
2000 rpm

0X6
advance is retarded
# 13
# 15
JSA061.0
17-143
D7F 720
engine 35 tracks
NOTES
INJECTION
17
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Adaptive richness
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
After
programming
phase
# 30
106 X 150
the memory: 128)
# 31
106 X 150
the memory: 128)
JSA061.0
17-144
D7F 720 ENGINE - 55 tracks
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
..............................................................
155
..................................................................
175
Status and parameter checks
...........................................................
181
202
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
Checking conformity
209
.........................................................................
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Enter D13
9.NJ
ENTER
G70*
7700
XXX
XXX
JSA062.0
17-147
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
If the information obtained by the XR25 requires electrical continuities to be checked, connect bornier Sus
1228.
97434S
Bornier Sus 1228 is a 55 track base with a printed circuit on which are 55 copper coated surfaces, numbered
from 1 to 55.
IMPORTANT :
All tests using bornier Sus 1228 must be carried out with the battery disconnected.
JSA062.0
17-148
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 FAULT-CHECKING

a) Illuminated :
BARGRAPHS" section.
b) Flashing :
-

JSA062.0
17-149
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
XR25 CHECK CORRECT
POST-REPAIR CHECK
electrically.
JSA062.0
17-150
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
ROAD TEST

260
then 385
then 510
then is 635
then 760
<
<
<
<
<
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
# 01
<
<
<
<
<
385 mbars
510 mbars
635 mbars
760 mbars
970 mbars
Do not exceed an engine speed of 4400 rpm

JSA062.0
17-151
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
FI21727-1
JSA062.0
17-152
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
FI21727-2
JSA062.0
17-153
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
extinguished:
If flashing, there is a fault memorised for the product tested, the associated text defines the
fault.


information

information
either
or
Engine running

-

JSA062.0
17-154
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
XR25 CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2

Check:
- the connection between the XR25 and the diagnostic socket (condition of the XR25 cable),
- the conformity of the cassette,
- the injection, engine and passenger compartment fuses.
Check, ignition on, for 12 V on track:
- 1 on the fuel pump relay.
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
18
2
3
11
38
1
40
48
Earth
Earth
Earth
7 Diagnostic socket
5 Main relay
2 Main relay
2 Fuel pump relay
Ignition on, check for 12 V on track 5 of the main relay:

- If there is 12 V on track 5 of the main relay: replace the fuel pump relay.
- If there is not 12 V on track 5 of the main relay: replace the main relay.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-155
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
Bargraph 2 LH side illuminated.
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
COMPUTER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid: computer faulty
NOTES
None

AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-156
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
IMMOBILISER CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*22 = 1 dEF CO, CC- or CC+ line 37 of the computer

*22 = 2 dEF Refer to the immobiliser fault finding section
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-157
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+line 20 or 46 of the computer
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line.
Computer
Computer
20
46
2
1

Check the resistance of the sensor. Replace if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-158
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2

XR25 aid:
NOTES
CO, CC- or CC+line 17 of the computer

CO line 18 of the computer
If BG 3RH is flashing, increase the engine speed to 2500rpm for 5 minutes.

If BG 3RH becomes permanently illuminated, deal with the fault.
Check for the presence of earth on track 18 of the injection computer.
Computer 17
C Oxygen sensor
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-159
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2

XR25 aid :
NOTES
CO, CC- or CC+line 44 or 15 of the computer
If BG 6LH or BG 5LH is also illuminated , check line 44 of the computer. For certain
faults, BG 4LH is only permanently illuminated when the engine is running.
Computer 44
B 1 Coolant temperature sensor
Computer 15
B 2 Coolant temperature sensor
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-160
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

Fiche n 27 side 1/2

XR25 aid:
NOTES
CO, CC- or CC+ line 12 of the computer
Carry out a road test checking #18 if BG 4 RH is flashing. Deal with this fault if BG 4
RH illuminates permanently during the road test or #18 = 0

-+ 12 after ignition feed on track A.
Computer
12
B1
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-161
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Bargraph 5LH side illuminated

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 45, 44 or 16 of the computer

If BG 6LH or BG 4LH is also illuminated, check line 44 of the computer.
Check the conformity of the pressure sensor pipe (it must not be pierced or blocked...).
Computer
45
C Pressure sensor
Computer
44
A Pressure sensor
Computer
16
B Pressure sensor
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-162
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

5

XR25 aid:
NOTES
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
Fiche n 2 side 1/2
*25 = CO.0
*25 = CC.0
*25 = In
=>
=>
=>
CO or CC- line 33 or 34 of the computer

CC- line 33 or 34 of the computer
BG 5RH is often seen to flash if *25 = dEF as its illumination is very quick. In
certain cases BG 5RH may illuminate then extinguish.
In this case enter *25 and try to illuminate BG 5RH under starter speed.
Check the resistance of the target sensor.

Computer
33
B Target sensor
Computer
34
A Target sensor
computer.
*25 = In
not be inverted).
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-163
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 2 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 54 or 44 of the computer
For certain faults BG 6LH will only illuminate permanently at 3000 rpm. for 1
minute. If BG 4LH or BG 5LH is also illuminated, check line 44 of the computer.
Computer
54
2 Pinking sensor
Computer
44
1 Pinking sensor
Computer
31
The fault persists! Replace the pinking sensor.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-164
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27 side 1/2

XR25 aid:
NOTES
CO, CC- or CC+ line 19, 45 or 46 of the computer
If BG 5LH is also illuminated, check line 45 of the computer.

If BG 3LH is also illuminated, check line 46 of the computer.

Computer
Computer
Computer
19
45
46
C
B
A
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-165
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
Only detection of CC+ on line 48 of the computer
CO or CC- on line 48 of the computer prevents dialogue with the computer.

In certain cases of faults, BG 11 LH or BG 14 RH may also be illuminated.
Check the insulation from 12 V of line :

Computer
48
2 Fuel pump relay
The fault persists! Replace the fuel pump relay.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-166
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
11
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
XR25 aid:
NOTES
*11 = XX.CO
*11 = XX.CC


If BG 8LH or BG 14 RH is also illuminated, refer to BG 8LH
Check the resistance of the two faulty injectors.

Replace the injector/s if necessary.
injector.
Computer
Computer
30
4
2
2
Injectors 1 and 4
Injectors 2 and 3
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-167
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

11
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
XR25 aid:
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
INJECTION CIRCUIT
None
None
NOTES
Ignore this bargraph, as this vehicle is not fitted with automatic transmission.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-168
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

12

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*12 = CO.0
*12 = CC.1
CO or CC- line 43 on the computer

None

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line 43 on
the computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-169
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17

13
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
MEMORY CIRCUIT
Loss of computer feed.
XR25 aid:
NOTES
None
computer, ...).
Computer
Main relay
1
3
Computer
Main relay
40
Computer
Fuel pump relay
48
1
5 Main relay
Fuse
2 Main relay
Fuse
2 Fuel pump relay
Fuse
Run the engine.
Switch the ignition off and wait for the loss of dialogue between the XR25 and the computer.
NOTE :
Memorised faults are erased. It would therefore be useful to carry out a road test to check
there are no faults on the injection system.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-170
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
14
Bargraph 14LH side illuminated or flashing

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 8 or 35 or 9 or 36 of the computer
If BG 14 LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.

Turn the engine.
If BG 14 LH is now permanently illuminated or flashing, deal with this fault.

Computer
8
Computer
35
Computer
9
Computer
36
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-171
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
14
Bargraph 14RH side illuminated

XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CO, CC- or CC+ line 42 of the computer
If BG 8 LH or BG 11 LH is also illuminated, refer to BG 8 LH.

Check, ignition on , for 12 V on track A of the canister bleed valve.
Computer
42
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-172
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
15
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
CC + 12 V line 51 of the computer
Check that the vehicle has air conditioning, if not, ignore this bargraph.
Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of line 51 of the
computer.
If the fault persists, consult the air conditioning fault finding section.
AFTER REPAIR

JSA062.0
17-173
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
16
COMPUTER
XR25 aid:
NOTES
Fiche n 27 side 1/2
*16 = XX.CO
*16 = XX.CC


If BG 16 LH is flashing, erase the computer memory using G0**.Turn the engine. If
BG 16 LH illuminates permanently or flashes, deal with this fault.

Check the resistance of the coil.
Computer
Computer
29
28
2
1
Coil
Coil
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-174
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue
with XR25
D13
(selector
on S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
1
Fault test
9.NJ
Use fiche 27
1
Deal with
fault
bargraph
Code present
Change to
status test
10.NJ
None
G01*
Status test
Battery
voltage
11.8 < X < 13.2 V
# 04
19
Computer
configuration
Immobiliser
(if option)
Ignition on
manual gearbox
19

indicate that the
DIAG 1
See Fiche
Reminder C
to configure
the vehicle
DIAG 12
JSA062.0
17-175
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
2
10 < X < 50
No load
# 17
Throttle
position
potentiometer
.
2
Accelerator
pedal
slightly
depressed
DIAG 2
2
185 < X < 245
Full load
# 17
Pressure sensor
Coolant
temperature
sensor
Air
temperature
sensor
# 01
X = Atmospheric
pressure
DIAG 9
# 02
5 C
DIAG 3
# 03
bonnet 5 C
DIAG 4
The fan must operate
DIAG 17
10
Fan assembly
G17*
11
Fault warning
light
G21*1*
12
Canister bleed
The fault warning light

must illuminate then
extinguish
The canister bleed valve
must be heard to operate
G16*
DIAG 19
DIAG 20
JSA062.0
17-176
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
3
1
Flywheel signal
sensor
Fuel pump
Ignition
Fuel pressure
Starter
Illuminated if TDC
information detected
DIAG 5
G10*
Fuel pump should be

heard to operate
DIAG 6
Connect
Optima
Station
Starting test, complete

guide on Optima Station
Connect
pressure
gauge to
fuel inlet
and activate
starter
motor
Injection
command
Starter
Engine
compression
Connect
Optima
Station
Flywheel
Connect
Optima
Station
The pressure gauge must

show 2.5 bars

the injector
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Oscilloscope.
Complete guide on
Optima Station
Use Optima
5800 Station
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
DIAG 11
Use Optima
5800 Station
Use Optima
5800 Station
JSA062.0
17-177
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Charging
circuit
# 04
Throttle
potentiometer
No load
Idle speed
regulation
Anti-pinking
circuit
Pressure circuit
Bargraph
# 21
- 4.3 % < X < 3.9 %
# 13 (at
3500 rpm,
no load)
Fuel pressure
# 35
# 05
Connect a
pressure
gauge to the
fuel gallery
and activate
the starter
motor
Fault finding
DIAG 1
DIAG 2
690 < X < 790 rpm

4 % < X < 14 %
# 16
Illuminated(does not
flash!)
# 12
# 01
Richness
regulation
Display and notes
13 < X < 14.5 V
# 06
3
17
DIAG 7
DIAG 8
270 X 430 V
DIAG 9
0 < X < 255

X varies around 128
0.050 X 0.900 V
Pressure gauge must

show
2.5 bars
DIAG 10
See also DIAG

15
Fuel pressure,
see Workshop
Repair
Manual or
section
JSA062.0
17-178
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
17
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fault finding
9
Extinguished if fast idle is
not active
AC selected
10
10
Air
conditioning
Illuminated if the air

conditioning requests
compressor operation
Illuminated if the
injection authorises
compressor operation
# 06
690 X 790 rpm
# 44
250 X 4000 W
DIAG 16
9
800 X 900 rpm
# 06
# 44
Power assisted
steering
prestostat
10
13
Turn wheels
to full lock
250 X 4000 W

turned to full lock
DIAG 18
JSA062.0
17-179
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Vehicle speed
information
Adaptive
richness
Action
Bargraph
# 18
# 30
Fault finding
X = speed read on the

speedometer in km/h
DIAG 13
106 X 150
DIAG 14
106 X 150
CO < 0.3 %
CO2 > 13.5 %
O2 < 0.8 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
2500rpm
after driving
Emission of
pollutants
Display and notes
After
programming
# 31
17
At idle
speed, wait
for
stabilisation
DIAG 15
see also
DIAG 10
CO < 0.5 %
HC < 100 ppm
0.97 < < 1.03
JSA062.0
17-180
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
BATTERY VOLTAGE
DIAG 1
NOTES
XR25 aid: Battery voltage ignition on, Minimum< # 04 < Maximum

Battery voltage idle speed, Minimum< # 04 < Maximum

No consumers
Ignition on

At idle speed

NOTE:
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-181
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
DIAG 2
NOTES
Status bargraph 2RH

XR25 aid:# 17 outside tolerances
17
Fiche n 27

None
NOTES

Check the insulation and the continuity of the line:
Computer
Computer
Computer
19
45
46
C
B
A
# 17 is fixed
NOTES
None
Check the resistance of the throttle potentiometer when the throttle is activated.
NOTES
None
Check the upper and lower stops of the throttle.

Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-182
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
DIAG 3
XR25 aid:# 02 = Engine temperature 5 C
NOTES
If the value read is inconsistent, check the sensor correctly follows the standard table of values for
shock).
Computer 15
Computer 44
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-183
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
AIR TEMPERATURE
DIAG 4
XR25 aid:# 03 = Temperature under the bonnet 5 C
NOTES
If the value read is incoherent, check the sensor correctly follows the standard table of values for
shock).
Computer
20
2 Air temperature sensor
Computer
46
1 Air temperature sensor
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-184
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
TDC DETECTION
DIAG 5
NOTES
XR25 aid:Status BG 3LH, incorrect illumination

Check the resistance of the TDC sensor.

Computer
33
B Flywheel signal sensor
Computer
34
A Flywheel signal sensor
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-185
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
FUEL PUMP
DIAG 6
NOTES
XR25 aid:
The command mode should cause the fuel pump to operate.

Fuel pump fuse

Fuel pump relay 5
Impact sensor
Fuel pump relay
Impact sensor
C1 Fuel pump
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-186
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
DIAG 7
XR25 aid: Engine speed , Minimum < # 06 < Maximum
NOTES
17
Fiche n 27

Replace the idle speed regulation valve if necessary.
Computer
8
D Idle speed regulation motor
Computer
35
A Idle speed regulation motor
Computer
9
B Idle speed regulation motor
Computer
36
C Idle speed regulation motor
# 06 < Minimum
NOTES

- Clean the air supply circuit (throttle body, idle speed regulation valve), since it is probably
contaminated.
# 06 > Maximum
NOTES

- Check the throttle body seals.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-187
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 8
NOTES
XR25 aid:# 13 is not zero and variable for fast idle or under load
Computer
54
2 Pinking sensor
Computer
44
1 Pinking sensor
Computer
31
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-188
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
PRESSURE CIRCUIT
DIAG 9
XR25 aid:
NOTES
# 01 not coherent
ignition on
speed
# 16 not coherent

# 16 not coherent
Check the insulation, the continuity and that there is no interference on the
line:
Computer
45
C Pressure sensor
Computer
44
A Pressure sensor
Computer
16
B Pressure sensor


speed


AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-189
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
RICHNESS REGULATION
DIAG 10
NOTES
XR25 aid:

Using a vacuum pump fitted with a pressure gauge, check the coherence of # 01.
If incoherence is present, refer to "DIAG 9 # 01 incoherent, ignition on".
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-190
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
INJECTOR
DIAG 11
NOTES
XR25 aid : CO or CC - line 30 of the computer for injectors 1 and 4

CO or CC - line 4 of the computers for injectors 2 and 3
Check the resistance of the faulty injector.

Repair.
injectors 1 and 4
Computer 30
injectors 2 and 3
Computer 4
AFTER REPAIR
2 injectors
2 injectors
JSA062.0
17-191
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
IMMOBILISER
DIAG 12
NOTES
XR25 aid : Status BG 3RH, illuminated when ignition switched on
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-192
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
VEHICLE SPEED
DIAG 13
NOTES
XR25 aid:

Check with a road test.

- Check that the sensor is correctly mounted and fed:
+12 V on A1
Earth on B2
Computer 12
B1vehicle speed sensor
NOTE : check the various functions using this information.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-193
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
ADAPTIVE RICHNESS
DIAG 14
NOTES
XR25 aid:Minimum < # 30 < Maximum



- If # 30 or # 31 is at a MAXIMUM, there is not enough fuel.
- filter
- fuel pump
- fuel circuit
- fuel tank.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-194
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 15
NOTES
0.97 1.03 at 2500

rpm
XR25 aid: None
NOTES
If CO > 0.3 % at 2500 rpm


0.97 1.03 at 2500

rpm
NOTES
It is an injection or sensor fault.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-195
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 15
CONT
NOTES
> 1.03 at 2500 rpm
NOTES
None


< 0.97
at 2500 rpm.
NOTES
The oxygen sensor does not loop correctly at 2500 rpm, CO >
0.3 % at 2500 rpm.

Check the sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-196
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
AIR CONDITIONING
DIAG 16
NOTES
XR25 aid:Status BG 10LH or 10RH incorrect illumination
Check the insulation and continuity of lines track 5 and track 51 of the injection computer.
Consult the air conditioning fault finding.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-197
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 17
XR25 aid:
NOTES

There is not 12 V
on track 1
There is 12 V
on track 1

Bornier 10
2 Relay
Repair.

The fault persists!

does click when its
There is not 12 V
on track 5

relay to the fuse.
There is 12 V
on track 5

Relay
5
1 Fan assembly
Fan assembly
2
Earth
Repair.
fan assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-198
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 18
NOTES
XR25 aid :None.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-199
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
DIAG 19
NOTES
XR25 aid:None

Connect the bornier in place of the computer and check the insulation and continuity of the line track 43
on the computer.
Repair.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-200
D7F 720
engine - 55
tracks
INJECTION
17
Fiche n 27
CANISTER BLEED
DIAG 20
G16* = Canister bleed command
XR25 aid:
NOTES

Ignition on, check during the timed phase for the presence of 12 V on track A of the canister bleed valve.
Computer
42
Replace the canister bleed solenoid valve.
NOTE : when replacing the valve, shake it over a sheet of white paper, and also shake the adjacent pipes.
If pieces of carbon fall out, the canister must also be replaced.
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-201
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
NOTES
STARTING FAULTS
Chart 1
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Chart 2
Chart 3
JSA062.0
17-202
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
STARTING FAULTS
Chart 1
NOTES
Check the fuel

Check the hoses


Check the engine

compression

Check the flywheel

regulation valve
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-203
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
IDLE SPEED FAULTS
Chart 2
NOTES
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level

Check the flywheel

regulation valve
Check the manifold
Check the injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-204
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Chart 2
CONT
NOTES
Check the engine

compression


AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-205
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Chart 3
NOTES
Check the fuel

Check the hoses

Check the oil level

Check the inlet manifold
Check the exhaust manifold
Check the injectors
AFTER REPAIR
JSA062.0
17-206
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
17
Chart 3
CONT
NOTES
Check the flywheel

Check that the tyres are not under inflated.
Check the cooling
AFTER REPAIR

If there is no other effect, the canister bleed is faulty..
JSA062.0
17-207
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION Fault finding - Aid
17

Injector resistance
14.5

motor resistance
A-D
B-C
35
Primary =
1-4 ; 1-3 ; 2-3 ; 2-4

3-4 = 0.6
Secondary
= 100
= 100
= 1.5
8 k
3 to 15
no load A-B= 1300

A-C= 1360
B-C = 2300
220
Fuel pressure
CO
0.3 % maximum
HC
100 ppm maximum
CO2
14.5 % minimum
Oxygen
0.97 < < 1.03
Value for:
full load
A-B= 1300
A-C= 2350
B-C = 1260
Sensor resistance
Temperature in C
Resistance in ohms
Resistance in ohms
20
40
80
90
5000
to
7000
1700
to
3300
500
to
1550
6700
to
8000
2600
to
3000
1100
to
1300
270
to
300
200
to
215
JSA062.0
17-208
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D13
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
9.NJ
Use fiche n 27
fault test side
1
Fault test
Interpretation of
bargraphs
1
Code present
2
3
Immobiliser

immobiliser, this bargraph
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
JSA061.0
17-209
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Code present
2
No load recognition
3
active
4
received
5
9
Always illuminated if air
conditioning option available
12
19

correctly

Manual gearbox (G50*2*)
19
Automatic
transmission(G50*1*)
JSA061.0
17-210
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
2
6
Throttle position
potentiometer
No load
# 17
10 < X < 50
Accelerator
pedal slightly
depressed
Full load
# 17
185 < X < 245
Absolute pressure
sensor
# 01
Coolant temperature
sensor
# 02
5 C
Air temperature
sensor
# 03
5 C
10

stepping motor
# 12
11
12
Engine speed
Canister bleed
X = Local atmospheric
pressure

temperature : : 11 % X
100 %
# 06
X = 0 rpm
# 23
X = 0.7 %
JSA061.0
17-211
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
17
Engine warm, at idle speed, after fan assembly has operated at least once(air
conditioning not selected)
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
G01*
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
2
No fault present
Battery voltage

dEF.
(G01*)
# 04
if in # 04
X < 12.7 volts
then # 06

rpm nominal
JSA061.0
17-212
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Engine warm, at idle speed, after fan assembly has operated at least once(air
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Code present
2
No load recognition
3
received
4
received
5
6
JSA061.0
17-213
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
4
(cont)
17
Function to be
checked
Interpretation of
bargraphs (cont)
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
Fuel pump active

9
Always illuminated if air

conditioning option available
12
correctly

19
Manual gearbox (G50*2*)
19
Automatic
transmission(G50*1*)
JSA061.0
17-214
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
17
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Engine idle speed
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
6
Without air
conditioning
# 06
X = 740 50 rpm
# 12
4 % < X < 14 %
# 44
X 250 W
With air
conditioning
and without
fast idle
request
10
# 06
# 44
X = 740 50 rpm
With air
conditioning
and fast idle
request
250 X 4000 W
9
# 06
10
# 44
X = 850 50 rpm
250 X 4000 W
Anti-pinking noise
measurement
# 13
(3500 rpm, no
load)
JSA061.0
17-215
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checkedAction
Manifold pressure
# 01
no consumers
Richness regulation
17
Adaptive idle speed

correction
Bargraph
Stable engine
speed of 2500
rpm then idle
speed
X is variable and is
approximately
270 X 430 mb
altitude)
6
# 05

# 35

slightly
and minimum of 0
# 21
- 4.3 % < X < 3.9 %

the memory : 0)
11
Canister bleed
10
Display and notes
# 23
13

closed. X = 0.7 %
11
PAS pressostat
# 06
X = 800 rpm
12
Fan assembly
# 02
The fan must operate when the

temperature exceeds 99 C
JSA062.0
17-216
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
INJECTION
NOTES
Order of
operations
17
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
10.NJ
G01*
Use fiche n 27
status test side
20
2
No fault present

dEF.
(G01*)
Canister bleed
# 23
Vehicle speed
information
# 18
Pinking sensor
11


speedometer
Vehicle under
load and
engine speed
2000 rpm
# 13
0X6
advance is retarded
# 15
JSA061.0
17-217
D7F 720
engine 55 tracks
NOTES
INJECTION
17
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Adaptive richness
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
After
programming
phase
# 30
106 X 150
the memory : 128)
# 31
106 X 150
the memory : 128)
JSA061.0
17-218
ABS BOSCH 5.3
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
.............................................................
03
.........................................................................
18
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
20
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Checking conformity
CLIO
XB0X
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
38
CONDITIONS FOR APPLICATION FOR THE TESTS DEFINED IN THIS FAULT FINDING
The tests described in this fault finding are only to be applied when the wording of the fault corresponds
exactly to the display on the XR25 kit.
If a fault is dealt with because there is a flashing bargraph, the conditions for confirming the existence of an
actual fault (and the need to apply the fault finding ) can be found in the "Notes" or at the beginning of the
bargraph interpretation.
If a bargraph is only interpreted when it is permanently illuminated, the application of the recommended
tests in the fault finding when the bargraph is flashing will not allow you to determine the origin of the
memorisation of this fault. In this case, only a test of the wiring and the connections of the component in
question must be carried out (the fault is simply memorised as it was not present at the time of testing).
NOTE : The ignition must have been switched off before the XR25 kit is used.
INDISPENSABLE TOOLING REQUIRED FOR OPERATIONS ON THE ABS SYSTEM
- XR25 kit.
-
XR25 cassette n 17 minimum.
Reminders : When there is intermittent fault memorisation, the ABS warning light will illuminate the next
time the vehicle is used until the car reaches 7.5mph (12 km/h). When the fault is memorised, a
counter relating to the fault is set at 40 . This value is reduced by one each time the ignition is
turned on if the fault is not present when the vehicle exceeds 7.5mph (12 km/h). When the
reading on the counter is equal to 1, it remains at 1 and the fault is not erased.
B65531.0
38-1
CLIO
XB0X
38
PRESENTATION OF XR25 FICHE N 53
FI21753
B65531.0
38-2
CLIO
XB0X
Fault finding- Fiche XR25
38
SYMBOLISATION OF THE BARGRAPHS
- Of faults (always on coloured background) :

If illuminated, signals a fault on the product tested. The associated text
describes the fault.
This bargraph may be:
- Illuminated
: fault present.
- flashing
: fault memorised.
- Extinguished
: fault absent or not found.
- Of status (always on white background) :
Bargraph is always on the upper right hand side

If illuminated, this signals the establishment of dialogue with the product computer
If it remains extinguished :
- There is a fault in the XR25, the computer or the XR25/computer connection.
Initial status : (ignition on, engine stopped, without operator action).
or
Indefinite
illuminated when the function or condition specified on the fiche is
met
Extinguished
Illuminated
extinguished when the function or condition specified on the fiche is

no longer met.
- Supplementary information:
Certain bargraphs have a *. Command*.., when the bargraph is illuminated, allows supplementary
information on the type of fault or status arising to be displayed.
B65531.0
38-3
38
CLIO
XB0X

1
Fiche n 53
Bargraph 1, right hand side extinguished
Code present
NOTES
None
Check that the XR25 kit is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with the computer of
another vehicle. If the XR25 kit is not at fault and it will not communicate with any other computer in the
same vehicle, it is possible that a faulty computer is corrupting fault finding lines K and L . Locate this
computer by disconnecting the lines one by one.
Check that the ISO interface is correctly in position S8 and that you are using the most recent XR25
cassette and the correct access code.
Check the battery voltage and carry out the necessary operations to obtain the correct voltage(9.5
Volts< U battery<17.5 Volts)
Check the presence and condition of the ABS fuse on the passenger compartment fuse board (10A).
Check the connection of the computer connector and the condition of its connection.
Check the connection and condition of the connections at the intermediate connection R107 dashboard /
front of engine and R255 front of engine / ABS.
Check the ABS earth wires (tighten the two earth screws above the ABS assembly).
Check that the computer is correctly fed :
- earth on track 19 of the 31 track connector,
- + after ignition feed on track 15 of the 31track connector.
Check that the diagnostic socket is correctly fed :

- + before ignition feed on track 16,
- earth on track 5.
Check the continuity and insulation of the lines in the diagnostic socket / ABS computer connection:
- between track 12 of the computer connector and track 15 of the diagnostic socket,
- between track 11 of the computer connector and track 7 of the diagnostic socket.
If dialogue is still not established after these tests, replace the ABS computer.,
AFTER REPAIR
When communication is established, deal with any fault bargraphs which may be
illuminated.
B65531.0
38-4
CLIO
XB0X
38
Fiche n 53
1
Bargraph 1 left hand side illuminated
Power supply/computer
NOTES
None.
Check the condition and position of the 60A ABS fuse in the engine connection unit.
Ensure continuity between this fuse and tracks 17 and 18 of the computer connector (presence of positive
before ignition feed on both tracks). Check the tightness and condition of the battery terminals.
Check the connections on the 31 track connector of the ABS computer.
Check the ABS earths (above the hydraulic assembly) and visually check all the ABS wiring.
Erase the computer memory, exit the fault finding (G13*) and switch off the ignition.
Carry out a new XR25 test. If the "power supply / computer" fault persists, replace the ABS computer.
AFTER REPAIR
After replacing the computer, carry out another XR25 test.

B65531.0
38-5
CLIO
XB0X
38
Fiche n 53
2-3-4-5
Bargraphs 2, 3, 4 or 5 right or left hand side flashing
Solenoid valve circuit
Even if present at time of testing, these faults will always be declared by a

flashing bargraph.
NOTES
To confirm their presence and therefore the need to apply the fault finding
described below start command G20*. The fault is present if the bargraph
appears illuminated at the end of the command.
If bargraph 11 left hand side is also illuminated, deal with bargraph 11 left hand
side as a priority.
Check the ABS earths (tightening of the two screws above the hydraulic assembly).
Check the condition and position of the 60A ABS fuse in the engine connection unit.
Check the connection and condition of the connections on the 31 track connector of the computer.
Erase the computer memory, exit the fault finding mode(G13*) switch off the ignition.
Switch on the ignition and carry out a new test with the XR25 kit, using command G20*.
If the fault "solenoid valve circuit"reappears, replace the ABS computer.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase computer memory(GO**).

Carry out a road test followed by a check with the XR25 kit.
B65531.0
38-6
CLIO
XB0X

6
38
Fiche n 53
Front left wheel sensor circuit
NOTES
None.
Check the connection and condition of the sensor connections.

If the connector is correct, check the resistance of the sensor at its connector..
Replace the sensor if its resistance is not approximately 1.6 Kohms (1.6 Kohms 320 ohms).
If the resistance is correct, check and ensure the continuity of the connection between the sensor
connector and the computer connector:
- between one track of the sensor connector and track 7 of the computer connector,
- between the other track of the sensor connector and track 6 of the computer connector.
Also check the insulation between these connections.
Carry out a visual inspection of the sensor wiring and check the quality of the connection on the 31 track
computer connector.
If all the checks are correct, reconnect the computer and the wheel speed sensor then erase the computer
memory.
Exit fault finding mode(G13*) and switch off the ignition.
Switch the ignition on and replace the sensor if the fault reappears.
If the fault reappears after replacing the sensor, replace the computer.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-7
38
CLIO
XB0X

6
Fiche n 53
Bargraph 6 Right hand side illuminated
Front right wheel sensor circuit
NOTES
None.

If the connector is correct, check the resistance of the sensor at its connector.
If the resistance is correct , check and ensure the continuity of the connections between the sensor
connector and the computer connector :
- between one track of the sensor connector and track 3 of the computer connector,
- between the other track of the sensor connector and track 5 of the computer connector.
Carry out a visual inspection of the sensor wiring and check the quality of the connections on the 31
track computer connector.
If all the checks are correct, reconnect the computer and the wheel speed sensor, then erase the
computer memory.
Exit the fault finding mode(G13*) and switch off the ignition.
Switch the ignition on and replace the sensor if the fault reappears .
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-8
38
CLIO
XB0X

7
Fiche n 53
Rear left wheel sensor circuit
NOTES
None.

Check the connections at the intermediate connection under the body (R101).
If the connector and connection are correct, check the resistance of the sensor at its connector. Replace
the sensor if the resistance is not approximately 1.6 Kohms (1.6 Kohms 320 ohms).
If the resistance is correct, check and ensure the continuity of the connections between the sensor
- between one track of the sensor connector and track 8 of the computer connector (via track B of the
connector under the body R101),
- between the other track of the sensor connector and track 9 of the computer connector (via track A of
the connector under the body R101).
Carry out a visual inspection of the sensor wiring and check the quality of the connections on the 31 track
computer connector.
If all checks are correct, reconnect the computer and wheel speed sensor, then erase the computer
memory.
Switch on the ignition and replace the sensor if the fault reappears.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-9
38
CLIO
XB0X

7
Fiche n 53
Bargraph 7 Right hand side illuminated
Rear right wheel sensor circuit
NOTES
None.

Check the connections at the intermediate connector under the body (R101).
If the connector and connection are correct , check the resistance of the sensor at its connector.
If the resistance is correct, check and ensure the continuity of the connections between the sensor
- between one track of the sensor connector and track 1 of the computer connector (via track D of the
connector under the body R101),
-between the other track of the sensor connector and track 2 of the computer connector (via track C of
the connector under the body R101).
Carry out a visual inspection of sensor wiring and check the quality of the connections on the 31 track
computer connector.
If all checks are correct, reconnect the computer and the wheel speed sensor, then erase the computer
memory.
Switch on the ignition and replace the sensor if the fault reappears.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-10
38
CLIO
XB0X
Fiche n 53
8
Bargraph 8 right or left hand side
flashing
Front right or front left wheel sensor signal
NOTES
Even if they are present at time of testing, these faults will always be declared by
BG 8 flashing on the left or right hand side.
To confirm their presence and therefore the need to apply the fault finding below, carry out a road test. The fault is present if the bargraph illuminates during
the test.
If bargraphs 6 and 8 left hand side are both illuminated, deal with bargraph 6
first.
If bargraphs 6 and 8 right hand side are both illuminated, deal with bargraph 6
first.
Check the quality of the wheel speed sensor mounting (its position and that it is tightened to
recommended torque).Check the sensor / target air gap over one wheel revolution : 0.1 mm < air gap<
1.9 mm. Check conformity of the target (condition, number of teeth=26)

If the connector is correct , check the resistance of the sensor at its connector.
computer connector.
memory.
Leave fault finding mode(G13*) and carry out a road test. Replace the sensor if the fault reappears.
If the fault reappears after replacing the sensor, it may be caused by an operating fault on a solenoid
valve and it is therefore necessary to carry out the hydraulic check of the solenoid valves with the XR25 kit
with command G03* or G04* (consult the section "Aid"). If the ten unlocking/locking cycles do not occur
on one of the wheels, replace the hydraulic assembly.
If the hydraulic assembly is not at fault, replace the computer.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-11
38
CLIO
XB0X
Fiche n 53
9
Bargraph 9 right or left hand side flashing
Rear left or rear right wheel sensor signal
NOTES
Even if present at time of test, these faults will always be declared by BG9 flashing on the left or right hand side.
To confirm their presence and therefore the need to apply the fault finding below, carry out a road test.The fault is present if the bargraph illuminates during
the test.
If bargraphs 7 and 9 left hand side are both illuminated, deal with bargraph 7
first.
If bargraphs 7 and 9 right hand side are both illuminated, deal with bargraph 7
first.
Check the quality of the wheel speed sensor mounting (position and torque tightening).
Check the connections at the intermediate connector under the body R101.
If the connector is correct , check the resistance of the sensor at its connector.
computer connector.
memory. Leave fault finding mode(G13*) and carry out a road test.
If the fault reappears, check the conformity of the target:condition, number of teeth = 26.
If all checks are correct, erase the computer memory, leave fault finding mode and carry out a road test.
Replace the sensor if the fault reappears.
If the fault reappears after replacing sensor, it could be caused by a solenoid valve operating fault. It is
therefore necessary to carry out a hydraulic test of the solenoid valves with the XR25 kit with command
G05* or G06* (consult section"Aid"). If the ten unlocking/locking cycles do not occur on one of the
wheels, replace the hydraulic assembly.
If the hydraulic assembly is not at fault, replace the computer.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-12
CLIO
XB0X

Bargraph 10 right hand side illuminated or flashing
10
38
Fiche n 53
Pump motor circuit

XR25 aids: * 30
NOTES
1.dEF
NOTES
1.dEF
2.dEF
: Permanent signal or CO earth.

: Motor not turning over.
If bargraph 10 RH is flashing, confirm the presence of the fault and therefore the
need to apply fault finding below, using command G20* on the XR25 kit.
The fault is present if the bargraph re-illuminates at the end of the command.
Replace the computer if the pump motor is operating permanently.
Check the ABS earths (tightening of the two earth bolts above the hydraulic assembly).
Check/ ensure continuity between the ABS earth and track 16 of the computer connector.
Check locking of the two-track connector of the pump motor.
If all checks are correct, reconnect the computer and erase the memory with command G0**.
Leave fault finding mode(G13*) and carry out a road test.
Replace the computer if the fault reappears.
2.dEF
NOTES
None.
Replace the hydraulic assembly (mechanical locking of the pump, ...).
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-13
38
CLIO
XB0X

11
Fiche n 53
Solenoid valve power supply fault
NOTES
None.
Carry out operations necessary for obtaining correct voltage between tracks 19 and 17/18 of the 31-track
ABS computer connector (9.5 volts < correct voltage < 17.5 volts) :
- Check tightness and condition of battery terminals.
- Check the 60A fuse in the engine connection unit (white base).
- Ensure continuity between the 60A fuse and tracks 17 and 18 of the computer connector.
- Check the ABS earths (tightening of the two earth bolts above the hydraulic assembly).
- Check/ ensure continuity between the ABS earth and track 19 of the computer connector.
If all the checks are correct, reconnect the computer then erase its memory with command G0**.
Leave fault finding mode(G13*) and carry out a road test. Replace the computer if the fault reappears.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-14
CLIO
XB0X

12
38
Fiche n 53
Bargraph 12 left hand side illuminated or flashing
Brake light circuit
NOTES
None.
Press the brake pedal while observing right and left bargraph 13.
Are the positions "pedal released" and "pedal depressed" registered?
YES
Check the two brake light bulbs and the earth of the rear light units (no
earthing of track 14 across the bulbs when pedal is not depressed ).
NO
Apply the fault finding described in the interpretation of bargraph 13 right

and left hand side for "Bargraph 13 left hand side extinguished, brake pedal
depressed".
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-15
CLIO
XB0X

12
38
Fiche n 53
Bargraph 12 right hand side flashing
Target of one of the wheels
Even if present at moment of testing, this fault will always be declared by BG 12

RH side flashing.
NOTES
To confirm its presence and therefore the need to apply the fault finding below,
carry out a road test. The fault is present if the bargraph illuminates during the
test.
Check the quality of wheel speed sensor mountings (position and that they are tightened to the
recommended torque).
Check the conformity of the targets :condition, number of teeth= 26.
AFTER REPAIR

B65531.0
38-16
CLIO
XB0X

13
Bargraph 13 right and left
Brake pedal
NOTES
38
Illuminated on left hand side if pedal depressed.

Illuminated on right hand side if pedal not depressed.
Carry out checks only if illumination of the bargraph is not consistent with the
pedal position.
Bargraph 13 left hand side extinguished, brake pedal depressed
BG 13 right remains permanently illuminated.

If brake lights are operating :
- Ensure continuity between dashboard / rear left R2 connector on track 3 and track 14 of the ABS
computer connector .
Intermediate connection dashboard / front of engine R107 (track G7) and front of engine / ABS R255
(track 8).
If brake lights are not operating :
- Check condition and adjustment of brake light switch as well as the 15A fuse for the brake lights (on
the passenger compartment fuse board). Replace if necessary.
- Disconnect the brake light switch, then check / ensure presence of + after ignition feed on track B1
of the connector
- Check operation of brake light switch (closed contact between tracks A3 and B1).
- Check and ensure continuity between track A3 of the brake light switch connector and the dashboard
/ rear left hand side R2 connector on track 3.
Bargraph 13 permanently illuminated on left hand side
- Check the condition and adjustment of the brake light switch. Replace if necessary.
- Check the operation of the brake light switch contact (closed contact between tracks A3 and B1).
Replace the brake light switch if there is permanent continuity between the two tracks.
- Check and ensure insulation from 12 volts of the connection between track A3 of the brake light
switch connector and track 14 of the ABS computer connector .
Intermediate connectors :
Dashboard / Front of engine R107 on track G7.
Front of engine / ABS R255 on track 8.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-17
CLIO
XB0X
Fault finding - Conformity Check

NOTES
38
Only carry out this conformity check after a complete XR25 check.
Order of
operations
Function to be checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D11
(selector on
S8)
Computer conformity
#12
Operation of ABS warning

light- computer
initialisation check
Acknowledgement that
brake pedal is not
pressed
Acknowledgement that
brake pedal is pressed
Bargraph
Display and Comments
Two second illumination of warning light

when ignition is switched on (consult
fault finding if it remains illuminated or
if it does not illuminate)
Ignition on
13
Press brake
pedal
13
B65531.0
38-18
CLIO
XB0X
Fault finding - Aid
38
Solenoid valve control for hydraulic inspection: G03* to G06*

Lift vehicle so that the wheels can be turned and check that they turn freely.
Keep the brake pedal pressed down so that the wheel being tested cannot be turned by hand (do
not press the brake too hard to ensure you are at the releasing limit).
Enter G0X*
Ten cycles of unlocking/locking must be noted for the wheel concerned.
Pump motor control : G08*

Enter G08* and apply brake
Pump operation must be noted for 2 seconds.
Pump motor and solenoid valve control : G20*

Enter G20* and apply brake
Brief motor and solenoid valve operation must be noted.
Bleeding of hydraulic circuits : G15*3* front left / G15*4* front right / G15*5* rear left / G15*6* rear
right
Apply the procedure described in the section "Bleeding the circuits" in the Workshop Repair Manual.
B65531.0
38-19
CLIO
XB0X
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Fault finding - Customer Complaints
38
Only consult this section after a complete check with the XR25 kit.
NOTES
WARNING LIGHT FAULTS
ABS warning light does not illuminate for 3 seconds after ignition switched on.
Chart 1
Permanent illumination of ABS warning light , ignition on.
Chart 2
ABS and / or brake warning light illuminates again after engine starts.
Chart 3
Temporary illumination of ABS and /or brake warning light when driving.
Chart 3
Brake warning light does not illuminate 1 second after switching on ignition
Chart 4
Brake warning light permanently illuminated, ignition on.
Chart 5
ABS and brake warning lights permanently illuminated, ignition on.
Chart 6
FAULTS NOTED WHEN BRAKING WITH ABS REGULATION
Locking of one or more wheels.
Chart 7
Pulling.
Chart 8
Wandering.
Chart 9
Unexpected ABS operation at low speed and little force applied to brake.
Chart 10
Unexpected ABS operation on poor road surface.
Chart 11
Unexpected ABS operation when using special equipment

(mobile phone,CB...).
Chart 12
Extension of brake pedal travel following a regulation phase

(with an irregular pedal when regulation begins).
Chart 13
Spongy pedal.
Chart 14
Brake pedal vibration.
Chart 15
Noise from pump, pipes or hydraulic assembly .
Chart 16
B65531.0
38-20
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES

Fault finding - Customer Complaints
38
OTHER CASES
ABS and brake warning lights do not illuminate, computer disconnected.
Chart 17
No communication with ABS computer.
Chart 18
B65531.0
38-21
CLIO
XB0X

38
ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE FOR 3

SECONDS WHEN IGNITION SWITCHED ON
Chart 1
NOTES
Check the 10A instrument panel fuse on the

passenger compartment fuse board
(if the problem affects all instrument panel
operations).

Disconnect the computer, then switch on
the ignition again.
Does the ABS warning light illuminate?
yes
Carry out an inspection of the connections

on the 31 track connector.
Replace the computer if the fault persists.
no
Check condition of ABS warning light bulb

and its power supply.
Ensure continuity of connection between
track 20 of the computer connector and the
ABS warning light.
If fault persists, check the instrument panel
operation.
AFTER REPAIR
Carry out a road test, then a check with the XR25 kit.
B65531.0
38-22
CLIO
XB0X

38
ABS WARNING LIGHT PERMANENTLY ILLUMINATED

WHEN IGNITION SWITCHED ON (no fault declared by XR25)
Chart 2
NOTES
Disconnect the computer and check the

shunt positioning in the 31 track connector
(between track 19 and tracks 20 and 21).
Ensure on the computer side that a shunt
opening pin is present between tracks 19
and tracks 20 and 21 of the computer
connector.
Reconnect the computer.

Check that there is continuity between
track 10 of the R255 front of engine / ABS
connector on the ABS side, and earth.
Is continuity ensured ?
yes
Look for a fault in the shunt or a short

circuit to earth of the connection between
track 20 of the computer connector and
R255 on track 10.
no
Look for a short circuit to earth of the

connection between track 10 of
connection R255 and the ABS warning light.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-23
CLIO
XB0X

38
REILLUMINATION OF
Chart 3
NOTES
ABS AND / OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT AFTER

STARTING THE ENGINE
TEMPORARY ILLUMINATION OF ABS AND / OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT
WHEN DRIVING
Check the voltage of the computer power supply : 9.5 volts < correct voltage < 17.5 volts.
If necessary, carry out the following operations :
- Check the battery charge (check the charging circuit if necessary).
- Check the ABS earths (tightness of two earth bolts above the ABS assembly).
Disconnect the computer and check the condition and the positioning of the shunt in the 31 track
connector (between track 19 and tracks 20 and 21).
Check on the computer side, the condition of the shunt opening pin.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-24
CLIO
XB0X

38
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE 1

SECOND AFTER SWITCHING ON IGNITION
Chart 4
NOTES

Disconnect the computer then switch on the
ignition again.
Does the brake warning light illuminate?
yes
Check the connections on the computer

connector.
Replace the computer if the fault persists.
no
Check the condition of the brake warning

light bulb and its power supply.
Ensure continuity of the connection
between track 21 on the computer
connector and the warning light.
If the fault persists, check the operation of
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-25
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 5
38
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT PERMANENTLY ILLUMINATED,

IGNITION ON
NOTES
This warning light is multi-purpose.

- Check the position of the handbrake and the circuit for its switch.
- Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.
- Check the brake pad wear.
Ensure the insulation in relation to earth of the connection between track 21 on the computer connector
and the brake warning light.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-26
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 6
38
ABS AND BRAKE WARNING LIGHTS PERMANENTLY

ILLUMINATED, IGNITION ON.
NOTES
Check the 10A ABS fuse on the passenger compartment fuse board.
Check the ABS earths (tightness of two earth bolts above the ABS assembly).
Check the computer and the intermediate connections R107 dashboard / front of engine and R255 front
of engine / ABS are correctly connected (also check the condition of the connections).
Check that the computer is correctly fed:
- Ensure the presence of + after ignition feed on track 15 of the computer connector.
- Ensure the continuity to earth of tracks 16 and 19 on the computer connector.
If the fault persists, refer to Chart 2 and Chart 5.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-27
CLIO
XB0X
38
LOCKING OF ONE OR MORE WHEELS

Chart 7
NOTES
Wheel locking on a vehicle equipped with ABS, or tyre squeal, considered by the customer
as locking, can be linked to a normal reaction of the system and should not be systematically considered as a fault :
- locking is allowed below 3.75 mph ( 6 km/h) (the system will not provide regulation).
- Braking with ABS regulation under very bad road conditions (high degree of tyre squeal).
- -----------------------------------------
REMINDER:
On the other hand, if there really is wheel locking on one or more wheels, lift the vehicle so the wheels
can be turned, and check :
- a possible incorrect connection in the speed sensor connection.
Use operations #01, #02, #03 and #04 while turning the appropriate wheel and ensure the consistency of the results obtained .
If the value measured is zero, turn the other wheels to confirm a bad electrical connection of the sensors and repair the wiring.
- A possible incorrect connection of the hydraulic assembly pipes.
Use operations G03*, G04*, G05* and G06* while applying the brake and check for the ten cycles of
unlocking/locking on the wheel concerned (consult section "Aid").
If the ten cycles do not occur on the wheel tested, (wheel remains locked), see if they occur on another wheel (if a bad connection is confirmed: repair).
If the ten cycles do not occur on a wheel and the pipes are correctly connected, replace the hydraulic
assembly.
Check the condition of the ABS targets and that they conform.
Also check the sensor/target air gap by rotating each of the front wheels (the rear wheels cannot be
checked) :
Front 0.1 mm < air gap over one rotation < 1.9 mm.
If the fault persists after these checks, replace the hydraulic assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-28
CLIO
XB0X

Chart 8
38
PULLING
NOTES
Disconnect a wheel speed sensor.

Start the engine and make sure only the
ABS warning light illuminates. If the brake
warning light illuminates too, do not drive
the vehicle as the brake limiter function is
no longer ensured.
Carry out a road test with the ABS nonoperational.
Does the fault persist under these
conditions?
yes
If the pedal travel is relatively long, bleed

the brake circuit.
If it is normal, check the tyre pressure, the
front axle assembly
or possibly for leaks in the circuit.
no
Lift the vehicle so the wheels can be turned

and check for :
- a possible incorrect connection in the
speed sensors,
- a possible incorrect connection of the
hydraulic assembly piping.
For these two checks, consult and apply the
methods defined in Fault Chart 7.Check the
condition of the ABS targets and that they
conform. Also check the sensor/ target air
gap by rotating each front wheel.
If the fault persists, replace the hydraulic
assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-29
CLIO
XB0X

Chart 9
38
WANDERING
NOTES
Disconnect a wheel speed sensor.

Start the engine and make sure only the
ABS warning light illuminates. If the brake
warning light illuminates too, do not drive
the vehicle as the brake limiter function is
no longer ensured.
Carry out a road test with the ABS nonoperational.
Does the fault persist under these
conditions?
yes
Handling fault not linked to ABS system.

Check the condition and conformity of
brake linings, check tyre pressures, front
axle assembly, ...
no
Normal behaviour linked to system

operation in the regulation phase
essentially because of asymmetrical grip or
poor road surface.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-30
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 10
NOTES
38
UNEXPECTED ABS OPERATION AT LOW SPEEDS AND

WHEN LITTLE PRESSURE APPLIED TO BRAKE PEDAL
It is possible to feel brake pedal vibrations which are linked to reactions of the system in particular
situations :
- Crossing speed bumps.
- Rear inside wheel lifts on tight bends.
This feeling may be connected to the simple action of the brake limiter when pressure is limited at the rear
axle assembly.
If the problem is different, check the speed sensors connectors ( micro-breaks) as well as the air gaps.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-31
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 11
NOTES
38
UNEXPECTED ABS OPERATION

UNDER POOR ROAD CONDITIONS
Under poor road conditions, it is normal to feel jerky operation and vibration of the pedal and a higher
degree of tyre squeal than on a good road surface.
This results in a feeling that there is variation in efficiency, but this is normal.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-32
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 12
NOTES
38
UNEXPECTED ABS OPERATION WHEN USING SPECIAL

EQUIPMENT (MOBILE PHONE,CB...)
Check that equipment causing the problem during use is approved.

Check that this equipment has been correctly installed without modification to the original wiring, in
particular, that of the ABS (connections to earth and + after ignition/ before ignition of the ABS are not
permitted).
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-33
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 13
NOTES
38
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL EXTENDED FOLLOWING A

REGULATION PHASE
(WITH IRREGULAR PEDAL AT START OF REGULATION)
Passage of air from the hydraulic assembly regulation channels to brake circuits.
Bleed the circuits according to the procedure recommended in the Workshop Repair Manual (use of XR25
command modes.).
After the operation, carry out a road test with ABS regulation.
If the fault persists, carry out the preceding operation once or twice more.
If customer complaint is particularly serious and bleeding brings about no improvement, replace the
hydraulic assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-34
CLIO
XB0X

Chart 14
NOTES
38
SPONGY PEDAL
Presence of air in the brake circuits.

Bleed the circuits in the conventional way starting with the rear right, then rear left , front left then front
right.
Repeat the operation if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-35
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 15
NOTES
38
BRAKE PEDAL VIBRATION
Normal reaction of the brake pedal during an ABS regulation phase or pressure limitation at the rear axle
assembly ("brake limiter" function).
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-36
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 16
NOTES
38
NOISE FROM THE PUMP, PIPES OR HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
- Assembly vibration: check the presence and condition of the rubber assembly mounting pads.
- Vibration of pipes : check that all pipes are well clipped into their fixing clips and that there is no contact
between pipes or between pipes and bodywork.
To determine the origin of the noise, it is possible to use functions G03*, G04*, G05* and G06* on the XR25
kit (consult section "Aid").
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-37
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 17
NOTES
38
ABS AND BRAKE WARNING LIGHTS DO NOT ILLUMINATE,

COMPUTER DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the ABS computer .

Check if the shunt is present between track 19 and tracks 20 and 21 of the computer connector.
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-38
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 18
NOTES
38
LACK OF COMMUNICATION WITH

ABS COMPUTER
Check that the XR25 kit is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with the computer of another vehicle. If the XR25 kit is not at fault and it will not communicate with any other computer in the
same vehicle, it is possible that a faulty computer is corrupting fault finding lines K and L . Locate this
computer by disconnecting the lines one by one.
Check that the ISO interface is correctly in position S8 and that you are using the most recent XR25
cassette and the correct access code.
Check the battery voltage and carry out the necessary operations to obtain the correct voltage(9.5
Volts< U battery<17.5 Volts)
Check the presence and condition of the ABS fuse on the passenger compartment fuse board (10A).
Check the connection of the computer connector and the condition of its connection.
Check the connection and condition of the connections at the intermediate connection R107 dashboard /
front of engine and R255 front of engine / ABS.
Check the ABS earth wires (tighten the two earth screws above the ABS assembly).
- earth on track 19 of the 31 track connector,
- + after ignition feed on track 15 of the 31track connector.

- + before ignition feed on track 16,
- earth on track 5.
Check the continuity and insulation of the lines in the diagnostic socket / ABS computer connection:
- between track 12 of the computer connector and track 15 of the diagnostic socket,
- between track 11 of the computer connector and track 7 of the diagnostic socket.
If dialogue is still not established after these tests, replace the ABS computer.,
AFTER REPAIR
B65531.0
38-39
AIR CONDITIONING
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
..............................................................
04
15
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
CLIO
XB0X
AIR CONDITIONING
Connect the XR25 to the diagnostic socket.
ISO selector in position S8
Using fiche 61, enter code D17
62
n.61
PRECAUTION :
Conditions apply to the illumination of the warning lights on the control panel:
-
The AC warning light illuminates when there is a request for air conditioning operation and when the fan
is set to the first speed.
The air recycling warning light illuminates under no particular conditions. It is memorised when the
ignition is switched off.
The heated rear screen warning light illuminates when engine speed > 600 rpm and there is a time limit
of 15 minutes for operation of the heated screen. The function is not memorised when the ignition is
switched off.
c13011.1
62-1
CLIO
XB0X
AIR CONDITIONING
62
FI21761
c13011.1
62-2
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
BARGRAPH SYMBOLS
FAULTS (always on a coloured background)
If illuminated, this indicates a fault on the product tested. The associated text
defines the fault.
The bargraph may be :
- Permanently illuminated
: fault present.
- Flashing
: fault memorised.
- Extinguished
: no fault or fault not found.
STATUS (always on a white background)
Bargraph always at the top right hand side.

If illuminated dialogue has been established with the computer for the product.
If it remains extinguished:
- There is a fault with the tool, the computer or the XR25 / computer connection.
or

Indefinite
illuminated when the function or condition on
the fiche is met.
Extinguished
Illuminated
extinguishes when the function or condition

specified on the fiche is no longer being met.
ADDITIONAL NOTES
Certain bargraphs have a *. The *.. command, when the bargraph is illuminated,
c13011.1
62-3
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Left hand bargraph 1 illuminated
62
Fiche n 61
COMPUTER FAULT
NOTES
None
Change the air conditioning control unit
AFTER REPAIR
Enter G0** on the XR25.

Check that the system operates correctly.
c13011.1
62-4
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Right hand bargraph 1 extinguished
Fiche n 61
XR25 / CONTROL UNIT COMMUNICATION
NOTES
None
Before establishing communication between the XR25 and the control unit, check that the ignition is
switched on.
Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with a computer on another
vehicle.
Check that the ISO interface is in position S8 and that you are using the latest version of the XR25 cassette
and the correct access code (D 17).
Check the battery voltage (U > 10.5 volts). Recharge the battery if necessary.
Check that the control unit connectors are engaged correctly.
Check that the air conditioning control unit is correctly supplied:
- earth on track 4 of the red 15 track connector
- + after ignition on track 6 of the red 15 track connector
Check that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied:
track K
track L
track 6
track 3
of the air conditioning control unit

grey 30 track connector
If there is still no dialogue between the XR25 and the control unit, change the air conditioning control
unit.
AFTER REPAIR
You may begin the fault finding procedure.

c13011.1
62-5
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
REFRIGERANT FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR

XR25 aid :
NOTES
*02 : 2 def = low level (CC.0)

1 def = high level (CO, CC.1)
None
Low level
Check that the refrigerant fluid pressure sensor connector is correctly engaged.
Engage the connector correctly if necessary.
Check the condition of the wiring between tracks A, B and C on the sensor and tracks 9, 10 and 11 of the
30 track connector for the air conditioning control unit (the sensor is supplied with 5V).
Repair the faulty electrical wiring.
If the fault persists, replace the refrigerant fluid pressure sensor.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-6
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Right hand bargraph 2 illuminated
Fiche n 61
EVAPORATOR SENSOR
XR25 aid :
NOTES
*22 : 2 def = high level (CO, CC.1)

1 def = low level (CC.0)
Timed period at level of sensor temperature measurement.
Check that the evaporator sensor connector is correctly clipped into the resistance module.
Reconnect it if necessary.
Check the condition of the wiring between tracks 7 and 8 of the 15 track connector and tracks 12 and 29
of the grey 30 track connector of the air conditioning control unit.
Repair the faulty wiring.
Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance of the evaporator sensor. You should measure a resistance
between 2 and 30 kohms.
Do you measure this resistance?
YES
Replace the air conditioning control unit.
NO
Replace the evaporator sensor.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-7
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
XR25 aid :
NOTES
C.O. open circuit

C.C.1 short circuit to 12 volts
Before any removal, enter G0** on the XR25 and reinitialise the system.
Check the continuity and that there is no short circuit on the wiring between track 1 of the clutch and
tracks 2 and 17 of the grey 30 track connector of the air conditioning control unit.
Repair the wiring if necessary.
Supply the compressor directly with 12 Volts and check that it operates.
Replace the compressor if necessary.
If the fault persists, replace the air conditioning control unit.
AFTER REPAIR
Check the system operates correctly by entering G21* on the XR25 (direct
compressor control).
c13011.1
62-8
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
AIR RECYCLING MOTOR
NOTES
None
Check that the evaporator sensor connector is correctly clipped into the resistance module.
Check the condition of the air recycling flap control motor.
On the motor connector, measure the resistance between the two tracks.
Replace the recycling motor if necessary.
Check the continuity and insulation from earth and from 12 Volts of the wiring between tracks:
resistance module
connector
2
1
30 track blue connector for air

conditioning control unit
27
26

If the fault persists, replace the air conditioning control unit.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-9
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
HEATED REAR SCREEN CONTROL

XR25 aid :
NOTES
C.O. open circuit

Before any removal, enter G0** on the XR25 and restart the system.
Check the electric wiring between track 3 on the control panel and the heated rear screen relay and
between track 24 of the 30 track connector for the air conditioning control unit and the rear screen relay.
Check the rear screen relay feed (12 V on tracks 1, 3 and 5 ; 0 V on track 2).
Replace the relay if necessary.
Check the continuity of the wiring between the relay and the rear screen.
If the fault persists, check the resistance of the rear screen and repair the screen if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-10
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
FAN (2) CONTROL

XR25 aid :
NOTES
C.O. open circuit

Check that the air conditioning has been selected. Check that right hand bargraph
6 is extinguished, if it is not, deal with right hand bargraph 6 first. Enter G0** on
the XR25. If left hand bargraph 6 remains illuminated, you can begin the fault
finding procedure.
Check the relay operation by entering G23* on the XR25. The fan should be heard to operate.
Can the fan be heard to operate?
NO
Check the continuity and insulation in relation to 12 volts of the wiring between
track F2 and track 23 of the 30 track connector for the air conditioning control
unit.
If the fault persists, replace the relay for fan 2.
YES
AFTER REPAIR
End of fault finding.

c13011.1
62-11
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Fiche n 61
FAN (1) CONTROL

XR25 aid :
NOTES
C.O. open circuit

Check that the air conditioning has been selected.Enter G0** on the XR25.
If right hand bargraph 6 remains illuminated, you can begin the fault finding
procedure.
Check the relay operation by entering G23* on the XR25. The fan should be heard to operate.
Can the fan be heard to operate?
NO
Check the continuity and insulation in relation to 12 volts of the wiring between
track M2 and track 22 of the 30 track connector for the air conditioning control
unit.
If the fault persists, replace the relay for fan 1.
YES
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-12
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
13
62
Fiche n 61
AIR CONDITIONING PROHIBITED BY INJECTION
NOTES
This bargraph should be extinguished when the engine is running.

If it is illuminated, you can begin the fault finding procedure.
The evaporator temperature must be > - 1 C and BG 14 LH and 14 RH must be
extinguished.
First check that the air conditioning has been selected (selection on the control panel).
Check the continuity of the wiring between:

- track 5 on the injection computer and track 13 of the 30 track AC computer connector for engines D7F
720, E7J, K7M AT4 (AP information)
726 (AP information).
Check the continuity of the wiring between:
720 and E7J,
- track 10 on the injection computer and track 18 of the 30 track AC computer connector for engines
D7F 726.
If the problem persists, check the injection fault finding procedure, as it is a problem related to the
injection.
AFTER REPAIR
Check the system operates correctly.

c13011.1.0
62-13
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
13
Fiche n 61
AIR CONDITIONING PROHIBITED BY AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTES
This bargraph should be extinguished when the engine is running.

If it is illuminated, you can begin the fault finding procedure.
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between :

- track 51 of the AT computer and track 19 of the 30 track AC computer connector for engines K7M.
If the problem persists, check the automatic transmission fault finding procedure, as it is a problem
related to the automatic transmission.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1.0
62-14
CLIO
XB0X
AIR CONDITIONING
62
Air distribution problem
Chart 1
Air flow problem
Chart 2
Heating not effective
Chart 3
No heat
Chart 4
Too much heat
Chart 5
Heating inadequate in the rear
Chart 6
Demisting/deicing ineffective
Chart 7
Heated rear screen does not operate
Chart 8
Ventilation ineffective
Chart 9
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT INCONVENIENCE
Controls stiff
Chart 10
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FAN DOES NOT OPERATE
Chart 11
AIR RECYCLING DOES NOT OPERATE BUT THE WARNING LIGHT OPERATES
Chart 12
AIR CONDITIONING PROBLEMS
No cold air
Chart 13
Too much cold air
Chart 14
Ineffective
Chart 15
COOLING FAN DOES NOT OPERATE
Chart 16
c13011.1
62-15
CLIO
XB0X
AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONING WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
AIR RECYCLING WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
62
Chart 17
Chart 18
Chart 19
REAR SCREEN WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
c13011.1
62-16
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 1
62
AIR DISTRIBUTION PROBLEMS
Before carrying out any work, check that the customer uses the air conditioning
correctly.
Non regulated air conditioning.
NOTES
Place the passenger compartment

fan on full, temperature control on
maximum heat or maximum cold,
and move the air distribution control.
Check that the air output
corresponds to the selection.
Is it correct?
yes
The air distribution is correct.

If necessary, explain how the system works to
the customer again.
yes
Check the adjustment of the air distribution

flap control cable.
no
Check visually or by touch, on the right hand
side of the air distribution unit,
that moving the control
moves the sprockets
and the lever.
Do they move?
In the case of a ventilation problem,

check the ventilation ducts
and the vents.
no
If the fault persists,

remove the air distribution unit and
check the distribution flaps.
Repair or change the assembly.
Check the connection of the cable

to the air distribution unit and the control
panel and check the condition of the cable
and its retention. Is it correct?
no
Change the control cable

or repair the connection of the cable (clip)
or change the faulty part
(control panel or distribution unit).
yes
A
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-17
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 1
CONT
Check the condition of the gears (sprockets,

levers...) on the air distribution unit and the
control panel.
Is it correct?
no
Repair if possible,
otherwise change the distribution unit or the
control panel.
yes
Remove the air distribution unit and check
the distribution flaps.
Repair or change the unit.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-18
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 2
62
AIR FLOW PROBLEM
correctly.
NOTES
Does the passenger compartment fan

operate?
no
See Chart 11
no
Repair or clean or change

the particle filter.
no
End of fault finding
yes
See Chart 1
yes
Check the air intake circuit, scuttle panel
grille, particle filter, rain shield.
Are they correct?
yes
Check that the air extraction circuit
is not blocked.
Does the fault persist?
yes
Is it a passenger compartment
air distribution problem?
no
Remove the heater radiator.
It must be blocked, clean or change it
(only valid for vehicles which have been
driven without the particle filter).
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-19
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 3
62
HEATING INEFFECTIVE
correctly.
NOTES
Carry out a road test to observe the customer

complaints.
Is the test satisfactory?
yes
Advise the customer how to use the heating

system correctly
(eg. : Do not place the passenger
compartment fan on full when starting from
cold, turn it up gradually instead).
no
Visually check that
the action of the control moves
the mixing flap.
Does the flap move?
no
See Chart 1.
yes
Visually check
whether the flap travel is complete.
Is it complete?
no
Readjust the control cable

(cable which controls the sprockets to the
right of the air distribution unit).
no
yes
Check the cooling circuit
(correct filling and bleeding),
the condition of the circuit
(pipes,connections, conformity
of the circuit...).
yes
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-20
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 3
CONT
Check the stiffness of the hose.
no
Replace the thermostat
no
no
yes
Check that there is no unwanted intake of

cold air into the passenger compartment
(seals, grommets, cables ...).
yes
Check the air inlets (particle filter)
and outlets.
Partially blocked air inlets or outlets
reduce the flow of heated air
into the
passenger compartment.
yes
The heater radiator must be blocked. Remove
the radiator and clean or change it
(only valid for vehicles which have been
driven without the particle filter).
AFTER REPAIR
Check that components that have been disconnected are correctly reconnected.
c13011.1
62-21
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 4
62
NO HEAT
correctly.
NOTES
Is it an air flow problem?
yes
See Chart 2
no
no
See Chart 1
no
no
Check the level of coolant in the cooling
circuit.
NOTE: if the coolant level is too low, the circuit may become unprimed when driving at
low load and at idle.
yes
Visually check that moving the control
moves the mixing flap.
Does it move?
yes
Check the coolant circuit.
NOTE: fitting an oil, water or air cooler which
has not been approved by the research centre

and which is incorrectly connected may reduce or even stop the flow of coolant in the
heater radiator.
Repair the coolant circuit if necessary.
yes
Remove the heater radiator.
Clean or change it if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-22
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 5
62
TOO MUCH HEAT
correctly.
NOTES
Visually check that moving the control

moves the mixing flap.
Does it move?
no
See Chart 1.
no
Readjust the cable

(to the right of the air distribution unit).
yes
See Chart 12
yes
Check that the flap travel
is complete.
Is the travel complete?
yes
Check the operation
of the recycling flap.
Is it jammed in the recycling position?
no
Check the operation
of the engine coolant thermostat.
Change the thermostat if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR

c13011.1
62-23
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 6
62
HEATING INADEQUATE IN THE REAR
None
NOTES
Check that the air inlets at the rear of the

centre console are not blocked.
(floor carpet...).
Are they correct?
no
Clear the air outlets.
yes
Remove the centre console and check
that the connection and sealing between the
air distribution unit and the heating duct to
the rear seats is correct.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-24
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 7
62
DEMISTING/DEICING INEFFECTIVE
Check that the windows are clean on the inside.

NOTES
Check that the air extractors

are not blocked.
no
no
yes
See Chart 1
yes
See Chart 2
yes
See Chart 3
yes
Ensure that there are no water leaks into the
passenger compartment which would
significantly increase the humidity level and
reduce the effectiveness of the demisting.
Locate the leak and repair it.
yes
Is it an air distribution problem?
no
no
Is it a heating effectiveness problem?
no
Check that the recycling flap is not jammed in
the recycling air position
(see CHART 12).
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-25
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 8
62
HEATED REAR SCREEN DOES NOT OPERATE
Bargraphs 10 RH and 10 LH must be illuminated and bargraph 5 LH must be

extinguished.
The engine speed must be higher than 600 rpm.
NOTES
Check the wiring between track 12 on the

control panel connector and track 10 on the
15 track connector for the air conditioning
control unit.
Is the wiring in good condition?
no
yes
Check the condition of the fuse.
Is the fuse in good condition?
no
Replace the fuse.
no
no
Replace the relay.
yes
Check for 12 Volts on track 3 of the heated
rear screen relay.
Is there 12 Volts ?
yes
Check for 12 Volts on track 5 of the heated
rear screen relay.
Is there 12 Volts ?
yes
Check the condition of the wiring between
track 5 of the relay and the heated rear
screen. Is the wiring in good condition?
no
yes
Measure the resistance of the heated rear
screen and repair the screen if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-26
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 9
62
VENTILATION INEFFECTIVE
None.
NOTES
yes
See Chart 2.
yes
See Chart 1.
yes
no
Is it an air distribution problem?
no
Check that the mixing flap
travel is complete.
Is is correct?
no
Readjust the cable.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-27
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
STIFFNESS OF THE CONTROLS

(passenger compartment inconvenience)
Chart 10
None.
NOTES
Check the travel of the control cable.

Remove any constraints
on it:
- folding,
- cable clamped with plastic clips.
Change it if necessary.
no
no
Change the control panel or repair the

kinematic of the flap or change the air
distribution unit.
yes
Unclip the cable from the side
of the unit and check the stiffness of
movement of each component, control
button and flap control
on the air distribution unit.
Is it correct?
yes
Change the flap control cable.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-28
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 11
62
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FAN DOES NOT OPERATE
correctly.
NOTES
Check fuses, +battery, +fuse board, +side

lights. Are the fuses in good condition?
no
Change the faulty fuse(s).
yes
no
no
Change the control panel.
yes
With the ignition on and the air conditioning
selected, position the fan at the various
speeds and check the correct operation
of the ventilation?
Is operation normal?
no
Check the connections between the fuses and
the control panel tracks A5 and A4.
yes
Check the presence of 12 V
on the tracks of the control panel connector:
A1
speed 4
B1
speed 3
B4
speed 2
B5
speed 1
Is there 12 V ?
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-29
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 11
CONT
A
On the passenger compartment fan resistance
module check for 12 Volts on tracks:
3
speed 1
4
speed 2
5
speed 3
12
speed 4
Is there 12 V ?
no
Repair the wiring between the control panel

and the passenger compartment fan.
no
Reclip the connector.
no
Repair the wiring.
yes
Replace the resistance module.
yes
Check that the 2 track connector is correctly
clipped on the fan motor.
Is this correct?
yes
Check on the passenger compartment fan
resistance motor for 0 Volt on tracks 14 and
15. Is there 0 Volt ?
yes
Does the passenger compartment fan operate
on speed 4 and not speeds 1, 2, 3?
no
Does the passenger compartment fan operate
on speeds 1, 2, 3 and not speed 4?
yes
Check for 12 Volts on tracks 10 and 11 of the

resistance module connector.
Replace the fuse BP1.
no
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-30
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 11
CONT
B
Replace the resistance module.
no
yes
Replace the fan assembly.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-31
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
AIR RECYCLING DOES NOT OPERATE BUT THE WARNING LIGHT OPERATES
Chart 12
correctly.
NOTES
First of all check the condition of fuses

+battery, + fuse board, +after ignition.
Change them if necessary.
Press the air recycling key.

The warning light illuminates.
Check the recycling motor operates.
Is this correct?
yes
yes
Replace the recycling motor.
no
Measure the voltage between tracks 1 and 2
of the resistance module in the 15 seconds
following pressing the recycling key.
Is a voltage of 12 Volts measured?
no
Check the insulation and continuity of the
electrical wiring between:
30 track
connector
26
27
1
2
motor
connector
no

yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-32
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62

No cold air
Chart 13

The passenger compartment fan operates.
Check that bargraphs 2RH, 2LH and 4LH are extinguished.
NOTES
First of all check the condition of fuses

+battery, + fuse board, +after ignition.
yes
Check for the presence of + 12 Volts ACC on
track 5 on the red 15 track air conditioning
computer connector (BG 7LH).
Is there 12 Volts ?
no
Repair the wiring between the fuse and track

5 of the connector.
no
Repair the wiring between the fuse and track

1 of the connector.
no
Repair the wiring between track 4 of the grey

connector and track 9 of the resistance
module connector.
yes
Check for the presence of + 12 Volts after
ignition on track 1 on the grey 30 track air
conditioning computer connector.
Is there 12 Volts ?
yes
Connect the XR25, set the fan to speed 2 and
enter #08.
Is the value read greater than 7?
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-33
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 13
CONT
62

No cold air

NOTES
A
Check that the air conditioning warning light
illuminated on the control panel
when the key is pressed.
Does the warning light illuminate?
no
See Chart 17.
yes
Replace the refrigerant fluid.
yes
See Chart 13A.
yes
Check that bargraphs 13LH and 13RH are
extinguished. The injection or automatic
transmission is preventing
air conditioning operation.
Are these bargraphs extinguished?
no
Connect the XR25 and check that bargraphs
14 LH and 14 RH are extinguished.
Is this correct?
no
Check the connections between:
air
9
A
fluid
conditioning
10
B
pressure
computer
11
C
sensor
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-34
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62

No cold air
Chart 13 A

Check that bargraphs 2RH, 2LH and 4LH are extinguished.
NOTES
Air conditioning operating, fan on maximum

speed, connect the XR25 and enter #03.
Check that the evaporator temperature does
not remain below - 1 C.
Is this correct?
no
Replace the evaporator sensor.
yes
yes
Connect the XR25 and enter G21*
(compressor clutch direct control).
Does the compressor engage?
no
Check the wiring between :
air
2
1
conditioning
compressor
computer
17
1
no
yes
Directly supply the compressor with 12 Volts
on track 1.
Does the compressor engage?
no
Replace the compressor.
yes
Replace the air conditioning computer.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-35
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62

Too much cold air
Chart 14
correctly.
NOTES
Is the fan always operating?

(normal if high pressure 20 bars)
yes
Check the refrigerant circuit pressures using

the XR25 or pressure gauges.
The fan operates if the high pressure 20
bars and stops if the pressure 15 bars.
If the pressures are correct, change
the pressure sensor, otherwise, replace the
fluid in the refrigerant circuit.
no
Check that the recycling flap does not remain
in the air recycling position.
Operate the control button
and check that the flap moves.
Does it move?
no
See Chart 12.
no
See Chart 1.
no
Readjust the cable.
yes
Check that the action of the
heater control
moves the flap.
Does it move?
yes
Visually check that
the flap travel is complete.
Is it correct?
yes
Change the fan.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-36
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62

Ineffectiveness
Chart 15
correctly.
NOTES
Check the tension of the compressor belt, the

clutch air gap and its condition.
Retension the belt or change
the compressor clutch.
no
no
See Chart 12.
no
yes
See Chart 2 or Chart 11.
yes
Ensure that the recycling flap is in the
recycling position in air conditioning recycling
mode. Is it in this position?
yes
Check that the flap travel is complete,
readjust the cable if necessary.
yes
no
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-37
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 15
CONT
With the vehicle stationary, engine running

at idle, air conditioning on maximum,
measure the pressure of the refrigerant
circuit.
If the pressure is > 28 bars, there is :
- too little fluid,
- or the operation of the fan is abnormal,
- or the condenser is clogged,
- or the engine heats up too much.
Is the pressure < 28 bars ?
no
no
See Chart 15.
yes
Check the cleanness of the
condenser wiring harness.
Clean or change the condenser.
If the fault persists, check the operation of

the cooling fan at high speed
(ventilation and air conditioning
on maximum).
It should be:
- operating if high pressure
20 bars
- stopped if high pressure
15 bars
Is the operation of the fan normal?
yes
Clean the circuit and replace the refrigerant
fluid.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-38
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62

Ineffectiveness
Chart 15A
correctly.
NOTES
Check the operation of the cooling fan

assembly.
Connect the XR25 and enter G22*
and G23* (direct fan control).
Does the fan operate at low
and high speeds?
no
Check the wiring between tracks 22 and 23 of

the air conditioning computer and the fan
assembly. Repair if necessary.
If the fault persists, replace the fan assembly.
yes
Check the pressure of the refrigerant circuit.

The fan should:
- operate for a pressure
10 bars,
- stop for a pressure
7 bars.
Is this correct?
yes
no
Check the wiring between:
air
9
1
pressure
conditioning
10
4
sensor
computer
11
5
connector
and between the connector and the sensor.
no
yes
Replace the pressure sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-39
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
COOLING FAN DOES NOT OPERATE
Chart 16

The compressor operates.
NOTES
Check the condition of the fuses.

Connect the XR25 and enter G22* and G23*.

Does the fan operate at both speeds?
yes
See Chart 16A
no
Check the continuity and insulation in
relation to 12 Volts of the wiring
between:
air
22
K2
slow speed
conditioning
relay
computer
23
F2
high speed
relay
no
yes
Check the presence of 12 volts on tracks 1 and
3 of the low speed and high speed relays.
Is there 12 Volts?
no
yes
Check the presence of 12 volts on track 5 of
the low speed and high speed relays.
Is there 12 Volts?
no
Replace the faulty relay/s.
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-40
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 16
CONT
Check that the fan is correctly supplied with

12 volts and 0 volts.
Is this correct?
no
Repair.
For slow speed, check the resistance in series
with the motor.
no
Replace the fan assembly.
yes
Directly supply the fan assembly with 12 Volts
and check it operates.
Does the fan assembly operate?
yes
Replace the air conditioning computer.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-41
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 16
CONT 1
Air conditioning requested and fan on

maximum, check the pressure of the
refrigerant circuit with the XR25 by entering
#16 (engine idling).
- The fan should operate at slow speed for a
pressure 10 bars,
- The fan should operate at high speed for a
pressure 20 bars.
Are the pressure values correct?
yes
no
Replace the refrigerant fluid sensor.
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-42
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 17
+ after ignition feed
NOTES
Check the condition of the + after ignition

feed fuse. Replace it if necessary.
Connect the XR25 and check that when the

key is pressed, bargraph 8LH illuminates.
Is this correct?
no
See Chart 17A
yes
With the XR25 still connected, enter G26*
(warning lights control).
yes
no
track 10 on the control panel connector and
track 7 on the red air conditioning control
unit connector.
no
yes
If bargraph 8 LH is illuminated, check for 0
Volts on track 10 of the control panel
connector.
Is there 0 Volts?
no
yes
Replace the control panel
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-43
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 17A
NOTES
Check for the presence of 12 Volts on track 4

of the control panel.
Is there 12 Volts?
no
Repair the wiring between the fuse

and track 4.
no
Replace the control panel.
yes
Keep the air conditioning key depressed and
check for 12 Volts on track 9 of the control
panel connector.
Is there 12 Volts?
yes
track 2 on the 15 track air conditioning
control unit connector.
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-44
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 18
NOTES


Is this correct?
no
See Chart 18A
yes
yes
no
unit connector.
no
yes
connector.
Is there 0 Volts?
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-45
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
Chart 18A
+after ignition feed
NOTES

Is there 12 Volts ?
no

and track 4.
no
yes
panel connector.
Is there 12 Volts?
yes
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-46
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
HEATED REAR SCREEN WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Chart 19
NOTES


Is this correct?
no
See Chart 19A
yes
yes
no
unit connector.
no
yes
connector.
Is there 0 Volts?
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-47
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIO
XB0X
62
HEATED REAR SCREEN WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Chart 19A
NOTES

Is there 12 Volts ?
no

and track 4.
no
yes
panel connector.
Is there 12 Volts?
yes
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
c13011.1
62-48
CLIO
XB0X
AIR CONDITIONING
Fault finding - Aid
62
ADDITIONAL TESTS
COMMAND MODE G--*
To use this function, enter G on the XR25 keypad, then the number of the command selected followed by
an asterisk.
G20* : heated rear screen control
G21* : compressor clutch control
G22* : fan low speed control
G23* : fan high speed control
G24* : recycling motor control
G26* : control panel warning lights control
G13* : End of fault finding
COMMAND MODE #
# 03 : evaporator temperature
# 08 : fan assembly speed
# 15 : engine speed
# 16 : refrigerant fluid pressure in the circuit
c13011.1
62-49
IMMOBILISER
FAULT FINDING
SUMMARY
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
04
..............................................................
Customer complaints (petrol version)
..........................................................
11
...................................................................
12
Customer complaints (diesel version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Fault charts (diesel version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Conformity check
............................................................................
30
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
Fault charts (petrol version)
NOTE
The decoder unit is incorporated inthe multi-timer unit (BMT).
CLIO
XB0X
IMMOBILISER
82
INSTALLATION OF XR25 DIALOGUE / MULTI-TIMER UNIT
ISO selector on S8
Enter D56
n.56
IMPORTANT:
If there is a dialogue problem with the XR25 during fault finding on the immobiliser system for diesel
vehicles, it will be necessary to disconnect the injection computer or the injection relay fuse during the test.
PRECAUTION
When carrying out the test using a multimeter, avoid using a test pin on connectors where the test pin is
of a size which could damage the clips and lead to a poor contact.
Pay attention to key head numbers.

ERASING THE MEMORY
After repairing the immobiliser system, enter G0** on the keyboard of the XR25 kit to proceed with
erasing the memorised fault.
a3011.0
82-1
CLIO
XB0X
IMMOBILISER
Fault finding- XR25 Fiche
82
FI21756
a3011.0
82-2
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
DESCRIPTION OF BARGRAPHS
Illuminates when dialogue is established with the product computer, if it remains extinguished :
- there is a line , computer or tool fault.
REPRESENTATION OF FAULTS (always on coloured background)
Illuminated, indicates a fault on the part tested, the associated text defines the fault.
Extinguished, indicates non-detection of fault on the product tested.
REPRESENTATION OF STATUS (always on white background)

Engine stopped, ignition on, no operator action
Status Bargraphs on the fiche are shown as they should appear, engine stopped, ignition on, without
operator action
the kit should show
- If on the fiche, the Bargraph is shown as
the kit should show

either
the kit should show
or
Engine running
Extinguished when operation or condition specified on the fiche is no longer met.
Illuminated when operation or condition specified on the fiche is met.
a3011.0
82-3
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Fiche n 56
XR25 / MULTI-TIMER UNIT COMMUNICATION
NOTES
Check that lines K and L are not being disrupted by another computer.
Check the condition of the + before ignition fuse.

Replace the fuse if necessary.
Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with another computer on
the vehicle (air conditioning computer, injection computer,...).
Check that the ISO interface is in position S8, that you are using the latest XR25 cassette and the correct
access code (D 56).
Check that the yellow multi-timer unit connector is correctly connected.
Check that the multi-timer unit is correctly fed:
- earth on track A1 of the black connector for the multi-timer unit.
- + before ignition feed on track B1 of the black connector for the multi-timer unit.
Ensure the diagnostic socket is correctly fed.
Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the wiring for tracks 14 and 1 of the yellow connector
for the multi-timer unit.
If there is still no dialogue between the XR25 and the multi-timer unit, replace the multi-timer unit.
AFTER REPAIR
When communication has been established, deal with any illuminated fault
bargraphs.
Carry out a conformity check.
a3011.0
82-4
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Bargraph 3 RH side incorrect illumination
Fiche n 56
CODED DIESEL SOLENOID VALVE CONFIGURATION
NOTES
None.
Use the XR25 to correctly configure the multi-timer unit.

On the XR25, enter
G22*1* for a petrol vehicle

G22*2* for a diesel vehicle
NOTE : for a diesel version, incorrectly configuring the multi-timer unit does not prevent the immobiliser
from operating correctly. If there is a fault, however, the immobiliser warning light will not illuminate.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the memorised fault by entering G0** on the XR25.

Check the operation of the immobiliser system.
a3011.0
82-5
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Bargraph 4 RH side incorrect illumination
Fiche n 56
+ AFTER IGNITION FEED PRESENT
NOTES
Reminder. For normal operation:

- BG 4RH illuminated, ignition switch in + after ignition position
- BG 4RH extinguished, ignition switch in position other than + after ignition
Check the condition of the + after ignition fuse.

Ignition on, check for + 12 volts on track 6 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there 12 volts ?
YES
Replace the multi-timer unit .
NO
Repair the wiring between track 6 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer
unit and the passenger compartment fuse board.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-6
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
Bargraph 6 LH side
illuminated
82
Fiche n 56
ACCEPTANCE (CLEARANCE) OF THE SIGNAL BY THE

DIESEL SOLENOID VALVE
NOTES
Check that the computer configuration is correct:

- diesel : bargraph 3 RH side illuminated
- petrol: bargraph 3 RH side extinguished
Set the XR25 to pulse detection mode (button "G", input on terminal "Vin").
Ignition on, check for pulses on track 15 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit (test connectors
for the multi-timer unit and coded electronic unit of the solenoid valve connected).
Ignition on, if no pulses are noted, replace the multi-timer unit.
Switch on the ignition for longer than 30 consecutive seconds, then switch it off and wait for the
immobiliser warning light to flash (immobiliser active).
Switch on the ignition again and wait for bargraph 8 LH side to illuminate permanently.
Is bargraph 8 LH side permanently illuminated?
YES
NO
Replace the solenoid valve coded electronic unit.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-7
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Bargraphs 6 LH side and 6 RH side illuminated
Fiche n 56
DIESEL SOLENOID VALVE AND CODED LINE CLEARANCE
NOTES
Before beginning fault finding, switch on the ignition for more than 30
consecutive seconds then switch off the ignition.
For the diesel version, if bargraphs 6 LH side and 6 RH side are illuminated, check the impact sensor.
Ensure that the solenoid valve coded electronic unit is correctly connected and check the solenoid valve is
supplied with 12 Volts.
Check the condition of the wiring between track 15 of the yellow connector of the multi-timer unit and
track 8 on the coded solenoid valve connector.
Ignition on, check for pulses on track 15 of the yellow connector of the multi-timer unit (test with
connectors for the multi-timer unit and coded electronic unit of the solenoid valve connected).
Do you note any pulses?
YES
Replace the electronic unit on the solenoid valve.
NO
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-8
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Fiche n 56
CODED LINE
NOTES
None.
For the petrol version, if bargraph 6 RH side is illuminated, check the impact sensor.
Check the continuity and insulation from earth and 12 volts of the wiring between track 15 of the yellow
connector for the multi-timer unit and track ** of the injection computer.
Ignition on, check for pulses on track 15 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit (test with the
multi-timer unit and injection computer connectors connected).
YES
NO
** track : 30, 37 or 58 depending on engine
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-9
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
ANTENNA RING / MULTI-TIMER UNIT CONNECTION

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 56
*27 =
cc.1
co.0
short circuit + 12 volts

open circuit
None.
Check the continuity and insulation from earth and 12 volts of the wiring between :
yellow multi-timer unit connector
(2
4)
antenna ring

Check the antenna ring is correctly fed with earth on track 2 and 12 volts on track 3.
Ignition off, check for + 12 volts on track 2 of the multi-timer unit connector, wiring side (multi-timer
unit connector disconnected and antenna ring connector connected).
If 12 volts +before ignition is not found, replace the +before ignition fuse for the antenna ring.
If the fault persists, replace the antenna ring.
Reconnect the multi-timer unit .

Switch off the ignition and wait for the immobiliser warning light to flash (immobiliser active).
Switch on the ignition again and check for a pulse on track 2 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer
unit (test with the multi-timer unit and antenna ring connectors connected).
When the ignition is switched on, is there a pulse?
YES
Replace the antenna ring.
NO
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-10
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Fault finding - Customer complaints (petrol version)
NOTES
Only consult these customer complaints after a complete check using the XR25
NO XR25 / MULTI-TIMER UNIT COMMUNICATION
Chart 1
IGNITION ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT FLASHES PERMANENTLY
Chart 2
(starting is impossible)
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED (even with the
ignition off) OR REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
Chart 3
IGNITION ON, THE INJECTION WARNING LIGHT FLASHES PERMANENTLY
Chart 4
WHEN DRIVING (deceleration) AND AT IDLE SPEED, THE INJECTION
WARNING LIGHT FLASHES PERMANENTLY
Chart 5
THE VEHICLE CANNOT BE STARTED
Chart 6
a3011.0
82-11
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 1
NOTES
IMMOBILISER
Fault finding - Fault charts (petrol version)
82
Lines L and K are used by several computers which may disrupt them. If the fault
persists, it may be advisable to check that lines L and K are not being affected.

Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with another computer on the
vehicle (air conditioning computer, injection computer,...).
access code (D 56).
Check that the 18 track multi-timer unit connector is correctly connected.


AFTER REPAIR
bargraphs.
a3011.0
82-12
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
IGNITION ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT FLASHES

PERMANENTLY (starting is impossible)
Chart 2
None
NOTES

Connect the XR25. Use fiche n 56, selector on
S8. Enter D56.
Is there communication between the XR25
and the multi-timer unit ?
no
See Chart 1.
no
no
See chart for bargraph 4 RH in the

section"Fault finding - Interpretation of XR25
bargraphs".
no
Carry out programming if it is a new unit,

otherwise replace the multi-timer unit .
yes
Check the condition of the antenna ring fuse.
yes
Switch on the ignition and check that
bargraph 4 RH is illuminated.
Is bargraph 4 RH illuminated ?
yes
Apply + after ignition feed and check that
bargraph 19 RH is extinguished.
Is bargraph 19 RH extinguished?
yes
AFTER REPAIR

Erase the faults using G0**.
a3011.0
82-13
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Chart 2
CONT 1
Switch off the ignition and wait for the

immobiliser warning light to flash
(immobiliser active).
Switch on the ignition and check on fiche
n 56 if BG 7 RH is illuminated.
Is BG 7 RH illuminated ?
yes
See chart for BG 7 RH in the section "Fault

finding - Interpretation of XR25 bargraphs".
yes
Repair or replace the first key.
no
Replace the multi-timer unit.
no
Check the key recognition function. Try to
start the engine with the second key.
Can the engine be started?
no
Test the memory of the multi-timer unit by
entering # 65.
If "0" is displayed, test is OK.
If "1" is displayed, there is a fault.
Is "0" displayed ?
yes
Is the antenna ring securely mounted on the
ignition switch?
no
Correctly refit the antenna ring into position.
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-14
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Chart 2
CONT 2
Check the continuity and insulation from

earth and 12 volts of the wiring between :
antenna
ring
2
3
4
earth
+ AVC
yellow
connector
no
Is the wiring correct?

yes
Check for + 12 volts on track 2 of the multitimer unit (multi-timer unit disconnected and
antenna ring connector connected).
Do you note this voltage?
no
no
yes
(immobiliser active). Set the XR25 to pulse
detection (button "G",
and input on terminal "Vin").
Switch on the ignition and check for a pulse
on track 2 of the multi-timer unit
(test with multi-timer unit and antenna ring
connectors connected).
Do you note a pulse?
yes
Replace the key.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-15
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED (even

with the ignition off) OR REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
Chart 3
Check that the multi-timer programming has been correctly carried out.
NOTES
Check the condition of the + before ignition

fuse. Is the fuse in good condition?
no
Replace the fuse.
yes
Check that bargraph 3 RH is extinguished.
no
Change to petrol configuration G22*1*.
yes
no
See chart for bargraph 5LH in the

bargraphs".
no
Repair the wiring.
yes
earth of the wiring between track 24 of the
yellow connector for the multi-timer unit and
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-16
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Chart 3
CONT
Carry out the following tests to determine the

component at fault:
- if the immobiliser warning light is illuminated, disconnect the yellow connector for
the multi-timer unit and check that the immobiliser warning light extinguishes,
- if the immobiliser warning light is extinguished, connect track 24 of the multitimer unit connector to a vehicle earth and
check that the immobiliser warning light illuminates.
Does the immobiliser warning light illuminate
correctly during the test?
no
Replace the instrument panel.
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-17
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82

IGNITION ON, THE INJECTION WARNING LIGHT FLASHES
Chart 4
None
NOTES

S8. Enter D56.
no
See Chart 1.
yes
Check the programming (G60*)

if the multi-timer unit is new, otherwise
replace the unit.
no
Repair the wiring.
yes
Is bargraph 9 RH illuminated?
no

earth and from 12 volts of the wiring
between track 15 on the yellow connector
for the multi-timer unit and tracks 30, 37 or
58 depending on engine for the injection
computer. Is the wiring correct?
yes
Set the XR25 to pulse detection mode (button
"G", input on terminal "Vin"). Ignition on,
check for pulses on track 15 on the yellow
connector for the multi-timer unit (test with
the multi-timer unit and injection computer
yes
Replace the injection computer or refer to the

Workshop Repair Manual section "changing
the multi-timer unit kit + key".
no
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-18
CLIO
XB0X
IMMOBILISER
82
WHEN DRIVING (deceleration) AND AT IDLE SPEED, THE INJECTION

WARNING LIGHT FLASHES PERMANENTLY
Chart 5
None
NOTES

S8. Enter D56.
no
See Chart 1.
no
yes
XR25 still connected, check if BG 2 RH is
illuminated on injection fiche n 27.
Is BG 2 RH illuminated on this injection fiche?
yes
Refer to the chart for BG 2 RH injection fiche
in the section "Fault finding - Interpretation
of XR25 bargraphs".
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-19
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 6
82
None
NOTES
Check that bargraph 6 RH is illuminated.

Is bargraph 6D illuminated?
no
There is an engine fault.
yes
The impact sensor is faulty.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-20
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Fault finding - Customer complaints (diesel version)
NOTES
Only consult these customer complaints after a complete check using the XR25
Chart 1
IGNITION ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT FLASHES PERMANENTLY
Chart 2
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED FOR MORE
THAN 30 CONSECUTIVE SECONDS, IGNITION ON (the immobiliser warning
Chart 3
light illuminates permanently as soon as the ignition is switched on, in the

16 seconds following switching on the ignition or the immobiliser warning
light illuminates permanently for more than 30 consecutive seconds)
WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT
ILLUMINATES FOR 3 SECONDS THEN EXTINGUISHES, BUT THE VEHICLE
CANNOT BE STARTED
Chart 4
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED (even with the

ignition off) OR REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
Chart 5
THE INJECTION AND IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED (3

seconds ON then OFF) BUT THE VEHICLE CANNOT BE STARTED
Chart 6
a3011.0
82-21
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 1
NOTES
IMMOBILISER
Fault finding - Fault charts (diesel version)
82
Lines L and K are used by several computers which may disrupt them. If the fault
persists, it may be advisable to check that lines L and K are not being affected.

Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with another computer on the
vehicle (air conditioning computer, injection computer,...).
access code (D 56).


AFTER REPAIR
bargraphs.
a3011.0
82-22
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
IGNITION ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT FLASHES

Chart 2
None
NOTES

S8. Enter D56.
no
See Chart 1.
no
no
See chart for bargraph 4 RH in the

bargraphs".
no
Carry out programming if it is a new unit,

otherwise replace the multi-timer unit .
yes
Check the condition of the antenna ring fuse.
yes
Switch on the ignition and check that
bargraph 4 RH is illuminated.
Is bargraph 4 RH illuminated ?
yes
Apply + after ignition feed and check that
bargraph 19 RH is extinguished.
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-23
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Chart 2
CONT 1

(immobiliser active).
Switch on the ignition and check on fiche
n 56 if BG 7 RH is illuminated.
Is BG 7 RH illuminated ?
yes
See chart for BG 7 RH in the section "Fault

finding - Interpretation of XR25 bargraphs".
yes
Repair or replace the first key.
no
no
Check the key recognition function. Try to
start the engine with the second key.
no
Test the memory of the multi-timer unit by
entering # 65.
If "0" is displayed, test is OK.
If "1" is displayed, there is a fault.
Is "0" displayed ?
yes
Is the antenna ring securely mounted on the
ignition switch?
no
Correctly refit the antenna ring into position.
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-24
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
Chart 2
CONT 2

earth and 12 volts of the wiring between :
antenna
ring
2
3
4
earth
+ AVC
yellow
connector
no

yes
Check for + 12 volts on track 2 of the yellow
connector (multi-timer unit connector
disconnected and antenna ring connector
connected).
Do you note this voltage?
no
no
yes
(immobiliser active). Set the XR25 to pulse
detection (button "G",
and input on terminal "Vin").
Switch on the ignition and check for a pulse
on track 2 of the multi-timer unit
(test with multi-timer unit and antenna ring
Do you note a pulse?
yes
Replace the key.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-25
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED FOR MORE THAN 30

CONSECUTIVE SECONDS, IGNITION ON (the immobiliser warning light illuminates
permanently as soon as the ignition is switched on, in the 16 seconds following

switching on the ignition or the immobiliser warning light illuminates permanently
for more than 30 consecutive seconds)
Chart 3
None
NOTES
Check the condition of the wiring between :

solenoid
coded
electronic
unit connector
15
yellow
connector
no
Repair the wiring.
no
Replace the multi-timer unit or refer to the

Workshop Repair Manual section "changing
the multi-timer unit kit + key".
no
Replace the solenoid valve coded electronic

unit.
and the solenoid valve feed

(12 volts and earth).
yes
Set the XR25 to pulse detection mode
(button "G", input on terminal "Vin").
Ignition on, check for pulses on track 15 on
the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit
(test with the multi-timer unit and solenoid
valve coded electronic unit connectors
connected).
yes
XR25 connected, use fiche n 56.
Mechanically test the solenoid valve.
- Ignition off, enter G23*.
- Switch the ignition on again. The valve
should open and close several times in 30
seconds (listen).
Does the valve open and close several times in
30 seconds?
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-26
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED ON, THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
FOR 3 SECONDS THEN EXTINGUISHES, BUT THE VEHICLE CANNOT BE STARTED
Chart 4
None
NOTES
Connect the XR25, use fiche n 56.

Mechanically test the solenoid valve.
- Ignition off, enter G23*.
- Switch the ignition on again. The valve
should open and close several times in 30
seconds (listen).
Does the valve open and close several times in
30 seconds?
no
Remove the solenoid valve electronic unit.

Check the condition of the solenoid valve.
Ignition off, connect +12 volts to the
solenoid valve.
Now try to start the engine.
yes
yes
no
Replace the solenoid valve
The solenoid valve coded electronic

unit is not faulty.
Refer to the fault finding for a diesel engine.
Replace the solenoid valve coded electronic

unit.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-27
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
82
THE IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED (even with

the ignition off) OR REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
Chart 5
Check that the multi-timer programming has been correctly carried out.
NOTES
Check the condition of the + before ignition

fuse. Is the fuse in good condition?
no
Replace the fuse.
no
See chart for bargraph 5LH in the

bargraphs".
no
Repair the wiring.
no
Replace the instrument panel.
yes
Check that bargraph 5 LH is extinguished.
Is bargraph 5 LH extinguished?
yes
earth of the wiring between track 24 of the
yellow connector for the multi-timer unit and
yes
Carry out the following tests to determine the
component at fault:
- if the immobiliser warning light is illuminated, disconnect the yellow connector for
the multi-timer unit and check that the immobiliser warning light extinguishes,
- if the immobiliser warning light is extinguished, connect track 24 of the multitimer unit connector to a vehicle earth and
check that the immobiliser warning light illuminates.
Does the immobiliser warning light illuminate
correctly during the test?
yes
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-28
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 6
82
None
NOTES
Check that bargraphs 6 RH and 6 LH are

illuminated.
Are these bargraphs illuminated?
no
There is an engine fault or a coded solenoid

valve fault.
yes
The impact sensor is faulty.
AFTER REPAIR

a3011.0
82-29
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
82
If a fault bargraph illuminates, refer to the corresponding fault chart.
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D56
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
n.56
1
2
Code present
X X X
Conformity of multitimer unit
Interpretation of
bargraphs normally
illuminated
G70*
Part Number displayed in 2

sequences
Computer
configuration to
petrol / diesel
Illuminated if programmed for

both keys
Extinguished if programmed
for one key
Illuminated if configured for a

diesel vehicle with coded
solenoid valve.
Extinguished if configured for
a petrol vehicle
Command :
- G22*1* petrol
configuration.
- G22*2* configuration for
diesel with coded solenoid
valve
a3011.0
82-30
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
9
6
Forced protection
mode
Immobiliser status
10
8
8
Presence of the key
82
Reception of key code
Display and notes
Illuminated only after entering

command G04* on the XR25.
Vehicle cannot be started as
long as BG 9LH is illuminated.
active : switch off the ignition
and wait approximately 10
seconds for the BG 10LH to
illuminate.
Extinguished if immobiliser
inactive.
Illuminated when the ignition
is switched on if the key is
coded
(on condition that the vehicle
was protected before the
ignition was switched on,
immobiliser warning light
flashing).
NOTE : in normal operation,
bargraphs
8RH, 9 RH and 10 RH should be
illuminated together.

is switched on
if the key is coded and has the
correct format (on condition
that the vehicle was protected
before the ignition was
switched on, immobiliser
warning light flashing).
NOTE : In normal operation ,
bargraphs
8RH , 9RH and 10RH should be
illuminated together.
a3011.0
82-31
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
10
10
Valid key code
11
Reception of door
switch information
12
13
82
11
Information received
on programming in
progress or
resynchronisation of
decoder or
programming not
carried out
Programming of 1st
key information
received
Display and notes

is turned on if the key is coded
and has the correct format and
code (on condition that the
vehicle was protected before
the ignition was turned on,
flashing).
NOTE: In normal operation
bargraphs 8RH, 9RH and 10RH
should be illuminated
together.
Illuminated if the doors are

open
12
17LH illuminated if
programming or
resynchronisation in progress.
17RH illuminated if
programming not carried out
13
Illuminated if programming of
1st key in progress
a3011.0
82-32
IMMOBILISER
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
14
Reception of door
switch information
14
15
82
Reception of
programming not
locked information
14
Reception of
information that
security code input is
blocked for a timed
period
15
Display and notes
Illuminated if multi-timer unit

has not been programmed
with any keys.
Illuminated when
programming has not been
locked by command G60*.
Illuminated after entering 3

incorrect security codes
(antiscanning)
Wait for this bargraph to
extinguish with the ignition on
(approximately 15 minutes)
before entering a new code.
a3011.0
82-33
IMMOBILISER
Fault finding - Aid
CLIO
XB0X
82
ADDITIONAL CHECKS
COMMAND MODES G--*
To use this function, enter G on the XR25 , then the number of the command followed by a star.
04
Forced protection mode : activates the immobiliser function even if the key is correct, which allows
starting prevention to be checked. Bargraph 9 left should illuminate.
This command must be entered when the ignition is off and the immobiliser function is active.
IMPORTANT: switching the ignition off cancels this command.
05
Immobiliser warning light command (illuminates immobiliser warning light for 3 seconds ).
13
22
Configuration :
- G 22 * 1 * = configuration for petrol vehicles (Bargraph 3RH should be extinguished).
- G 22 * 2 * = configuration for diesel vehicles with coded solenoid valve (Bargraph 3RH should
be illuminated).
23
Forced solenoid valve test mode (used only on diesel vehicles).

Activates coded solenoid valve (opening/closing) for approximately 30 seconds (listen).
NOTE:
- the multi-timer unit must be configured for a diesel vehicle
- Bargraph 8 left should be illuminated during the test.
40
Entering the security code (Bargraph 10 LH must be illuminated and the ignition must be on).
This command mode may be used to enter the security code, but does not decode the injection
computer or the coded solenoid valve.
Enter the emergency code number for the vehicle on the XR25 and validate with "*".
If the code number is correct, "bon" is displayed on the XR25 and Bargraph 10 LH extinguishes.
If the code number is incorrect, "Fin" is displayed on the XR25 and Bargraph 10 LH remains
illuminated.
IMPORTANT: three attempts may be made to enter the code. If, after the third attempt, the code is
not valid, you must wait for 15 minutes before another attempt may be made (between each
attempt to enter the code, the ignition must be switched off and on again).
70
Reading the Part Number (multi-timer unit reference).
a3011.0
82-34
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
..............................................................
04
31
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Checking conformity
.........................................................................
57
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
CLIO
XB0X
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
INSTALLATION OF XR25 / MULTI-TIMER UNIT (BMT) DIALOGUE
ISO selector on S8
Enter D56, then G02*
2n.57
PRECAUTION
ERASING THE MEMORY
After repairing the multi-timer unit, enter G0** on the keyboard of the XR25 kit to proceed with erasing
the memorised fault.
bmt 1112.0
87-1
CLIO
XB0X
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
FI21757
bmt 1112.0
87-2
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87

operator action
the kit should show
the kit should show

either
the kit should show
or
Engine running
bmt1112.0
87-3
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DRIVERS ELECTRIC WINDOW
NOTES
None
Check the condition of fuse .

Connect the XR25 and enter G24* and G25*.
The electric window relays should click.
Do the relays click?
NO
Replace the faulty relay/s. If the fault persists, replace the multi-timer unit.
YES
Disconnect the blue 26 track connector and press the electric window button to
raise the window.
Check for the presence of 12 V on track 1 of the connector and 0 V on track 2 of
the connector.
Is this correct?
AFTER REPAIR
NO
Check the continuity of the wiring between the relays and the
electric window motor.
If the fault persists, replace the electric window button.
YES
Replace the electric window motor.

bmt 1112.0
87-4
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
RELAYS
NOTES
Check that bargraph 10 RH is illuminated (+after ignition feed present)
Check the correct operation of each component in the multi-timer unit.

If a component is not operating correctly, connect the XR25 and enter the command mode for the faulty
component
- G08* for door unlocking,
- G09* for door locking,
- G17* for the dipped headlights,
- G18* for the side lights,
- G19* for the hazard warning lights,
- G24* for lowering the drivers electric window,
- G25* for raising the drivers electric window,
- G28* for the front wiper,
- G29* for the rear wiper,
- G33* for the headlight washers,
- G38* for + after ignition feed.
When the command mode for each component is entered, the corresponding relay should click.
If a relay does not click, replace it.
If the fault persists, replace the multi-timer unit.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-5
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DOOR LOCKING
NOTES
Check that bargraph 5 RH is extinguished, otherwise deal with that bargraph first.
Check the insulation in relation to earth of the wiring between track 7 of the yellow connector for the
multi-timer unit and track 1 of the door locking button.
Repair the faulty wiring if necessary.
Replace the door locking button.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-6
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DOOR UNLOCKING
NOTES
Check the insulation in relation to earth of the wiring between track 22 of the yellow connector for the
multi-timer unit and track 5 of the door locking button.
Repair the faulty wiring if necessary.
Replace the door locking button.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-7
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X

87
Fiche n 57
REAR SCREEN WASHER
None
NOTES
Check the insulation from 12 Volts of the wiring between :

wiper
stalk
B1
B1
16
B1
yellow connector for the multi-timer unit

washer pump

Check for the presence of 12 V on track B1 of the wiper stalk when the rear washer is activated.
Replace the stalk if you do not note 12 V.
Check that the washer pump is operating by supplying it directly with 12 V on track B1.
Replace the pump if necessary.
Check the condition of the wiring between track A1 on the pump and track A4 on the wiper stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-8
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
WINDSCREEN WASHER
NOTES
None
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring between :

wiper
stalk
A4
A4
3
A1
yellow connector for the multi-timer unit

washer pump

Check for the presence of 12 V on track A4 of the wiper stalk when the windscreen washer is activated.
Replace the stalk if you do not note 12 V.
Check that the washer pump is operating by supplying it directly with 12 V on track A1.
Replace the pump if necessary.
Check the condition of the wiring between track B1 on the pump and track B1 on the wiper stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-9
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
OIL PRESSURE
NOTES
None
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 1 on the oil pressure switch and track 20 of
the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit.
Replace the the oil pressure switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-10
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DIPPED HEADLIGHTS
NOTES
Check the continuity and insulation from 12 V of the wiring between track B5 on the lights stalk, the left
and right hand headlights and between track B5 and track 6 of the blue connector for extreme cold
versions.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-11
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DRIVERS ELECTRIC WINDOW LOWER
NOTES
None
Check that the button is not jammed in the lower position.

- If it is, release or replace the button.
- If it is not jammed, refer to the chart for bargraph 13 RH side.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-12
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Fiche n 57
DRIVERS ELECTRIC WINDOW RAISE
NOTES
None
Check that the button is not jammed in the raise position.

- If it is, release or replace the button.
- If it is not jammed, refer to the chart for bargraph 13 LH side.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-13
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Bargraph 10 LH side extinguished or permanently illuminated Fiche n 57
10
ACCESSORIES CIRCUIT
None
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action at the ignition switch.

Check for the presence of 12 V on track 5 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there 12 V ?
YES
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring between the ignition switch and track 5 of the
yellow connector.
If the fault persists, replace the ignition switch.
NO
The bargraph is permanently extinguished with no action at the ignition switch.

Check for the presence of 12 V on track 5 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit when starting.
Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO
Check the condition of fuse F3.

Check the continuity and insulation from earth of the wiring between :
fuse BP 13
yellow connector
1
5
4
3
ignition switch
ignition switch

YES
Replace the ignition switch.
NO
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-14
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Bargraph 10 RH side extinguished or permanently illuminated Fiche n 57
10
AFTER IGNITION FEED
NOTES
None
The bargraph is permanently illuminated, ignition switch in off position.

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring between track 6 of the yellow connector and
track 1 of the ignition switch.
If the fault persists, replace the ignition switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished after + after ignition feed is applied.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

fuse BP 13
yellow connector
1
6
4
1
ignition switch
ignition switch

NO
YES
Replace the ignition switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-15
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
11
OVERSPEED CIRCUIT
NOTES
Check that bargraph 10 RH is illuminated, otherwise deal with this bargraph first
(Arabia equipment only).
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the overspeed switch.

Check for the presence of 12 V on track 10 of the blue connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring between the overspeed switch and track 10 of
the blue connector .
If the fault persists, replace the overspeed switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the overspeed programming switch is pressed.
Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

fuse BP 13
blue connector
1
10
overspeed switch
overspeed switch

NO
YES
Replace the overspeed switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-16
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
12
REAR WIPER CIRCUIT
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action at the rear wiper stalk.
Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
track B1 of the stalk.
If the fault persists, replace the rear wiper stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the rear wiper control is activated.
Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

fuse BP 13
yellow connector
1
16
B4
B1
rear wiper stalk

rear wiper stalk

NO
YES
Replace the rear wiper control.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-17
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
12
WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action at the windscreen wiper stalk.
Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
track A4 on the stalk.
If the fault persists, replace the windscreen wiper stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the windscreen wiper control is activated.
Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

fuse BP 13
yellow connector
1
3
A7
A4
windscreen wiper stalk

windscreen wiper stalk

NO
YES
Replace the windscreen wiper control.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-18
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
13
ONE-TOUCH WINDOW BUTTON IN RAISE POSITION
NOTES
and check that bargraph 5 RH is extinguished.
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the electric window switch.
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 1 of the blue connector and
track 2 of the switch.
If the fault persists, replace the electric window switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the switch is pressed.

Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO
Check the continuity and insulation from 12 V of the wiring between track 1 of the blue
connector and track 2 of the switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-19
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
13
ONE-TOUCH WINDOW BUTTON IN LOWER POSITION
NOTES
and check that bargraph 5 RH is extinguished.
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the electric window switch.
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 2 of the blue connector and
track 6 of the switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the switch is pressed.

Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO
Check the continuity and insulation from 12 V of the wiring between track 2 of the blue
connector and track 6 of the switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-20
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
14
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action at the wiper stalk.

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
track A1 of the wiper stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the wiper stalk is activated.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

yellow connector
wiper stalk
wiper stalk
18
A3
A6
A1
A1
K3
wiper stalk
wiper motor
relay

NO
YES
Replace the wiper stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-21
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
14
WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK
NOTES
The bargraph remains extinguished .

Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO
Check the continuity and insulation in relation to 12 V of the wiring between track 10 of the
yellow connector and track A2 of the wiper motor.
If the fault persists, replace the windscreen wiper motor.
The bargraph remains illuminated and the wiper moves from its park position.
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 10 of the yellow connector and
track A2 of the windscreen wiper motor.
If the fault persists, replace the windscreen wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-22
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
15
REAR WIPER TIMER
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated without activation of the wiper stalk.

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
track B2 of the wiper stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the wiper stalk is activated.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

yellow connector
wiper stalk
relay
4
B4
L3
B2
L5
1
wiper stalk
relay
motor

NO
YES
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-23
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
15
REAR WIPER PARK POSITION
NOTES
The bargraph remains permanently illuminated.

Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO
yellow connector and track 3 of the wiper motor.
If the fault persists, replace the rear wiper motor.
The bargraph remains extinguished .

Disconnect the rear wiper unit.
Does the bargraph illuminate?
YES
Replace the rear wiper motor.
NO
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 19 of the yellow
connector and track 3 of the windscreen wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-24
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
16
SIDE LIGHTS CIRCUIT
None
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the lights stalk

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES

yellow connector
17
B
LH side light
lights stalk
B1
B
LH and RH side lights
If the fault persists, replace the lights stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the lights stalk is activated.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

yellow connector
lights stalk
17
B1
B
B
LH side light
LH and RH side lights

NO
YES
Replace the lights stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-25
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
16
DIPPED HEADLIGHTS CIRCUIT
NOTES
Check for "extreme cold" versions only.
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the lights stalk.

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES

lights stalk
B5
fuse F9
fuse
F9
C
RH and LH headlights
If the fault persists, replace the lights stalk.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the lights stalk is activated.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

blue connector
fuse BP13
6
1
B5
B3
lights stalk
lights stalk

NO
YES
Replace the lights stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-26
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
17
REVERSING CIRCUIT
NOTES
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action for reverse gear.

Is there 12 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring between track 3 of the blue connector and
track 2 of the reverse gear switch.
If the fault persists, replace the reverse gear switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished when reverse gear is engaged.

Is there 12 V ?
YES
NO

blue connector
fuse BP 13
3
1
2
1
reverse gear switch

reverse gear switch

NO
YES
Replace the reverse gear switch.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-27
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
18
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS CONTROL
NOTES
None
The bargraph is permanently illuminated with no action on the hazard warning lights switch.
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 23 of the yellow connector and
track 6 of the hazard warning lights control.
If the fault persists, replace the hazard warning lights switch.
The bargraph remains extinguished when the hazard warning lights switch is pressed.
Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO

Check the continuity and insulation from 12 V of the wiring between :
yellow connector 23
6 hazard warning lights control
hazard warning lights control 8
earth
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-28
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
18
INDICATORS CONTROL
NOTES
The bargraph remains extinguished after activating the indicators control.

Switch off the ignition and check for earth on track A3 of the black connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there 0 V ?
YES
Replace the indicators relay

Switch on the ignition and check if the bargraph illuminates.
NO
Check the continuity and insulation from 12 V of the wiring between :

black connector A3
A6 lights stalk
A3
If the fault persists, replace the hazard warning lights switch and / or the lights stalk.
The bargraph remains illuminated with no action on the indicators control.

Switch off the ignition and check for earth on track A3 of the black connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between:

black connector A3
A6 lights stalk
A3
If the fault persists, replace the hazard warning lights switch and / or the lights stalk.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-29
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
20
OIL PRESSURE
NOTES
The bargraph remains extinguished when the engine is running.

Is there 0 V ?
NO
YES
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between track 20 of the yellow connector
and track 1 of the oil pressure switch.
If the fault persists, replace the oil pressure gauge.
The bargraph remains illuminated when the engine is not running.

Is there 0 V ?
YES
NO
yellow connector and track 1 of the oil pressure switch.
If the fault persists, replace the oil pressure gauge.
AFTER REPAIR

bmt 1112.0
87-30
CLIO
XB0X
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
RUNNING LIGHTS FAULT
Running lights fault - side lights
Chart 1
Running lights fault - dipped headlights
Chart 2
COURTESY LIGHT FAULT
Courtesy light remains extinguished
Chart 3
Courtesy light remains illuminated
Chart 4
Loss of indicator function
Chart 5
Indicators permanently illuminated
Chart 6
Constant indicator noise with no indicator illumination
Chart 7
Relay operating twice as fast and bulbs extinguished
Chart 8
INDICATOR FAULT
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS FAULT
Hazard warning lights do not operate
Chart 9
OPENING ELEMENTS WARNING LIGHT FAULT
Warning light remains extinguished
Chart 10
Warning light remains illuminated
Chart 11
ELECTRIC WINDOW FAULT
Electric windows do not operate
Chart 12
bmt 1112.0
87-31
CLIO
XB0X
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
WINDSCREEN WIPER FAULT
Windscreen wipers do not stop in park position for intermittent

wiping or for washing
Chart 13
Wipers do not return to park position after + after ignition
Chart 14
Windscreen wipers do not operate for intermittent wipe
Chart 15
Windscreen wipers do not operate for washing
Chart 16
Windscreen wipers do not operate for high speed
Chart 17
Variable intermittent wiping does not operate
Chart 18
REAR SCREEN WIPER FAULT
Rear screen wiper does not stop in park position for intermittent
wiping or for washing
Chart 19
Rear screen wiper does not operate
Chart 20
Rear screen wiper does not operate for washing
Chart 21
Rear screen wiper does not operate for reverse gear
Chart 22
HEADLIGHT WASHER FAULT
Headlight washers do not operate
Chart 23
Headlight washers operate permanently
Chart 24
bmt 1112.0
87-32
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 1
NOTES
RUNNING LIGHTS FAULT - SIDE LIGHTS
Only consult this customer complaint after checking for the absence of fault
bargraph 5 RH and the presence of status bargraphs 10 LH, 10 RH, 16 LH, 16 RH
and 4 LH.
Check the condition of the maxi-fuse BP11.

Check the condition of the wiring between:
Connect the XR25 and enter G18*.

The side lights should illuminate.
Do they illuminate?
no
Fuse BP11
B2 lights stalk
lights stalk B1
B side lights
and between track 17 of the yellow
connector of the multi-timer unit and the left
hand side light.
yes
AFTER REPAIR
Check the components which have been disconnected are correctly reconnected.
bmt 1112.0
87-33
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 2
NOTES
RUNNING LIGHTS FAULT - DIPPED HEADLIGHTS
bargraph 5 RH and the presence of status bargraphs 10 LH, 10 RH, 16 LH, 16 RH
and 4 LH.
Check the condition of the maxi-fuse BP13.


The dipped headlights should illuminate.
Do they illuminate?
no
Fuse
BP13
lights stalk B5
B3 lights stalk
C dipped
headlights
yes
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-34
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 3
COURTESY LIGHT REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
None
NOTES
Set the courtesy light to the forced "on"

position. Does the courtesy light illuminate?
no
Check the condition of the 20A fuse F29.

If the fault persists, check the condition of the
wiring between the fuse and track A2 of the
courtesy light.
yes
Check the insulation from 12 V between track
26 of the yellow connector of the multi-timer
unit and track A3 of the courtesy light.
no
Repair the wiring.
no
Check the continuity of the wiring between

track 26 of the yellow connector and track A3
of the courtesy light.
yes
Set the courtesy light to the centre position.
Is there 12V on track 26 of the yellow
connector of the multi-timer unit ?
yes
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-35
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 4
87
COURTESY LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED, DOORS CLOSED
None
NOTES
Disconnect the yellow connector of the multitimer unit.

Does the bulb remain illuminated?
no
Check the insulation from earth between

track 26 of the yellow connector and track A3
of the courtesy light.
no
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-36
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 5
NOTES
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
LOSS OF INDICATOR FUNCTION
Only consult this customer complaint after checking for the presence of status
bargraph 10 RH and the absence of fault bargraph 5 RH.
Refer to the chart for bargraph 18 RH side.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-37
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 6
NOTES
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
INDICATORS PERMANENTLY ILLUMINATED
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-38
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 7
NOTES
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
CONSTANT INDICATOR NOISE WITH NO INDICATOR ILLUMINATION
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-39
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 8
RELAY OPERATING TWICE AS FAST AND BULBS EXTINGUISHED
NOTES
Check that 18RH is illuminated.

Is it illuminated?
no
yes
Check the condition of the 15A fuse F22.
Check the wiring between fuse BP 13 and

track 1 on the indicator relay.
no
yes
Replace the relay.
If the fault persists, replace the multi-timer
unit.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-40
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 9
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS DO NOT OPERATE
bargraph 18LH and the absence of fault bargraph 5 RH.
NOTES
Check for 12 V on track 2

of the hazard warning lights switch.
Is there 12 V ?
yes
Replace the hazard warning lights switch.
no
lights stalk A6
lights stalk A6
A3 black multitimer unit

connector
2 hazard warning
lights switch
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-41
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 10
OPENING ELEMENTS WARNING LIGHT REMAINS EXTINGUISHED
bargraph 5 RH.
NOTES
Check the condition of the fuse.

Check for 12 V on track 14

of the blue connector of the multi-timer unit.
Is there 12 V ?
yes
no
Check the wiring
between track 14 of the blue connector and
track 7 of the instrument panel.
Also check the feed to the warning light and
the bulb.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-42
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 11
87
OPENING ELEMENTS WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ILLUMINATED
bargraph 5 RH.
NOTES
Disconnect the blue connector of the multitimer unit.

Is the warning light still illuminated?
yes
There is a short circuit to earth on the wiring

between track 14 of the blue connector and
track 7 of the instrument panel.
no
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-43
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 12
87
ELECTRIC WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE
bargraph 5RH and the presence of status bargraphs 13 LH, 13 RH, 10 LH and 10
RH.
NOTES
Check the mechanical operation of the electric window system is correct.

AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-44
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 13
NOTES
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87

WINDSCREEN WIPERS DO NOT STOP IN PARK POSITION FOR
INTERMITTENT WIPING OR FOR WASHING
bargraphs 10LH, 12RH, 14LH, 14RH.
Check the mechanical operation of the windscreen wipers is correct.

AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-45
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87

WIPERS DO NOT RETURN TO PARK POSITION AFTER + AFTER
IGNITION FEED APPLIED
Chart 14
NOTES

Is the bargraph extinguished?
no
Refer to bargraph chart
yes
Switch in position 0, check the continuity of
the wiring between track K4 of the relay and
track A2 of the wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-46
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
WINDSCREEN WIPERS DO NOT OPERATE FOR INTERMITTENT WIPE
Chart 15
bargraph 14LH.
NOTES

Do the wipers operate?
yes
no
Replace the relay.

unit.
no
Does the wiper relay click?
yes
Set the wiper switch to the slow position.

Do the wipers operate?
no
stalk
relay
relay
stalk
A6
K5
K5
A3
K3
C1
A7
A1
relay
motor
stalk
motor
yes
Replace the relay.
If the fault persists, replace the windscreen

wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-47
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87

WINDSCREEN WIPERS DO NOT OPERATE FOR WASHING
Chart 16
bargraph 12RH.
NOTES
Check the windscreen wiper intermittent

wipe function operates.
Is this correct?
yes
no
See Chart 15 for intermittent wipe faults.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-48
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
WINDSCREEN WIPERS DO NOT OPERATE FOR HIGH SPEED
Chart 17
NOTES

Check the windscreen wiper intermittent
wipe function operates.
Is this correct?
yes
stalk
A2
B1
motor

no
If the fault persists, replace the windscreen
wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-49
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 18
VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPING DOES NOT OPERATE
bargraphs 10LH, 14LH, 14RH
NOTES
Connect the XR25 and enter # 04 .

Check the position varies when the wiper
stalk positions are altered.
Is this correct?
no
yes
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-50
CLIO
XB0X
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
87
Chart 19
REAR SCREEN WIPER DOES NOT STOP IN PARK POSITION FOR

INTERMITTENT WIPING OR FOR WASHING
NOTES
bargraphs 10RH, 15RH and the absence of fault bargraphs.
Check the mechanical operation of the wiper is correct.

AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-51
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 20
REAR SCREEN WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
bargraphs 10RH, 15LH, 15RH.
NOTES

Does the wiper operate?
yes
no
Replace the relay.

unit.
no
Repair the wiring.
no
Does the relay click?
yes
stalk
B2
B3
stalk
relay
B4
L3
L5
1
yellow
connector
relay
motor

yes
Replace the rear wiper motor.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-52
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 21
REAR SCREEN WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE FOR WASHING
bargraph 12LH.
NOTES
Check the operation of the rear intermittent

wipe function.
Is it correct?
yes
no
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-53
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 21
REAR SCREEN WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE FOR REVERSE GEAR
bargraphs 14LH, 17LH.
NOTES
Check the operation of the rear intermittent

wipe function.
Is it correct?
yes
no
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-54
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 23
HEADLIGHT WASHERS DO NOT OPERATE
bargraph 5RH and the presence of status bargraphs 10RH, 10LH, 12RH, 16RH,
17RH.
NOTES
Check the condition of the 20A fuse F33

and 10A fuse F12 . Replace them if necessary.

The headlight washers should operate.
Do they operate?
yes
no
Repair the wiring.
no
track 5 of the blue connector of the multitimer unit and fuse F12.
yes
blue connector
relay
7
5
2
A
relay
pump
no

yes
Check the correct operation of the pump by
supplying it directly with 12 V.
Does the pump operate?
no
Replace the pump.
yes
Replace the headlight washers relay.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-55
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
87
Chart 24
HEADLIGHT WASHERS OPERATE PERMANENTLY
bargraph 5RH and the presence of status bargraphs 10LH, 10RH, 12RH, 16RH,
17RH.
NOTES
Disconnect the blue connector of the multitimer unit.

Do the headlight washers still operate?
no
yes
Check the insulation from 12 V of the wiring

between track 7
of the blue connector and track 2 of the relay.
no
yes
Check the insulation from 12 V

of the wiring between fuse F33
and the headlight washers relay.
Repair the wiring.
AFTER REPAIR
bmt 1112.0
87-56
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
87
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D56
(selector on
S8)
then G02*
Conformity of the
multi-timer unit
Bargraph
Display and notes
2.n57
Use fiche 57
XXXX
G70
Part Number displayed in 3
sequences
2
Illuminated if overspeed
buzzer configured for Arabia
(level 4)
4
3
Interpretation of
bargraphs
Illuminated if front
intermittent wipe ring present
and configured
4
Illuminated if running lights

configured
5,6,7,8,9
4
Checking faults
5,6,7,8,9
10
Interpretation of
+ after ignition
bargraphs
10
Illuminated if faults
present
indicates multi-timer unit

receives
indicates multi-timer unit
receives
+ accessories feed (L3 and L4)
bmt 1112.0
87-57
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
12
Illuminated when windscreen

wiper activated
(ignition on)
12
Illuminated when rear wiper

activated
(ignition on)
13
Illuminated when drivers

window lower button pressed
(levels L2, L3 and L4)
13
Illuminated when drivers

window raise button pressed
(levels L2, L3 and L4)
14
Illuminated when windscreen

wiper is parked
14
Illuminated for intermittent

windscreen wiping
Command button
check
Interpretation of
wipers bargraphs
Command button
check
15
6
87
Interpretation of
wipers bargraphs
15
Command button
check
16
Interpretation of
lights control
bargraphs
Illuminated when rear wiper is

parked
Illuminated for intermittent

rear windscreen wiping
Illuminated for dipped

headlights (level 4)
16
Illuminated for side lights
17
Illuminated for main beam

headlights
bmt 1112.0
87-58
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
17
7
87
Command button
check
Display and notes
Illuminated for reverse gear,

ignition on
(levels 3 and 4)
18
Command button
check
8
18
Command button
check
Illuminated for hazard warning

lights
(ignition on)
Illuminated direction indicators

active
(ignition on)
19
Interpretation of
automatic clutch
warning light
bargraph
Illuminated if automatic clutch

and lever in position 3 and
accelerating
20
Illuminated engine running (oil
pressure information) for levels
3 and 4
Interpretation of oil
pressure warning light
bargraph
bmt 1112.0
87-59
MULTI-TIMER UNIT
Fault finding - Aid
CLIO
XB0X
87
COMMAND MODES G--*
G03*
illuminates courtesy light
G08*
unlocks opening elements
G09*
locks opening elements
G11*
opening elements warning light
G12*
lights on reminder buzzer
G17*
dipped headlights
G18*
side lights
G19*
indicators
G24*
drivers window lower
G25*
drivers window raise
G28*
windscreen wipers
G29*
rear screen wiper
G33*
headlight washers
G37*
buzzer
G38*
ADDITIONAL TESTS #--
# 01
vehicle speed
# 02
battery voltage
# 04
ring position; intermittent wipers
# 14
equipment level
bmt 1112.0
87-60
AIR BAG AND PRETENSIONERS
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02
..............................................................
03
.........................................................................
19
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Checking conformity
CLIO
XB0X
Fault finding -Introduction
88
CONDITIONS FOR THE APPLICATION OF THE CHECKS DEFINED IN THIS FAULT FINDING
The checks defined in this fault finding should only be applied to a vehicle when the fault bargraph is
illuminated, indicating that the fault is present on the vehicle at the time of checking. Only a computer
fault will require replacement of the computer, whether the bargraph is permanently illuminated or
flashing .
If the fault is not present but simply memorised, the bargraph flashes and application of the checks
recommended in the fault finding section will not allow the origin of the fault to be found. In this case,
only a check of the wiring and the connection of the component in question must be carried out (it is
possible to test the wiring concerned in fault finding mode to try to obtain permanent illumination of the
bargraph ).
TOOLING REQUIRED FOR OPERATIONS ON THE AIR BAG AND SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER SYSTEMS :
- XR25 (with minimum XR25 cassette N 17).

- XRBAG the updated N 4 version (with the new 30 track B40 yellow computer base adaptor).
REMINDER:
When carrying out an operation on the air bag/seat belt pretensioner systems , it is essential to lock the
computer with the XR25 command G80* to avoid all risk of triggering at the wrong time (all firing lines
will be inhibited). This operating mode will be indicated by illumination of the warning light on the
instrument panel.
Never carry out any measuring operations on the air bag and pretensioners trigger lines with equipment
other than the XRBAG.
Before using a dummy ignition module, ensure that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 ohms.
1AB7651.0
88-1
CLIO
XB0X
88
Fault finding - XR25 Fiche
FI21748
1AB7651.0
88-2
CLIO
XB0X
88
MEANING OF BARGRAPHS
FAULT BARGRAPHS (always on coloured background)
If illuminated, indicates a fault on the product tested. The associated text defines
the fault.
This bargraph could be :
- Illuminated
: fault present.
- Flashing
: fault memorised.
- Extinguished
: fault absent or not found.
STATUS BARGRAPHS (always on a white background)
Bargraph always located on the top right hand side

If illuminated , indicates establishment of dialogue with the product computer.
If it remains extinguished :
- There is a tool, computer or XR25 / computer connection fault.
The following bargraph representations indicate their initial status :
or
Indefinite
illuminated when the operation or the condition specified on the
fiche is met.
Extinguished
Illuminated extinguished when the operation or the condition specified on the

fiche is no longer met.
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Certain bargraphs have a *. The command *.., when the bargraph is illuminated,
1AB7651.0
88-3
88
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Bargraph 1 right hand side extinguished
Fiche n 48
Code present
None
another vehicle. If the XR25 is not faulty and dialogue is not established with another computer on the
same vehicle, a faulty computer may be disrupting the K and L fault finding lines. Disconnect computers
in turn to locate the faulty computer.
Check that the ISO selector is in position S8, that the latest XR25 cassette and the correct access code are
being used.
Check the battery voltage and carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage (9 volts <
U battery< 18 volts).
Check the presence and condition of the 15 A air bag fuse.

Check the condition of the computer connector and the condition of the connections.
- Disconnect the air bag computer and fit the 30 track adaptor B40 of the XRBAG.
- Check and ensure the presence + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth 1 / earth 2
and + after ignition.

- + Before ignition feed on track 16.
- Earth on track 5.
Check the continuity and insulation of the lines of the diagnostic socket / air bag computer connection:
- Between the terminal marked L and track 15 of the diagnostic socket .
- Between the terminal marked K and track 7 of the diagnostic socket .
If dialogue is still not established after these various checks, replace the air bag computer (consult the
section on "Aid" for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
When communication is established, deal with any illuminated fault bargraphs.
1AB7651.0
88-4
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
or flashing
88
Fiche n 48
Computer
None
Replace the air bag computer (consult the section "Aid" for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
None
1AB7651.0
88-5
88
CLIO
XB0X

2
Voltage supply
XR25 aid:
NOTES
I.dEF - 2.dEF
Fiche n 48
*02 :
1.dEF
2.dEF
3.dEF
dEF
:
:
:
:
Voltage too low

Voltage too high
Too many micro-breaks
Cumulative between faults 1.dEF/2.dEF/3.dEF
Use the 30 track adaptor of the XRBAG to operate on the computer connector .
NOTES
None
Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct computer power supply :
9 volts 0.1 < correct voltage< 18 volts 0.1.
- Check the charge circuit.
- Check the computer earth .
3.dEF
NOTES
None
For a micro-break fault, check the computer power supply lines :

- Condition of the computer connections.
- Condition of the computer earths (tracks 6 and 20 on the 30 track connector to the FRH pillar earth).
- Condition / position of the fuse.
- Condition and tightening of battery terminals.
dEF
NOTES
None
The dEF display on the kit indicates the minimum memorisation of 2 of the 3 faults declared by the
display 1.dEF, 2.dEF and 3.dEF (bargraph flashing ).
Operation:
- Check the charge circuit.
- Condition of the computer connections.
- Check the computer earth .
- Condition / position of the fuse.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory using the command G0**.

1AB7651.0
88-6
88
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Bargraph 2 right hand side illuminated
Fiche n 48
Configuration
None
The illumination of bargraph 2 RH side corresponds to an incoherence between the computer

configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer.
The vehicle must be fitted with a passenger air bag and the computer must be configured for "without
passenger air bag" shown by bargraph 19 LH side extinguished.
Modify the computer configuration using command G20*1*.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory using the command G0**, then switch off the ignition.
Carry out another check using the XR25.
1AB7651.0
88-7
88
CLIO
XB0X
Resistance on the drivers air bag line

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 48
*06 :
CC : Short-circuit
CO : Open circuit
Never carry out measurements on the trigger lines with equipment other than
the XRBAG.
Lock the computer with the command G80* on the XR25.

Switch off the ignition and remove the two mounting bolts of the steering wheel cushion.
Check that it is correctly connected.
Disconnect the steering wheel cushion and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module
connector . Switch on the ignition and carry out an XR25 check.
Replace the air bag cushion if the fault has been memorised (fault no longer declared).
With the ignition switched off, disconnect, then reconnect the connector for the rotary switch below the
steering wheel. Operate on the connection if bargraph 6 left hand side begins to flash .
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance at point C2 of the drivers air bag circuit.
If the value obtained is not correct, replace the rotary switch below the steering wheel.
Reconnect the rotary switch below the steering wheel, disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30
track adaptor B40.
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance on the wire marked A on the adaptor.
If the value obtained is not correct, check the 30 track connector connection (tracks 10 and 11) and
replace the wiring if necessary.
If the checks carried out have not proven the existence of a fault, replace the air bag computer (consult
the section "Aid" for this operation).
Reconnect the drivers air bag ignition module and remount the steering wheel cushion.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the computer memory using the command G0** then switch off the
ignition. Carry out another check using the XR25 and, if there is no fault, unlock
the computer using command G81*.
Destroy the air bag cushion if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-8
CLIO
XB0X
Fiche n 48
Insulation of drivers or passengers air bag line

XR25 aid :
NOTES
88
*26 :
CC.1 : Short circuit at 12 volts

CC.0 : Short circuit to earth
Never carry out measurements on the trigger lines with equipment other than the
XRBAG. If the vehicle does not have a passenger air bag, only test on the cable
marked A on the adapter (drivers air bag circuits).
Lock the computer using command G80* on the XR25.

Switch off the ignition, disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30 track adapter B40.
The XRBAG must be used to measure the insulation appropriate to this type of fault as shown by the XR25
on the cables marked A and B for the adapter.
On which adapter cable is the insulation fault noted?
Cable A
NOTES
Fault on drivers air bag circuits
Switch off the ignition and reconnect the computer connector.

Remove the 2 mounting bolts for the steering wheel cushion.
Check the condition of the trigger wire.
The XRBAG tool MUST be use for measuring insulation appropriate to the type of fault at point C2 of the
drivers air bag circuit .
If the value obtained is not correct , replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel .
If the value obtained is correct at C2, check the condition of the connections on the computer.
Replace the air bag wiring if the fault persists.
Cable B
NOTES
Fault on passengers air bag circuits
Check the condition of the connections on the computer.

Replace the air bag wiring if the fault persists.
If the checks carried out have not proven the existence of an insulation fault on one of the air bag circuits,
check the connections on the computer.
Replace the air bag computer if the fault persists (consult the section "Aid" for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
Destroy the air bag cushion or module if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-9
88
CLIO
XB0X
Resistance on passenger air bag line

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 48
*07 :
CC : Short circuit
CO : Open circuit
Never carry out measurements on the trigger lines with equipment other than the
XRBAG. If the vehicle does not have a passenger air bag, refer to the fault finding
for bargraph 19 LH side.

Switch off the ignition, disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30 track adaptor B40.
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance on the wire marked B on the adaptor.
Is the value obtained correct?
YES
If the value obtained is correct at wire B on the adaptor, check the condition of the
computer connection .
NO
If the value obtained is not correct at wire B on the adaptor, check the 30 track
connector connection (tracks 13 and 14).
If the value remains incorrect, switch off the ignition and remove the dashboard to
gain access to the wiring of the passengers air bag module . Disconnect the ignition
module of the passengers air bag module, connect a dummy ignition module to the
ignition module , then use the XRBAG to measure the resistance on the wire marked B
on the adaptor.
If the value obtained is correct , replace the passengers air bag module .
If the value obtained is not correct, replace the air bag wiring.
Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passengers air bag module , then switch on the
ignition again.
Carry out an XR25 check.
If the kit still indicates the presence of a passengers air bag line fault and and the checks carried out
show no evidence of a fault, replace the air bag computer (consult the section "Aid" for this operation).
AFTER REPAIR
Destroy the passenger air bag cushion if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-10
88
CLIO
XB0X
Insulation of driver or passenger pretensioner lines

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 48
*27 :
CC.1 : Short circuit to 12 volts

CC.0 : Short circuit to earth
the XRBAG.

Disconnect the ignition module of the drivers pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to
the ignition module connector.
Switch on the ignition and carry out an XR25 check.
If the fault has been memorised (fault no longer declared), check the condition of the seat wiring.
Replace the drivers pretensioner if the wiring is not faulty.
Then carry out the same operation on the passengers pretensioner (if not a drivers side fault ).
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for measuring insulation appropriate to the type of fault at point C1 (seat
connector) of the drivers pretensioner line.
If the value obtained is not correct , replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).
Then carry out the same measurement on the passengers pretensioner line (if not a drivers side fault ).
Disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30 track adaptor B40.
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for measuring insulation appropriate to the type of fault on the adaptor
wires marked C (Passenger ) and D (Driver ) .
If one of the values obtained is not correct, check the 30 track connector connection (tracks 3 / 4 for wire
C and 1/2 for wire D) and replace the wiring if necessary .
If the checks carried out have not proven the existence of a fault on one of the pretensioner circuits,
replace the air bag computer (consult the section "Aid" for this operation).
Reconnect the ignition modules of the seat belt pretensioners.
AFTER REPAIR
Destroy the pretensioner(s) if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-11
88
CLIO
XB0X
Resistance on drivers pretensioner line

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 48
*08 :
CC : Short circuit
CO : Open circuit
the XRBAG.

Switch off the ignition and check ignition module of the drivers pretensioner is correctly connected.
Disconnect the ignition module of the drivers pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to
the ignition module connector.
Replace the drivers pretensioner if the fault has been memorised (fault no longer declared).
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance at point C1 (seat connector) on the line of the
drivers pretensioner .
Disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30 track adaptor B40.
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance on the wire marked D of the adaptor .
If the value obtained is not correct, check the 30 track connector connection (tracks 1 and 2) and replace
the wiring if necessary.
Reconnect the ignition module of the drivers pretensioner .
AFTER REPAIR
Destroy the pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-12
88
CLIO
XB0X
Resistance on the passengers pretensioner line

XR25 aid :
NOTES
Fiche n 48
*09 :
CC : Short circuit
CO : Open circuit
the XRBAG.
Lock the computer using command G80* on the XR25. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition
module of the passengers pretensioner is correctly connected.
Disconnect the ignition module of the passengers pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module
to the ignition module connector.
Replace the passengers pretensioner if the fault has been memorised (fault no longer declared).
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance at point C1 (seat connector) of the passengers
pretensioner line.
Disconnect the computer connector and fit the 30 track adaptor.
The XRBAG tool MUST be used for checking resistance on the wire marked C on the adaptor.
If the value obtained is not correct , check the 30 track connector connection (tracks 3 and 4) and replace
the wiring if necessary.
Reconnect the ignition module of the passengers pretensioner .
AFTER REPAIR
Destroy the pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool El. 1287).
1AB7651.0
88-13
CLIO
XB0X

10
88
Fiche n 48
Air bag fault warning light circuit

XR25 aid:
*10 :
CC.1 : Short circuit to 12 volts

CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth
Use the 30 track XRBAG adaptor to operate on the computer connector .
NOTES
CC.1
NOTES
None

Check the condition of the warning light bulb .
Ensure insulation from 12 volts of the connection between the warning light and track 7 of the 30 track
connector.
CO.0
Warning light
NOTES
None
extinguished after ignition

Check the condition of the warning light bulb.
Ensure the insulation of the connection between the warning light and track 7 of the 30 track connector.
Ensure that 12 volts are reaching the warning light .
If the checks carried out have not proven the existence of a fault, disconnect the computer connector and
fit the 30 track XRBAG adaptor . Use the XRBAG in testing mode to check the operation of the warning
light on the instrument panel from the grey adaptor wire marked 1.
If it is possible to illuminate the warning light using the XRBAG, replace the air bag computer (consult
If it is impossible to operate the warning light , repeat the preceding checks.
Warning light illuminated
after ignition

Ensure the insulation from earth of the connection between the warning light and track 7 of the 30 track
connector .
AFTER REPAIR
ignition. Carry out another check using the XR25 and if there is no fault, unlock
1AB7651.0
88-14
CLIO
XB0X
11
NOTES
88
Fiche n 48
Computer locked (voluntary request)
None
This bargraph 11 left hand side allows computer locked status to be seen .
When it is illuminated, all trigger lines are inhibited, preventing the release of the air bags and the seat
belt pretensioners.
This bargraph is normally illuminated in two situations :
- The computer is new (it is sold in locked mode).
- The XR25 computer locking command has been used during an operation on the vehicle
(G80*).
AFTER REPAIR
1AB7651.0
88-15
88
CLIO
XB0X
11
NOTES
Fiche n 48
Computer locked after an impact
First deal with bargraph 1 LH side if this is also illuminated (computer fault).
This bargraph is normally illuminated when an impact has been detected by the system and the computer
was not locked before the impact.
The computer may be used again if the computer fault bargraph is not also illuminated.
Replace any components which have been triggered (air bags and pretensioners).
Unlock the computer using command G81*.
Erase the computer memory using the command G0** then switch off the ignition.
Carry out another check using the XR25 and ensure that no faults are present.
AFTER REPAIR
1AB7651.0
88-16
88
CLIO
XB0X
16
NOTES
Bargraph 16 left hand side
Fiche n 48
All trigger lines locked
None
This bargraph 16 left hand side allows computer locked status to be seen .
When it is illuminated, all trigger lines are inhibited, preventing the release of the air bags and the seat
belt pretensioners.
This bargraph is normally illuminated in the following situations :
- The computer is new (it is sold in locked mode).
- The XR25 computer locking command has been used during an operation on the vehicle
(G80*).
- The computer is locked after an impact.
Bargraph 16 left hand side is therefore illuminated together with bargraphs 11 RH side and LH side.
AFTER REPAIR
1AB7651.0
88-17
88
CLIO
XB0X
19
NOTES
Bargraph 19 left hand side
Fiche n 49
Computer configuration "with passenger air bag"
None
Bargraph 19 left hand side allows the computer configuration to be visualised and to ensure that it is
correct for the vehicle.
If bargraph 19 left hand side is illuminated and the vehicle does not have a passenger air bag, use
command G20*0* to configure for "without air bag passenger".
AFTER REPAIR
ignition. Carry out another check using the XR25.
1AB7651.0
88-18

NOTES
Order of
operations
88
CLIO
XB0X
Only carry out this conformity check after a complete XR25 check.
Function to be
checked
Dialogue with XR25
Computer conformity
Computer
configuration
Warning light
operation - check
computer
initialisation
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
D49
(selector on
S8)
2.Ab
#02
19
Ensure that the computer

configuration shown by this
bargraph corresponds to the
vehicle equipment.
3 second illumination of the
warning light when switching
on the ignition (consult fault
finding if it remains
illuminated or if it does not
illuminate).
Switch on the
ignition
1AB7651.0
88-19
CLIO
XB0X
Fault finding - Aid
88
REPLACING THE AIR BAG COMPUTER
The air bag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of release at the wrong time (all
trigger lines are inhibited). This operational mode is indicated by the illumination of the warning
light on the instrument panel.
When replacing the air bag computer, follow this procedure :
- Ensure that the ignition is switched off.
- Replace the computer.
- Carry out an XR25 check.
- Unlock the computer using command G81*, only when no fault is declared by the XR25.
If the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger air bag, configure the computer to "without air bag
passenger" using command G20*0*.
1AB7651.0
88-20
REMOTE CONTROL FOR

DOOR LOCKING
FAULT FINDING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Information
.................................................................................
24
XR25 fiche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
..............................................................
27
32
Fault charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Checking conformity
.........................................................................
35
Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
CLIO
XB0X
WIRING
88
INSTALLATION OF XR25 DIALOGUE / MULTI-TIMER UNIT
ISO selector on S8
Enter D56
n.56
PRECAUTION
Pay attention to key head numbers.

ERASING THE MEMORY
After repairing the immobiliser system, enter G0** on the keyboard of the XR25 kit to proceed with
erasing the memorised fault.
t0112.0
88-23
CLIO
XB0X
WIRING
Fault finding - Information
88
Resynchronising the keys

- Press the central locking button for a few seconds until the immobiliser warning light illuminates and the
door motors operate.
- Check that bargraphs 14LH, 14RH, 17LH, 17RH illuminate for a few seconds.
- Press the PLIP key twice; the doors will unlock then lock.
- Check bargraphs 14LH, 14RH, 17LH, 17RH again.
The resynchronisation is complete.
Programming a second PLIP key or a replacement key

- Enter G04* and check that bargraph 9 LH is illuminated.
- Put the key in the ignition and switch the ignition on (+APC).
- Enter G40*, then the security code (4 character code from Techline) and validate with * (the display shows
"FIN").
- Switch off the ignition. Enter command mode G32*. The door motors operate.
- Press the remote control twice, the door motors operate again.
t0112.0
88-24
CLIO
XB0X
WIRING
88
FI21756
t0112.0
88-25
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
88

operator action
the kit should show
the kit should show

either
the kit should show
or
Engine running
t0112.0
88-26
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
88
Fiche n 56
XR25 / MULTI-TIMER UNIT COMMUNICATION
NOTES
Check that lines K and L are not disrupted by another computer.
Check the condition of the + before ignition feed fuse.

Ensure that the XR25 is not the cause of the fault by trying to communicate with another computer on
the vehicle (air conditioning computer, injection computer,...).
Check that the ISO selector is in position S8, that the latest XR25 cassette is being used with the correct
access code (D 56).
If dialogue is still not established between the XR25 and the multi-timer unit, replace the unit.
AFTER REPAIR
bargraphs.
t0112.0
88-27
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
88
Fiche n 56
CENTRAL LOCKING BUTTON
NOTES
Check that the central locking button is not permanently present due to a
mechanical problem.
Check the insulation from earth of the wiring between :

multi-timer unit
yellow connector
22
7
5
1
central locking
button
If the fault persists, replace the central locking button.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the memory using G0** on the XR25.

t0112.0
88-28
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X

Bargraph 11 LH side illuminated and bargraph
11 RH side extinguished
11
NOTES
88
Fiche n 56
If BG 17 RH side is illuminated, do not apply the fault finding as the multi-timer

unit is new. Carry out the procedure for programming the PLIP keys.
Only consult this fault finding below if BG 11 LH side remains extinguished after
trying to lock or unlock the vehicle doors using the PLIP.
Check that the key will mechanically open the door.

Can the door be opened?
NO
Use the correct key.
YES
Check the condition of the key battery and resynchronise the key.Press the PLIP.
If the doors do not open, replace the key.
AFTER REPAIR

t0112.0
88-29
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
11
NOTES
Bargraphs 11 LH side and 11 RH side extinguished
88
Fiche n 56
Do not consult the fault finding below if, when the PLIP is pressed, BG 11 LH side
illuminates for 3 seconds and BG 11 RH side remains extinguished.
Check that the keys belong to the vehicle.
Check that the key tell-tale illuminates when the key is pressed.
Replace the battery if necessary and replace the key if the fault persists.
Connect the XR25 as a pulse detector (button G, input via terminal Vin) and check for the presence of a
signal on track 11 of the yellow connector for the multi-timer unit.
Is there a signal?
YES
Check the condition of the wiring between track 11 of the yellow connector and
track 2 on the PLIP receiver.
NO
Replace the PLIP receiver.
AFTER REPAIR

t0112.0
88-30
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
14
NOTES
Bargraph 14 LH side illuminated or extinguished

after pressing the PLIP
88
Fiche n 56
Bargraph 10 LH side must be illuminated.
Check the continuity and insulation in relation to 12 V and earth of the wiring between:
multi-timer unit
yellow connector
22
7
5
1
central locking
button
Repair the wiring if necessary or replace the switch.

if the fault persists, replace the multi-timer unit.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the memory using G0** on the XR25.

t0112.0
88-31
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
WIRING
88
Only refer to these customer complaints after a complete check using the XR25.
OPENING ELEMENTS CANNOT BE LOCKED OR UNLOCKED
Chart 1
DOOR OPENING PROBLEM USING PLIP FUNCTION
Chart 2
t0112.0
88-32
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 1
NOTES
88
OPENING ELEMENTS CANNOT BE LOCKED OR UNLOCKED
Check that no fault bargraphs are illuminated.

If they are, deal with those bargraphs first.
Check the correct operation of the mechanical opening system for the opening elements.
Otherwise replace the multi-timer unit.
AFTER REPAIR

t0112.0
88-33
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
Chart 2
88
DOOR OPENING PROBLEM USING PLIP FUNCTION
Check that no fault bargraphs are illuminated.

If they are, deal with those bargraphs first.
NOTES
Do bargraphs 11LH and 11RH illuminate

when the PLIP is pressed?
no
Refer to fault finding for bargraphs.
no
Refer to fault finding for bargraphs

5 LH and 14 LH.
yes
Check the condition of the 20 A fuse.
Press the central locking button.

The relay should click.
Does the relay click?
yes
AFTER REPAIR

t0112.0
88-34
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
88
If a fault bargraph illuminates, refer to the corresponding fault finding.
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Dialogue with XR25
D56
(selector on
S8)
Bargraph
Display and notes
n.56
1
2
Code present
X X X
Multi-timer unit
conformity
G70*
Part No. displayed in 2

sequences
Interpretation of
bargraphs normally
illuminated
Remote control type:

- Illuminated for infrared
remote control.
- Extinguished for radio
frequency remote control
Illuminated if fitted with

courtesy light timer.
Extinguished if not fitted with
courtesy light timer.
Illuminated for programming

with 2 keys.
Extinguished if programming
with 1 key.
t0112.0
88-35
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Computer
configuration as
petrol/diesel
9
6
88
Forced protection
mode
Immobiliser status
10
Presence of the key
Display and notes
Illuminated if configured for a

diesel vehicle.
Extinguished if configured for
a petrol vehicle.
Command :
- G22 *1* configuration for
petrol
- G22 *2* configuration for
diesel
Illuminated only after entering

G04* on the XR25.
Vehicle cannot be started while
BG 9 LH side is illuminated.
Illuminated if immobiliser is
active: switch off ignition and
wait for 10 seconds for BG 10
LH to illuminate permanently.
Extinguished if immobiliser
inactive.
Illuminated when ignition

switched on if a coded key is
used (on condition that the
vehicle was protected before
switching on the ignition,
flashing).
NOTE: for normal operation,
bargraph 8 RH, 9 RH and 10 RH
illuminate together
t0112.0
88-36
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Reception of the key

code
10
10
Key code valid
11
11
Reception of infrared
signal from the PLIP
11
12
88
Display and notes

switched on if a coded key of
the correct format is used (on
condition that the vehicle was
protected before switching on
the ignition, immobiliser
illuminate together

switched on if a coded key of
the correct format is used (on
condition that the vehicle was
protected before switching on
the ignition, immobiliser
illuminate together
Illuminated for approximately

3 seconds if the infrared signal
is received by the multi-timer
unit via the infrared receiver.
Illuminated for approximately

3 seconds if the infrared signal
received by the multi-timer
unit via the infrared receiver is
a correct signal.
12
Presence of interior
lighting cut-out after
PLIP operation
Not used
t0112.0
88-37
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
13
14
15
88
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Reception of door
lock/unlock
information from the
central door locking
button
14
Sending of door
lock/unlock
information by the
multi-timer unit to the
locking micromotors
14
Display and notes
Illuminated when door

lock/unlock information is
received from the central door
locking button.
Enter * 14 on the XR25 to
determine the information
received by the multi-timer
unit:
- if * 14 = 0 door lock
information
- if * 14 = 1 door unlock
information
Illuminated when door

lock/unlock information is sent
from the multi-timer unit to
the locking micromotors.
Enter * 34 on the XR25 to
determine the information
sent by the multi-timer unit:
- if * 34 = 0 door unlock
information
- if * 34 = 1 door lock
information
(NOTE : ignore what is written
on fiche n 56, XR25 cassette,
n 16).
15
Reception of electric
window information
Not used
t0112.0
88-38
WIRING
CLIO
XB0X
NOTES
Order of
operations
16
17
18
88
Function to be
checked
Action
Bargraph
Display and notes
16
Reception of door
switch information
Illuminated if doors are open
Reception of
information that
programming is
underway or multitimer
resynchronisation or
programming has not
been carried out
17
18
Reception of
programming with 1st
key information
Reception of
information that
programming has not
been carried out
19
Reception of
information that
programming has not
been locked
19
Reception of
information that
security code input has
been temporarily
blocked
20
17 LH illuminated if
programming or
resynchronisation underway.
17 RH illuminated if
programming has not been
carried out
Illuminated if programming of
1st key underway
19
20
t0112.0
88-39
WIRING
Fault finding - Aid
CLIO
XB0X
88
ADDITIONAL TESTS
COMMAND MODES G--*
To use this function, enter G on the XR25 followed by the number of the command mode selected and a star.
03
Courtesy light command (illuminates the courtesy light for 3 seconds).
04
Forced protection mode: activates the immobiliser function even if the key is correct, which allows
checking of starting prevention. Bargraph 9 LH side must illuminate.
This command must be entered when the ignition is off and the immobiliser is active.
IMPORTANT: switching off the ignition cancels this command.
05
Immobiliser warning light command (illuminates the immobiliser warning light for 3 seconds).
08
Door unlock command (operates the micromotors for 3 seconds, unlock side).
09
Door lock command (operates the micromotors for 3 seconds, lock side).
13
End fault finding.
22
Configuration :
- G 22 * 1 * = configuration for petrol (bargraph 3 RH side must be extinguished).
- G 22 * 2 * = configuration for diesel (bargraph 3 RH side must be illuminated).
23
Solenoid valve forced test mode (used on diesel vehicles only).

Activates the coded solenoid valve (open / close) for approximately 30 seconds (listen).
NOTE:
- the multi-timer unit must be configured for diesel
- bargraph 8 LH side must be illuminated during the test.
t0112.0
88-40
WIRING
Fault finding - Aid
CLIO
XB0X
88
ADDITIONAL TESTS
COMMAND MODES G--*
To use this function, enter G on the XR25 followed by the number of the command mode selected and a star.
32
Programming for 2nd PLIP key.
40
Entering the security code (bargraph 10 LH side must be illuminated and the ignition must be on).
This mode can be used for entering the security code, but does not allow decoding of the injection
computer or coded solenoid valve.
Enter the security code number for the vehicle on the XR25 and validate with "*".
If the code number is correct, "bon" is displayed on the XR25 and bargraph 10 LH side
extinguishes.
If the code number is incorrect, "Fin" is displayed on the XR25 and bargraph 10 LH side remains
illuminated.
IMPORTANT: three attempts to enter the code may be made. If, at the end of the third attempt,
the code is invalid, you must wait for 15 minutes before another attempt may be made (the
ignition must be switched off and on again between each attempt to enter the code).
47
Courtesy light timer configuration:

- G 47 * 0 * = cancels courtesy light timer.
- G 47 * 1 * = activates courtesy light timer.
70
Reading the part number (of the multi-timer unit).
LIST OF VARIOUS #
26
Source of the last opening element command:

1 Infrared remote control
2 Central locking button
27
Type of last opening element command:

1 Unlock
2 Lock
95
Manufacturer (1 = Valo, 2 = Sagem).
t0112.0
88-41
Transmission
CLUTCH
MANUAL GEARBOX
DRIVESHAFTS

77 11 197 298
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRO20.2
Transmission
Contents
Page
20 CLUTCH
Mechanism - Disc
Flywheel
20-1
20-4
21 MANUAL GEARBOX
Identification
Ratios
Capacity - Lubricants
Consumables
Parts to be systematically replaced
Gearbox (Removal - Refitting)
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-4
21-4
21-5
29 DRIVESHAFTS
General
Front driveshafts
29-1
29-2
CLUTCH
Mechanism - Disc
Vehicle
type
Engine
type
Mechanism
Disc
26 splines
D = 181.5 mm
E = 6.7 mm
B/C B0A
B/C B0C
20
GA : Grey Silver
VR : Violet Red
D7F
E7J
85873S
180 CP 3300
90693R8
26 splines
D = 200 mm
E = 6.8 mm
B/C B0E
76906R
V :Green
RR : Red Ruby
GB : Grey Blue
F8Q
85873S
200 CPOV 3250
90693R11
26 splines
D = 200 mm
E = 6.8 mm
B/C B0D
76906R
JS : Yellow Sand
K7M
85873S
200 CPO 3500
90693R12
Cable controlled, dry operating single disc clutch.

Thrust pad in constant contact.
20-1
76906R
CLUTCH
Mechanism - Disc
20
REPLACEMENT (after removing the gearbox)

Mot. 582
or
Mot. 582-01
Locking sector
REFITTING
Mechanism mounting bolt
Clean the clutch shaft splines and refit the assembly without lubricant.
Fit the disc into position (hub offset on gearbox

side).
REMOVAL
Centre using the tool in the replacement kit.
Fit the locking sector Mot. 582 or Mot. 582-01.

Remove the mechanism mounting bolts and remove the friction disc.
Check and replace any faulty parts.
95414S
Tighten progressively in a star pattern then lock

the mechanism mounting bolts to the correct torque.
99055R2
Remove the locking sector Mot. 582 or

Mot. 582-01.
Coat with MOLYKOTE BR2 :
- the guide tube,
- the fork pads.
20-2
CLUTCH
Mechanism - Disc
After refitting the gearbox, place the cable on the
clutch fork , reset the notched sector and check
the operation of the wear compensation system.
20
NOTE : during an operation which does not require the gearbox to be removed or after fitting
the gearbox, DO NOT LIFT the fork as it may become released from lug (A) on the thrust pad.
Check the clutch travel.

The fork travel should be :
X = 27.4 to 30.7 mm
99054R
97758-1R
20-3
CLUTCH
Flywheel
20
REPLACING THE FLYWHEEL

Mot. 582
or
Mot. 582-01
Locking sector
TIGHTENING TORQUES ( in daN.m )
Flywheel bolt
2 + 60
REMOVAL
After removing the friction disc, remove the flywheel mounting bolts (they cannot be re-used).
The friction face cannot be reground.
REFITTING
On the crankshaft, clean the flywheel mounting

bolt threaded holes.
Degrease the pressure face of the flywheel on the
crankshaft.
Refit the flywheel, locking it using Mot. 582 or
Mot. 582-01.
NOTE: the flywheel mounting bolts must be systematically renewed.
20-4
MANUAL GEARBOX
Identification
21
This type of vehicle is fitted with a JB type gearbox.

Workshop Repair Manual "B.V. JB. JC " deals with the complete repair of this component.
87227G
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
At A
At B
At C
At D
At E
At F
:
:
:
:
:
gearbox type
gearbox suffix
fabrication number
factory of manufacture
a notch when the gearbox is assembled with
an E engine
: letter preceding fabrication numbers greater than 999999
J B0 0 0 0
X X0 0 0 0 0
E
F
21-1
B
C
MANUAL GEARBOX
Ratios
21
JB1
Suffix
Vehicle
Step down
Speedo
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
16
55
180
183
16
57
B/C B0D
34
35
15
58
15
61
184
21
19
11
37
22
41
39
32
28
37
B/C B0A
909
15
58
185
15
61
30
29
34
35
B/C B0C
186 (1)
Reverse
39
31
B/C B0E
905 (1)
5th
15
61
(1) Vehicle fitted with AC.
21-2
39
31
11
39
26
MANUAL GEARBOX
Capacity - Lubricants
CAPACITY (in litres)
5 speed gearbox
JB1
3.4
Viscosity
TRX 75W 80W
CHECKING THE LEVEL
92081S
Fill up to the level of the opening.
21-3
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
Consumables
TYPE
PACKAGING
PART NUMBER
21
COMPONENT
Right hand sunwheel splines

MOLYKOTE BR2
LOCTITE 518
1 kg tin
77 01 421 145
24 ml syringe
77 01 421 162
5661
100 g tube
77 01 404 452
LOCTITE FRENBLOC
(locking and sealing
resin)
24 cc bottle
77 01 394 071
RHODORSEAL
Fork pivot
Thrust pad guide
Fork pads
Housing assembly faces

Threaded plugs and switches
Bearing plugs
Ends of driveshaft roll pins
Primary and secondary shaft nuts
Fixed gear and 5th gear hub
Differential lock drive stud
Parts to be systematically replaced
Whenever they are removed:

- lip seals,
- O rings,
- thrust pad guide tubes,
- secondary and differential shaft nuts,
- speedo gear and shaft,
- speedo drive,
- roll pins,
- inner hubs.
21-4
Clutch
control
MANUAL GEARBOX
21
Set of punches
Trolley for sub-frame
B. Vi. 31-01
Mot. 1040-01
T. Av. 476
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Engine support tool

Component jack
Brake caliper bolt

Driveshaft gaiter bolt
Lower ball joint nut
Engine tie bar bolt
Bolt at edge of gearbox and starter
Suspended mounting bolt on gearbox
Wheel bolt
Track rod end nut
4
2.5
5.5
18
6.5
4.5
4
9
4
REMOVAL

Remove the battery.
13083S
Disconnect the connectors on:

- the injection computer (petrol version),
- the preheating unit (diesel version),
- the fuel filter (diesel version),
- the impact sensor.
Remove bolts (A) from the battery protective

shield.
Remove the air filter sleeve.
13088R
21-5
MANUAL GEARBOX
Remove the two mounting bolts (B).
Right hand side of the vehicle, remove the driveshaft roll pins using tool B. Vi. 31-01.
13119R
91755-1R2
Disconnect the clutch cable.
On the right and left hand sides, remove:

- the brake calipers and attach them,
- the mudguards,
- the track rod ends (T. Av. 476),
- the sub-frame- side member tie rods (A),
- the driveshaft - stub axle carrier assembly by
releasing the lower ball joint.
Remove:
- the upper bolts at the edge of the gearbox
and starter motor (slacken bolt (D) as far as
possible),
- the earth strap bolts on the gearbox,
- the two TDC sensor bolts,
13097-2R
21
99070R1
the front wheels,

the oil collector under the gearbox.
21-6
MANUAL GEARBOX
21
Check that the rollers for the left hand driveshaft

do not come out by hand. If they do, check that
the needles have not fallen into the gearbox.
Disconnect and remove the starter motor.
Disconnect:
- the reversing light switch,
- the speedo connector and remove the final
drive sensor.
Remove:
- the complete gear control rod, removing bolt
(E) and the three bolts for the heat shield to
reach the base of the gear lever,
- the engine tie bar bolt,
- the rear gearbox mounting.
13120S
Remove the steering rack and attach it.

Fit the engine support tool and take the weight of
the engine and transmission assembly.
Positioning for F8Q engine
12993-1R2
Remove the engine - gearbox tie rod.
14279-1S
To make removing the steering rack easier, if necessary, fit a block to allow the engine to be tilted
forwards.
21-7
MANUAL GEARBOX
21
Fit the trolley (Mot. 1040-01) to support the subframe and lower the vehicle.
Positioning for other engines
14278S
Remove the three mounting bolts for the support

on the gearbox.
98755R1
Remove the sub-frame by slackening the four

mounting bolts.
Fit the component jack under the gearbox without lifting it.
Release the gearbox from the engine by removing
nut (E) and the engine - gearbox mounting stud.
12924R
Lower the engine as far as possible.

Remove:
- the last upper bolt at the edge of the gearbox,
- the shield/bumper.
85812-1R
21-8
MANUAL GEARBOX
REFITTING
Coat the walls of the guide tube and the fork pads
with MOLYKOTE BR2 .
Fit the fork in the lugs on the clutch thrust pad.
Connect the gearbox to the engine, avoiding altering the height of the engine.
Ensure the engine - gearbox centring rings are
present and correctly positioned.
Stud (C) makes connecting the engine and gearbox easier.
86308R2
Refit:
- the sub-frame,
- the steering,
- the engine tie bar.
SPECIAL NOTES FOR E7J ENGINES
Refit the exhaust downpipe before refitting the

right hand driveshaft.
Refitting is then the reverse of removal.
21-9
21
DRIVESHAFTS
General
29
SPECIFICATIONS
Driveshaft joint
Engines
F8Q
Gearbox
Left
Right
GE 86 + GI 69
GE 86 + RC 462
JB1
D7F
E7J
JB1
K7M
CONSUMABLES
Type
Quantity
Component concerned
RHODORSEAL
Coat
Driveshaft roll pin, gearbox end
180 g
Part No. : 77 01 366 100
GE 86
110 cm3
RC 462
MOBIL OIL
55911L 611
(supplied with the repair kit)
SHELL STAMINA 0233 grease
(supplied with the repair kit)
NOTE : the ENKO driveshaft nut does not require the stub axle splines to be coated with Loctite SCELBLOC.
29-1
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
29
B. Vi.
Rou.
T. Av.
T. Av.
Roll pin punch

Hub locking tool
Driveshaft extractor
31-01
604-01
476
1050-02
On both sides
Driveshaft nut
Gaiter mounting bolt on gearbox
Wheel bolt
Shock absorber base nut
Brake caliper mounting bolt
Track rod end nut
Remove:
- the track rod end nut and remove the pin
using tool T. Av. 476,
- the upper shock absorber base bolt.
28
2.5
9
18
10
3.7
Push the driveshaft back using tool T. Av. 1050-02

(if necessary).
Remove the lower shock absorber base bolt and
remove the driveshaft.
REMOVAL

Drain the gearbox.
Remove:
- the brake assembly (suspend it from the
chassis),
- the driveshaft nut ; tool Rou. 604-01.
Left hand side

Remove the three bolts on the gearbox.
Right hand side

Remove the roll pin; tool B. Vi. 31-01.
99544R
29-2
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
REFITTING
Left hand side:

Fit the driveshaft as horizontally as possible.
Right hand side:
Coat the splines of the joint at the gearbox end
with MOLYKOTE BR2 .
Fit the driveshaft and check its position using the
elbow pin B. Vi. 31-01.
Fit two new roll pins : B. Vi. 31-01. Seal the roll pin
holes using RHODORSEAL 5661 .
On both sides:
Fit the driveshaft stub axle into the hub; it should
enter easily.
Refitting is then the reverse of removal. Observe
the correct tightening torques.
Fill the gearbox with oil.
piston into contact with the pads.
29-3
29
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
Left hand
driveshaft
29
T. Av. 1168
T. Av. 1256
T. Av. 1331
CAILLAU clip pliers
OETIKER clip crimping pliers

Tool for retaining the driveshaft bearing
gaiter in position
REPLACING THE GAITER, GEARBOX END
REFITTING
GI 69 JOINT
To be correctly positioned on the shaft, the

bearing must be pressed on to give dimension
L = 118 0.2 mm between the rear part of the
bearing and the end of the shaft.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Spider
Rubber gaiter
Bearing guide
Retaining clip
Shield
Circlip
Driveshaft
This dimension is obtained using tool T. Av. 1331

when the end of the tool is level with the shaft.
85884-1R1
DI2935R
NOTE : to avoid damaging the bearing which has

a lip seal, which could cause leakage, do not press
it on using a mallet, but use the press to ensure
progressive pressure.
REMOVAL
Remove the circlip.
The driveshaft is secured on the press by groove

(G) using an extractor.
On the press, remove the spider using an

extractor.
Fit the spider into the position noted on removal

and refit the retaining circlip.
NOTE : note the position of the spider before

removing it.
Remove the gaiter and bearing - shield assembly

in the same manner as for the spider.
29-4
Left hand
driveshaft
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
29
REPLACING THE GAITER, WHEEL END
Remove the gaiter and replace it with a new one.
GE 86 JOINT
Spread the recommended dose of grease in the

gaiter and the stub axle bowl.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Stub axle bowl

Retaining starplate
Spider
Shaft yoke
Thermoplastic gaiter
Clips
Spring
Pushrod
Shim
ABS target
NOTE : the volume of grease specified in the

consumables section must be observed.
Position the two gaiter rings in the grooves on the

stub axle bowl.
Adjust the amount of air in the gaiter.
Fit the clips and tighten them.
DI2934R
REMOVAL
Cut the two collars (6), taking care to avoid

damaging the grooves in the stub axle bowl.
Remove as much grease as possible.
To replace the thermoplastic gaiter, the parts at
the gearbox end must be removed(GI 69 joint)
(see method described previously).
29-5
Right hand
driveshaft
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
29
REPLACING THE GAITER, GEARBOX END
REFITTING
RC 462 JOINT
Slightly lubricate the driveshaft to make fitting

the gaiter easier (position the smaller diameter of
the gaiter on the driveshaft groove).
1
2
3
4
5
Yoke sleeve
Spider
Locking spring ring
Gaiter
Clips
Position the spider in the position noted on

removal and fit the locking spring ring.
Crimp three points at 120 by folding over the
metal of the splines on the driveshaft.
Fit the yoke sleeve on the spider.
Spread the dose of grease in the gaiter and the
yoke sleeve.
Ensure the gaiter is correctly positioned in the
grooves.
Insert a rounded end rod between the gaiter and
the yoke sleeve to adjust the amount of air in the
joint.
Lengthen or shorten the joint to obtain dimension
A = 190 mm (dimension measured between the
end of the gaiter and the face of the smaller diameter of the yoke sleeve).
Remove the rod in this position.
DI2933R
REMOVAL

damaging the groove in the yoke sleeve.
Remove the yoke sleeve.
Remove the locking spring ring.
IMPORTANT: never use thinners to clean the
parts.
On the press, remove the spider, using a releasing

type extractor.
90392R1
Refit the clips using the recommended tooling.

NOTE : note the position of the spider before
removing it.
29-6
Right hand
driveshaft
DRIVESHAFTS
Front driveshafts
NOTE : certain right hand driveshafts have a vibration damper. If the thermoplastic gaiter is damaged, replace the complete driveshaft.
REPLACING THE GAITER, WHEEL END

GE 86 JOINT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
29
Stub axle bowl

Retaining starplate
Spider
Shaft yoke
Thermoplastic gaiter
Clips
Spring
Pushrod
Shim
ABS target
Remove the gaiter and replace it with a new one.

Spread the recommended dose of grease in the
gaiter and the stub axle bowl.
NOTE : the volume of grease specified in the
consumables section must be observed.
Position the two gaiter rings in the grooves on the

stub axle bowl.
Adjust the amount of air in the gaiter.
Fit the clips and tighten them.
DI2934R
REMOVAL

damaging the grooves in the stub axle bowl.
To replace the thermoplastic gaiter, the parts at
the gearbox end must be removed(RC 462 joint)
(see method described previously).
29-7
Chassis
GENERAL
FRONT AXLE
REAR AXLE
WHEELS AND TYRES
STEERING ASSEMBLY
MECHANICAL ELEMENT CONTROLS
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

77 11 197 307
DECEMBER 1997
" The repair methods given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH3001
Chassis
Contents
Page
30 GENERAL
General diagram of braking circuits
Tightening torques (in daN.m)
Dimensions of the main braking
components
Brake unions and pipes
Brake fluid
Bleeding the brake circuit
36 STEERING ASSEMBLY
30-1
30-2
Axial ball joint

Manual steering rack
Power assisted steering rack
Gaiter
Steering rack pinion
Manual steering assistance pump
Power assisted steering electric
pump assembly
Steering column
Retractable shaft
30-8
30-9
30-9
30-10
36-1
36-3
36-4
36-6
36-7
36-8
36-14
36-15
36-21
31 FRONT AXLE
Lower wishbone
Lower wishbone rubber bushes
Lower wishbone ball joint
Brake pads
Brake caliper
Brake disc
Stub axle carrier bearing
Spring and shock absorber assembly
Anti-roll bar
Sub-frame
31-1
31-2
31-3
31-4
31-5
31-6
31-7
31-9
31-10
31-12
37 MECHANICAL ELEMENT CONTROLS

Master cylinder
Brake servo
Air filter - Brake servo non-return
valve
Vacuum pump
Handbrake control lever
Handbrake control
Brake pipes
Braking compensator
Clutch control
Clutch automatic wear take-up
system
External gear control
33 REAR AXLE
Rear axle assembly
Shock absorber
Spring
Brake drum
Wheel cylinder
Brake linings (drum)
Bearing
33-1
33-4
33-5
33-6
33-8
33-9
33-11
37-6
37-7
37-8
37-10
37-12
37-13
37-17
37-18
37-19
38 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
35 WHEELS AND TYRES

Specifications
Wheel balancing
37-1
37-3
35-1
35-4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
BOSCH ABS
Presentation of BOSCH ABS 5.3

Presentation of the hydraulic
regulation assembly
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram key
31 track connector
Diagnostic socket
Hydraulic assembly
Hydraulic braking test
38-1
38-2
38-3
38-4
38-5
38-6
38-7
38-8
38-11
GENERAL
General diagram of braking circuits
30
NOTE : the diagram below shows the general principle ; in no case should it be taken as reference for the
circuit connections and allocations. When replacing one of the components of the brake circuit on a vehicle,
always mark the pipes before removing them so that they can be connected back in their original positions.
"X" PATTERN BRAKING
with load sensitive compensator
91563S
30-1
FRONT
AXLE
GENERAL
30
DI3035R
30-2
FRONT
AXLE
GENERAL
30
DI3034R1
Must be fitted in this way
30-3
REAR
AXLE
GENERAL
30
DI3041
30-4
REAR
AXLE
GENERAL
30
DI3042
30-5
REAR
AXLE
GENERAL
30
DI3043
30-6
GENERAL
30
DIMENSIONS
TIGHTENING TORQUE
0.6 to 0.8
M 10 100
1.7
Hoses on rear suspension arm
M 10 100
1.7
Rear wheel cylinder supply
M 10 100
or
M 12 100
1.7
Master cylinder outlets
M 10 100
or
M 12 100
1.7
Compensator inlets
M 10 100
or
M 12 100
1.7
Compensator outlets
M 10 100
or
M12 100
1.7
Bleed screw
Hoses for front calipers in front wheel
cylinders
30-7
GENERAL
Dimensions of the main braking components
B/C B0A (1)

B/C B0C (1)
B/C B0E (1)
B/C
B/C
B/C
B/C
B0A
B0C
B0D
B0E
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3) (4)
30
B/C B0C (2)
B/C B0D (2)
B/C B0E (2) (3)
FRONT BRAKES (in mm)
Diameter of wheel cylinders

Diameter of discs
Thickness of discs
Minimum disc thickness
Pad thickness (including backing)
Minimum pad thickness (including backing)
Maximum disc run-out
54
238
12
10.5
18.2
6
0.07
54
238
20
17.7
18.2
6
0.07
54
259
20.6
17.6
18.2
6
0.07
19
180.25
181.25
36.7
17.5 *
203.2
204.2
36.7
17.5
203.2
204.2
36.7
(A)
(A)
(A)
20.6
20.6
20.6
REAR BRAKES (in mm)
Diameter of wheel cylinders

Diameter of drums
Maximum drum wear diameter
Diameter of discs
Thickness of discs
Minimum disc thickness
Lining size
Lining thickness (including backing)
Minimum lining thickness (including backing)
MASTER CYLINDER (in mm)
Diameter
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
without ABS
with ABS
with CA
with or without ABS
except B/C B0A
(A) The lining thicknesses are :

- 4.85 mm for the B/C B0A,
- 4.6 mm (leading shoe) and 3.3 mm (trailing shoe) for the B/C B0C, B/C B0D and B/C B0E.
30-8
GENERAL
Brake unions and pipes
30
The connection of the pipes between the master

cylinder, calipers, compensator and the hydraulic
assembly is made using threaded unions with a
METRIC THREAD.
Consequently, only parts specified in the Parts

Catalogue for this vehicle should be used.
Identification of parts
- SHAPE of the ends of PIPES in steel or copper
(A),
- SHAPE of the THREADED LOCATIONS on
components (B),
- Pipe UNIONS coloured GREEN or BLACK:
HEXAGONAL OUTSIDE 11 mm or 12 mm (C).
78491R
Brake fluid
BRAKE FLUID RENEWAL FREQUENCY
The technology of our brakes, and of our disc brakes in particular (hollow pistons which transmit little heat, a
low volume of fluid in the cylinder, sliding calipers avoiding the need for a fluid reservoir in the least cooled
area of the wheel), has allowed us to reduce the risk of vapour lock as far as possible, even under conditions
of intensive use of the brakes (mountainous areas).
Modern brake fluids still degrade slightly during the first few months of use due to a small uptake of
humidity and replacement of the fluid is therefore recommended (refer to vehicles Warranty and Servicing
Handbook).
Topping up the level

Wear of the brake pads and shoes will cause a gradual drop in the fluid level in the reservoir. This drop should
not be compensated for since the level will rise again when the pads are changed. The level should not
however be allowed to fall below the minimum mark.
Approved brake fluids

Mixing two incompatible brake fluids in the circuit will cause a risk of major leaks, mainly due to
deterioration of the cups. To avoid such risks, it is important to use only those brake fluids which have been
tested and approved by our Technical Department and which conform to standard SAE J 1703 DOT 4.
30-9
GENERAL
Bleeding the brake circuit
M.S. 815
Bleed equipment
For vehicles fitted with a brake servo, during

bleeding and whatever the method applied, it is
important that the assistance device is not used.
Bleeding is carried out using the M.S. 815 tool on
a four post lift with the wheels on the ground.
Connect the M.S. 815 pipes to the bleed screws on
the :
- master cylinder ,
- wheel cylinder ,
- compensator .
Connect the tool to a compressed air supply point
(minimum 5 bars).
Connect the filling system to the brake fluid
reservoir.
Open:
- the supply, wait until the reservoir is full (both
sections),
- the compressed air valve.
Proceed as follows for vehicles fitted with X
pattern braking:
Open:
- the rear right hand wheel bleed screw and
allow the fluid to run out for approximately 20
seconds,
- the front left hand wheel bleed screw and
allow the fluid to run out for approximately 20
seconds.
Ignore any bubbles in the bleed tool hoses .
Do the same for the rear left and front right
wheels.
Check the firmness of the brake pedal when
depressed (apply several times).
Repeat the bleed operation if necessary.
Top up the brake fluid level in the reservoir after
disconnecting the tool.
(For bleeding of the ABS braking circuit,consult
section 38).
30-10
30
FRONT AXLE
Lower wishbone
REFITTING
Wheel bolts
Lower wishbone nut on sub-frame
Cotter bolt on stub-axle carrier
Anti-roll bar bearing nut
31
NOTE: ensure the plastic protective washer ( A ) is
present on the lower ball joint shaft.
9
5.5
1.5
REFIT:
REMOVAL
the wishbone,
the two bolts without tightening them,
the ball joint shaft in the stub-axle carrier and
tighten the Cotter bolt nut.
Remove both wheels.
Refit the anti-roll bar and fit the mounting nuts

using tool Sus. 1414 (see method in anti-roll bar
section).
Remove the mounting nuts for the anti-roll bar on

the lower wishbones.
This tool allows the rubber mounting to be

compressed to fit the nut.
Release the anti-roll bar downwards.

Remove:
- the nut and Cotter bolt on the stub-axle carrier,
- the two mounting bolts for the wishbone on
the sub-frame,
- the wishbone.
12992R
NOTE: bounce the suspension and tighten the
wishbone and anti-roll bar bearing nuts to the recommended torque (tightening position: vehicle
unladen).
85875R2
31-1
FRONT AXLE
Lower wishbone rubber bushes
REPLACEMENT
To ensure the bushes are correctly positioned in

relation to the lower wishbone, they are replaced
one after the other.
On the press, remove one of the worn bushes
using a tube of external diameter 30 mm.
Refit the new bush, ensuring that dimension A =
146.5 mm.
Remove the second bush on the press and proceed
in the same manner as for the first bush, ensuring
the new bush is fitted so that dimension A =
146.5 mm.
90404R
31-2
31
FRONT AXLE
Lower wishbone ball joint
31
REMOVAL
If the gaiter is damaged, the complete ball joint

must be replaced.
Proceed in the same manner as for removing the
lower wishbone.
Slacken but do not remove the two mounting
bolts (3) for the wishbone on the sub-frame.
85875R1
Remove:
the two ball joint mounting bolts (4) ,
-
the ball joint.
REFITTING
Note: ensure the plastic protective washer ( A ) is

present on the lower ball joint shaft.
Fit the ball joint and torque tighten the
mountings.
Then proceed in the same manner as for refitting
the lower wishbone.
31-3
FRONT AXLE
Brake pads
31
Fre. 823
Tool for pushing piston back
REFITTING
Wheel bolts
Push back the wheel cylinder piston using tool Fre.

823.
9
4
REMOVAL
Disconnect the wear warning light wire (if fitted).

Push the piston back by sliding the caliper
outwards by hand.
82160R
Fit new brake pads.

Refit the caliper into position and fit the lower
guide bolt (7) coated with Loctite FRENBLOC.
Press on the caliper and fit the upper guide bolt
coated with Loctite FRENBLOC.
Tighten the guide bolts to the recommended torque, beginning with the lower bolt.
Reconnect the wear warning light wire (if fitted).
90130-2R

piston into contact with the pads.
Remove the guide bolts (7) using the two

wrenches.
Do not clean these bolts.
Remove:
- the sliding caliper,
- the pads.
Checking
Check:
- the condition and fitting of the piston dust cover and its retaining spring ring,
- the condition of the guide dust covers (8).
31-4
FRONT AXLE
Front brake caliper
REPAIR
Wheel bolts
31
NOTE: if there are any scratches in the caliper
9
4
10
bore, the complete caliper must be replaced.

To do this:
-
REMOVAL
In the passenger compartment, fit a pedal press

(limits the amount of brake fluid which will run
out).
Release the brake pipe at the wheel cylinder end.
Remove the brake pads (see previous page).

Remove the two mounting bolts for the caliper on
the stub axle carrier.
remove the brake caliper,

remove the rubber dust cover,
remove the piston using compressed air,
inserting a wooden block between the caliper
and the piston to prevent damage to the
piston: any trace of damage to the piston skirt
will render it unusable
remove the seal from the caliper groove using
a flexible rounded edge blade (eg feeler
gauge).
Clean the parts using methylated spirits.

Replace any faulty parts using original parts and
then refit the seal, piston and dust seal.
Completely release the brake pipe by turning the

caliper.
Check the condition of the pipe and replace it if
necessary.
REFITTING
Fit the pipe onto the caliper.

Remove the pedal press.
To check the correct operation of the caliper
cylinder, slacken the bleed screw and wait for
brake fluid to run out.
Retighten the bleed screw.
Refit the caliper on the stub-axle carrier and
tighten the bolts to the recommended torque.
Refit the pads and the wheel cylinder (follow the
method described previously).
31-5
FRONT AXLE
Brake discs
31
Brake discs cannot be reground. If they are too

heavily worn or are scratched they must be replaced.
Wheel bolts
9
10
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the two brake assembly mounting bolts (A),
88310-1R
REFITTING
Refit the disc on the hub and secure it using the

two bolts (B).
Refit the brake caliper, coat the bolts with Loctite
FRENBLOC and torque tighten.
NOTE: when a brake disc is replaced, the pads
must also be renewed.

Press several times on the brake pedal to put the
piston in contact with the pads.
91758R
the two disc mounting bolts (B) , Torx allen

key (T40),
the disc.
31-6
FRONT AXLE
31
Rou.
Rou.
15 -01
604 -01
T.Av.
476
T.Av. 1050-02
Shaft protector
Hub locking tool
Tool for pushing driveshaft
back
Remove the hub on the press.
Driveshaft nut
Wheel bolts
Shock absorber base nut
Track rod end nut
Cotter bolt nut on stub axle carrier
Remove the track ring from the hub using an extractor with jaws and tool Rou. 15-01.
28
9
18
10
3.7
5.5
REMOVAL

Remove:
- the wheel,
- the brake caliper and attach it to the spring so
the pipe is not damaged,
- the driveshaft nut.
Push back the driveshaft using tool T. Av. 1050-02.
Remove:
- the brake disc,
- the lower ball joint nut and Cotter bolt,
- the two shock absorber base bolts,
- the hub / stub axle carrier / bearing assembly.
83348G
Remove the locking spring ring from the stub axle

carrier.
On the press remove the remainder of the bearing, taking care to take the weight on the inner
bush using a tube of the same diameter.
31-7
FRONT AXLE
31
Fit on the press, using a tube of external diameter

48 mm and internal diameter 42 mm, taking the
weight on the inner bearing bush.
79057S
REFITTING
Fit the bearing on the press, into the stub axle carrier using a tube of external diameter
70 mm and bore 66 mm, taking the weight on the
external bush.
85902S1
Refit the hub / stub axle carrier / bearing assembly

to the vehicle.
IMPORTANT: do not take the weight on the internal bush to avoid damaging the bearing as the
force required to push the bearing on is quite
considerable.
Refitting is then the reverse of removal. Observe the

correct tightening torques.
79058-1S
Fit a new locking spring ring.

Coat each sealing lip of the bearing with multipurpose grease.
31-8
FRONT AXLE
Spring and shock absorber assembly
31
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Spring compressor
Replacing a shock absorber
Shock absorber base mounting bolt

Rebound stop nut
Wheel bolts
When replacing a shock absorber, fit it in a vice

and compress the spring using the spring
compressor tool.
18
6
9
Remove the spring retaining nut.

REMOVAL
Remove the spring and the intermediate parts.
Put the vehicle on a four post lift.
If necessary, replace the shock absorber pad and

the rotating stop.
Remove:
- the wheels,
- the shock absorber base mounting bolts.
When refitting, ensure all components are

replaced in the correct location and then
decompress the spring.
NOTE: release the ABS sensor wiring if this is
fitted on the base of the shock absorber.
NOTE: apply grease between the ends of the
Remove the upper shock absorber nut in the

engine compartment.
spring and its stops.
Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.
REFITTING
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Observe the

31-9
FRONT AXLE
Anti-roll bar
31
Sus.
Sus.
1413
1414
Central bearing compressor

Rubber mounting compressor
Central bearing bolt

Rubber mounting nut
3
1.5
the two rubber mounting nuts at the ends of

the anti-roll bar,
the two bolts from the central bearings on the
bar.
Check the condition of the bearings and the

rubber mountings and replace them if necessary.
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Refit :
- the rubber mounting nuts using tool
Sus. 1414,
Remove:
- the two lower bolts from the exhaust
downpipe,
- the two sub-frame reinforcements (4 bolts),
12992R
12993-1R
31-10
FRONT AXLE
Anti-roll bar
-
31
the central bearing bolts using tool

Sus. 1413.
12991R
the two sub-frame reinforcements,

the lower bolts on the exhaust downpipe.
Rubber bush locking position : UNLADEN.
31-11
FRONT AXLE
Sub-frame
31
Mot. 1040-01
T. Av.

/ refitting engine / transmission
assembly
476
Remove:
Wheel bolts
Track rod end nut
Steering universal joint eccentric bolt
Sub-frame mounting
bolt
front 10
rear 12
Sub-frame - side member tie rod nut
Cotter bolt nut on stub axle carrier
9
3.7
2.5
6
10.5
3
the exhaust downpipe and attach the catalytic

converter,
the bolt (engine side) for the engine tie bar.
the gear control by removing the two bolts at
the ends of the control. To do this, the catalytic converter heat shield must be removed and
the gaiter on the gearbox side must also be removed.
5.5
Engine tie bar
Steering rack mounting bolts
6.5
5
REMOVAL

Remove the wheels.
Remove the track rod ends using tool T. Av. 476.
Remove the Cotter bolt on the stub axle carrier.
Release but do not remove the mudguards to
reach the upper bolt on the sub-frame - side member tie rod and remove it.
12988R
31-12
FRONT AXLE
Sub-frame
Remove:
- the two nuts for the steering rack heat shield,
- the mounting nuts for the steering rack and
attach it to the exhaust manifold.
31
REFITTING
Systematically renew the sub-frame mounting

bolts and ensure they are tightened to the correct
torque.
NOTE: the sub-frame is fitted to the body in the
following manner :
- fit 2 pins in place of the front mounting bolts
- offer up the sub-frame,
- tighten, but do not lock, the rear mounting
bolts (begin with the longest rear right hand
bolt),
- replace the pins with mounting bolts at the
front,
- tighten the four mounting bolts to the correct
torque, beginning at the rear,
- ensure that the heat shields are correctly refitted.
12993-1R1
Fit tool Mot. 1040-01 under the sub-frame.

Remove the sub-frame mounting bolts.
Carefully raise the lift.
31-13
REAR AXLE
Rear axle assembly
Remove the compensator pin by removing the

retaining clip on the rear axle.
Axle mounting nut

Wheel bolt
Shock absorber upper nut
33
5.5
9
2
10.5
REMOVAL

Remove the two rear wheels.
Fit the pedal press to limit the amount of brake
fluid running out.
Disconnect the two rigid brake fluid pipes.
14214S
In the passenger compartment, slacken the handbrake cable (see the method described in section
37 of the Workshop Repair Manual).
Under the vehicle, remove the two rear heat
shields and unclip the brake cables from the body
(A).
14290S
14217R1
33-1
REAR AXLE
Rear axle assembly
33
Remove the shock absorber lower bolts by using a

bar to lift it.
Remove the springs as you go.
14290-1R
NOTE: slacken, but do not remove the rubber
bush bolts (B).

Fit the component jack.
14442S
NOTE: before removing the second bolt, ensure
that there are two people to hold the rear axle

assembly. When the bolt is removed, tilt the
assembly until it is correctly balanced.
Remove the six rear axle assembly bearing nuts on
the body.
14443S
14291R
Completely remove the axle assembly whilst keeping it balanced on the component jack.
33-2
REAR AXLE
Rear axle assembly
33
REFITTING
Position the axle assembly, in balance, on the

component jack, position the mounting bearings
so the the positioning pin (A) is to the top.
PRO33.1
Fit the axle assembly until it has passed the mounting bolts and replace the six nuts.
Using two people, tilt the rear axle assembly to refit the springs and the shock absorber bolts.
Correctly replace the heat shields.
Bleed the brake circuit.
33-3
REAR AXLE
Shock absorber
-
Shock absorber upper nut

33
the nut (1) and the rubber bush (2).
2
10.5
REMOVAL

Put the vehicle on its wheels, and in the luggage
compartment remove:
- the shock absorber cover ,
14219R
Lift the vehicle and remove the shock absorber lower bolt.
14219-1S
14218R
IMPORTANT : do one side at a time.

REFITTING
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Observe recommended tightening torques.
33-4
REAR AXLE
Spring
NOTE: to make it easier to remove the shock
33
absorber lower bolt, insert a bar in the axle to lift

it.
10.5
REMOVAL

Lift the vehicle and remove the shock absorber lower bolt.
14442R
To remove the spring, lever downwards on the

axle to release it.
14218R
14442R1
IMPORTANT : do one side at a time.
REFITTING
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Observe recommended tightening torques.
33-5
REAR AXLE
Brake drum
33
The two brake drums must be of the same diameter, if one is reground, the other must also be reground.
Never exceed the maximum wear diameter marked on the drum.
Emb. 880
Rou. 943
Inertia extraction tool

Hub cover plug extractor
Wheel bolts
Hub nut
9
17.5
REMOVAL
98991
Remove the hub plug using tools Rou. 943 +

Emb. 880.
Release the handbrake, slacken the secondary
handbrake cables to allow the lever to move back.
Insert a screwdriver through one of the wheel
mounting holes in the drum and push the handbrake lever to release the lug from the brake
shoe( E ).
Help the lever to slacken by pushing it towards
the rear.
98990G
Remove:
33-6
the nut and stub axle washer,
the drum.
REAR AXLE
Brake drum
REFITTING
Remove all dust from the drum and the linings

using brake cleaner.
Fit:
-
the drum,
the washer and the nut, which must be torque

tightened,
the plug.
Adjust:
- the linings by repeatedly pressing the brake
pedal,
-
the handbrake (see section 37 "Controls").
33-7
33
REAR AXLE
Wheel cylinder
33
Wheel bolts
Hub nut
Bleed screw
Pipe bolt
9
17.5
0.5 to 0.8
1.7
REMOVAL
Remove:
-
the drum (see corresponding section),

the upper return spring (see paragraph
"Brake linings").
Separate the shoes.

Slacken:
-
the rigid pipe union on the wheel cylinder

using a pipe wrench,
the two cylinder mounting bolts on the
backing plate and remove it.
Check the condition of the shoes. If they have

traces of oil on them, renew them.
REFITTING
Remove all dust from the drums and the linings

using brake cleaner.
Bleed the braking circuit (see section 38).
Adjust the linings by repeatedly pressing the
brake pedal.
Check the cut-out pressure (see section 37
"Controls").
33-8
REAR AXLE
33
Emb. 880
Rou. 943

Hub cover plug extractor
REMOVAL
Wheel bolts
Hub nut
Brake shoes must be replaced on the complete

axle - never fit shoes of differing makes or
grades.
9
17.5
Composition of RAI brake (Rattrapage Automatique Incrmental - automatic wear take up

system).
Remove:
- the brake drum (see corresponding paragraph),
- the lower spring (2) using brake shoe pliers.
Using adjustable pliers, remove the shoe side retaining springs.
In turn, pass each brake shoe base over the fixed
point. Squeeze the bases of the shoes together to
separate the ends at the wheel cylinder end.
Separate the assembly (RAI and shoes) from the
brake backing plate then remove it, after
unclipping the handbrake cable.
98992-2R
A Leading shoe
B Trailing shoe
C Fixed point
P Base of brake shoe
F RAI automatic wear take up system
1 Upper return spring
2 Lower return spring (for base)
3 Side retainer
4 Handbrake lever return spring
33-9
REAR AXLE
33
Ensure:
- the cables slide freely,
- the handbrake levers (L) are correctly
positioned against the shoes.
REFITTING
Present the assembly to the vehicle.

Attach the handbrake cable to the lever.
Squeeze the bases of the shoes together and
position the other ends on the wheel cylinder
pistons. Take care not to damage the covers.
Position the shoes on the fixed point (C).
Fit the side retainers (3).
Remove the pliers from the wheel cylinder pistons
then refit the lower spring (2).
ADJUSTMENT
Using a screwdriver, adjust the brake shoe

diameter using the notched segment.
Refit the drums without tightening the nuts.
Centre the linings by repeatedly pressing the
brake pedal (approximately 20 times).
Ensure the RAI is operating correctly
(characteristic click from the drums).
Remove the drums.
98992-3R
Progressively tighten the cables at the central

adjustor so that levers (L) start to move between
the 1st and 2nd notch of the control lever travel
and remain applied from the 2nd notch.
Lock the lock nut on the central adjuster.
Refit:
- the drums and tighten the nuts to a torque of
17.5 daN.m,
- the plugs.
33-10
REAR AXLE
Bearing
33
Emb.
Rou.
880
943

Hub plug extractor
Hub nut
Wheel bolts
17.5
9
CHECKING
Check the end float using a dial gauge mounted

on the drum : 0 to 0.03 mm maximum.
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the hub plug using tools Rou. 943 + Emb. 880,
- the brake drum (see corresponding section).
From the drum, remove:
- the bearing retaining clip,
- the bearing using a tube.
REFITTING
Using a tube and a press, fit the bearing until it

touches the shoulder.
Fit:
-
a new clip,
the drum on the pre-lubricated stub axle,
a new lock nut and tighten to the correct
torque,
the hub plug.
Adjust:
-
the brake shoes by repeatedly pressing the

brake pedal,
the handbrake (see section 37 "Controls").
33-11
WHEELS AND TYRES

Specifications
35
WHEEL RIMS
There are two forms of wheel identification marking:

-
engraved markings for steel rims,
cast marking for alloy rims.
The marking gives the main dimensional specifications of the wheel.

The marking may be complete:
Example : 5 1/2 J 14 4 CH 36
or simplified
Example : 5 1/2 J 14
A
TYPE
OF
WHEEL
5 1/2 J 14
4 CH 36
N OMINAL DIAMETER
WIDTH
(in inches)
5 1/2
RIM
PROFILE
(in inches). under tyre

bead
14
Number
of holes
4
Tyre bead
profile
CH
Offset
(in mm)
36
The four wheel bolts are over a diameter of 100

mm (4 mounting bolts).
Maximum run-out: 1.2 mm measured on the rim
edge (at G).
Maximum eccentricity: 0.8 mm measured on the
pressure face of the tyre beads.
DI3501
35-1
WHEELS AND TYRES

Specifications
35
TYRES
Examples of identification marking

165/70 R 13 83 S
165
70
13
83
85920R2
165
Tyre width in mm ( l ) section
70
h/l ratio
height
width
Radial structure
13
Inner diameter expressed in inches().Corresponds to the diameter of the rim
83
Load index
Speed index 180 km/h maximum

Some speed symbols :
Maximum speed
R
S
T
U
H
V
ZR over
Types of structure :
Diagonal
Radial
Bias belted
No marking
R
B
35-2
km/h
170
180
190
200
210
240
240
WHEELS AND TYRES

Specifications
Vehicle
Rim
Tyres
B/C B0A
35
Inflation pressure (bar)
cold
FRONT
REAR
2.2
2.1
2.3
2.1
5 B 13
165/70 R 13 T
B/C B0D
5 B 13
5.5 J 14
165/70 R 13 T
165/60 R 14 T
165/65 R 14 T
2.4
2.1
B/C B0E
5 B 13
165/70 R 13 T
175/70 R 13 T (1)
2.3
2.1
B/C B0C
(1) with air conditioning

Wheel nut tightening torques : 9 daN.m
Rim run-out : 1.2 mm
The tyre inflation pressures are values for a fully laden vehicle or motorway use.
The tyre inflation pressure must be checked when cold. The increase in temperature during driving increases
the pressure by 0.2 to 0.3 bar.
If the inflation pressures are checked when the tyres are warm, take this pressure increase into consideration.
Never deflate a warm tyre.
Chains
For safety reasons, chains may NEVER be fitted to the rear axle.
"Snow" or "thermorubber" tyres: all four wheels must be fitted with these tyres to retain vehicle adhesion as
far as possible.
35-3
WHEELS AND TYRES

Wheel balancing
35
BALANCE WEIGHTS
Only use weights provided by the Parts

Department:
-
A
B
fitted using hooks to steel wheels (hook is part

of the weight),
fitted using hooks (flat hooks) or self adhesive
for alloy wheels.
Steel wheel rim

Alloy wheel rim
88659R
35-4
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Axial ball joint
36
Dir.
1305 -01
Tool for removing - refitting

axial ball joint
Tool for retaining SMI unit rack
Dir.
1306
T.Av.
476
Turn the wheels so the rack teeth are freed on the

pinion side.
Wheel bolts
Track rod end nut
Bolt on parallelism adjustment sleeve
Axial ball joint
Fit tool Dir. 1306.
3.7
1.7
In this position, release the axial ball joint using

tool Dir. 1305-01.

REMOVAL
Disconnect the track rod end using tool T.Av. 476.

Slacken the bolt on the parallelism adjustment
sleeve and slacken the track rod end while
holding the axial ball joint using an open wrench.
Make a mark or count the number of turns of
thread taken up so the parallelism can be preadjusted on refitting.
97469R1
Remove the plastic retaining clip for the gaiter

and remove the gaiter.
36-1
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Axial ball joint
REFITTING
Assembly (2) MUST be renewed systematically.

NOTE: assembly (2) is only fitted to vehicles with
manual steering.
83510-1R3
Refit to the rack (3) :

-
the stop washer assembled with the locking

ring (2),
- the new axial ball joint (1) having lightly coated
the threads with LOCTITE FREN-BLOC, ensuring
that the air evacuation opening is not blocked.
Before finally tightening the axial ball joint using
tool Dir. 1305-01, check that the tabs on the
locking ring (2) align with the flats (B) on the rack
(in the case of a vehicle with manual steering).
Tighten the axial ball joint to the recommended
torque.
Centre the steering to equalise the air in the gaiters.
Fit a new gaiter and secure it with a new clip (after greasing the gaiter bearing surface on the
axial ball joint).
CHECKING
Gently press on the gaiter to check the other gaiter inflates which indicates the air is circulating
correctly.
36-2
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Manual steering rack
36

T.Av.
476
Wheel bolts
Track rod end nut
Universal joint eccentric bolt
9
3.7
5.5
2.5

REMOVAL
Remove the front wheels.

Cut the rubber gaiter retaining clip and push the
gaiter back towards the bulkhead.
Disconnect the ball joints using tool T.Av. 476.
Remove:
-
the universal joint eccentric bolt,

the steering rack mounting bolts on the subframe.
Remove the steering rack.

REFITTING

recommended tightening torques.
If a new steering rack is being fitted, fit the track
rod ends in the position noted on removal.
To do this, slacken the bolt on the parallelism
adjustment sleeve and slacken the track rod end
while holding the axial ball joint using an open
wrench.
Check the parallelism.
NOTE : the markings on the track rod ends MUST
BE OBSERVED (one mark on right hand joint, two
marks on left hand joint).
36-3
STEERING ASSEMBLY
36
Mot.
T.Av.
453 -01
476
Hose clamp pliers

Wheel bolts
Track rod end nut
Engine tie bar bolt
9
3.7
5
2.5
6.5

REMOVAL
Remove the front wheels.

Fit a clamp Mot. 453-01 to each of the pipes from
the oil reservoir.
13120S
NOTE : never clamp the high pressure pipes.
Disconnect the high and low pressure pipes on the

steering rack (take precautions to catch the oil)
and the nut on the pipe retaining bracket.
Special notes for F8Q engine

Remove (from above) :
-
the battery,
the battery mounting,
the high and low pressure pipes from the
steering valve.
Cut the rubber gaiter retaining clip and push the

gaiter back towards the bulkhead.
Disconnect the ball joints using tool T.Av. 476.
Remove the universal joint eccentric bolt.
Disconnect the oxygen sensor.
Remove the exhaust downpipe.
Remove the bolt (engine side) from the engine tie
bar and pivot the engine and transmission
assembly forwards.
12997R
Insert a retaining block.
36-4
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Remove:
-
the two nuts on the heat shield for the right

hand steering rack bearing,
the steering rack mounting nuts and remove it
from the timing side.
NOTE:
do not remove the jack-valve pipes,
put plugs in the take offs of the steering rack

to prevent purities entering the system.
REFITTING

recommended tightening torques.
Fill the circuit with oil.
Turn the wheels from left to right (engine not
running) to distribute the oil in the circuit.
Repeat the operation with the engine running
then top up the level.
If a new steering rack is being fitted, fit the track
rod ends in the position noted on removal.
To do this, slacken the bolt on the parallelism
adjustment sleeve and slacken the track rod end
while holding the axial ball joint using an open
wrench.
Check the parallelism.
36-5
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Gaiter
The gaiter MUST be renewed with a new gaiter
whenever an axial ball joint is removed.
Fitting the gaiter
Use a protector on the axial ball joint to prevent
damage to the gaiter during fitting.
Coat the gaiter bearing face on the axial ball joint
with grease to prevent the gaiter twisting.
Secure the gaiter with a new clip (supplied with
the gaiter).
NOTE : the steering MUST be at the centre point
to equalise the air.
36-6
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering rack pinion
36
ADJUSTMENT
If the steering rack pinion is noisy, before considering replacing the steering rack, check that the rack pinion
is correctly adjusted.
1.
Determining the source of the noise
Hold the steering rack on the rack pinion side and

check for transverse play (up and down).
Movement followed by a click is caused by the
rack pinion.
2.
Adjusting for SMI steering racks
Release the adjusting nut (1) by straightening the

bent over edges (A) on the nut collar.
Check when driving that the steering wheel
returns to the centre point.
Maximum adjustment allowed : 1 notch.
Lock the nut again in the two lugs opposite the
housing by bending over the nut collar.
83920R
36-7
E7J / K7M
ENGINES
WITH AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
36
Mot.
Dir.
453 -01
1083 -01
Hose clamp pliers

Tool for refitting the PAS pump
pulley
22 -01
B.Vi.
+
B.Vi.
47
Dir.
or
1083 -02
Tool for removing the PAS pump

pulley
Remove the four cross member upper mounting

bolts (C).
Push the cross member to the rear without
removing the engine compartment opening
cable.
PAS pump mounting bolt

Alternator mounting bolt
2
4

REMOVAL

Remove the front right hand wheel and the associated mudguard.
Remove the radiator grille (6 bolts (A)).
13996R
Remove:
- the alternator belt,
- the alternator,
- the PAS pump belt (see method described in
section 11).
Disconnect the PAS pressostat connector.
Remove the high pressure hose mounting bracket.
13975R
Fit a clamp Mot. 453-01 to the low pressure hose

and disconnect the two hoses.
Remove the two cooling assembly mounting nuts

(B) on the upper cross member.
Remove the power assisted steering pump (four

bolts).
Move this to one side and slacken, but do not remove, the two cross member lower mounting
bolts.
36-8
E7J / K7M
ENGINES
WITH AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
36
REFITTING
REFITTING

tightening torques.
Refit the pulley using tool Dir. 1083-01.

Press the pulley on to dimension:
Refit the PAS pump belt and the alternator belt

(see method described in section 11).
X=
Check the tension of the alternator belt (see section 07 "Belt tension").
Fill and bleed the circuit, moving the steering
from lock to lock.
REPLACING THE PULLEY
REMOVAL
With the pump removed (see removal method on

following pages), set it in a vice and extract the
pulley using tools B.Vi. 22-01 + B.Vi. 47 or Dir.
1083-02.
12996R1
12995R
36-9
34.7 0.2
E7J ENGINE
WITHOUT AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Mot.
453 -01
Hose clamp pliers

REMOVAL
Remove:
- the alternator belt,
- the PAS pump belt,
- the alternator.
Fit a clamp Mot. 453-01 to the supply pipe.
Disconnect the supply and high pressure pipes.
Take precautions to catch the PAS fluid.
Remove the three pump mounting bolts and remove the pump.
13296R
REFITTING

procedure for tensioning the belt (see section 07).
from lock to lock.
36-10
36
D7F ENGINE
WITH AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Mot.
453 -01
Hose clamp pliers

REMOVAL
Remove:
- the right hand wheel,
- the right hand mudguard,
- the accessories belt (see the method described
in section 11 of the Workshop Repair Manual),
- the pulley.

Disconnect the supply pipe. Take precautions to
catch the PAS fluid.
The connector support panel (one bolt) must be
removed so the high pressure pipe can be disconnected.
Remove the pump (three bolts).
REFITTING
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Ensure that

the belt is correctly fitted (see section 11 of the
Workshop Repair Manual).
from lock to lock.
36-11
36
D7F ENGINE
WITHOUT AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Mot.
453 -01
Hose clamp pliers

REMOVAL
Remove:
- the PAS pump belt,
- the pulley.
Take precautions to catch the PAS fluid (protect
the alternator).
REFITTING

from lock to lock.
36-12
36
F8Q ENGINE
WITHOUT AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Mot.
453 -01
Hose clamp pliers

REMOVAL
Remove:
-
the right hand wheel,

the right hand mudguard,
the bumper (ten bolts).
the accessories belt,
the pulley.

Take precautions to catch the PAS fluid.
REFITTING

from lock to lock.
36-13
36
F8Q ENGINE
WITH AC
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Power assisted steering electric pump assembly
36
Mot.
453 -01
Hose clamp pliers
Remove the three electric pump assembly mounting bolts.
Electric pump assembly mounting bolts

REMOVAL

Remove:
- the front left wheel,
- the front left headlight, use the method described in section 80 of the Workshop Repair
Manual,
- the front mudguard.
Fit a clamp Mot. 453-01 to the hose.
Disconnect the two hoses (Take precautions to
catch the PAS fluid).
14028R
Disconnect the electric pump assembly motor

connector .
REFITTING

Bleed the circuit. The battery has to be removed
to allow access to the PAS reservoir.
14027R
36-14
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
Before removing the assembly, the position of the

rotary switch MUST be noted :
- either by ensuring the wheels are straight
when removing it so that the strip may be positioned centrally,
- or by checking that the "0" mark on the rotary
switch is in line with the fixed reference
mark (E).

Steering wheel bolt
Steering column mounting nuts
Air bag cushion mounting bolts
36
2.5
4.5
2
0.5
REMOVAL

Vehicle without an air bag :
Remove the central steering wheel cover (clipped).
Vehicle with an air bag:
Remove:
- the drivers air bag cushion by the two Torx
bolts (T30) (tightening torque 0.5 daN.m)
located behind the steering wheel and
disconnect the connector (D),
VALEO ASSEMBLY
14057R
LUCAS ASSEMBLY
14036R1
the steering wheel bolt,

the steering wheel after setting the wheels
straight,
- the half cowlings ( three bolts).
Disconnect the control stalks (wipers and lights)
and the rotary switch connector.
IMPORTANT: pyrotechnic systems (air bags and
pretensioners) must not be handled near to a heat
source or flame - they may be triggered.
IMPORTANT: whenever the steering wheel is removed, the air bag connector ( D ) MUST be dis-
connected. The air bag is fitted with a connector

which short circuits when it is disconnected to
avoid any incorrect triggering.
14056R
36-15
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
Slacken the bolt (C) then tap sharply on the screwdriver to release the cone and remove the assembly from the steering column.
36
remove the two side bolts,
14090R
14039R
Remove the top dash section by :

- first removing the windscreen pillar lining by
pulling the trim away enough so that the upper clip may be pressed, then remove the pillar trim(1) and unclip it from the top dash
section (2),
remove the three bolts at the top (near the

windscreen) and completely remove the top
dash section as shown in the diagrams.
14091R1
14094R
36-16
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
36
Remove the immobiliser antenna ring.
14038R
14041S
Disconnect the connector.
Remove the instrument panel (six bolts) by disconnecting the four connectors.
14040S
14037R
36-17
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
In the engine compartment:
- remove the air intake tube,
- remove the expansion bottle mounting nuts
and move it to allow access to the steering column universal joint.
36
REFITTING
Refit the steering column.

Fit the gaiter on the bulkhead, having first tied
the flaps and the universal joint together with
string.
Remove the eccentric bolt from the universal

joint.
Remove the six steering column mounting bolts
and pull the bulkhead gaiter.
13116S
14093R
Remove the steering column.
36-18
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
Pull on the tab then cut the string to put the gaiter in place.
36
Special notes for refitting

Ensure that the wheels are still straight.
Check that the rotary switch is correctly positioned by checking that the "0" mark of the rotary
switch is pointing to the fixed reference mark (E).
Position the assembly on the steering column and
connect the various connectors.
Carry out the rest of the refitting procedure and
do not lock bolt (C) until the half cowlings are
back in place, so that the stalks are correctly aligned to the instrument panel and the dashboard.
This operation is made easier by the hole cut in
the lower half cowling which allows access to the
bolt (C).
14071S
For the rest of the parts, refitting is the reverse of

removal.
Ensure that the instrument panel connectors are
correctly connected.
14039R1
36-19
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Steering column
Renew the steering wheel bolt each time it is removed ( pre-bonded bolt).
Observe the correct tightening torque (4.5
daN.m).
IMPORTANT : Before reconnecting the drivers air
bag cushion, check to see if the system is operating correctly as follows:

- check the air bag warning light on the instrument panel is illuminated when the ignition is
on,
- connect a dummy ignition module to the drivers air bag connector and check that the
warning light extinguishes,
- switch the ignition off, connect the air bag
cushion in place of the dummy ignition module and secure the cushion to the steering
wheel (tightening torque 0.5 daN.m),
- switch the ignition on. Check the warning
light illuminates for three seconds when the
ignition is switched on then extinguishes and
remains extinguished.
If the warning light does not operate as described
above, refer to the fault finding section and check
the system using the XRBAG (El. 1288)
IMPORTANT : if these instructions are not followed exactly the system may not operate normally and could even be triggered incorrectly.
36-20
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Retractable shaft
36
REMOVAL - REFITTING
These vehicles are fitted with a non-removable retractable shaft - steering wheel shaft - steering column assembly. If it is necessary to repair the universal joint eccentric bolt, check that the shaft length is correct or replace the assembly (see paragraph "Steering column").
CHECKING
92218R1
LEFT HAND DRIVE
RIGHT HAND DRIVE
L = 373.1 1.5 mm
L = 395.9 1.5 mm
36-21

Master cylinder
37
Hydraulic pipe unions

Mounting nut on brake servo
1.7
1.8
REMOVAL

Disconnect the brake fluid level detector connector.
Remove the injection computer (depending on
version).
Release the PAS reservoir and move it to the side,
towards the engine.
91101R
Drain and remove, by pulling up, the brake fluid

reservoir (take care to catch the fluid which will
run out).
NOTE : these vehicles have a master cylinder
which is integral to the brake servo. Sealing of the

brake servo is directly linked to that of the master
cylinder. During any operation, a new seal (A)
must be fitted.
Remove:
- the pipes and note their positions,
Fit the master cylinder in alignment with the

brake servo so that pushrod pin (P) enters correctly into the master cylinder housing.
- the two mounting nuts on the brake servo.
REFITTING

Check the length of the pushrod.
Dimension X = 22.3 mm.
Depending on model, adjust using pin (P).
DI3718
37-1

Master cylinder
Fill the brake fluid reservoir and bleed the brake
circuit.
MASTER CYLINDER (EXCHANGE)
The kit sold by the Parts Department comprises :

- one master cylinder (4 outlets or 2 outlets for
ABS),
- two plugs (A),
- two mounting nuts (B).
DI3719
37-2
37

Brake servo
REFITTING
Mounting nut on brake servo

Brake servo on bulkhead
37
Before refitting, check :

- dimension L = 104.8 mm,
- dimension X = 22.3 mm.
1.8
2.3
The brake servo cannot be repaired. Operations

are only allowed on :
- the air filter,
- the non-return valve.
REMOVAL
Disconnect and remove the battery.

Remove:
- the master cylinder (following the method
described previously),
- the battery protection plate (4 bolts, 1 nut),
- the two mounting nuts for the expansion
bottle and move it towards the engine.
Disconnect the flexible vacuum hose from the
brake servo.
91101R2
In the passenger compartment:

- remove the pin (A) from the clevice connecting the brake pedal to the pushrod by moving the clip,

97860R
Remove the four brake servo mounting nuts,

Remove the brake servo.
37-3
PETROL
ENGINE

Brake servo
37
Mot. 1311-01
Pressure gauges and unions for

measuring pressure
CHECKING SEALING
When checking the sealing of the brake servo, ensure the seal between the brake servo and the master cylinder is perfect. If there is a leak, replace the seal (A), (see method described on page 37-1).
The sealing of the brake servo is checked on the
vehicle.
Connect the tool Mot. 1311-01 between the brake
servo and the vacuum source (inlet manifold).
use the "T" union to join the pipes, the vacuum gauge and the assembly (1) (use connector B from the Mot. 1311-01 kit and a hose
clip (2)).
14213R
14287R
Fit the assembly by connecting the valve on

the brake servo and the pipe to the manifold
outlet.
NOTE : ensure that the closure valve is on the side
of the manifold.
To do this :
- completely remove the vacuum hose,
- retain the non-return valve / flexible hose assembly (1) by removing the clamp,
Run the engine at idle speed for one minute.

Close the valve and turn off the engine.
The vacuum in the circuit should be about
613 mbar, if the vacuum drops by more than 33
mbar in 15 seconds, there is a leak located either:
- at the non-return valve (replace it),
- or at the pushrod diaphragm (in this case, replace the brake servo).
14216R
37-4
DIESEL
ENGINE

Brake servo
37
Mot.
1311 -01
Pressure gauges and unions for

measuring pressure
CHECKING SEALING
When checking the sealing of the brake servo, ensure the seal between the brake servo and the master cylinder is perfect. If there is a leak, replace the seal (A), (see method described on page 37-1).
Checking the sealing of the brake servo can be

carried out on the vehicle.
Fit the tool Mot. 1311-01 between the brake servo

and the vacuum source (vacuum pump).
use a "T" union to join the pipes, the vacuum

gauge and the assembly (1) (use the B connector from the Mot. 1311-01 kit and a hose
clamp (2)),
Fit a quick-release connector to the other pipe
(3) which can be ordered from the Parts
Department (77 00 105 874),
14213R1
14288R
To do this :
- completely remove the vacuum pipe,
- retain the non-return valve / flexible hose assembly (1) by removing the clamp,
fit the assembly in place by connecting the

valve on the brake servo and the quick release
connector on the vacuum pump.
NOTE : ensure that the closure valve is on the ma-
nifold side.
Warm the engine and run at 4 000 rpm., the vacuum should be 933 mbar in 3 seconds.
Close the valve and turn off the engine.
The vacuum in the circuit should be 933 mbar, if
the vacuum falls more than 33 mbar in 15 seconds, there is a leak which may be located either
:
- at the non-return valve (replace it),
- or at the pushrod diaphragm (in this case, replace the brake servo).
14216R
37-5

Air filter - Brake servo non-return valve
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER
37
REPLACING THE NON-RETURN VALVE
This operation may be carried out on the vehicle.
REMOVAL
Disconnect the brake servo vacuum inlet pipe.

Pull the non-return valve while twisting it to
release it from the rubber sealing washer.
83 212
74883S
75 564
91101G
To replace the air filter (F), the brake servo does

not need to be removed.
REFITTING
Check the condition of the rubber sealing washer

and the non-return valve.
Under the pedal mounting, use a screwdriver or a

metal hook to remove the worn filter (F). Cut the
new filter at A (see diagram) and fit it around the
rod, then press it into position, checking that it
fills the complete opening to prevent any nonfiltered air from passing through.
Replace any faulty parts.

Refit the assembly into position.
37-6
DIESEL
ENGINE

Vacuum pump
REMOVAL
Remove the air tube.

Disconnect the quick release vacuum pipe.
Remove the vacuum pump (four bolts).
13097-1S
Systematically renew the drive dog when replacing the pump.

REFITTING
37-7
37

37
Lift the vehicle and remove the heat shield and

the exhaust pipe (four bolts).
REMOVAL
Vehicle on a lift.
Release the handbrake.
Remove the central console (two bolts) and the
plastic cover (2) of the lever.
14215R
13998R1
Release the two cables at the brake compensator.

Slacken the handbrake adjustment nut (1) and
note dimension X (approximately 20 mm), to release the cable.
14217R
14029R
37-8

In the passenger compartment, remove the two
handbrake mounting nuts and disconnect the
connector.
14030R
Remove the handbrake lever.
REFITTING

Remember to reconnect the handbrake connector.
Reset the handbrake control linkage adjustment
nut to the dimension noted on removal (about 20
mm).
If necessary, adjust the lever travel (see section
"Adjusting the control").
37-9
37

Handbrake control
37
Remove:
- the two rear wheels,
- the two drums.
ADJUSTMENT
Incorrect adjustment of the handbrake where the

cable is too tight:
Check the operation of the compensation system

by rotating the notched sector (D) (ensure it turns
in both directions), then turn it back by 5 to 6
teeth.
- prevents the correct operation of the automatic compensation system for the brake shoes ,
- causes long brake pedal travel.
The cables should not be re-tensioned to correct
this fault since it will quickly occur again.
The handbrake should not be used to adjust play,
it should only be adjusted when replacing :
- brake linings,
- cables,
- the control lever.
Any other adjustment except in the above cases is
not permitted.
With the vehicle on a lift, slacken the nut (1) to
completely release the cable and thereby the central adjuster (see method described previously).
98992-1R3
14029R1
37-10

Handbrake control
Ensure :
- the cables slide correctly,
- the handbrake levers (B) are in the correct
position against the brake shoes.
98992-1R2
Progressively tighten the cables at the central

adjuster so that levers (B) start to move between
the 1st and 2nd notch of the control lever travel
and remain applied from the 2nd notch.
Tighten the lock nut.
Fit the drums.
With the vehicle on its wheels, adjust the brake
linings by pressing the brake pedal firmly and
progressively for a number of times while
listening for the automatic compensation system
clicking.
37-11
37

Brake pipes
37
These vehicles have brake pipes without a copper seal. The seal is by contact "at the bottom of the cone" of
the shoulder (Y) on the pipe.
X = 1.5
Z= 1.3
96118R
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING - REFITTING A BRAKE CYLINDER OR A BRAKE PIPE.
For safety reasons and to ensure that the brake pipe is not twisted and is not liable to touch a suspension
component the following order of operations must be observed:
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Slacken the union (1) (pipe wrench) between the

rigid pipe and the hose (2) until the spring (3)
becomes slack which releases the hose from the
splines (4).
Fit the caliper to the brake and screw the hose

onto it, then torque tighten to
1.5 daN.m.
The brake pipes are fitted when the axle assembly
is in position:
Wheels suspended (suspension in place)
Axle assembly aligned (wheels straight)
Position the female end of the hose on the
retaining bracket (5), without twisting it and
check that the end piece (4) fits freely into the
splines of the bracket, then fit:
- the spring (3),
- the rigid pipe to the hose, checking that the
hose does not turn when the assembly is
screwed together.
Torque tighten the union.
85536R

Remove the hose from the caliper and if necessary
remove the caliper.
37-12

Braking compensator
37
CHECKING PRINCIPLE
These vehicle are fitted with a load sensitive

braking compensator.
The pressure is read in an X pattern, by comparing
the pressure at the rear wheels with a given
pressure at the front wheels.
The dual compensator has two totally separate
bodies which act in an X pattern on one front
wheel and one rear wheel.
Both circuits must be checked.
I : front right/ rear left.
II : front left/ rear right.
Load sensitive compensators
For load sensitive compensators, the adjustment
allows alteration of the rear pressure depending
on the front pressure.
The adjustment is made simultaneously in both
bodies. If the pressure is incorrect for one of the
two bodies, replace the compensator.
85925S
37-13

Braking compensator
37
Fre.
Fre.
244 -03
or
1085 -01
Pressure gauge for checking

compensator rating
Disconnect the brake pipes (at the compensator),

note their positions.
Hydraulic unions
Compensator mounting bolt
Rod adjustment bolt
1.7
1.8
1
Vehicle on a two post lift.
REMOVAL
Fit a pedal press to limit the amount of brake fluid

which runs out.
Remove the rod from the compensator by
removing the retaining clip on the rear axle.
14214-1S
Remove the heat shield (one bolt, two quick

release connectors).
14214S
14290-1S
37-14

Braking compensator
37
Remove the compensator (two bolts).
ADJUSTING
Slacken, but do not remove, the mounting bolt (1)

from the compensator retaining bracket.
To adjust the braking compensator, slacken bolt

(1) and move the rod (2) in the sleeve.
14214-2R
14214R
REFITTING
NOTE : do not alter the position of nut (3).
Reconnect the pipes on the compensator,and

ensure that the two black ones are on the right
hand side and the two green ones are on the left
hand side.
Bleed and check the circuit (see section "Checking
- Adjusting").
PRO37.1
37-15

Braking compensator
CHECKING
Connect two pressure gauges Fre. 244-03 or

Fre. 1085-01 :
- one at the front right hand side,
- one at the rear left hand side.
Bleed the pressure gauges via screw (P).
98828R
Progressively press the brake pedal until the

pressure at the front wheels is the setting
pressure (see table of values). Read the
corresponding pressure at the rear wheels;
correct it if necessary.
37-16
37

Clutch control cable
CLUTCH CABLE
37
CLUTCH PEDAL
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
In the engine compartment, disconnect the cable

from the fork.
In the engine compartment, disconnect the cable

from the fork.
In the passenger compartment, remove:
- the cable at the pedal by pulling the end from
its location on the wear compensation sector ,
- the stiffener(1),
- the nut from the pedal mounting shaft (2).
Remove the pedal.
89204S
Passenger compartment side, disconnect the cable

at the pedal by removing the end from its location
on the wear compensation sector.
Remove the cable sleeve stop from the bulkhead.
Remove the complete cable via the engine
compartment.
PRO37.2
REFITTING
REFITTING
From the engine compartment, thread the cable

through the bulkhead.
Fit the cable end piece into position on the wear

compensation sector.
Fit the cable end piece into position on the wear

compensation sector(3).
Fit the cable onto the clutch fork.
In the engine compartment, fit the cable onto the

clutch fork.
The adjustment is carried out automatically when

the pedal is pressed.
The adjustment is carried out automatically when

the pedal is pressed.
37-17

Clutch automatic wear take-up system
SPECIAL NOTES
In order to ensure the assembly operates correctly,

check that:
- the notched sector pivots correctly about its
pin,
- the ratchets return to the rest position freely,
- the cable is always taut on the fork and there is
at least 2cm of slack,
- the fork travel is between:
X = 27.4 and 30.7 mm
91830R1
These components should be checked before any

operation on the clutch itself.
37-18
37

Under the vehicle:
- release the primary exhaust pipe (1),
- remove the heat shields (2).
Mounting nut for unit on body

Linkage mounting clip bolt on clevice
Linkage mounting bolt on clevice
Linkage - lever mounting nut
37
1.5
2
3
3
REMOVAL

In the vehicle, remove the gaiter from the console.
14215R1
Remove:
- the linkage-lever mounting nut,
- the four control unit mounting nuts.
13999S
12987R
37-19

REMOVAL of the control linkage
After removing the lever - linkage connecting nut,
remove the linkage - selector connecting bolt.
PRG37.6R
REFITTING

Coat the lever joints and the linkage pin with 33
Mdium grease.
Ensure the clevice is fitted correctly : offset on
gearbox side.
37-20
37

37

B.Vi.
1133
Shim for locking the gearbox

input lever in 1st
Slacken bolt (V).
Linkage mounting clip bolt on clevice
Fit shim B.Vi. 1133 to take up any play.
ADJUSTMENT
Remove the collector or the engine undertray.
92450-2R
At the same time pull the end of the shim

downwards and pivot it through approximately
45 until it touches the lug on the housing.
93856-1S
Engage 1st gear.
92450-3S
37-21

37
Press the lower lever gate against the gearbox

ramp , inserting a 9 mm shim.
93910S1
In this position, tighten bolt (V).

Check the resulting play ( Y ) which must be
between 7 and 10 mm.
Remove shim B. Vi. 1133.
DI3705
Check the gears engage correctly.

Refit the collector or the engine undertray.
37-22
BOSCH ABS
38
This vehicle is fitted with BOSCH ABS 5.3 of the four channel additional type; the conventional braking
equipment and the ABS equipment are separate.
SPECIAL NOTES
The system comprises four speed sensors. Each hydraulic braking channel is associated with a sensor at each
wheel. The front wheels are therefore regulated separately. The rear wheels however are regulated at the
same time and in the same way according to the select low principle (the first wheel which tends to lock
causes immediate regulation on the complete axle assembly).
On this vehicle, the braking compensator is suppressed (on versions fitted with ABS) and its role is ensured by
the special programme in the ABS assembly computer and is known as REF (Electronic Braking Distributor).
IMPORTANT: if the ABS fuse is removed, be careful during road tests not to brake hard as the REF function is
no longer activated (identical front and rear pressure), so there is a risk that the vehicle will spin.
38-1
BOSCH ABS
38
LOCATION OF THE BOSCH ABS COMPONENTS
DI3896
1
2
3
4
Hydraulic assembly
Master cylinder
Brake servo
Brake fluid level warning light
38-2
BOSCH ABS
38
PRESENTATION OF THE HYDRAULIC REGULATION ASSEMBLY
PRN3819
A
B
C
D
E
Inlet from master cylinder

Rear left wheel
Rear right wheel
Front right wheel
Front left wheel
38-3
BOSCH ABS
38
WIRING DIAGRAM
PRO14069
38-4
BOSCH ABS
WIRING DIAGRAM KEY
104
Ignition switch
118
ABS computer
120
Injection computer
150
Rear right wheel sensor
151
Rear left wheel sensor
152
Front right wheel sensor
153
Front left wheel sensor
160
Stop switch
225
Diagnostic socket
247
Instrument panel
645
Passenger compartment connection unit
777
Power feed fuse board
R2
Dashboard/rear left
R67
Front of engine/engine
R101 Right hand side member/Right hand

headlight
R107 Dashboard/Front of engine
38-5
38
38
BOSCH ABS
31 TRACK CONNECTOR
PRN3813
Micro-spring connecting earth (terminal 19) to pins 20 and 21 (ABS and NIVOCODE warning lights) if the
connector is disconnected.
Allocation of connector tracks

Track
Description
Track
Description
Sensor earth RRH
15
+ after ignition computer feed
Sensor information RRH
16
Pump motor earth
Sensor earth FRH
17
+ BAT (solenoid valves and pump
Not connected
Sensor information FRH
Sensor earth FLH
19
Electronic earth
Sensor information FLH
20
Not connected
Sensor earth RLH
21
ABS warning light
Sensor information RLH
22
Not connected
10
Not connected
25
Not connected
11
Diagnostic line K
26
FRH wheel speed output (to be
12
Diagnostic line L
27
introduced)
Not connected
13
Not connected
31
Not connected
14
Stop lights switch information
motor)
18
+ BAT (solenoid valves and pump
motor)
38-6
BOSCH ABS
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
PRN3807
Chassis earth
Electronic earth
Diagnostic line K
15
Diagnostic line L
16
+ battery
38-7
38
E7J and K7M
BOSCH ABS
ENGINES
38
Mot. 1311-06
Tool for removing petrol

pipe connectors
Remove the canister bleed solenoid valve (2).
HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
NOTE : it is fixed to the top of the inlet manifold
below the cover.

Pipe unions
M10 X 100
M12 X 100
1.7
1.7
REMOVAL

Fit a pedal press to limit the amount of brake
fluid which will run out.
Remove:
- the air filter unit,
- the dipstick.
Using the Mot. 1311-06 , disconnect the fuel return pipe (1).
13242R3
13244R1
IMPORTANT: when opening a fuel circuit,use a
cloth as protection against petrol which may spurt

out as a result of residual pressure.
38-8
E7J and K7M

ENGINES
BOSCH ABS
Disconnect the ABS computer connector.
38
Remove the two mounting nuts (A) for the hydraulic assembly on its support.
Remove the two earth wire bolts.

Disconnect the six pipes from the hydraulic assembly, marking their position for refitting.
PRO38.1
Remove the hydraulic assembly.

13138R1
NOTE : to make removal of the hydraulic assembly
easier, remove the two bolts (B).

Remove the upper bolt (3) and the two lower
mounting bolts (4) for the hydraulic assembly support.
REFITTING

To ensure that the petrol connector is correctly
joined, a "click" must be heard when the two
parts are connected.
Bleed the braking circuit, as described on the following pages.
NOTE : the computer must not be removed. If
there is a fault, replace the complete hydraulic assembly.
13139R1
IMPORTANT: lower the hydraulic assembly moun-
ting enough to allow the "front right wheel" pipe

to be unclipped (see page 38-3).
38-9
D7F and F8Q

ENGINES
BOSCH ABS
From below
HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
Remove:
- the exhaust manifold heat shield (3 bolts),
- the two lower mounting bolts for the hydraulic assembly,
TIGHTENING TORQUES (In daN.m)
Pipe unions
M10 X 100
M12 X 100
38
1.7
1.7
REMOVAL

Remove the front right wheel.
Fit a pedal press to limit the amount of brake fluid
which will run out.
From above
Disconnect the computer connector.
Remove the two earth bolts.
Disconnect the six pipes from the hydraulic assembly, marking their position for refitting.
13139R
the hydraulic assembly via the wheel arch.
REFITTING

Correctly refit the heat shield.
NOTE : the computer must not be removed. If
there is a fault, replace the complete hydraulic assembly.
13138R
Remove the upper hydraulic assembly mounting

bolt.
38-10
BOSCH ABS
38
HYDRAULIC BRAKING TEST
This section describes the test to be carried out using the XR25, to check the mounting of the ABS system in
the vehicle and, in particular, the hydraulic circuit.
NOTE: for this test, two persons are required and the vehicle must be on a two post lift, if possible.
Principle of the test

Put the vehicle on the lift with the wheel to be tested raised. One of the operators must be in the passenger
compartment in the drivers position with the XR25 . Switch the ignition on, vehicle in neutral, in fault finding
mode and press the brake pedal. The second operator must apply a torque to the wheel to try and rotate it.
The operator generates an appropriate command on the XR25 which carries out the following cycle ten
times: alternate decrease then increase in pressure at the wheel to be checked. These actions in the ABS will
be noted at the wheel as ten alternate locking and releasing operations. The jerky movement of the wheel,
noted qualitatively by the operator, signify that the hydraulic circuit for this wheel is correctly connected.
The programme for the XR25 for this sequence is as follows:
-
Cycle on the wheel to be tested :

a drop in pressure for 200 ms where the pump starts at the same time,
an increase in pressure for 300 ms where the pump starts at the same time (ten cycles are carried out
for the wheel in question).
The pressure increases to master cylinder pressure for all four wheels.
The hydraulic pump motor stops.
The operator releases the brake pedal.
The hydraulic test for the wheel in question is complete - begin the test for the three other wheels.
BLEEDING PROCEDURE
NOTE : the hydraulic assembly is pre-filled.
This bleeding procedure must be used when one of the following components has been removed:
-
the hydraulic assembly,
the master cylinder,
the pipework (between the hydraulic assembly and the master cylinder).
1) Bleed the braking system conventionally using the pedal.

NOTE : if, after a road test with ABS regulation, the pedal travel is not correct, bleed the hydraulic assembly.
38-11
BOSCH ABS
38
2) Bleeding the hydraulic assembly.

IMPORTANT : the bleeding order must be observed, beginning with the rear right , then the rear left, front
left and then front right.
a) Bleed the rear right brake by bleeding the hydraulic assembly secondary circuit using the XR25:
- position the bleed container and the hose, open the brake bleed screw,
- pump the brake pedal (approximately ten times),
- start the bleed command on the XR25,
- pump the brake pedal during the diagnostic bleed phase,
- at the end of the bleed cycle on the XR25, continue to pump the brake pedal and close the brake
bleed screw.
b) Carry out the procedure described at a) for the rear left, front left and front right brakes.
c)
Check the pedal travel and if it is incorrect, restart the bleeding procedure.
IMPORTANT : ensure there is sufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

CHECKING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSORS
a) Check the resistance of the sensor connections (from the computer connector to the 2 track speed sensor
connector).
b) Visually inspect the teeth ( 26 teeth) on the target and if they are faulty, replace the target.
c)
Check the air gap using a set of shims. Only the front sensors can be checked.
Front: 0.1 < Z < 1.9 mm
PRN3820
38-12
Sheet Metalwork
GENERAL
LOWER STRUCTURE
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
UPPER SIDE STRUCTURE
UPPER REAR STRUCTURE
TOP OF BODY
SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS
NON-SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS

77 11 197 393
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.
Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH4015
Sheet Metalwork
Contents
Page
40 GENERAL
Dimensions
Engine and equipment
Identification
Means of lifting
Towing
Using symbols
Key to symbols
Description of parts (exploded view)
Opening clearances
Collision fault finding
Sub-frame dimensions
Repair bench
Special tooling
Part number of special tooling
Page
42 UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE

40-1
40-2
40-3
40-4
40-6
40-7
40-9
40-10
40-13
40-21
40-24
40-26
40-36
40-36
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Front wing
Upper front cross member
Headlight carrier panel
Bonnet strut mounting
Cowl side panel
Upper reinforcement of cowl side
panel, front section
Upper reinforcement of cowl side
panel, rear section
Wheel arch, front section
Wheel arch
Side plenum chamber
Bulkhead
Windscreen wiper mounting plate
Windscreen aperture lower cross
member
Steering column lower mounting
42-1
42-3
42-4
42-7
42-10
42-14
42-17
42-19
42-24
42-31
42-33
42-37
42-39
42-42
41 LOWER STRUCTURE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Front end lower cross member

Complete front end
Front side member, front section
Front side member closure panel
Sub-frame front mounting
Front half unit
Front side cross member
Front side member, rear section
Centre floor
Cross member under front seat
Rear floor raised section
Rear floor centre cross member
Rear side member
Lashing ring
Rear floor
Exhaust mounting unit
Rear floor unit
41-1
41-5
41-9
41-16
41-19
41-22
41-27
41-31
41-34
41-40
41-42
41-44
41-47
41-51
41-52
41-60
41-62
43 UPPER SIDE STRUCTURE

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Front pillar
Front pillar lining (cowl side panel)
Windscreen aperture pillar lining
Centre pillar
Centre pillar lining
Centre pillar reinforcement
Body side, front section
Sill panel
Sill panel reinforcement
Sill panel closure panel
Complete body side
43-1
43-7
43-11
43-13
43-19
43-24
43-31
43-32
43-38
43-41
43-45
Contents
44 UPPER REAR STRUCTURE

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Rear wing panel, complete and

partial
Upper side rain channel
Tailgate balancing ball joint
Outer wheel arch
Inner wheel arch
Body side lining
Rear end panel
Rear lights mounting
44-1
44-12
44-14
44-15
44-17
44-19
44-27
44-30
45 TOP OF BODY
A
B
C
D
E
Roof
Roof front cross member
Roof centre cross member
Roof rear cross member
Body top
45-1
45-7
45-8
45-9
45-10
47 SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS

A
B
C
Front and rear doors

Front door panel
Rear door panel
47-1
47-4
47-8
NON-SIDE OPENING
48 ELEMENTS
A
B
Tailgate
Bonnet
48-1
48-4
GENERAL
Dimensions
40
Dimensions in metres
13491R3
40-1
GENERAL
Engine and equipment
40
Engine
Vehicle type
Clutch type
Type
Capacity
(cm 3)
B/C B0A
D7F
1149
180 CP 3300
B/C B0C
E7J
1390
180 CP 3300
B/C B0D
K7M
1598
200 CPOV 3500
B/C B0E
F8Q
1870
200 CPOV 3250
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Example : BB0A
B : Bodywork type (5-door)
B : Project code
0A : Engine suffix
40-2
Gearbox type
Manual
JB1
GENERAL
Identification
40
LOCATION OF THE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE
13491R2
6
7
A
RENAULT S.A.
9
e0-00/00-0000-000-000-00
1
10
VF000000000000000
0000 kg
0000 kg
1 - 0000 kg
2 - 0000 kg
11
12
13
000000000000000
1 The vehicle type mine and the chassis number

2 MTMA (maximum permitted all up weight for
the vehicle)
3 MTR (Maximum permitted total train weight vehicle fully laden and towing)
4 Maximum permitted weight on front axle
5 Maximum permitted weight on rear axle
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
40-3
Technical specifications of the vehicle

Paint reference
Equipment level
Vehicle type
Trim code
Additional equipment definition
Fabrication number
Interior matching trim code
GENERAL
Means of lifting
40
Safety symbol (special precautions to be taken when carrying out operations).

Cha. 280 -02

Cha. 408 -01
or
Cha. 408 -02
Adaptable cross piece for trolley

jack
Adaptable socket for trolley jack
If a trolley jack is used, appropriate axle

stands must also be used.
AXLE STANDS
To place the vehicle on axle stands, they MUST be

placed :
- either under the reinforcements provided for
lifting the vehicle with the jack which forms
part of the vehicle equipment,
- or under the points behind the reinforcements.
Rear positioning of the axle stands can be carried
out by lifting the vehicle from the side.
The vehicle MUST NOT be lifted by supporting its

weight under the front suspension arms or under
the rear axle assembly.
Depending on the type of trolley jack, use sockets
Cha. 408-01 or Cha. 408-02 to position the cross
piece Cha. 280-02.
To lift at the front or rear, take the weight under
the vehicle jacking points.
LIFTING FROM THE SIDE WITH A TROLLEY JACK
Use cross piece Cha. 280-02.

Take the weight under the valance at the front
door.
Position the flange correctly in the cross member
groove.
14275-1R
85679-1G15
40-4
13491G
GENERAL
Means of lifting
SAFETY SYMBOL
40
FRONT
There are several examples to consider :
1 - WHEN REMOVING COMPONENTS

Generally speaking, never use a 2-post lift if a
four post lift would be more suitable.
If this is not possible, position the lifting pads
below the body flange at the jacking points for
the jack supplied with the vehicle.
2 - SPECIAL CASE OF THE REMOVAL - REFITTING
98703S
OF THE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION
In this specific case, the body of the vehicle MUST

be fixed to the arms of the two post lift with
special pads.
REAR
98704S
These MUST be placed to the right of the jacking

points. They must be clipped into the sill panel
flange openings.
40-5
GENERAL
Towing
40
OBSERVE THE LEGAL TOWING REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY YOU ARE IN

NEVER USE THE DRIVESHAFTS AS ATTACHMENT POINTS
The towing points should only be used for towing the vehicle on the road. They should never be used for removing the vehicle from a ditch or for any other similar breakdown operation, or to lift the vehicle, either directly or indirectly.
FRONT
REAR
13565S
13646S
40-6
GENERAL
Using symbols
40
The following indications are found in the section

diagrams :
The black part is the one which will be

removed in the operation
are the part numbers corresponding to
and 7 the list on the introduction page
e = 1 + 1
are the thicknesses (in mm) of the

panels for electrical spot welding
This arrow on the diagram designates

the access points for the unpicking of
spot welds (see specific cases)
11644R1
The above diagram shows the part on the vehicle

for which a section of the panel butt welding joint
is shown by the diagrams which follow.
It also indicates the logical sequence of operations

in the symbols which follow each diagram.
This dashed line shows the centre of

the sections.
Example :
place of operation and logical sequence
The point shows the exact position of

the weld join.
This letter designates the diagram
F - G - corresponding to the section (it is giH - I - J ven in one of the upper corners of
each diagram).
spot welding
weldable mastic
unpicking with a grinder
CAA11538R8
e = 1+1
40-7
GENERAL
Using symbols
40
SPECIFIC CASES
Under diagram I
site of operation and logical sequence
1
1st operation
2
chisel the edge
2
unpicking
with grinder
apply weld
fillet
2nd operation
CAA11537-1R6
In this example, there is no direct access for removing part 1. The spot welds should be unpicked
through part 2, which should be kept.
10354R
In this particular case, the arrow indicates that

the joint is made by arc welding (MIG).
E
CAQ11697-1R5
2
This arrow indicates that the part which
it crosses must be cut before the joint
can be accessed .
The references which follow indicate different

operations:
unpicking
1
2
10349R
In this example, the joint is

made by bonding.
welding
40-8
GENERAL
Key to symbols
40
Plug welding.
Under MIG gas protection.
Chiselling
Grind back beads or spot welds

Straight grinding wheel with 75 mm
diameter bakelite impregnated disc,
thickness 1.8 mm to 3.2 mm.
Crimping of exterior door panels.
Safety symbol.
This means that the welding operation
in question concerns one or more of the
vehicles safety components.
Grind back spot welds

20 000 rpm. straight grinder with 10 or
16 mm spherical burr.
Drill spot welds
Hardened steel bit. Speed of rotation 800
to 1 000 rpm.
Body solder - lead fill.

Hot air torch.
Nozzle output temperature 600 min.
BAT+ 33% tin solder + tallow
Note : to a large extent, body solder
filling compensates for the heat
distortion caused by welding.
Unpicking
Application of weldable mastic.

This mastic conducts electricity. Applied
between two panels to be spot welded,
it ensures the seal between the panels
and avoids corrosion of the spot welds.
Clean the surfaces to be welded

100 mm diameter fibre disc.
Cutting with a saw

Pneumatic power hacksaw.
Application of aluminium paint.

This is to be applied to the joint faces of
each of the parts to be plug welded.
The paint conducts electricity and is
resistant to high temperatures; it
provides anti-corrosion protection
around the plug welds.
- Cutting out part by grinding off flange

or grinding back remaining traces of
spot weld.
- Finish surface after welding.
- Angle grinder equipped with a rubber
pad and a 120 to 180 mm fibre disc
grain size P36
Unsoldering.
Apply a fillet of extruded mastic

from a manual or pneumatic gun
one or two pot mastic for crimped or
butt joints.
MIG stitch weld

Note : for a high quality weld we
recommend the use of a gas consisting
of argon + 15% CO2. This is considered
to be an active gas (MAG).
Spray on sealer
spray gun
two pot anti-gravel and anticorrosion mastic.
For UK = MIG.
Spot welding
40-9
GENERAL
40
PRH4010
20
*21
22
* 23
*23A
* 24
* 24A
25
*26
* 27
*28
29
29A
*30
*

Complete front panel
Front mounting of front sub-frame
Right hand side front side member
Front side member (cut A)
Front side member closure panel (cut A)
Engine mounting reinforcement
Left hand side front half unit
Right hand side front half unit
Centre floor
Centre floor, part section
31
Front cross member of front seat
32
Rear cross member of front seat
*33
Rear floor unit
34
Rear floor
34AARear floor (cut AA)
34BA Rear floor (cut BA)
35
Front cross member of rear floor (cross member)
* 36
Lashing ring mounting
* 37
Exhaust mounting support
* 38
Rear side member
* 38A Rear side member (cut A)
*39
Rear centre cross member
* 40
Rear section of front side member
* 41
Left hand side front side member
Part which must be subject to electro zinc plating of the repaired areas.
40-10
GENERAL
40
PRH4011
*60
*61
*62A Right hand wheel arch, front section
*63
Right hand wheel arch, complete
* 64 Screen wiper mounting
*65
Plenum chamber closure panel
*66
Plenum chamber, centre section
*67
Double pedal mounting
68 Bulkhead blanking cover without AC
69A Bulkhead (cut A)
*70
Windscreen aperture lower cross member
71 Right hand drive steering column mounting
72 Left hand drive steering column mounting
73 Roof front cross member
74 Roof
75 Roof centre cross member
76 Roof rear cross member
77 Windscreen aperture pillar lining(version B)
77A Windscreen aperture pillar lining(version C)
*78
Rear end panel
*79
Lights mounting panel
*80
Wing panel upper rain channel
*81
Rear quarter panel lining (version B)
*81AA Outer wheel arch (version B)
81BB
*82
*83
*84
*84AA
*84BB
85
*86
*87
* 88
*89
*89AA
*90AA
*91
*92
*92AA
*92BB
*93
*94
*95
*96
*96AA
* 97
*98
*99
*Part which must be subject to electro zinc plating of the repaired areas.
40-11
Centre pillar lining (version B)

Inner wheel arch
Rear quarter panel lining (version C)
Centre pillar lining (version C)
Outer wheel arch (version C)
Wing panel (version VB)
Top of body (version B)
Sill panel (version B)
Wing panel (version C)
Wing panel (version C)
Sill panel under door
Top of body (version C)
Front pillar (versions B and C)
Centre pillar (version B)
Double thickness joint support
Cowl side panel reinforcement, rear section
Cowl side panel reinforcement, front section
Cowl side panel
Front pillar lining
Bumper mounting
Left hand wheel arch, complete
Left hand wheel arch, front section
GENERAL
PRH4009
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bonnet
Front door panel (2 doors) along cut A
Front door (2 doors)
Rear tailgate
Rear door panel along cut A
Rear door
Front door panel (4 doors) along cut A
Front door (4 doors)
Front wing
Part which must be subject to electro zinc plating of the repaired areas.
40-12
40
5 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
40
13491R
13491R1
40-13
5 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
40
3
14111R
14105R
14108R
14106R
14118R
40-14
5 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
40
8
14119R
14121R
14120R
14122R
40-15
GENERAL
Opening clearances
5 DOOR
VERSION
40
12
10
14123R
14125R
11
13
14124R
14127R
40-16
5 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
16
14
14141R
14144R
17
15
14129R
14145R
40-17
40
5 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
40
18
14104R
19
14140S
Section view of sun roof
40-18
3 DOOR
VERSION
GENERAL
Opening clearances
40
13491-1R1
14098R
14138R1
40-19
GENERAL
Opening clearances
3 DOOR
VERSION
40
5
3
14137R
14135R
14136R
40-20
GENERAL
40
Before carrying out repairs to the bodywork of a car, even if the damage seems slight, it is necessary to carry
out a series of tests :
VISUAL INSPECTION
This inspection involves the examination of the sub-frame of the vehicle where mechanical components
are mounted and in the crumple zones or vulnerable areas in order to detect folds where materials have
been deformed.
INSPECTION USING TRAMMEL GAUGE

The visual inspection may be completed using a trammel gauge which will allow measurement of certain
deformations by symmetrical comparisons (for more detail on each point to check, refer to the repair
bench paragraph below).
INSPECTION OF AXLE ASSEMBLY GEOMETRY

It is the only check which determines whether the impact suffered by the vehicle has or has not affected
its road holding.
Important : In borderline cases, it is essential not to neglect checking the axle assembly components which
may also have been subject to deformation.
On principle, no welded component in the body shell may be replaced without ensuring that the subframe was not affected by the impact.
14147R
40-21
GENERAL
40
Left hand side
GAUGE POINTS
Point H :
Front end of front side member.
650a2-14203
650h1-14210-1
Point A :
Rear mounting of front sub-frame.
The starting point for a rear impact.
Right hand side
650a1-14201
40-22
GENERAL
40
Point B :
Point J :
Front point of rear axle assembly.
Rear end of rear side member.
The starting point for a frontal impact.
Right hand side
Right hand side
650b1-14202
650j5-14245
Left hand side
Left hand side
650b2-14200
650j4-14206
40-23
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
40
DIAMETER
ANGLE %
205
402.5
71
18.5
Front sub-frame rear mounting
Rear axle assembly front mounting
2 012
530
129
16.2
Left hand front mounting of front subframe
- 418
447
130
1010
(squared)
Right hand front mounting of front subframe
- 418
465
130
1010
(squared)
18.2
Rear shock absorber upper mounting
Front shock absorber upper mounting
18.5
545.50
657
48
Rear section of front left side member
600
375
- 3.7
2020
(squared)
Rear section of front right side member
600
351.6
-5
2020
(squared)
Rear point of rear right side member
2 791
496.5
182
10.7
Rear point of rear left side member
2 790
481
162.5
10.2
Front cross member
- 575
315
280
14.25
X : 430
Z : 5
Rear end cross member, left hand side

(rear end panel)
2 879
- 420
200
1216
X : 10
Front engine mounting
- 247
483.5
514
M10
Rear engine mounting
- 113
483.5
514
M10
2 448.5
40-24
534.5
477.5
X : 302
Y : 1
GENERAL
40
14146R
40-25
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
I - PRINCIPLE REFERENCE POINTS FOR SETTING VEHICLE TRIM LEVEL
2 - Front mechanical units in place
A - FRONT SUB-FRAME REAR MOUNTING
It is the principle front reference point.
Left hand side
1 - Front mechanical units removed
650a2-14203
Right hand side
650a3-14198
The bracket rests against the rear section of the

side member and is centred in the sub-frame
mounting hole.
NOTE :
on the left hand side, the hole is round,

on the right hand side it is a slot.
650a1-14201
The bracket covers the sub-frame mounting bolt

and rests against the mounting bolt washer.
NOTE : The two sides are not symmetrical, on the
right hand side the mounting is set on the rubber

mounting.
If the rear of the vehicle is being rebuilt, these
two points alone may be used to align and support the front of the vehicle.
40-26
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
I - PRINCIPLE REFERENCE POINTS FOR SETTING VEHICLE TRIM LEVEL (cont)
2 - Rear mechanical units in place
B - FRONT POINT OF REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
It is the main rear reference point.
Right hand side
1 - Rear mechanical units removed
650b1-14202
Left hand side
650b3-14199
The bracket rests under the side cross member of

the rear axle assembly front mounting and is centred in the control unit hole .
650b2-14200
The bracket rests under the rear axle assembly

bearing and covers the front mounting nut of the
rear axle assembly.
If the front section is being rebuilt, these two
points alone can be used to align and support the
rear of the vehicle.
40-27
GENERAL
Repair Bench
II - ADDITIONAL REFERENCE POINTS FOR SETTING VEHICLE TRIM LEVEL
These are the provisional reference points which

replace the main ones, when they have been affected by the impact.
G - FRONT SIDE MEMBER, REAR SECTION
650g2-14198-1
This point is also used as a positioning reference

when replacing a rear section of the front side
member.
On the impact side, this point allows the vehicle
to be additionally supported with a main reference point on the opposite side.
NOTE : these points should only be used in the cir-
cumstances quoted, there is no need to use them

when the main reference points (points A and B)
are correct.
This additional reference function may also be filled by the front side member ends check points
for a rear impact and vice versa.
40-28
40
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
III - REFERENCE POINTS FOR POSITIONING REPLACED PARTS
C - FRONT SUB-FRAME FRONT MOUNTING
650c1-14210
The bracket covers the sub-frame mounting bolt

and washer.
It is used:
- following a frontal collision for a slight impact,
- for fault finding for the gauge inspection of
the front section .
650c2-14211
The bracket rests under the sub-frame front

mounting and is centred in the hole with the
mounting bolt.
It is used when replacing :
- a front end cross member,
- a side member, part section,
- a half unit.
40-29
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
III - REFERENCE POINTS FOR POSITIONING REPLACED PARTS (cont)
E-
F-
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER UPPER MOUNTING
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER UPPER

MOUNTING
650e1-14208
12841R
The bracket is fitted at the shock absorber cup

and positions this mounting when replacing a
wheel arch.
The bracket rests under the shock absorber cup

and is centred in the shock absorber mounting
hole.
It is also used when straightening.
It is used when replacing :

- wheel arches,
- a front half unit.
It is also used when straightening.
40-30
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
2- With mechanical units
J - REAR END OF REAR SIDE MEMBER
1- Without mechanical units
Left hand side
Left hand side
650j4-14206
Right hand side
650j2-14204
Right hand side
650j3-14207
It may be used for a slight rear impact without removing the rear axle assembly.
650j1-14205
40-31
GENERAL
Repair Bench
K - FRONT END CROSS MEMBER
650k1-14211-1
The bracket helps with the fitting of the front

cross member and rests vertically against the
front end cross member, then it is centred by a
centring bolt at (K).
It is used for replacing the front end cross member, with or without mechanical units.
NOTE : The operation for replacing the front end
cross member can be carried out without the removal of the engine and transmission assembly,
but requires the removal of the radiator.
The bracket helps with fault finding on the front
cross member.
This requires the removal of the plastic protective
shield located between the bumper and the engine sub-frame.
40-32
40
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
CELETTE REPAIR BENCH
PRH4014
40-33
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
BLACKHAWK REPAIR BENCH
PRH4012
With mechanical units
PRH4013
40-34
GENERAL
Repair Bench
40
IV - SPECIAL TOOLING
BLACKHAWK
CELETTE
Photo
Photo
Special heads for MS System
Special heads for MS System
Order from : Consult your After Sales Head Office
Order from : Consult your After Sales Head Office
Suppliers Part Number :
Suppliers Part Number :
REN 88240
Complete kit
774.300
Complete kit
REN 88221
Addition to the Kangoo kit

(REN 88220)
760.309
Addition to Kangoo kit (760.300)
774.309
REN 88241
Addition to complete kit REN

88240 for repairing a Kangoo
Addition to complete kit 774.300

for repairing a Kangoo
40-35
GENERAL
Special tooling
40
14553R
Points (A) and (B) are the references for the positioning of the jig on
the vehicle.
Before fitting, when fault finding is carried out, the user must ensure
that these points are correct.
Points (C), (D) (E) and (F) and their symmetry help with the mounting
and positioning of the replaced components.
When points (A) or (B) can no longer be used as a reference (detected
during a fault finding inspection), the points on the opposite side of
the impact fulfil the function of positioning reference.
Special Tooling Part Number
Drawing
Manual Part
Number
Car. 1481
Parts Department
Number
00 00 148 100
40-36
Description
Front end jig.
LOWER STRUCTURE
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part is a basic operation

for a frontal impact .
The repair bench does not have to be used, on
condition that the side members have not been
affected by the impact.
COMPOSITION OF THE PART FROM THE PARTS

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with :

- front end lower cross member closure panel,
- towing ring mounting.
PRH4136
PARTS CONCERNED (thickness in mm) :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Towing ring mounting
Front side member
Cowl side panel pillar lining
Wheel arch
41-1
1.8
2.5
1.2
1.5
1.2
0.8
1.2
41 A
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 A
CAR11700-1R3
651a1-14461
C
7
1
CAQ11697R1
CAA11538-1R1
41-2
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 A
RIGHT HAND SIDE
CAR11700-1R3
CAA11536-1R6
E
LEFT HAND SIDE
CAA11538-1R2
CAS13025-5R6
41-3
LOWER STRUCTURE
651a2-14462
1
CAR11700-1R7
41-4
41 A
LOWER STRUCTURE
INTRODUCTION

for a frontal impact .
The repair bench does not have to be used, on
condition that the side members have not been
affected by the impact.

DEPARTMENT

- front end cross member ,
- towing ring mounting ,
- threaded ring ,
- nuts to be welded ,
- front cross member closure panel ,
- front panel upper side cross member,
- front panel upper centre cross member,
- lock mounting reinforcement ,
- headlight carrier panel ,
- bumper mounting bridge.
PRH4137

1.8
Towing ring mounting
2.5
1.2
Front side member
1.5
1.2
Wheel arch
0.8
1.2
Front sub-frame front mounting,
lower section
1.2
9 Front panel upper side cross member
1.2
10 Cowl side panel upper front reinforcement 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
41-5
41
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
CAR11700-1R3
651b1-14461-1
4
1
1
CAA11538-1R1
CAQ11697R1
CAR11700-1R3
41-6
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
LEFT HAND SIDE
4
1
CAA11538-1R2
CAS13025-5R6
RIGHT HAND SIDE
G
5
9
CAA11536-1R6
CAA11536R3
41-7
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
10
5
CAX13937-4R7
651b2-14462-1
J
5
CAA11536-1R1a
CAA11536-3R3
CAR11700R7
41-8
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part can be done in two

ways :
A Front side member, complete front section .
B Front side member, partial front section (cut
to be made in front of the front mounting of
the sub-frame), see the following diagram.
In the two cases these are complementary operations to the replacement of the front end lower
cross member and the headlight carrier panel. As
a result, the joints with these parts will not be
considered here, they will be dealt with in the respective sections.
PRB4122R
The repair bench must be used when this is being

completely replaced.
or
NOTE: the repair bench must also be used when
there is partial replacement of the two side members .
The replacement of this part also requires the replacement of the side member closure panel
which will have to be ordered separately.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

DEPARTMENT
1 - Side member

Front wheel arch
Shock absorber cup height adjuster
Side member closure panel
Engine mounting height adjuster *
Engine mounting reinforcement *
* Only the right hand side.

- engine mounting height adjuster (only on the
right hand side),
- sub-frame front mounting.
5 - Front side member closure panel
Part on its own.
41-9
1.5
2.5
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.8
1.5
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
COMPLETE REPLACEMENT
6
1
5
CAS13028-6R1
12903R
C
3
CAS13028-6R1
CAS13028-6R1
41-10
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
D
4
CAA11537-3R2
13005R6
1
CAE11546-4R7
CAB11539R8
41-11
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
H
1
CAA11538R3
12896R
2
CAG11548-6R1
CAA11536R3
41-12
LOWER STRUCTURE
12894R
13010R
41
3
2
1
1
5
CAN11689R3
CAS13028-6R2
41-13
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
PARTIAL REPLACEMENT
CAA11536-2R1
NOTE: to avoid using the repair bench for the par-
651c1-14463
tial replacement of a side member, on the new

side member, keep section (Z)which will ensure
that the part replaced will line up correctly in relation to the part remaining on the vehicle. This will
be removed when the overlapping part is cut.
or
CAA11536-1R6
41-14
LOWER STRUCTURE
651c2-14463-1
CAS13033R2
41-15
41
LOWER STRUCTURE
INTRODUCTION
41 D
The replacement of this part may be done in two

ways :
A-
Complete front side member closure panel

(refer to the complete side member operation).
B-
Front side member closure panel, partial

front section (cut to be made in front of the
sub-frame front mounting), see cut in the
diagram and the method following.
1 Front side member closure panel

2 Front side member, front section
3 Front sub-frame front mounting
reinforcement
4 Front sub-frame front mounting
This operation is carried out by straightening or

replacing the front side member. It is complementary to the front end lower cross member and to
the wheel arch.
In the operation described below, there are only
descriptions of the connections specific to the part
concerned.
As a result, joints with other parts will not be
considered here, they will be dealt with in the respective section(see contents).

DEPARTMENT

Part on its own.
PRH4138
or
41-16
1.2
1.5
1.2
1.2
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 D
PARTIAL REPLACEMENT
RIGHT HAND SIDE
1
2
CAB11539-1R7
C
1
12903R3
3
4
A
3
CAT13323R3
CAT13322R7
CAB11539-1R1
41-17
LOWER STRUCTURE
E-F
LEFT HAND SIDE
CAS13033R2
12902R1
41-18
41 D
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION

for a collision affecting the sub-frame.
In the operation described below there are only
descriptions of the connections specific to the part
concerned.
Information concerning the other parts will be
dealt with in the respective sections.
The repair bench must be used.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with sub-frame front mounting

reinforcement.
PRB4127
Front sub-frame front mounting

Front sub-frame front mounting
reinforcement
5 Headlight carrier panel
1
2
3
4
41-19
1.5
1.2
1.2
1
1.2
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
C
1
CAA11538R6
1
12901R
A
5
D
3
1
CAR11700R4
4
CAT13322-1R4
B
1
CAA11536R5
41-20
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
F
4
CAB11539R1
12903R4
E
3
4
CAU13323-3R3
41-21
LOWER STRUCTURE
Front half unit
41
INTRODUCTION
The operation for the replacement of this part is

complementary to :
- the front end lower cross member,
- the headlight panel.
This operation requires the replacement of the
cowl side panel (pillar lining) and of the cowl side
panel upper reinforcements, which have to be ordered separately.
descriptions of the specific joints to the part
concerned, information concerning the parts to
be ordered separately is not considered here. This
will be dealt with in the respective sections.
PRB4124R

DEPARTMENT
or

A

- engine mounting height adjuster (right
hand side)
- engine mounting reinforcement (right
hand side),
- engine mounting plate (right hand side),
- sub-frame front mounting ,
- front side member closure panel,
- wheel arch,
- shock absorber cup,
- shock absorber cup height adjuster,
- ABS mounting (right hand side),
- injection unit mounting and impact sensor
(left hand side),
- side plenum chamber
1 Central plenum chamber

2 Injection unit mounting and impact
sensor (left hand side)
3 Front side member, front section
4 Front side member, rear section
5 Shock absorber cup height adjuster
6 Shock absorber cup
7 Cowl side panel (pillar lining)
8 Cowl side panel upper reinforcements
10 Side plenum chamber
11 Bulkhead
Cowl side panel (pillar lining)

Cowl side panel upper reinforcement
NOTE : to avoid removing the bulkhead lining,
the side section of the new half unit plenum

chamber must be removed, if this part of the vehicle is not damaged.
41-22
1
2
1.5
1.8
1
2
1.5
1
1
1
0.7
LOWER STRUCTURE
Front half unit
13007R1
41
13000R2
B
6
5
1
5
1
CAA11536R8
CAS13024-3R3
Right hand side special feature.
41-23
LOWER STRUCTURE
Front half unit
13010R4
12894R1
41
1
4
CAA11538R8
CAN11689R3
41-24
LOWER STRUCTURE
Front half unit
41
CAA11536-4R2
13005R7
G
5
3
4
4
3
CAB11539R3
CAS13029-4R1
41-25
LOWER STRUCTURE
Front half unit
41
REPLACEMENT WITH SIDE CHAMBER
10
CAA11537R1
651f1-14465
H
11
10
CAA11538R7
41-26
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 G
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part is a complementary

operation to the replacement of a front pillar or a
sill panel with a lining for a side impact.
descriptions of the joints specific to the part
concerned.
dealt with in the respective sections.

DEPARTMENT
Part on its own.
PRB4125
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Floor
Front side member reinforcement,
rear section
Sill panel
41-27
1
1
1.8
2.5
1.2
0.7
1
2.5
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 G
B
3
2
1
CAG11548-2R8
651g1-14466
C
1
4
3
1
2
CAA11536R7
CAF11547-2R3
41-28
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 G
F
8
CAM11557-5R5
651g2-14467
7
6
5
1
5
1
CAT13329-1R7
CAA11538R6
H
6
1
5
1
CAS13024-1R6
CAE11546-2R7
41-29
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 G
J
5
1
2
1
CAA11538-2aR3
651g3-14469
1
2
CAF11547-2R1
41-30
LOWER STRUCTURE
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the half unit.
concerned.
dealt with in the respective sections (see
contents).
DEPARTMENT

- sub-frame front mounting ,
- front side cross member ,
- side member reinforcement.
PRH4139
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Centre floor
Front side member reinforcement
Sill panel
Front cross member under front seat
Rear cross member under front seat
41-31
1
1.47
2
2.5
1
1
1.2
2.5
1
1
41 H
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 H
CAA11538R6
651h1-14468
7
6
5
1
2
3
CAT13329-1R7
CAT13324R2
7
5
1
1
2
CAE11546-2R7
CAA11536R7
41-32
LOWER STRUCTURE
41 H
2
651h2-14470
CAF11547-2R2
F
H
4
10
2
3
CAT13324R2
CAF11547-2R2
41-33
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
41
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of:
1 - For a frontal impact
- front side member, rear section,
- bulkhead.
2 - For a side impact
- front pillar with lining,
- sill panel closure panel
The replacement of this part is carried out in the
same way for the front section as for the rear section (see cut in the method below).
PRH4140

Centre floor
Bulkhead
Front side member
Front side member reinforcement
Tunnel reinforcement
Tunnel front reinforcement
Cable sleeve stop mounting
Front cross member of rear
floor cross member
13 Tunnel reinforcement
14 Sill panel closure panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

concerned.
contents).
DEPARTMENT

- front cross member under front seat,
- rear cross member under front seat,
- bolts to be welded,
- studs to be welded,
- tunnel front reinforcement,
- cable sleeve stop mounting,
- front cross member of rear floor cross member.
41-34
1.47
1
0.7
1.5
2
2.5
1
1
1
1
1.2
1.5
1.5
1
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
41
B
3
1
CAK11552R1a
651i1-14471
or
C
3
1
2
CAA11538-1R3
CAT13319R7
41-35
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
41
G
13
1
5
CAA11538-1R6
CAA11536-1R4
H
1
13
CAT13324-2R1
CAS13028R5
I
1
1
10
CAA11538-1R5
CAA11536-2R2
41-36
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
J
3
1
CAN11690R5
1
2
CAA11536R7
41-37
41
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
41
M
9
1
651i2-14472
CAA11538-1R2
or
N
1
1
14
CAF11547-1R2
CAN11690-1R5
41-38
LOWER STRUCTURE
Centre floor
41
12 1
651i3-14473
11
CAY14458-2R1
or
Q
1
12
11 1
CAC11541-1R1
CAX13938-1R2
41-39
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the sill panel closure panel following a side impact.
concerned.
contents).
651j1-14472-1

DEPARTMENT
1 - Front cross member under front seat

Part assembled with front seat spacer.
2 - Rear cross member under front seat
Part assembled with front seat spacer.
6
5
3
2
CAY14350R3
PRH4141
1
2
3
4
5
6

Centre floor
Tunnel front reinforcement
1
1
1.47
2
1.5
1.5
41-40
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
D
3
CAA11538R2
CAA11538R2
CAF11547R2
CAF11547R2
41-41
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of a body side lining
or a wheel arch for a side impact.
This operation is carried out partially (see cut and
method below).
concerned.
contents).

DEPARTMENT
651k1-14474-1
Part assembled with fuel tank mounting.
or
A
1
PRH4142
CAC11541R1
1
2
3
4
5

Rear floor
Centre floor
1.5
0.7
1
1.2
1.47
41-42
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
E
1
5
CAS13030-3R2
CAA11536-2R6
F
1
3
4
2
CAS13030-3R2
CAC11541R5
G
1
1 3 4
CAY14292R6
CAW13605-1R6
41-43
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the sill panel closure panel, rear section.
concerned.
Information concerning additional parts will be
dealt with in the respective section (see contents).
651l1-14477

DEPARTMENT

- nut to be welded,
- seat belt mounting,
- seat back mounting reinforcement.
CAA11538R5
PRH4143
PARTS CONCERNED (thickness in mm):

Rear floor
Rear side member
Rear axle assembly mounting unit
Side member / cross member
joining component
6 Seat belt mounting support
7 Seat back mounting reinforcement
1
2
3
4
5
1.2
0.7
1.2
1
1.5
1.2
1.2
41-44
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
1
4
CAA11538R5
CAA11536-1R5a
CAF11547-2R2
CAH11549-2R5
41-45
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
1
5
CAF11547-1R2
651l2-14475
H
1
CAA11538-1R8
CAA11536R5
41-46
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear side member
41
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part can be carried out in

two ways:
A - Complete rear side member
(for a rear impact)
In this case it is a complementary operation to
the sill panel closure panel.
B - Complete rear side member, part section
(for a rear side impact) (cut to be made in
front of the side member reinforcement), see
cut, diagram and method below.
In this case it is a complementary operation to
the rear end panel.
PRH4144

concerned.
1 Rear side member

2 Exhaust mounting unit
3 Side member / cross member
joining component
4 Rear floor
5 Front cross member of rear floor
cross member
6 Rear floor centre cross member
7 Wheel arch
8 Rear axle assembly mounting unit
10 Sill panel reinforcement

The repair bench must be used when replacing
the complete side member.

DEPARTMENT

- welded nuts,
- exhaust mounting (left hand side),
- rear axle assembly mounting unit,
- rear axle assembly mounting spacer,
- rear side member reinforcement,
- towing ring mounting,
- rear suspension spring cup,
- rear suspension spring cup reinforcement,
- side member / cross member joining component .
41-47
1.8
1.2
1.5
0.7
1.5
1.2
0.8
1
1
1
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear side member
41
4
2
CAA11538R6
651m1-14478
7
CAA11538R5
D
2
CAS13028-8R2
CAS13033R5
41-48
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear side member
41
4
1
651m2-14476
CAA11538R6
E
H
5
1
1
CAA11538R6
CAA11538-1R5
CAF11547-2R1
41-49
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear side member
41
L
9
10
CAA11538R8
CAE11546-2R1
M
6
CAA11536R6
CAF11547-2R2
N
6
1
1
6
CAA11538-1R6
CAA11538R7
41-50
LOWER STRUCTURE
Towing ring
41 N
INTRODUCTION

operation to the partial floor for a rear impact.
concerned.
DEPARTMENT
651n1-14479
Part assembled with a threaded support.
A
1
2
CAT13328R8
PRH4145
1 Towing ring
2 Rear side member
1.5
1.8
1
2
CAA11536R8
41-51
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the :
Rear floor
Rear floor reinforcement
Rear inner wheel arch
Exhaust mounting
Rear side member
Side member / cross member
joining component
8 Front cross member of rear floor
cross member
10 Rear axle assembly mounting unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A - Cut for a side impact :

of the rear sill panel closure panel.
B - Cut for a rear impact :
of the rear end panel.
This operation is carried out partially , with three
possibilities (see cut in the diagram below) :
-
rear left hand section,

rear right hand section,
front section.

concerned.
DEPARTMENT

- emergency spare wheel mounting,
- rear floor reinforcement,
- bolts to be welded,
- stud to be welded,
- rear cushion retaining bracket.
PRH4146
41-52
0.7
1.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.5
1.5
1
1
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
B
3
4
1
CAS13028-7R1
651o1-14480
C
3
or
A
1
CAT13319R8
CAA11538-1R6
CAA11536-3R5
41-53
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
1
5
CAA11538-1R6
651o2-14481
or
1
G
7
CAA11536-3R3
CAY14457-6R2
41-54
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
K
2
CAT13324-2R1
CAA11536-1R1a
L
1
2
1
CAA11536-1R2
CAX13946-4R5
M
3
1
5
1
CAF11547-1R1
5
CAS13028-7R2
41-55
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
O
1
CAN11689R1a
651o3-14483
or
N
1
1
6
CAY14459-2R1
CAA11536-3R7
41-56
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
1
5
CAA11538-1R6
651o4-14482
or
9
Q
8
CAN11689R1a
CAD11545R1
10
CAA11538R4
41-57
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
41 O
10
CAS13032R3
CAA11536-3R5
Y
3
1
1
1
10
CAX13946-4R6
CAA11538-1R6
CAY14456-2R2
CAA11537-1R6
41-58
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor
AA
10
CAH11549R2
AB
1
10
CAA11538-1R6
41-59
41 O
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the rear end panel.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with welded nuts.
PRH4148
1
2
3
4
Exhaust mounting
Rear side member
Rear floor
Wheel arch
1.2
1.8
0.7
0.8
41-60
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
CAA11538R5
651p1-14484
C
2
4
3
1
1
CAA11538R7
CAS13028-8R1
41-61
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor unit
41 Q
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the rear end panel for a rear impact.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

concerned.

Rear floor
Centre floor
Rear side member
Wheel arch

DEPARTMENT

- fuel tank mounting,
- welded nuts,
- exhaust mounting (left hand side ),
- rear axle assembly mounting unit,
- rear axle assembly mounting spacer,
- rear side member reinforcement,
- towing ring mounting,
- rear suspension spring cup,
- rear suspension spring cup reinforcement,
- side member / cross member joining component ,
- rear side members,
- rear floor ,
- rear floor raised section ,
- towing ring .
PRH4147
41-62
1.5
0.7
1
1.2
1.47
1
1
1
1.8
0.8
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor unit
41 Q
B
1
4
CAS13030-3R2
651q1-14474
1
5
CAS13030-3R2
CAG11548-2R6
D
1
CAC11541R1
41-63
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor unit
41 Q
G
6
1
653j2-14373
CAT13325-4R2
E
H
6
1
2
CAA11538R5
CAB11540R2
F
1
CAB11540R2
41-64
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor unit
41 Q
651q2-14476-1
CAE11546-2R1
I
6
CAA11538R8
41-65
LOWER STRUCTURE
Rear floor unit
41 Q
L
10
2
9
654e1-14305R
CAS13028-6R2
K
10
M
8
10
9
CAA11536-2R7
CAC11541R7
41-66

Front wing
42 A
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part is a basic operation for a frontal and side impact.
14197R
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the radiator grille and unclip it from the wing (1) (see section 55-C),
- the scuttle panel grille (see section 55-D),
- the front bumper (see section 55-A),
- the clips (A), the bolts (B), and the clips (C),
- the front and rear mudguards.
REMOVING THE WING
Open the door and remove the mounting nuts (D) and (E).
Remove the bolts (F), (G), (H), (I) and the nuts (J), (K).
42-1

Front wing
42 A
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE
REPAIRING THE PLASTIC WING
First fit the sliding clips (L) and(M) onto the wing .
Reminder
Fit all the mountings without tightening them,

before adjusting the opening clearances.
Certain types of repairs to the wing may be carried out - scratches, score marks etc., ...
Observe the tightening order as follows :
For more information, consult Technical Note n

392A on the repair of bumpers.
Bolt (I), nut (K), bolt (F), nut (J) with bonnet
and doors closed.
Nut (E), nut (D) with door open.
bolt (L) with bonnet open.
In this note you will find information concerning

methods and products.
Adjust the flush fitting of the headlight unit on

the wing with bolts (G), then tighten these two
bolts.
All wing mounting bolts
0.5
13491R5
42-2

INTRODUCTION

for a frontal impact.
This is a removable bodywork component, secured by 6 x 8 mm bolts :
- four Torx 40 bolts on the headlight carrier panel at (A),
- two hexagonal bolts on the front end lower
cross member (B).
DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with lock mounting.
652b1-14440
PRH4219
42-3
42

INTRODUCTION

The fitting jig must be used.
DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with:

- front panel upper side cross member,
- headlight carrier panel ,
- bumper mounting support,
- welded nuts.
PRH4215
Front panel upper side cross member

Front end cross member
Front side member
Cowl side panel upper front
reinforcement
6 Front sub-frame front mounting,
lower section
1
2
3
4
5
42-4
1.2
1.2
1.8
1.5
1
1.2
42

42
B
5
CAA11536-1R1a
652c2-14438
5
1
6
CAA11536R3
5
CAX13937-4R7
42-5

42
E
1
CAA11536-3R3
652c1-14439
CAR11700R7
42-6

INTRODUCTION
42 D

operation to the :
1 Bonnet hinge mounting

2 Cowl side pillar lining
3 Windscreen aperture lower cross
member
1 - replacement of the bonnet for a frontal impact, in this case, this operation is carried out
partially (see cut and method below),
2 - replacement of the front pillar, in this case,
this operation is carried out completely.
concerned.
DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with welded nut.
PRH4220
or
42-7
1.2
1.2
1.2

42 D
PARTIAL REPLACEMENT
CAA11536-2R8
652d2-14436
or
1
2
CAA11538-1R6
42-8

42 D
CAS13028R3a
652d1-14437
C
3
1
2
CAB11540-1R5
CAA11538-1R6
42-9

Cowl side panel
INTRODUCTION
42

operation to the replacement of the headlight
carrier panel for a frontal impact.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

method below).
concerned.

Engine support plate
Front shock absorber cup
Side plenum chamber
Engine support plate corner plate
Wheel arch
Bumper mounting corner plate


DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with:

- nut to be crimped,
- bonnet hinge mounting,
- dashboard mounting bracket,
- welded nuts,
- wing mounting support.
PRH4216
42-10
1.2
2
2
1
1.2
1.8
1.5
0.8
0.8

Cowl side panel
42
1
9
8
CAS13026-1R7
652e2-14434
C
7
1
CAQ11697R2
CAA11538-1R2
42-11

Cowl side panel
42
F
1
1
2
CAA11538-1R3
CAA11536-1R8
E
1
CAA11536-1R8a
42-12

Cowl side panel
42
H
5
1
652e1-14435
CAA11538-1R2
G
I
CAA11536-1R3
CAG11548-7R3
J
1
CAO11694R4
42-13

Cowl side panel upper reinforcement, front section
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the cowl side panel for a frontal impact.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part on its own.
PRH4217
1 Cowl side panel upper front

reinforcement
1
2 Cowl side panel pillar lining
1.2
3 Headlight carrier panel
1.2
4 Engine support plate
2
5 Side plenum chamber
1
6 Cowl side panel upper rear reinforcement 1
7 Wheel arch
0.8
42-14
42

42
C
1
652f1-14425
CAA11538R4
A
D
1
5
2
2
1
CAS13024-1R7
CAF11547-2R3
B
1
CAA11538R4
42-15
42
G
1
6
2
1
CAN11690-1R5
CAF11547-2R8
H
1
6
CAA11536-2R2
CAS13026R7
42-16

Cowl side panel upper rear reinforcement, rear section
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the front pillar
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with welded shaft.
PRH4218
1 Cowl side panel upper rear reinforcement 1

2 Cowl side panel upper front
reinforcement
1
1.2
4 Front pillar
1.2
42-17
42 G
42 G
Cowl side panel upper rear reinforcement, rear section
C
3
CAA11538R7
652g1-14433
A
1
CAA11536R2
CAA11536-2R1
E
1
3
4
1
2
CAN11690R2
CAF11547-2R3
42-18

INTRODUCTION
42 H
The replacement of this part is an operation for a

frontal impact and is complementary to the replacement of the cowl side panel (pillar lining).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
It can be carried out partially from the right hand

side (see cut, diagram and method below).
Engine mounting height adjuster

Side member, front section
Front wheel arch
Cowl side panel (pillar lining)

concerned.
Information concerning other parts will be dealt
with in the respective section (see contents).
DEPARTMENT
1 - Part only (right hand side).

2 - Part only (left hand side).
PRB4212
or
42-19
1.8
1.5
1.2
1.5
0.8
1.8
1.2

42 H
B
5
CAQ11697R5
13009R
CAR11700R5
CAI11550-2R5
42-20

42 H
E
1
4
CAS13028R1
12903R2
or
D
5
1
CAS13028R8
42-21

42 H
G
7
CAC11541R7a
13010R1
H
1
4
2
CAB11540R1a
CAS13028R2
42-22

13005R3
2
1
CAP11696-1R4
42-23
42 H

Wheel arch
42
INTRODUCTION

operation to the replacement of the cowl side panel (pillar lining) for a frontal impact.
It also requires the replacement of the cowl side
panel upper reinforcements (pillar lining), and
the use of the repair bench.
concerned.
DEPARTMENT
PRB4213

- engine mounting height adjuster (right hand
side),
- engine support plate (right hand side),
- wheel arch ,
- shock absorber cup ,
- shock absorber cup height adjuster ,
- ABS mounting (right hand side),
- injection unit and impact sensor mounting
(left hand side).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
42-24

Engine mounting height adjuster
Engine mounting reinforcement
Shock absorber cup
Side plenum chamber
Front wheel arch
Shock absorber cup height
adjuster / plenum chamber joining
component
1.5
1.8
1.5
2
1
1.2
1.5
2
0.8
1.8
1.5

Wheel arch
42
B
9
CAQ11697R5
13009R
10
9
CAR11700R5
CAI11550-2R5
42-25

Wheel arch
42
E
1
7
CAA11538-1R3
12895R1
F
1
7
3
8
CAA11536-1R8a
CAS13029R1
42-26

Wheel arch
42
G
1
CAA11536R5
13005R1
H1
G1
1
1
CAA11537-2R2
CAA11536-4R5
H
1
CAA11537-1R2
42-27

Wheel arch
42
K
9
7
CAS13028R1
13005R5
3
2
1
7
9
CAT13324R8
CAB11539-1R8
L1
1
3
6
7
2
CAE11546R7
CAA11536-1R3
42-28

Wheel arch
13007R
42
13000R
N
4
1
5
1
5
CAA11536R8
CAS13024-1R3
42-29

Wheel arch
42
P
9
7
CAS13028R2
13010R2
O
5
11
CAA11538R8
42-30

Side plenum chamber
INTRODUCTION
42

operation to the replacement of the front half
unit.
Central plenum chamber

Side plenum chamber
Bulkhead
Windscreen wiper plate
centre reinforcement
5 Pedal plate reinforcement
1
2
3
4

concerned.
with in the respective sections (see contents).

DEPARTMENT

- nut to be welded,
- shaft to be welded.
PRH4210
42-31
1
1
0.7
1.2
1

Side plenum chamber
42
C
3
652j1-14426
CAA11538R8
A
1
D
1
3
CAA11537-1R2
CAG11548-2R4
B
E
3
1
CAN11690R1
CAI11550-2R1
42-32

Bulkhead
42
INTRODUCTION

for a front side impact.
concerned.
NOTE : for vehicles not fitted with air conditioning, the blanking cover (2) will also have to be
ordered, which will be mounted at its lower section by two rivets whose sealing will be ensured
by a paint sealing mastic.
PRH4211
For driving school vehicles, parts (3 and 4) will

have to be ordered separately, and the specific
pedal mounting will have to be used as a drilling
template.
or

DEPARTMENT
1
2
3
4
1 - Bulkhead : Part assembled with welded studs.

2 - Blanking cover : part only.
3 and 4 -
Pedal reinforcement : Part assembled

with welded bolt.
5
6
7
8
42-33
Bulkhead
Central plenum chamber
Side plenum chamber
Windscreen wiper plate
Pedal plate reinforcement
Centre floor
member
Steering mounting unit, upper section
0.7
1
1
1.2
1
0.7
1.2
2

Bulkhead
42
652k1-14424
CAN11690-2R1
or
3
1
CAA11538-1R4
CAA11538-1R4
2
5
1
CAG11548R4
42-34

Bulkhead
42
H
1
1
4
6
2
CAI11550R1
CAS13030-1R4
I
1
6
1
CAW13605-4R6
CAT13319-1R7
J
1
1
1
CAA11536-3R1
CAS13030R4
42-35

Bulkhead
42
8
1
652k2-14430
CAT13321-2R3
K
1
CAA11536R5
CAA11536-1R5a
42-36

INTRODUCTION
42

operation to the replacement of the windscreen
aperture lower cross member for a frontal impact.
1 Windscreen wiper plate

member
3 Bulkhead

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with upper and lower section with

welded nuts.
PRH4212
42-37
1.2
1.2
0.7
1

42
B
3 1
CAI11550-1R1
652l1-14432
1
652L2-14431
CAA11536-2R5
CAD11545R5
42-38

INTRODUCTION
42

operation to the replacement of the front pillar lining for a front side impact.

member
2 Steering mounting unit, upper section
3 Front pillar
4 Bulkhead

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with steering column mountings

and dashboard mountings.
PRH4213
42-39
1.2
2
0.7
1.2
1.2

42
1
2
4
CAD11545-1R3
652m2-14428
A
1
2
CAA11536-2R4
CAA11536-1R1a
CAA11538R6
42-40

42
CAS13025-1R2
652m1-14429
1 3
CAX13968-1R6
42-41

INTRODUCTION
42 N

for damage to the steering column when the vehicle has been stolen.
1 Steering mounting unit, upper section

2 Steering mounting unit, lower section
3 Bulkhead

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with welded nuts.
PRH4214
42-42
2
2
0.7

42 N
B
3
652n1-14427
CAR11700R1
A
2
CAB11540-1R2
42-43

Front pillar
43 A
INTRODUCTION

The front pillar is removed for replacement by cutting the assembled body side, front section, from
which the windscreen aperture pillar double seal
mounting must be unclipped.
The cowl side panel reinforcement, rear section,
will have to be ordered separately.
concerned.
PRH4308

DEPARTMENT
or
1 - Front pillar
- front pillar reinforcement ,
- windscreen aperture pillar double seal
mounting,
- welded nuts,
- wing mounting bracket,
- cowl side panel upper reinforcement,
- welded stud,
- door hinge.
1 Front pillar
2 Front pillar reinforcement
3 Windscreen aperture pillar
double seal mounting
4 Bulkhead
member
8 Front side cross member
9 Windscreen aperture pillar lining
2 - Cowl side panel reinforcement, rear section

Part only
3 - Windscreen aperture pillar double seal joint
mounting
Part only
43-1
1.2
1
0.7
0.7
1.2
1
1
1
1.2
1.2
1.2

Front pillar
43 A
10
2
1
CAY14351-4R2
653a1-14377
A
C
10
2
6
2
1
CAN11690-3R4
CAN11690-3R4
D
6
CAW13602R1
43-2

Front pillar
43 A
G
1
CAY14350-3R5
CAI11550-2R5
H
1
10
2
1
CAN11690-3R3
CAS13033R5
43-3

Front pillar
653a2-14378
43 A
653a3-14357
1
CAR11700-1R8
CAS13033R5
43-4

Front pillar
43 A
N
9
11
CAV13465R6
CAP11696R6
O
10
10
2
1
1
CAJ11551R1
CAN11690-3R4
11
10
10
CAW13602R5
CAY14351-4R2
43-5

Front pillar
43 A
S
9
10
1
2
CAE11546-5R1
CAQ11697R3
10
CAL11554-2R2
43-6

INTRODUCTION
43

1
2
3
4

concerned.
5
6
7
8


Side plenum chamber
Bulkhead
member
Bonnet hinge mounting

DEPARTMENT
Part only
PRH4309
or
43-7
1.2
1
0.7
1.2
1.2
1.2
1
1

43
B
1
2
CAA11538-1R3
653b1-14375
C
2
3
1
1
1
CAS13028R7
CAA11538-1R4
43-8

43
F
3
CAA11538-1R1
CAX13938-4R6
E
5
CAN11689R1a
43-9

43
H
8
CAN11689R1a
653b2-14358
I
1
1
8
CAE11546-1R4
CAC11541-1R2
43-10

INTRODUCTION
43

1
2
3
4
5
The Parts Department part is identical for the two

versions, BUT, for version B it must be cut as
shown below.

Body side lining

concerned.

DEPARTMENT

- windscreen aperture pillar lining,
- windscreen aperture pillar reinforcement.
PRH4310
* Cut for version B (140 mm)

or
43-11
1.2
0.7
1.2
1.2
1

43
C
2
1
5
653c1-14359
CAE11546-1R4
A
1
CAA11536-3R1
653c2-14360
D
4
2
1
CAB11539-1R3
CAN11689R1a
43-12

Centre pillar
INTRODUCTION
43 D

for a side impact.
Centre pillar
Centre pillar closure panel
Seat belt mounting centre pillar
upper reinforcement
1
2
3
4
The centre pillar is removed for replacement by

cutting the assembled front section of the body
side.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Three parts assembled with :

- front pillar reinforcement ,
- windscreen aperture double seal mounting,
- welded nuts,
- welded stud,
- door hinge.
PRH4311
or
43-13
1.2
0.7
1
1.2
1
1

Centre pillar
43 D
B
6
5
1
CAI11550R5
653d1-14379
A
1
1
3
CAS13033R6
CAE11546-2R4
43-14

Centre pillar
43 D
F
6
5
1
CAI11550R5
CAI11550R5
G
1
5
2
1
CAS13033R5
CAE11546-8R1
43-15

Centre pillar
43 D
CAL11554-3R2
653d2-14361
CAS13033R7
CAL11554-3R1
43-16

Centre pillar
43 D
3
1
CAE11546-8R2
CAL11554-3R2
CAE11546-8R1
CAE11546-8R2
43-17

Centre pillar
653d3-14379
O
1
CAN11689-1R4
43-18
43 D

INTRODUCTION
1 Centre pillar lining

2 Centre pillar closure panel
3 Seat belt mounting centre
pillar upper reinforcement

concerned.
DEPARTMENT

VERSION B (1)
lock striker plate reinforcement,

seat belt mounting upper reinforcement,
nuts to be welded.
VERSION C (2)

operation to the centre pillar for version B, the
rear wing panel for version C for a side impact.
43
lock striker plate reinforcement,

seat belt mounting upper reinforcement,
nuts to be welded.
PRH4312
43-19
1
0.7
1.2
1
1

43
VERSION B
CAN11689R3
653e1-14362
5
4
2
CAE11546R8
CAB11539R6
43-20

43
CAE11546-2R1
653e2-14363
F
1
D
1
CAS13033R7
CAB11539R6
43-21

VERSION C
43
H
2
CAQ11697R3
653e3-14364
1
5
CAA11536R8
43-22

43
J
2
CAB11539-1R1
653e4-14365
I
1
CAB11539R5
CAS13033R3
CAE11546-2R5
43-23

INTRODUCTION
VERSION C (2)

operation to the centre pillar for version B, the
rear wing panel for C, for a side impact.

concerned.
43
quarter panel lower reinforcement,

quarter panel upper reinforcement,
inflating insert,
quarter panel lining,
seat belt mounting nuts,
stretcher extension.


DEPARTMENT

VERSION B (1)
quarter panel lower reinforcement,

quarter panel upper reinforcement,
inflating insert,
quarter panel lining,
seat belt mounting nuts.
PRH4314
1 Centre pillar reinforcement

2 Centre pillar lining
3 Seat belt mounting centre
pillar upper reinforcement
PRH4313
43-24
1
0.7
1.2
1
1
1.2

43
VERSION B
653f2-14367
653f1-14366
A
1
CAB11539-1R2
CAF11547R3
43-25

43
E
1
CAA11537-1R2
CAC11541R5
F
1
CAB11539-1R3
CAA11536-3R1
43-26

43
VERSION C
653f3-14368
653f5-14380
FA
1
1
CAA11536-3R2
CAA11536-3R1
CAB11539R5
43-27

43
2
1
CAE11546-2R2
CAB11539-1R3
L
2
2
CAB11539R5
CAE11546R4
43-28

43
1
2
CAB11539R4
653f4-14376
O
1
CAS13033R6
CAA11536-2R5
43-29

P
4
5
CAE11546R3
Q
1
CAA11536-1R8a
43-30
43

43 G
INTRODUCTION

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
1 - Cowl side panel upper reinforcement, rear

section
Part only.
PRH4315
2 - Body side, front section

- front pillar reinforcement,
- windscreen aperture pillar double seal
mounting,
- welded nuts,
- welded stud,
- door hinge.
NOTE : for replacing this part, refer to operations

43A and 43D.
43-31

Sill panel
INTRODUCTION
43 H

operation to the base reinforcement for a side impact.
1
2
3
4
5
6
This operation is carried out partially for version B

and completely for version C.
Sill panel
Centre pillar closure panel

concerned.
DEPARTMENT
VERSION B (1)
Part assembled with welded stud.

VERSION C (2)
Part assembled with welded stud.
PRH4316
or
43-32
1.2
1
1
1.2
1
0.7

Sill panel
43 H
VERSION C
CAI11550-2R5
653h1-14381
C
1
A
1
1
CAI11550-2R2
D
CAS13033R5
CAI11550-2R2
43-33

Sill panel
43 H
VERSION B
CAI11550-2R5
653h3-14382
G
CAS13033R6
CAS13033R6
43-34

Sill panel
43 H
J
1
CAS13033R8
CAE11546-2R1
K
2
CAE11546-2R1
CAT13326-1R1
43-35

Sill panel
43 H
CAY14355R3
653h2-14369
1
3
4
CAE11546-2R3
1
CAI11550-2R5
CAS13033R8
43-36

Sill panel
CAE11546-2R1
Q
2
3
1
CAE11546-2R7
43-37
43 H

INTRODUCTION

operation to the sill panel .
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part only.
PRH4317
1
2
3
4
5

Body side lining
43-38
1
0.7
1
1.2
1
43

43
CAS13025-1R2
653i1-14370
CAN11689R5
CAN11689R5
43-39

43
1
2
CAA11536R7
653i2-14371
D
F
3
1
2
CAS13025-3R8
CAA11536-1R6
CAS13025-2R5
43-40

INTRODUCTION

operation to the sill panel reinforcement for a
side impact (versions B and C).
concerned.

DEPARTMENT

- reinforcement plate,
- nuts to be welded.
PRH4319
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Rear floor
Cross member of rear floor cross
member
Centre floor
43-41
1
1
1.2
0.7
1.5
1
1
1.47
1
43

43
B
1
8
653j1-14372
CAA11538-1R3
A
C
1
6
1
CAA11536-2R8
CAA11538-1R3
CAF11547R1
43-42

43
F
5
653j2-14373
CAB11540-1R2
E
G
1
CAA11538-1R5
CAT13325-2R2
H
4
CAB11540-1R2
43-43

43
653j4-14383
J
9
653j3-14374
1
CAA11536R4
CAA11538-1R5
43-44

Complete body side
43
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part is a complementary operation to the replacement of the

roof for a front side impact.
In the operation described below there are only descriptions of the joints specific to
the part concerned.
Information concerning other parts will be dealt with in the respective section (see
contents).
COMPOSITION OF THE PART FROM THE PARTS DEPARTMENT
1 - Upper reinforcement of cowl side panel, rear section

Part only
2 - Body side, front section
- front pillar reinforcement,
- windscreen aperture pillar double seal mounting,
- welded nuts,
cowl side panel upper reinforcement,
- welded stud,
- door hinge.
3 - Rear wing panel
Part assembled with striker plate reinforcement.
PRH4318
NOTE 1 : to replace these parts, refer to operations 43A, 43D and 44A.
NOTE 2 : sections A and B of part 3 are big enough to be cut where they overlap
with the sections corresponding to part 2.
43-45
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
Rear wing panel, complete and part section
INTRODUCTION

for a rear side impact.
It will be replaced partially.
For version B : along cut A, diagram below (the
double seal mounting will have to be ordered separately).
For version C : along cut B.
NOTE : complete replacement will be complemen-
tary to the roof.

concerned.
PRH4425


DEPARTMENT

VERSION B (1)
bumper reinforcement,
door striker plate reinforcement,
striker plate reinforcement plate,
double seal mounting (part 3) (to be ordered
separately for version B).
VERSION C (2)
stiffener,
adjustable seal,
bumper reinforcement.
PRH4432
or
44-1
VERSIONS
B/C

44 A
1 Rear wing panel

2 Quarter panel double seal mounting
3 Rear quarter panel upper rear
reinforcement
4 Rear quarter panel lower rear
reinforcement
5 Body side lining
6 Door striker plate reinforcement
9 Seat belt mounting centre pillar
upper reinforcement
11 Upper rear side rain channel
12 Lower rear side rain channel
0.8
0.7
1.2
1.2
0.7
1.2
1
1
1.2
1
1
0.7
654a6-14298
1
2
CAA11536R8
44-2
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
C
1
3
4
654a7-14299
CAJ11551-1R4
D
B
5
4
1
CAE11546-8R2
CAS13033R7
44-3
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
(with removal of roof)
CAS13033R1
G
5
654a8-14300
CAE11546-8R8
1
4
CAB11539R3
44-4
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
H
1
3
4
CAJ11551-1R4
654a9-14301
5
4
CAE11546-8R2
1
6
5
CAE11546-2R3
44-5
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
1
5
CAB11539R4
CAS13033R2
8
7
1
1
5
7
CAE11546-2R3
CAE11546-2R8
1
7
8
CAE11546-2R3
44-6
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
Q
1
CAV13463R5
654a1-14295
R
8
5
1
1
CAO11694R6
CAE11546-2R7
44-7
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
SPECIAL NOTE FOR VERSION C
5
3
CAT13326-1R4
654a4-14296
5
4
S
CAT13326-1R4
CAS13033R1
44-8
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
W
1
11
CAB11540-1R3
654a5-14297
X
1
1
1
12
11
CAS13033R6
CAT13325-2R3
44-9
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
Z
5
9
10
CAT13329-2R6
654a3-14314
AA
5
10
Y
1
CAE11546R6
AB
CAS13033R4
1
10
5
CAJ11551-1R4
44-10
VERSIONS
B/C
44 A
AD
7
10
1
CAE11546-8R2
654a2-14315
AE
AC
1
10
1
CAI11550-2R5
CAE11546-8R2
AF
1
CAS13033R6
44-11

INTRODUCTION

operation to the roof and to the rear wing panel.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part only.
PRH4426
1 Rear upper side rain channel

2 Rear lower side rain channel
reinforcement
reinforcement
5 Body side lining
44-12
1
0.7
1.2
1.2
0.7
44

44
B
1
CAJ11551-1R1
654b1-14302
C
4
1
CAO11694-1R1a
CAS13024R5
1
4
2
CAS13024-1R3
44-13

Tailgate balancing ball joint
44
INTRODUCTION

for cases where the ball joint breaks.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part only.
654c1-14303
A
1
PRH4433
1 Tailgate balancing ball joint

2 Rear lower side rain channel
CAA11538R4
1.5
0.7
44-14

Outer wheel arch
INTRODUCTION
VERSION C (2)

operation to the rear wing panel and lights mounting panel.

method below).
44 D
rear quarter panel lower reinforcement,

rear quarter panel upper reinforcement,
inflatable insert,
rear quarter panel lining,

concerned.

DEPARTMENT

VERSION B (1)

inflatable insert,
PRH4428
1 Body side lining

reinforcement
3 Shock absorber cup height adjuster
PRH4427
44-15
0.7
1.2
1.5

Outer wheel arch
44 D
B
1
1 3
CAT13320-1R2
654d1-14304
or
A
1
CAA11536-1R1a
CAC11541-1R2
NOTE : plug weld under the rear quarter panel

lower reinforcement.
44-16

Inner wheel arch
INTRODUCTION
44

operation to the body side lining, rear section and
the lights mounting for a rear side impact.
1
2
3
4

Rear floor
Rear side member

concerned.

DEPARTMENT

- shock absorber mounting cup,
- shock absorber mounting cup reinforcement,
- parcel shelf side mounting,
- shock absorber cup height adjuster,
- rear seat mounting hook,
- rear seat mounting.
PRH4429
44-17
0.8
0.7
1
1.2

Inner wheel arch
44
B
1
2
654e1-14305
CAS13028R2
A
1
C
1
2
CAA11536-3R4
CAC11541-1R7
44-18

Body side lining
INTRODUCTION
VERSION C (2)

operation to the rear wing panel.

method below).
44

inflatable insert,
The method below deals with the special features

of versions B and C. In both cases, the upper rain
channel will have to be ordered separately.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT

PRH4428
VERSION B (1)
Upper rain channel

-

inflatable insert,
Part only.
PRH4426
Body side lining

Rear upper side rain channel
Rear quarter panel lower rear
reinforcement
reinforcement
1
2
3
4
5
6
PRH4427
44-19
0.7
1
0.8
1.5
1
1.2
1.2
1
1

Body side lining
44
1
CAG11548-2R1
654f1-14306
or
CAS13024-1R6
CAG11548-2R1
44-20

Body side lining
C1
44
E
1
CAA11536-2R3
CAR11700-1R1
F
1
CAQ11697R5a
CAT13326-1R7
44-21

Body side lining
44
H
7
CAA11536-3R2
654f2-14307
I
or
G
8
CAX13938R5
CAA11536R6
CAA11537R2
44-22

Body side lining
M
5
44
7
6
CAA11536-1R1a
CAJ11551-2R7
L
1
CAS13024-3R6
44-23

Body side lining
SPECIAL FEATURES OF VERSION C
44
CAA11536-2R6
654f3-14308
1
or
2
9
N
1
CAW13602R7
CAY14292-4R1
44-24

Body side lining
44
CAA11536-2R6
654f5-14310
or
or
CAP11696-4R5
or
44-25

Body side lining
654f4-14309
S
1
CAS13033R6
44-26
44

Rear end panel
INTRODUCTION
44 G

for a rear impact.
1
2
3
4
5
6

concerned.
Rear end panel

Rear floor
Rear end panel lining
Absorber mounting
Rear side member
Lights mounting


DEPARTMENT

- rear end panel lining,
- rear end panel striker plate reinforcement,
- bumper support corner plate,
- absorber mounting,
- bumper mounting support corner plate
PRH4430
44-27
1
0.7
0.7
1.2
1.2
1

Rear end panel
44 G
B
3
CAG11548-8R5
654g1-14311
2
2
CAT13324-3R6
CAT13319-1R2
D
1
CAS13024-2R2
44-28

Rear end panel
44 G
6
1
CAA11536-1R4
CAS13029-2R1
H
1
CAA11538-1R8
CAA11538R3
44-29

INTRODUCTION

operation :
-
to the rear end panel for a rear impact, for

this operation, the rain channel on the Parts
Department part will have to be removed,
to the wing panel for a rear side impact.
44 H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This operation is carried out partially (see method

below).
For the complementary operation to the rear end
panel, the lower rear side rain channel will have
to be removed according to (X) below, keeping
the lower parcel shelf mounting.
11
Lights mounting
Rear lower side rain channel
Parcel shelf lower mounting
Rear wing panel
Wheel arch
Absorber mounting
Rear bumper mounting side
reinforcement
Rear quarter panel lining
Rear floor
Rear quarter panel lower rear
reinforcement
Rear upper side rain channel
1
0.7
1
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
0.7
0.7
1.2
1
X
2

DEPARTMENT

- rear lower side rain channel,
- parcel shelf lower mounting,
- balancing reinforcement (ball joint mounting
support),
- balancing ball joint.
CAA11536-3R3
PRH4431
44-30

44 H
4
2
1
CAS13024-1R7
654h1-14312
5
2
3
1
CAA11538-1R2
CAS13025R7
D
5
8
1
CAS13025-1R8
44-31

44 H
G
4
7
1
CAA11536-3R6
CAE11546-2R7
CAT13328-1R7
CAA11538-1R3
44-32

44 H
11
2
10
8
CAY14294R7
654h2-14313
K
11
11
10
CAA11537-1R4
CAJ11551-5R6
44-33
TOP OF BODY
Roof
45 A
INTRODUCTION
The replacement of this part is a basic operation.

concerned.

DEPARTMENT

- soundproofing,
- earthing washer.
PRH4517
Roof
Front pillar
Rear wing panel
Rear quarter panel upper rear
reinforcement
9 Body side lining
11 Upper side rain channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
45-1
0.7
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.8
1
1.2
0.7
1
0.7
TOP OF BODY
Roof
45 A
C
1
4
3
655a4-14253
CAT13326-1R5
A
1
D
5
2
1
CAQ11697R7
CAA11538R8
B
1
2
3
CAT13326-1R5
45-2
TOP OF BODY
Roof
45 A
F
6
CAA11538R8
655a3-14248
E
6
7
CAF11547-2R7
45-3
TOP OF BODY
Roof
45 A
H
1
9
CAF11547-2R5
655a1-14252
G
1
8
CAF11547-2R5
45-4
TOP OF BODY
Roof
45 A
10
CAS13024R5
655a2-14250
K
10
CAN11689R1a
11
CAS13024-1R1
45-5
TOP OF BODY
Roof
VERSION B
45 A
SUNROOF VERSION
When replacing the body or roof of a vehicle fitted with a sunroof, the roof will have to be cut to
the following dimensions.
655a5-14258
655a6-14249
NOTE : a radius of 73 mm on the four corners
must be respected.
8
CAS13024-1R5
45-6
TOP OF BODY
45
INTRODUCTION

operation to the roof.
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part assembled with roof cross member closure

panel.
655b1-14254
A
2
PRH4518
CAA11536-2R2

1.2
1.2
B
2
CAO11694R4
45-7
TOP OF BODY
Roof centre cross member
45
INTRODUCTION

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
655c1-14256
Part assembled with an acoustic weight.
CAS13028R4
PRH4519

2 Body side lining
1.2
0.7
1
45-8
TOP OF BODY
Roof rear cross member
45 D
INTRODUCTION

concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part only.
655d1-14246
PRH4520
CAA11536R1

reinforcement
1.2
CAA11536-1R5
45-9
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
INTRODUCTION
45
VERSION C

This operation is carried or partially (see cut and
method for versions B and C below).
concerned.

DEPARTMENT
Part only.
VERSION B
PRH4522
or
1 Top of body
3 Windscreen aperture pillar
upper reinforcement
5 Body side lining
6 Body side upper stretcher
(version C)
7 Centre pillar
8 Seat belt mounting centre pillar
upper reinforcement
reinforcement
reinforcement
PRH4521
or
45-10
1.2
1.2
1
1
0.7
1
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
45
CAB11539-1R5
655e1-14255
C
or
A
1
CAQ11697R3
CAS13033R1
CAB11539-1R5
45-11
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
45
1
2
CAA11536R1
CAB11539R4
2
1
1
3
2
CAE11546-2R3
CAB11539R7
G
2
3
1
CAE11546-2R8
45-12
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
45
VERSION C
5
4
CAN11690R5
L
655e2-14247
or
CAQ11697R2
1
2
M
4
CAB11539R4
CAT13326-3R1
45-13
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
Q
1
45
5
8
1
CAA11536-1R8
CAY14261R7
CAA11538R2
CAI11550R8
P
5
6
1
CAE11546-2R8
CAS13033R4
45-14
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
45
VERSION C
10
CAB11539R1
655e3-14251
or
V
5
9
1
CAE11546-2R8
CAS13033R1
45-15
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
45
VERSION B
3
1
CAB11539R7
655e4-14257
or
Y
5
W
1
1
2
CAE11546-8R8
CAB11539R4
Z
5
4
CAN11690R5
45-16
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
AA
45
AD
1
5
4
CAE11546-8R2
CAV13466R7
AE
AB
CAS13033R8
CAO11694-1R1a
AF
AC
CAE11546-2R1
CAA11538R4
45-17
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
AG
45
VERSION B
5
1
CAB11539R7
655e5-14259
or
AH
5
CAE11546-8R3
45-18
TOP OF BODY
Top of body
AI
45
AK
5
5
1
CAE11546-8R8
CAB11539R7
AJ
AL
1
5
CAB11539R4
CAS13033R2
45-19

47 A
PRH4704
REMOVAL
13021R
13021R1
Fit the door support tool (see section 50B).
Remove the door hinge pins using tool Car. 1415

(see section 50B).
Disconnect the door wiring by pushing the clip upwards.
NOTE : tool Car. 1415 has to be modified (see fol-
lowing page).
Remove the bolt on the door support bar (A).
47-1

MODIFYING THE TOOL FOR REMOVING THE
HINGE PINS
47 A
REFITTING AND ADJUSTING
14244R
PRH5001
Using a flat file and a round file, file the end of

the tool blade and the bottom of the neck to
obtain the precise dimensions indicated on the
diagram below.
Refitting is the opposite of removal. Refer to the

section "Opening clearances" to make adjustments.
NOTE : when changing the door or when
Following this modification, it is also possible to

remove the pins on the X65 (B) and the pins on
changing the body but replacing original opening

elements, the correct type of after sales bolted
hinges will have to be used which ensure the
correct height adjustment of the door.
the MEGANE (C).
Use the Parts Department kit, part number 77 01

468 331.
47-2

85700-2R
Adjusting the doors by tilting

Use special tool, WILMONDA, part number BHA
(Supplier Z. INTERNATIONAL).
This tool allows position "X" of the welded hinge
to be modified on the front pillar or the centre pillar.
85899R1
Flush fitting adjustment of the doors

Adjustment range : 3 mm.
47-3
47 A

Front door panel
INTRODUCTION

for a side impact.
This part can be replaced partially (see cut and
method below).
DEPARTMENT

- upper reinforcement of door trim,
- soundproofing pads,
- vertical stiffener (version B).
PRH4705
1 Door panel
2 Door box section
3 Door frame
0.7
0.7
0.8
47-4
47

Front door panel
47
B
2
CAT13318R1
1
PRH4707
2
or
C
1
2
1
CAS13033R8
CAT13318R2
1
2
47-5

Front door panel
47
D
1
CAB11539-1R2
PRH4708
or
CAT13318R1
CAS13033R8
47-6

Front door panel
G
1
2
1
CAT13318R2
1
2
H
1
2 3
1
CAT13318R2
1
2
3
47-7
47

Rear door panel
INTRODUCTION

for a side impact.
This part can be replaced partially (see cut and
method below).
DEPARTMENT

- soundproofing pads,
- stiffener.
PRH4706
1 Door panel
2 Door box section
3 Door frame
0.7
0.7
0.8
47-8
47

Rear door panel
47
B
1
1
2
CAT13318R2
1
PRH4709
2
or
C
1
1
2
1
CAS13033R8
CAB11539R3
47-9

Rear door panel
47
E
1
4
1
2 3
CAT13318R2
1
PRH4710
D
1
3
4
CAS13033R8
47-10

Tailgate
48 A
13972R1
PRH4805
Pull the spoiler upwards to unclip it (B).
REMOVAL
Disconnect the third stop light (C).

Remove the supply pipe from the rear screen jet
(D).
13973R
Remove the spoiler on the tailgate (mounting

bolt (A)).
14161R1
Remove the mounting bolt (E).

Unclip the trim using the unpicking pliers (clips
(F)).
Remove the tailgate trim.
48-1

Tailgate
48 A
REMOVING THE HINGES
14160R
Disconnect:
the supply connectors from the screen wiper
and tailgate lock motors,
- the supply terminals from the screen de-icing
network.
13991R2
Partially pull back the luggage compartment seal

in the area which comes into contact with the
upper section of the side parcel shelf (H).
Remove:
- the wiring loom from the tailgate box section
and the screen jet supply pipe,
Using a flat blade screwdriver, remove the

headlining retaining clips (I).
13972R2
the tailgate balancers and the mounting nuts

(G),
the tailgate .
48-2

Tailgate
48 A
REFITTING
PRM9402
13992R
IMPORTANT
Unclip and pull the trim to one side.
When refitting the hinges, do not forget to ensure the seal between them and the roof panel.
Fit an open wrench between the lining and the

headlining to hold the headlining to one side
while the hinges are being removed.
To do this, use the mastic sealing bead, part number 77 11 170 230 (refer to the Technical Note
396A).
Carefully pull the headlining to one side as indicated below to gain access to the hinge mounting
nuts (J) ( 13 mm hexagonal nuts).
To adjust the tailgate and the tailgate lock after

refitting, respect the opening clearances in section 40.
Adjustments must be made when the tailgate is
fully refitted.
48-3

Bonnet
48
PRH4806
48-4

Bonnet
REMOVAL
48
REFITTING
14072R1
13974R2
Disconnect the supply pipe from the nozzles fitted

on the bonnet.
To correctly adjust the bonnet, move the lock and

the bonnet struts to ensure the opening
clearances specified in section 40.
Remove:
- the mounting nuts (A) of the bonnet struts,
- the bonnet (two people).
48-5
Mechanisms and Accessories

GENERAL
SIDE OPENING ELEMENT MECHANISMS
NON-SIDE OPENING ELEMENT MECHANISMS
WINDOWS
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES
LOWER INTERIOR ACCESSORIES
UPPER INTERIOR ACCESSORIES
INTERIOR SAFETY ACCESSORIES

77 11 197 316
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH5002
PRH5003
Mechanisms and
Accessories
Contents
Page
50 GENERAL
A
B
Safety
Tooling
Page
55 EXTERIOR PROTECTION
50-1
50-2
A
B
C
D
E
Front bumper
Rear bumper
Radiator grille
Scuttle panel grilles
Side protection strips
51-1
51-4
51-6
51-8
56 EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES
55-1
55-3
55-5
55-7
55-9
51 SIDE OPENING ELEMENT

MECHANISMS
A
B
C
D
Front door lock and barrel

Rear door lock
Front door electric window
Rear door electric window
A
B
C
D
E
Rear spoiler
Exterior rear view mirror
Exterior rear view mirror glass
Exterior rear view mirror shell
Rain channel trim
56-1
56-2
56-3
56-4
56-5
52 NON-SIDE OPENING ELEMENT

MECHANISMS
A
B
C
D
E
Tailgate lock and barrel

Sunroof cassette
Tilt / slide sunroof motor
Moving panel
Sunroof cassette sun blinds
52-1
52-3
52-9
52-12
52-13
57 LOWER INTERIOR ACCESSORIES

A
B
C
D
54 WINDOWS
A
B
C
D
E
Windscreen
Rear screen
Front door window
Rear door window
Rear quarter panel window
Centre console
Handbrake lever trim
Storage tray under front passenger
seat
Dashboard
57-1
57-2
57-3
57-4
58 UPPER INTERIOR ACCESSORIES

54-1
54-5
54-9
54-10
54-13
Grab handle
58-1
59 INTERIOR SAFETY ACCESSORIES

A
B
C
Front door side impact absorber

Front seat belts
Rear seat belts
59-1
59-2
59-5
GENERAL
Safety
50 A
AIR BAG AND PRETENSIONERS
96310-1S
14036R
IMPORTANT : All operations on the Air bag and
Each time the steering wheel is removed, the steering wheel bolt (A) MUST be renewed.
Refer to sections 88 and 57-D.
pretensioner systems must be performed by qualified, appropriately trained personnel only.

The AIR BAG manual section 88 MUST be consulted.
IMPORTANT : Each time the steering wheel is re-
moved, the Air bag connector (B) MUST be disconnected.

The Air bag has a connector which short circuits
when it is disconnected to avoid any incorrect triggering.
IMPORTANT: when working on the vehicle, take
care not to cause impacts under the body, without

having removed the pretensioners fuse and having waited 5 minutes for the reserve capacity to
discharge.
Refer to section 88 - "Fuse allocation".
HEAT SHIELDS
AIR BAG LABEL KIT
These MUST be refitted, whether by mechanical

fitters or bodywork fitters.
When a windscreen is replaced the labels warning

that an air bag is fitted must be replaced.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
All recommended tightening torques MUST be

observed.
If the vehicle is fitted with a passenger air bag, systematically replace the adhesive warning label on
the side of the dashboard when it is removed.
PRODUCTS
A label kit containing all these labels is available

from the Parts Department under Part Number 77
01 205 442.
Read all instructions for using products with care

and observe the safety instructions by using the
appropriate equipment (gloves, mask etc.).
50-1
GENERAL
Tooling
13411S
13412S
DOOR SUPPORT TOOLING
This equipment is used to assist the mechanic during operations to remove or fit opening or sliding
doors.
It is especially designed for the opening elements
of utility vehicles and supports the weight of a
door with lining, thus removing the need for a second person to assist.
Renault approval number : 661 000.
50-2
50
GENERAL
Tooling
TOOLING FOR REMOVING / REFITTING BONDED
WINDOWS
50
MULTIPURPOSE GUN
Photo 14 342
To determine the recommended products, application equipment and application methods, refer
to Technical Note 371A "General method for bonding windows".
90989S
RAPID SINGLE POT BONDING KIT FOR WINDOWS
Photo 14 341
96826R1
Removal
Set the wipers in the park position.
Open the bonnet.
Remove the covers from the wiper arm nuts by sliding a blade between the cover and the arm to
unclip it by lifting.
50-3
GENERAL
Tooling
HOLLOW THREADING TOOL
50
DASHBOARD PROTECTOR
98858S
88400S3
Car. 1482 - Part Number : 00 00 148 200.

"EASY CUT" PNEUMATIC TOOL FOR REMOVING
BONDED WINDOWS (DCAV/SODICAM)
TOOL FOR REMOVING EXTERIOR REAR VIEW
MIRROR GLASS
12267S
Refer to the corresponding Technical Note for details of the method and recommendations for use
for this tool.
99331S
Car. 1363 - Part Number : 00 00 136 300.

This tool may also be used for removing the roof
trim strips and the exterior door weatherstrips.
50-4
GENERAL
Tooling
UNPICKING PLIERS
50
TOOL FOR REMOVING DOOR HINGE PINS
99799S
Using these pliers, clips may be easily removed

and interior lining clips such as those used for
door panels, soundproofing mats and mudguard
mountings may also be released.
12776S
Door window winder handles may also be removed (apply a piece of masking tape to the bearing
surface on the door lining first to avoid damaging
it during removal).
Car. 1415 - Part Number 00 00 141 500.
The bevelled, flat nose allows easy access, without

causing damage underneath clips. The clip heads
are not deformed and may therefore be re-used
on refitting (refer to the corresponding Technical
Note).
50-5
GENERAL
Tooling
MODIFICATION FOR TOOL FOR REMOVING DOOR
HINGE PINS
50
TOOL FOR ADJUSTING TILT ANGLE OF SIDE

OPENING ELEMENTS
14244R
85700-2S
Following this modification, it is now possible to

remove pins of type X65 (B) as well as pins of type
The tilt angle of the door may be adjusted using

the special WILMONDA tool, reference BHA.
MEGANE (C).
Supplier: Z. INTERNATIONAL
Using a flat file and a round file, file the end of
the nose of the tool as well as the bottom of the
groove to obtain the precise dimensions shown on
the diagram above.
This tool allows the X position to be modified for

the welded hinge on the front pillar or the centre
pillar.
50-6
GENERAL
Tooling
ADJUSTING DOOR CLEARANCE
50
MOUNTING NUMBER PLATES
85899R
Adjustment scope: 3 mm
98833S
For details on recommendations for fitting number plate mounting rivets, refer to Technical Note
418A.
PRH5001
When replacing opening elements or bodies,

when refitting, use the specific after sales mountings kits.
For details on the composition and part numbers
of these kits, refer to Technical Note 384A.
50-7

51 A
PRH5101
Remove:
- the front door lining (see section 72-A)
- the impact absorber (see section 59-A)
NOTE : the interior door opening control has a sheathed cable.
51-1

51 A
Release the exterior door opening control linkage

(C).
REMOVAL
Remove the interior control cable from the retaining clip (D).
Remove the anti-theft bracket (E).
13979R
Remove:
- the two mounting bolts (A) for the anti-theft
bracket,
- the three mounting bolts (B) for the lock on
the door box section.
14076R
Remove the retaining clip from the lock motor

supply connector and remove it.
Tilt (1) the lock towards the door panel to release
it from the control finger (F) of the barrel (see previous page).
Remove the lock (2) from the door box section.
14077R
51-2

14075R
Turn the retaining clip a quarter turn (3) and remove it from its location on the body of the barrel.
Remove the barrel from the door panel.
51-3
51 A

Rear door lock
51
PRH5102
Remove the rear door lining (see section 72-B).
Unclip at (1) and (2) the locks anti-theft cover.

Release :
- the return bracket (A) and the door locking
button linkage,
- the interior door opening control linkage (B).
Remove the three mounting bolts (C) for the lock
on the door.
14242R
51-4

Rear door lock
14241R
Release the exterior opening control linkage (D)

on the door handle.
Remove the retaining clip from the motor supply
connector and remove it.
Release the lock towards the front of the door
and remove it via the door box section opening.
51-5
51

51
PRH5103
REMOVAL
Remove the front door lining (see section 72-A).
14188R1
14187R
Remove the front door window and the interior

weatherstrip (see section 54-C).
Remove:
- the two guide rail mounting bolts (A),
- the three motor mounting bolts (B).
51-6

14186R
IMPORTANT: The mounting points for the manual
window winder (C) are not the same as the mounting points (B) for the electric window system with
motorised drive (see previous page).
14185S
Remove the electric window motor supply

connector if necessary.
Remove the window winder through the door
box section opening.
51-7
51

51 D
PRH5104
REMOVAL
Remove the rear door lining (see section 72-B).
Remove the two mounting bolts (A) for the window on the electric window guide carriage.
Lower the window to the bottom of the door box
section.
Remove:
- the two mounting bolts (B) for the guide rail,
- the mounting bolts (C) for the manual or motorised window winder command.
14240R
51-8

14234S
Remove the electric window motor supply

connector if necessary.
Remove the window winder through the door
box section opening.
REFITTING
When refitting the mounting bolts (A) (see previous page), before tightening them, return the
window to the fully closed position.
Tighten the bolts by passing a ring spanner
through the box section openings provided for
this purpose.
The window is then correctly positioned in relation to the guide carriage.
51-9
51 D

52 A
PRH5201
Remove:
- the tailgate trim,
- the mounting bolt (A).
REMOVAL
Using unpicking pliers, unclip the lining (B).

Remove it.
14161R
52-1

52 A
REMOVING THE LOCK MOTOR
14160R1
Remove:
- the lock control linkage (B),
- the two mounting bolts (C).
14163R
Remove the mounting bolt (G).
Unclip the barrel / motor assembly (D).

REFITTING
Disconnect the motor supply connector.

Tilt the barrel / motor assembly to release the pin
(E) from the tailgate lining.
14162R
Push the barrel to release the motor shaft from

the finger (H).
14159R
IMPORTANT : before refitting the opening han-
dle, check that the seal in contact with the tailgate paintwork is clean.
Using a small flat blade screwdriver, unclip the

opening handle (F).
52-2

Sunroof cassette
52
PRH5202
INTRODUCTION
This sunroof is of the tilt and slide type.

The manual (1) and electric (2) sunroof cassettes are identical.
This cassette has sun blinds, the removal of which is described in section 52-E.
NOTE : the special headlining for the sunroof is bonded at the rear to the roof panel. It no longer has velcro
retaining strips.
52-3

Sunroof cassette
52
REMOVAL
14064S
13779S
REMOVING THE ROOF CONSOLE
Remove the courtesy light bulb by inserting a

small screwdriver as shown in the diagram above.
Remove:
- the door seals,
- the luggage compartment seal,
- the grab handles,(see section 58-A),
- the front sun visors,
- the centre pillar linings (see sections 71-C and
71-E),
- the windscreen pillar linings (see section 71A).
The console is secured to the headlining by four

clips (B) and two brackets (A).
Fold down the rear seatbacks to make the following operations easier.
Note the position of the sunroof on the roof using
adhesive tape to ensure it is correctly centred
when the cassette is refitted.
IMPORTANT : if there is a fault, the moving panel

may be operated manually (see section 52-C).
To move the panel, remove the roof console and

move the sunroof using a 4mm hexagonal spanner.
14065R1
52-4

Sunroof cassette
52
Remove the interior finishing strip (D).

Cut the bead (E) using window mastic bead cutting equipment (wire, pulling handle, picking
tool).
Separate the two upper parts of the rear shelf,
slide the headlining backwards and remove it
through the tailgate.
REMOVING THE ROOF CASSETTE
Remove the mounting bolt (F).

Unclip (G) the roof console mounting and remove
it.
13991R1
Remove the motor supply connector.

REMOVING THE HEADLINING
Partially remove the luggage compartment seal

where it touches the upper part of the side shelf.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, remove the sun visor retaining clips and the retaining clip for the
headlining (C).
14333R
PRH5203
52-5

Sunroof cassette
52
NOTE : the motor support plate does not need to
be removed to remove the sunroof cassette from

its location on the roof panel.
14332R
Remove the mounting bolts (H) for the counter

frame and the mounting bolts (I) for the motor
support.
Remove the sunroof cassette water drain pipes.
14335R
After lifting the rear of the cassette (1), release

the sunroof cassette / drive motor assembly (2).
14334R
To remove the sunroof cassette, use the following

procedure:
lift the sunroof cassette (1) at the rear and release
the counter frame (2) and (3) from its position under the motor support plate (J).
52-6

Sunroof cassette
52
REFITTING
99711R1
Refit the interior finishing strip (D) to the cassette

(before refitting the cassette) inserting a piece of
string into the groove (A) beforehand, all along
the length of the seal.
PRH5204
IMPORTANT : for all operations of removal refitting, the foam seal between the sunroof
cassette and the roof panel must be renewed.
Also clean the sealing face of the roof panel using
surface cleaner.
To refit the sunroof cassette, refitting is the

reverse of removal.
Sunroof cassette mounting bolt
0.4
52-7

Sunroof cassette
REFITTING THE HEADLINING
If necessary, clean back the remainder of the bead

of mastic on the roof panel.
Position the headlining (E) offering it up after
bringing it into the vehicle through the tailgate
(two people required).
Slide the headlining to the front of the vehicle
and position it using the retaining clips for the
front sun visors.
Flatten out the rear of the headlining and refit
the retaining clips (C).
PRH5203
NOTE : for bonding the headlining, use an addi-
tional cartridge of single pot rapid adhesive, Part

Number : 77 11 171 314.
Now refit the other linings.
IMPORTANT : remember to reconnect the water
drain pipes.
52-8
52

52
REMOVAL
PRH5205
In all cases where the motor is removed, check or

adjust the zero point as described below.
14333R1
REMOVING THE MOTOR, SLIDING PANEL CLOSED
One of two cases may arise (motor nonoperational) :

- sunroof closed,
or
- sunroof open.

Remove:
- the front sun visors and retaining clips,
- the windscreen pillar linings (see section 71A),
- the roof console (see section 52-B).
Remove the mounting bolt (A).
Unclip (B) the roof console mounting and remove
it by moving the front of the headlining slightly
to one side, taking care not to fold it.
Disconnect the motor supply connector (C).
52-9

52
97413S
14332R1
Remove the three motor mounting bolts (D) and

disconnect the relay (E).
REMOVING THE MOTOR, SLIDING PANEL OPEN
Remove the motor from the metal plate (F) mounted on the sunroof cassette.
Carry out the same trim removal operations as before.

Close the sunroof manually using a 4 mm
hexagonal spanner to bring the moving panel to
the stop without forcing it.
Remove the motor as described previously.
IMPORTANT : each time the motor is removed the

motor / moving panel drive bar zero point must
be checked (see below) to ensure the correct operation of the motor over its complete opening /
closing cycle.
52-10

52
Remove the motor mounting bolts to position the

cam (I) as shown below.
Ensure the cam is in position (1) in relation to
switch (J).
Use a 4 mm hexagonal spanner to adjust this position.
Refit the motor and operate the moving panel
through a complete opening / closing cycle.
14339R1
ADJUSTING THE ZERO POINT
Adjusting the zero point for the drive bars

Remove the moving panel (see section 52-D).
14455R1
Before positioning the motor to the correct "zero

point" position , manually move the sunroof motor using a 4mm hexagonal spanner to move the
carriages (G) to the level of the indexing holes at
(1) on the rail.
Fit a 3 mm diameter drill into the aligned holes (1)
in the two parts (G) and (H) to immobilise the
drive bar "zero point" position.
Now adjust the "zero point" of the motor.
52-11

Moving panel
52 D
REMOVAL
PRH5206
14339R
The drive bars have:

- two mounting bolts(A), (adjustment in the X
dimension),
- two fixed pins (B) for positioning the moving
panel in the Z dimension,
- two guide pads (C).
The guide pads (C) must be positioned as shown in
the diagram above.
The moving panel may only be adjusted in the X
dimension.
14337R
Ensure the moving panel is centred in relation to

the seal (D) before tightening the mounting bolts
(A).
To remove the moving panel, it must be opened

to reach the mounting bolts (A).
If the roof is not correctly positioned in the Z dimension, check the "zero point" of the drive motor (see section 52-C) is correctly adjusted.
Remove these bolts and release the front (1) of

the moving panel from the two drive bars (B), (see
diagram below).
Also ensure the seal (D) and its sealing face on the
moving panel are clean.
Now pull the panel forwards (2) to release the

pads (C) from the guide rails.
If there is water ingress, check the condition of

the seal and replace it if necessary.
Remove the moving panel.
To do this, remove the moving panel as described

above and remove the seal from its location on
the sunroof cassette.
Ensure the new seal is correctly clipped into position along its complete length into the groove on
the cassette.
Test the sunroof sealing.
52-12

52
To do this, the sunroof cassette must be removed

using the method described in section 52B.
REMOVAL
To replace the pads or the handle (mounting bolt

(B)), proceed in the same manner, without removing the sunroof cassette beforehand.
PRH5207
14338R
Remove the guide pads (A) from the guide rails on

the sunroof cassette as shown in the diagram
above.
14335S
The blinds are fitted into a metal support mounted to the sunroof cassette.
If the blinds do not roll up correctly or during any
replacement operation after the blinds have been
damaged, the blinds / metal support assembly
must be renewed.
Only the handle (B) and the side pads (A) are available separately from the Parts Department.
52-13

14336R
Remove the mounting bolts (C).

Remove the two mounting rivets (D).
Remove the blinds / metal support assembly.
When replacing the sunroof cassette, remove the

blinds / metal support assembly taking care to
avoid removing the blinds from their location on
the metal support, otherwise the rewinding system will no longer operate correctly.
REFITTING
NOTE : the mounting rivets for the metal support
are supplied with the replacement kit from the

Parts Department.
52-14
52
WINDOWS
Windscreen
54 A
REMOVAL
13988S
PRH5402
the upper trim and its mounting.
Remove it using a small flat blade screwdriver.
88400S3
Fit the dashboard protector, Car. 1482.
13989R
Remove:
- the two windscreen wiper arms using tool El.
1294-01,
- the two half scuttle panel grilles (see section
55-D),
- the retaining shims (A),
- the side trims (using unpicking pliers),
54-1
WINDOWS
Windscreen
CUTTING THE BONDED SEAL
54 A
BONDING AND FITTING THE WINDSCREEN
90989S
Preparation of the bonding areas is detailed in

the general method for bonding windows, found
in Technical Note n 371A.
99536S
Apply a strip of masking tape around the edge of

the windscreen to protect the paintwork where
the wire will pass.
Fit:
- the new upper trim and its mounting, correctly fitted, on the windscreen,
- the lower retaining shims.
Fit the cutting wire using the threading tool (see

section 50-B).
Just after applying the mastic to the windscreen,

offer it up above its location in the windscreen
aperture and centre it by setting the outer trim
against the upper edge (at the level of the roof
panel).
Fit the picking tool and the pulling handle.

The pneumatic window cutting tool may also be
used (see section 50-B).
Lay the windscreen down into position ensuring

that the lower section is in contact with the retaining shims.
Refer to the corresponding technical note for information on the tool and how to use it correctly.
Refit the side trims and the other parts removed

beforehand.
54-2
WINDOWS
Windscreen
54 A
REFITTING THE WIPER ARMS
PRH5408
Ensure the motor is in the park position before fitting the wiper arms.
Clean the splines on the wiper arm pins using a
wire brush.
Refit the wiper arms and refit new nuts, torque
tightened to 18 N.m (15 %) using a torque
wrench.
54-3
WINDOWS
Windscreen
54 A
KIT OF AIR BAG LABELS
PRH5407
A vehicle fitted with an air bag on the drivers side is identified by a label located in the lower corner of the
windscreen on the drivers side.
When a passenger air bag is fitted, a second label is located in the lower corner of the windscreen on the passenger side and the drivers side.
This kit of labels is available under Part Number 77 01 205 442.
54-4
WINDOWS
Rear screen
54
REMOVAL
PRH5403
13990S
Remove the side trims.
14161R
Remove the wiper arm using tool El. 1294-01.

Tailgate lining:
- remove the mounting bolt (A),
- using unpicking pliers, remove the lining at
(B),
- remove the lining.
14044-1S
Using unpicking pliers, unclip the cover for the wiper motor shaft mounting nut, taking care to insert a cloth between the glass and the base of the
pliers.
54-5
WINDOWS
Rear screen
CUTTING THE BONDED SEAL
54
BONDING AND FITTING THE WINDOW
90989S

99536S

the screen to protect the paintwork where the
wire will pass.
Fit the new side trims to the tailgate.

NOTE : these trims contain adjusting shims which
ensure the window is flush with the rear wing panels.

Replace the blanking covers fitted under the
screen which will have been damaged during the
cutting operation (these blanking covers are supplied with the replacement screen kit from the
Parts Department).

section 50-B).
Refer to the corresponding technical note for information on the tool and how to use it correctly.
54-6
WINDOWS
Rear screen
14160R
Just after applying the mastic to the screen, offer

it up above its location in the tailgate aperture
and centre it by setting pin (C) in its position on
the edge of the tailgate panel.
Lay the screen down into position ensuring that
the sides sit correctly on the adjusting shims.
Refit the wiper shaft mounting nut cover and the
other parts removed beforehand.
54-7
54
WINDOWS
Rear screen
54
REFITTING THE WIPER ARM
PRH5401
Ensure the motor is in the park position before fitting the wiper arm.
Clean the splines on the wiper arm pin using a
wire brush.
13551R
Refit the wiper arm and position it on the screen

using the reference mark (C) on the coloured area.
Refit a new nut, torque tightened to 10 N.m (20
%) using a torque wrench.
54-8
WINDOWS
Front door window
54
REMOVAL
98954R
Lower the window to reach the window winder

guide carriage.
PRH5404
Remove the front door lining (see 72A),
Remove the mounting fork (A) and release the

window from the carriage shaft (1) (see diagram
below).
14189S
Remove the interior weatherstrip.
14188R1
Lay the window down in the bottom of the box

section of the door and release the window pad
from the window guide.
In this position only (2), remove the window from
the door box section (3) and (4).
REFITTING
54-9
WINDOWS
Rear door window
54 D
REMOVAL
14238S
PRH5405
the exterior weatherstrip.
Remove:
- the rear door lining (see section 72-B),
14239S
14240R1
the interior weatherstrip,
3/4 lower the window .

Remove the two mounting bolts (A).
Lower the window to the bottom of the door box
section (1) and (2).
54-10
WINDOWS
Rear door window
54 D
14237S
Release the window guide.

14235S
Remove the window from the door box section in

the same manner as shown on the diagram above.
14236R
Remove:
- the upper mounting bolt (B) from the fixed
pillar,
- the lower mounting nut (C) from the fixed pillar.
Tilt the pillar forwards (1) and release the welded
stud (2).
Turn the pillar a quarter turn (3), so it may be removed from the box section (4).
54-11
WINDOWS
Rear door window
54 D
REFITTING
When refitting the mounting bolts (A) (see previous page), before tightening them, return the
window to the fully closed position.
Tighten the bolts by passing a pipe wrench
through the openings in the box section, which
are designed for this purpose.
The window is then correctly positioned in relation to the guide carriage.
To refit the window guide, follow the method
described in section 66-C.
Take care to ensure the fixed pillar is correctly fitted at the fixed window frame and ensure that
the window guide lip is correctly positioned covering the the fixed pillar on the sliding window
side.
FITTING THE BOTTOM OF THE WINDOW
14158R
Observe dimension (X) of 18 mm to ensure the

bottom of the window is correctly fitted.
54-12
WINDOWS
REMOVAL
54
REPLACING THE WINDOW - CUTTING THE

BONDED SEAL

the screen to protect the paintwork where the
wire will pass.
section 50-B).
PRH5406
IMPORTANT: the rear quarter panel window in-
cludes a trim strip around its edge. This strip is not

available separately from the Parts Department.
If the the window is to be removed and refitted,
follow the method on the following page to avoid
damaging the seal when the window is removed.
Remove:
- the centre pillar lining (see section 71-E),
- the centre pillar and rear quarter panel lower
lining (see section 71-D),
- the rear shelf (see section 74-A).
14138-1R
The wire may only be inserted in corner (A) of the

window. The centre pillar forms a shoulder (B)
which prevents the wire from being fitted elsewhere in this area.

Cut the bead of adhesive.
Refer to Technical Note 414A for information on
the tool and how to use it correctly.
14423-1R
54-13
WINDOWS
54
Using a strip of masking tape with a 10 mm rigid

bar, protect the flexible lip of the trim around the
edge of the glass.
14135-1R
REMOVING - REFITTING THE WINDOW
The window has a trim strip (C) which is part of

the moulding (D) of the window (E).
12302R2
Bead of adhesive (F).

NOTE : insert the rigid plastic bar (H) holding the
Interior lining (G).
masking tape between the flexible lip (C) and

painted metal of the wing panel (I).
This lining has a visible lip (C) around the edge of

the window.
This ensures that the lip is moved back and held

apart (1) when the cutting wire passes by.
To preserve this trim, when the cutting wire

passes by, the following precautions must be taken:
For details on fitting this type of tape, refer to

Technical Note n 419A.
12301-2S
54-14
WINDOWS
14423S
Cut the adhesive bead by pulling the handle (on

the outside) parallel to the edge of the glass to limit damage to the moulding.
54-15
54
WINDOWS
14135-1
54
11928-1G1
SPECIFIC CUTTING OF THE ADHESIVE BEAD USING THE PNEUMATIC WINDOW

REMOVAL TOOL
Reminder: to remove moulded windows such as this rear quarter panel window (E), use a special blade (J) WK24ZR which does not damage the moulding
(C) of the window.
The sharp teeth on the blade are aligned towards the flange and the other
side is slightly rounded to limit damage to the moulding.
The straight guide (K), to be fitted to the tool must rest on the glass to position the blade as close as possible to the flange during he operation to cut the
adhesive bead.
NOTE :the end of the guide (K) must be covered with three pieces of velcro
on each side of the guide (supplied in the kit) to ensure the blade is correctly
positioned.
54-16
WINDOWS
BONDING AND FITTING THE REAR QUARTER
PANEL WINDOW
54
90989S

14138R1
Just after applying the adhesive mastic to the window, offer it up above its location in the wing panel and centre it in relation to the following flush
fitting information.
FLUSH FITTING
14136R
13491-1R
54-17
WINDOWS
14135R1
54-18
54
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Front bumper
55 A
PRH5501
REMOVAL
13983R
13985R
Remove:
- the mudguard clips (A),
- the mounting bolt (B).
Remove:
- the three mounting bolts of the shield (C),
- the lower mounting bolt (D) from the mudguard and the retaining clip (D).
Remove the mudguard from its location in the
wheel arch.
55-1
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Front bumper
55 A
REFITTING
13984R
Remove:
- the two side mounting bolts (E).
13995R
Before refitting the bumper, ensure the centring

device (G) is present which ensures the correct positioning of the bumper in relation to the nose of
the vehicle.
13996R1
the radiator grille (see section 55-C),

the two mounting bolts (F).
Disconnect the feed connector for the fog lights.

Remove the bumper from its location on the vehicle.
55-2
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Rear bumper
55
PRH5502
REMOVAL
13986R
13987R
Remove the mounting nut and bolt from the

mudguard (A).
Remove:
- the two side mounting bolts (B),
- the lower mounting bolts (C).
Remove the mudguard.
55-3
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Rear bumper
55
13982R
13561S
Using a flat blade screwdriver, unclip the number

plate light.
Remove the four upper mounting bolts (D) from

the bumper and remove it.
13560S
Disconnect the light and remove it.
55-4
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Radiator grille
55
PRH5505
REMOVAL
13975R
13976S
Remove the mounting bolts (A).
Unclip the radiator grille from its location on the

front wing.
55-5
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
Radiator grille
REFITTING
13974R1
NOTE : the positioning of the radiator grille in re-
lation to the upper cross member for the front panel is ensured by the centring device (B).
55-6
55
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
55 D
PRH5506
REMOVING THE LEFT HAND HALF GRILLE
Removing the rivets (1) :

Using a 10 or 20 Torx screwdriver, press the pin in
the centre of the rivet and lower it by a maximum
of 5 mm.
Remove the rivet from the scuttle panel grille.
Unclip the scuttle panel grille.(2).
Release:
- the retaining clips for the grille under the
windscreen aperture cross member (3),
- the grille positioning pin in the corner of the
wing (4).
13971R1
55-7
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
REMOVING THE RIGHT HAND GRILLE
55 D
REMOVING AND REFITTING THE RETAINING CLIPS
13970R
13969R
To remove the right hand half grille, the left hand

half grille must be removed beforehand.
Lift the anti-rotation clip (1) for the fastening clip

and turn it (2) a quarter turn.
Follow the removal operations described above

for the left hand grille.
Remove it from the grille.

REFITTING
NOTE : when refitting each scuttle panel grille,
the rivet pin (1) must be correctly fitted before

clipping the grille into position (see diagram opposite).
To do this, push the rivet pin upwards by more
than 5 mm.
Fit the rivet and push the pin until it is level with
the head of the rivet.
In this position the grille is clipped onto the cross
member.
55-8
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
55
13978R
PRH5503
Move the end of the strip to one side (1) to release

the pin (B).
REMOVING THE FRONT DOOR STRIP
Slide the strip backwards (2) to release the clips

(C).
To remove the retaining clips (C), turn each clip a
quarter turn and remove them from their location in the door panel.
13979R1
Removing the blanking cover (A) and the mounting bolt for the strip on the door panel.
55-9
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
55
PRH5504
REMOVING THE REAR DOOR STRIP

13977R
Move the end of the strip to one side (1) to release

the pin (B).
Slide the strip forwards (2) to release the clips (C).
To remove the retaining clips (C), turn each clip a
quarter turn and remove them from their location in the door panel.
13980R
Remove the blanking cover (A) and the mounting

bolt for the strip on the door panel.
55-10
3 DOOR
EXTERIOR PROTECTION
REMOVING THE WING PANEL STRIP
(3 DOOR)
14329R
Using a wooden or teflon block, slide the protective strip (1) backwards to release it.
NOTE : clip (D) ensures the strip is correctly posi-
tion in the X dimension. This clip must be renewed

before the strip is refitted.
55-11
55
Rear spoiler
56 A
PRH5601
13972R1
Pull the spoiler upwards to unclip it (B).
REMOVAL
Disconnect the third stop light (C).

Remove the supply pipe for the rear screen
washer jet (D).
13973R
Remove the bolts (A) mounting the spoiler on the

tailgate.
56-1
Exterior rear view mirror
56
PRH5602
REMOVAL
14195R
the three mounting bolts (B).
If necessary, disconnect the rear view mirror feed

connector.
14196R
Remove:
- the access cover for the rear view mirror feed
connector (1) or the manual control mounting,
- the blanking cover (A),
14157R
Lift the rear view mirror (1) and release the retaining brackets from the door panel (2).
56-2
Exterior rear view mirror glass
56
PRH5603
REMOVAL
14165S
Disconnect the feed terminals of the heated mirror wiring if necessary.

REFITTING
Position the glass and press on it to clip it to the

base of the rear view mirror.
14166R
Insert tool Car. 1363, and taking the weight on

the edge of the rear view mirror plastic shell, push
as shown above.
56-3
Exterior rear view mirror shell
56 D
PRH5604
REMOVAL
14164R
NOTE : to reach the temperature sensor (B), the
plastic shell must be removed from the base of the

rear view mirror.
14165R
Remove the rear view mirror glass (see section 56C).

Using a flat blade screwdriver, lift the retaining
brackets of the base to release the clips (A) on the
shell.
Remove the shell.
56-4
Rain channel trim
56
REFITTING
To replace any clips (A) broken when the trim was

removed, use the kit of clips Part Number : 77 03
077 438.
Refit the clips on the welded KSM type studs in
the position described opposite.
To correctly refit the trim, set the rear end (B)
against the stop on the roof panel.
Press the trim down and clip it into position along
its length.
PRH5605
REMOVAL
14167R
Insert tool Car. 1363, taking the weight on the

roof panel and push as shown in the diagram
above to release the trim along its length.
The retaining clips (A) remain in the rain channel.
56-5

Centre console
57 A
PRH5701
13997R
REMOVAL
Pull and unclip the front of the console (C).

Release it from its location under the dashboard
(1).
Disconnect the feed connectors for the cigar
lighter, the hazard warning lights control and the
central door locking switch.
Release the console from around the gear lever
(2).
13999R
Unclip the gear lever gaiter and remove the ashtray from its location in the console.
Remove the two mounting bolts (A).
57-1

Handbrake lever trim
PRH5702
REMOVAL
13998R
Move the two front seats as far forward as possible.

Remove the two bolts (A).
Push the trim forward to release it from the base
of the lever.
57-2
57

Storage tray under front passenger seat
REMOVAL
14073R1
Move the seat as far forward as possible to reach

the mounting bolts (A) for the storage tray.
Move the seat as far back as possible to reach the
mounting bolts (B) for the storage tray.
Remove the storage tray.
57-3
57

Dashboard
57 D
PRH5703
To remove the dashboard, the steering column must be removed beforehand.

To do this, follow the method described below.
57-4

Dashboard
57 D
Remove:
- the steering wheel bolt,
- the steering wheel after setting the wheels
straight,
- the half cowlings (three bolts).
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: it is forbidden to handle pyrotechnic
systems (air bag and pretensioners) near to a

source of heat or a flame - they may be triggered.
Disconnect the control stalks (wipers and lights)

and the rotary switch connector (vehicles fitted
with an air bag).
IMPORTANT : all operations on the air bag and
pretensioner systems must be carried out by

qualified staff having received the appropriate
training.
IMPORTANT : whenever the steering wheel is re-
moved, the air bag connector (D) must be disconnected. The air bag has a connector which
short circuits when it is disconnected to prevent
incorrect triggering.

Vehicles fitted with an air bag: remove the drivers air bag cushion by the two Torx bolts (T30)
(tightening torque : 0.5 daN.m) located behind
the steering wheel and disconnect the connector
(D).
Vehicles without an air bag: remove the central
steering wheel cover (clipped).
14036R1
57-5

Dashboard
57 D
SPECIAL NOTES FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH AN

AIR BAG
Before removing the assembly it is vital to note

the position of the rotary switch:
- by ensuring that the wheels are straight on
removal so that the strip may be positioned in
the centre,
- by checking that the reference mark "0" on
the rotary switch is correctly positioned opposite the fixed marker (E).
VALEO ASSEMBLY
14039R
Slacken bolt (C) then tap the screwdriver sharply

to release the cone and release the assembly from
the steering column.
14057R
LUCAS ASSEMBLY
14056R
57-6

Dashboard
14094R
57 D
14091R2
Remove the visor; to do this:

- first remove the windscreen pillar linings; to
do this, release the trim far enough so that the
upper clip may be pressed, then move the pillar trim (1) to one side and release it from the
visor (2),
the three bolts at the top (near the windscreen) and remove the visor completely as
shown in the diagrams.
14041S
Remove the immobiliser antenna ring from the

ignition switch.
14090R1
the two side bolts (A),

the two bolts under the instrument panel (B),
57-7

Dashboard
57 D
14037R
14093R
Remove the instrument panel (four bolts) and disconnect the connectors.
In the engine compartment, remove:

- the air inlet sleeve,
- the mounting nuts for the expansion bottle
and move it so the steering column universal
joint may be reached.
Remove the universal joint eccentric bolt.
Remove the six bolts mounting the steering column and pull on the bulkhead gaiter.
Remove the steering column.
14040S
Disconnect the connector for the ignition switch.
57-8

Dashboard
57 D
REMOVING THE DASHBOARD
14092R
REMOVING THE PASSENGER AIR BAG CUSHION
14059S
(depending on equipment)
Remove:
- the fuse box access cover.
Disconnect connector (I) and remove the cushion

mounting bolts (J).
14093R1
the lower mounting bolts (G),

the mounting bolts (H).
57-9

Dashboard
14150R1
57 D
14148R1
Remove the two mounting bolts (K) for the heating control unit and unclip it from its location in
the dashboard.
Gently lift the dashboard to release the retaining

pins at the mounting bolts (L), (see opposite).
Move the dashboard out on the right hand side
(1).
Remove:
- the three upper mounting bolts (L) of the
dashboard,
- the radio.
Disconnect the central display feed connector (if
fitted).
14168R
Slide the sleeve (2) so that the left hand side of the
dashboard may be moved out.
NOTE : this sleeve passes behind the metal heater
14062R2
casing; slide it as shown in the diagram above to

allow the dashboard to be released from the heater casing.
Remove the mounting bolt (M).
57-10

Dashboard
57 D
14149S1
Remove the dashboard from the passenger

compartment (two persons required).
14071S
NOTE : when replacing a body or dashboard wi-
ring loom, refit the wiring loom so that it runs under the dashboard as shown in the diagram
above.
Fit the gaiter onto the bulkhead, having first

connected the wings of the gaiter to the universal
joint using string.
REFITTING
Pull on the tab, cut the string to fit the gaiter.

Check that all the connectors are correctly reconnected.
13116S
Refit the dashboard and the heater control unit.

Fit the steering column; follow the appropriate
recommendations.
57-11

Dashboard
57 D
SPECIAL NOTES FOR REFITTING
Ensure that the wheels are still straight.

Check that the rotary switch is correctly positioned by checking that the reference mark "0" on
the rotary switch is opposite the fixed mark (E),
(vehicles fitted with air bag).
Fit the assembly onto the steering column and
connect the various connectors.
14035S
Renew the steering wheel bolt each time it is removed (pre-bonded bolt).
Observe the correct tightening torque (4.5
daN.m).

Steering wheel bolt
Steering column mounting nut
Air bag cushion mounting bolt
14039R1
Carry out the rest of the refitting operations and

only lock bolt (C) once the two half cowlings have
been refitted, so that the control stalks can be fitted in alignment with the instrument panel and
the dashboard.
This operation is made easier by an opening in the
lower half cowling to give access to bolt (C).
57-12
2.5
4.5
2
0.5

Dashboard
57 D
SPECIAL NOTES FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH AN

AIR BAG
IMPORTANT : before reconnecting the drivers air
bag cushion, the procedure for checking operation of the system must be applied:
- check that the air bag warning light is illuminated on the instrument panel when the ignition is on,
- connect a dummy ignition module to the drivers air bag cushion connector and check that
the warning light extinguishes,
- switch off the ignition, connect the air bag
cushion in place of the dummy ignition module and secure the cushion to the steering
wheel (tightening torque 0.5 daN.m),
- switch on the ignition, check that the warning
light illuminates for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on then extinguishes and remains extinguished.
11846S

above, refer to the section "Fault finding" and
test the system using the XRBAG (El. 1288).
When a dashboard fitted with a passenger air bag

is replaced, the warning label must be refitted in
the correct place (on the side of the dashboard).
This label is available in the kit Part Number 77 01
205 442.
IMPORTANT: if these instructions are not followed exactly, the systems may not operate normally and may even be incorrectly triggered.
57-13
UPPER INTERIOR ACCESSORIES

Grab handle
PRH5801
REMOVAL
14330R
Slacken the mounting bolts (A) without removing

them from their location in the vehicle.
Push on bolt (1), to remove the plastic brackets (B)
from the handle located in the body side linings.
58-1
58 A

Front door side impact absorber
59 A
PRH5901
REMOVAL
Remove the front door lining (see section 72-A).

14190R
Lift the impact absorber (1) and remove it via the

opening in the door box section (2).
14191R
Using a small flat blade screwdriver, separate

brackets (A), to unclip the impact absorber.
59-1

Front seat belts
59
14340R
PRH5902
INTRODUCTION
New programmed restraint system.

This new LEI force limiter system is integrated in
the inertia reel.
The limitation of force is applied to the thoracic
part of the seat belt and is carried out by controlled release of the belt (1), ensured by plastic deformation of a torsion bar (2) integral in the inertia reel.
59-2

Front seat belts
59
REMOVAL (5 DOOR VERSION)
Release the bracket (B) mounting the inertia reel

to the centre pillar lining.
14086R
Remove:
- the front seat (see section 75-A),
- the upper and lower mountings for the seat
belt,
- the centre pillar lining (see section 71-C),
- the rear part of the front door inner sill lining.
14085R
59-3

Front seat belts
59
14078S
14081R
Partially unclip the rear part (1) of the front door

inner sill lining.
Remove:
- the front seat belt retaining rail,
- the upper mounting for the seat belt.

Release the bracket (B) mounting the inertia reel
to the centre pillar lining.
If the pretensioner has been triggered, the front

seat belt(s) must be systematically renewed if
they were in use at the time the pretensioner was
triggered (if there is any doubt about whether
the seat belt was being used, it must be renewed).
59-4

Rear seat belts
59
PRH5903
Remove:
- the lower mounting for the seat belt,
- part of the rear door inner sill lining (1),
- part of the luggage compartment seal where
it touches the shelf (A),
- the rear side shelf (2) and (3) (see section 74A).
Unclip the strap guide (B) and remove the strap.
14088R
59-5

Rear seat belts
59
14089R
14078S
Remove the mounting bolt from the inertia reel.

Release the inertia reel from the rear quarter panel lining.
Remove:
- the front seat belt retaining rail,
- the side shelf (see section 74-A).
The operation to remove the inertia reel is identical to that for the 5 door version described above.
59-6
Heating and ventilation

HEATING
AIR CONDITIONING
77 11 196 723
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRO60.3
Heating and ventilation
Contents
Page
61 HEATING
Control panel
Control cables
Particle filter
Fan assembly
Distributor unit
Radiator
61-1
61-2
61-3
61-4
61-5
61-8
62 AIR CONDITIONING
General
Wiring diagram
Evaporator
Fan
Compressor
Condenser
Pressure relief valve
Dehydration canister
Connecting pipes
Electric control
Computer
62-1
62-3
62-7
62-9
62-10
62-13
62-14
62-15
62-16
62-19
62-21
HEATING
Control panel
61
Disconnect:
- the cables (1) on the control panel ,
- the control panel connectors (2) ,
- the control cables of the rotary arms on the
heating unit.
REMOVAL

Remove:
- the ashtray ,
- the centre console,
14223R
REFITTING

Check the correct positioning of the control panel
on its centring pins.
14062R
- the two mounting bolts (A) from the control

panel on the dashboard.
Check the setting of the air distribution and

mixing controls (see section 61 "Control cables").
61-1
HEATING
Control cables
REMOVAL
REFITTING
The removal of the control cables may be carried

out without removing the dashboard.
Fit the cables on the control panel .
61
Fit the cable sleeve stops (M).

Remove:
- the ashtray ,
- the control panel and the cable concerned.
On the lower right hand side of the passenger

compartment :
Remove the retaining clips (E).
14223R1
ADJUSTMENTS
Set the control panel knob and its associated flap

against the stop.
Connect the cable to the flap on the distributor
unit.
Replace the retaining clips (E).
Check the operation of the controls.
14224R
Refit the control panel to the dashboard.

Replace the centre console.
61-2
HEATING
Particle filter
61
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Remove:
- the half scuttle panel grille on the right hand
side (1),
- the protective covering of the particle filter.
Replace the particle filter in the same way as for

removal.
NOTE : ensure that the particle filter is fitted in
the correct way (the two arrows (A) should be aligned ).
13971R
Remove the particle filter by folding it gently.
14226-1R
14226S
61-3
HEATING
Fan assembly
FITTING WITHOUT
PARTICLE FILTER
FITTING WITH PARTICLE FILTER
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the windscreen wiper arms,
- the complete scuttle panel grille ,
- the fan assembly connector,
- the three fan assembly mountings.
Remove:
- the right hand scuttle panel half grille,
- the rain channel,
- the connector (1),
- the four mounting bolts (2).
Remove it.
Remove the fan assembly.
14225S
14226-2R
REFITTING
REFITTING
61-4
61
HEATING
Distributor unit
61
- the two mounting bolts of the heating control

panel (3),
- the car radio (if fitted),
- the passengers airbag (if fitted),
- the steering column,
- the seven dashboard mounting bolts,
- the bolt (A) on the distributor unit located below the dashboard.
REMOVAL

Remove:
- the steering wheel bolt,
- the steering wheel after straightening the
wheels.
Remove the dashboard.
IMPORTANT:
Follow the recommendations in section 88 for
handling the AIRBAGs.
Remove:
- the half cowlings of the steering column,
- the windscreen pillar trim (2 sections),
- the dashboard cover (1),
14150R
Remove the dashboard beam (B) mounting bolts

and move it to one side.
14091R
- the instrument panel,

- the control stalks for the windscreen wipers
and the lights,
14149R
61-5
HEATING
Distributor unit
61
Fit a shield and blow out the rest of the fluid

using compressed air.
Engine compartment side

Fit a hose clamp and then disconnect the quick release clips from the heater hoses .
Remove:
- the wiper arms using the tool El. 1294-01,
- the upper seal of the plenum chamber and the
external air inlet grille,
- the fan assembly,
- the distributor unit mounting bolts(1) .
13084S
Another type of quick release clips.
14227R
13085S
61-6
HEATING
Distributor unit
61
In the passenger compartment
REFITTING
Remove:
- the distributor unit,
- the heater radiator .
Check:
- correct fitting of the cables behind the dashboard,
- correct coupling of the air ducts to avoid noise.
Replace the steering wheel bolt (pre-bonded bolt,
tightening torque : 4.5 daN.m).
IMPORTANT : before reconnecting the AIRBAG

cushion, the system operation checking procedure
must be carried out :
Check that the AIRBAG warning light on the

instrument panel is illuminated when the ignition is switched on.
Connect a dummy ignition module to the
AIRBAG cushion connector and check that the
warning light extinguishes .
Switch off the ignition, connect the AIRBAG
cushion in place of the dummy ignition module
and secure the cushion to the steering wheel.
PRO61.6
Switch on the ignition, check that the warning

light illuminates for three seconds when the
ignition is switched on, then extinguishes and
remains extinguished.
above, consult section 88.
61-7
HEATING
Radiator
61
Fit a shield and blow out the rest of the fluid using
compressed air.
REMOVAL
The removal of the radiator is carried out after the

removal of the fan assembly, the dashboard and
the air distributor unit.
Remove the heater hose flange bolt on the bulkhead.
Passenger compartment side
Fit a hose clamp and then disconnect the quick release clips from the heater hoses .
Spread the four clips (E), and remove the radiator.
14091R
98816R
Another type of quick release clip.

REFITTING

Fit two mounting bolts (F) on the unit body if any
of the clips have broken.
13085S
61-8
AIR CONDITIONING
General
62
91096-1R
62-1
AIR CONDITIONING
General
A
B
C
D
E
F
Passenger compartment
Engine compartment
Outside air
Towards the air mixing unit
Scuttle panel grille
Outside or recycled air
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Compressor
Condenser
Tri-function pressostat
High pressure bleed valve
Pressure relief valve temperature regulation
Evaporator
Low pressure bleed valve
Fan
Cooling fan
Engine radiator
High pressure fluid
Low pressure vapour
High pressure vapour
Contents:
- Oil for the compressor
SANDEN SP 10 (P.A.G.) : 135 cm 3
- Refrigerant
R134a : 650 35 g
- Compressor
SANDEN SD 7V
62-2
62
ENGINE D7F
AIR CONDITIONING
Wiring diagram
62
PRO14270
62-3
ENGINES
E7J and K7M
AIR CONDITIONING
Wiring diagram
62
PRO14268
62-4
ENGINE F8Q
AIR CONDITIONING
Wiring diagram
62
PRO14269
62-5
AIR CONDITIONING
Wiring diagram
104
Ignition switch
120
Injection computer
171
Air conditioning clutch
206
Air control pressure switch
209
Light switch
225
Diagnostic socket
241
Lighting rheostat
319
Air conditioning control panel
320
Basic fan assembly/Air conditioning
419
Air conditioning unit
597
Engine fuse box
645
Engine connection unit
777
Power supply fuse plate
R67
Front of engine / Engine
R107
Dashboard / front of engine
62-6
62
AIR CONDITIONING
Evaporator
TIGHTENING TORQUES
62
- the twelve plenum chamber closure panel bolts

(2) and remove it,
- the evaporator protector in the plenum chamber.
(in daN.m)
Pressure relief valve bolt on the

evaporator
0.6
Connector pipe mounting nut on the pressure
relief valve
0.8
Pressure relief valve connector pipe
mounting bolt on the dehydration
canister
0.8
Condenser connector pipe mounting bolt
on the dehydration canister
1.2
Compressor connector pipe mounting bolt
on the condenser
0.8
Connector pipe mounting bolt on the
compressor
2.1
Compressor mounting bolt
2.1
Circuit pressure sensor
0.8
REMOVAL
14228R

Drain the R134a refrigerant from the circuit,
using the filling station equipment (see the method described in the manual "Air conditioning").
Disconnect the electric connections (4).

Remove the evaporator unit bolts.

Disconnect the R134a connecting tubes (bolt 1) at
the pressure relief valve .
Block the tubes and the pressure relief valve .
Remove:
- the windscreen wiper arms,
- the air inlet grille,
- the two expansion bottle retaining bolts,
- the oil reservoir for the power assisted steering,
14226-2R1
NOTE : the air filter unit must be removed for vehicles fitted with K7M, E7J and F8Q engines so
the evaporator unit can be removed.
62-7
AIR CONDITIONING
Evaporator
Passenger compartment side
REFITTING
Remove the dashboard after removing :

- the cover,
- the seven dashboard bolts,
- the bolt (5) (on the heater block).
Check that the wiring loom tubes are not in

contact (risk of noise).
62

Tighten the connector pipe nut to the pressure relief valve to 0.6 daN.m (check the condition of the
seal).
NOTE : use rags to protect the parts of the dashboard which may be susceptible to damage.
NOTE :
When refitting the dashboard, check :
- the correct positioning of the wiring,
- the correct fitting of the air ducts.
Use suction to complete the draining of the circuit, then refill with R134a refrigerant using the
filling station equipment (see the method in the
"Air conditioning" manual).
IMPORTANT
When replacing the evaporator, add 30 ml of

P.A.G. SP 10 oil to the circuit.
Use the same oil when refitting the seals and ensure that they are correctly positioned.
14062R1
Remove the two evaporator unit mountings (A)

located behind the dashboard on the passengers
side.
14148R
Remove it.
Carefully remove the evaporator from the unit.
62-8
AIR CONDITIONING
Fan assembly
REMOVAL

Remove:
- the rain channel,
- the connector (1),
- the four bolts (2).
Remove the fan assembly.
14226-2R
REFITTING
62-9
62
ENGINE D7F
AIR CONDITIONING
Compressor
62
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Drain the R134a refrigerant from the circuit (see

the method described in the "Air conditioning"
manual).
If replaced, the compressor is delivered full of oil.

Position the compressor in the correct direction
(filler cap to the top).

Tighten the three bolts (C) (tightening torque :
2.1 daN.m).
Remove:
- the compressor drive belt ,
- the two connecting pipes (A),
- the strut bolt(B),
- the three compressor bolts (C) .
Fit the strut bolt (B) .

Refit the two R134a refrigerant pipes (A) on the
compressor (Tightening torque : 2.1 daN.m).
Remove the compressor .

Fit the drive belt and check its tension.
NOTE: the pipes and compressor MUST be plugged to prevent humidity entering the circuit.
NOTE: when refitting the connector pipes to the
compressor, all bolts MUST be replaced, then
hand tighten them before tightening to the recommended torque . The aim is to ensure the correct positioning of the pipe so that it is not damaged at the "damper" (1).
Check the condition of the seals and lubricate

them with P.A.G. SP 10 oil.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the compressor , the oil level must

be topped up correctly.
13829R1
62-10
ENGINE F8Q
AIR CONDITIONING
Compressor
62
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Vehicle on a lift.
Drain the circuit of R134a refrigerant (see the method described in the "Air conditioning" manual).

Tighten the three bolts (Tightening torque : 2.1

daN.m).
Remove the front bumper.

Refit the two R134a refrigerant pipes (A)
(Tightening torque : 2.1 daN.m) on the compressor and the retaining bracket (B).
From above, remove :

- the two connector pipes (A),
- the connector pipe retaining bracket (B).
Fit the drive belt and check its tension.
From beneath the vehicle, remove the three

compressor bolts and remove it.
NOTE: when refitting connector pipes on the


IMPORTANT
When replacing the compressor, the oil level must

be topped up.
13947R
62-11
ENGINES
E7J and K7M
AIR CONDITIONING
Compressor
62
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Vehicle on a lift.

Tighten the mounting bolts (Tightening torque :

2.1 daN.m).
Remove:
- the engine undertray,
- the bumper.
Refit the two R134a refrigerant pipes (A)

(Tightening torque : 2.1 daN.m) on the compressor .
From above, remove:

- the accessory drive belt,
- the two R134a connector pipes (A).
Fit the drive belts and check their tension.

From beneath the vehicle, remove:

- the compressor mounting bolts and remove the
compressor.
NOTE: when fitting the connector pipes on the


IMPORTANT
When replacing the compressor, the oil level must

be topped up.
14229R
62-12
AIR CONDITIONING
Condenser
62
Remove the four condenser mounting bolts (6) on

the radiator.
REMOVAL
It is not necessary to use a lift.

Remove the condenser carefully.
Remove:
- the seal (1),
- the upper cross member (2),
- the two R134a refrigerant pipes (4) (plug to
prevent humidity entering the system),
- the two radiator upper mounting bolts (3).
13828R
REFITTING

Check the condition of the seals.
Drain the circuit of R134a refrigerant, then , using
suction, refill it (see the method described in the
IMPORTANT
13974R
When replacing the condenser, add 30 ml of

P.A.G. SP 10 oil to the circuit.
NOTE: tightening torque for the bolts (6) : 0.8
daN.m.
62-13
AIR CONDITIONING
62
REPLACEMENT
Drain the R134a refrigerant from the circuit

using the filling station equipment (see the method described in the "Air conditioning" manual).
Remove:
- the connector piping mounting nut (A) ,
- the two pressure relief valve mounting bolts
(B) on the evaporator.
14228R1
When refitting, ensure that the pipe seals are in

good condition.
Bolt tightening torques :
- bolt (A) : 0.8 daN.m,
- bolt (B) : 0.6 daN.m.
using suction, then refill using the filling station
equipment (see the method described in the "Air
conditioning" manual).
62-14
AIR CONDITIONING
62
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Vehicle on a lift.


using suction, then refill using the filling station
equipment (see the method described in the "Air
conditioning" manual).
Remove:
- the two radiator upper mounting bolts,
- the R134a union (2),
- the two pipe mounting bolts on the dehydration canister .
When replacing the dehydration canister, add 15

ml of P.A.G. SP 10 oil to the circuit.
Gently push back the radiator - condenser assembly.
NOTE: bolt tightening torque (2) : 1.2 daN.m
From beneath the vehicle

Remove the two dehydration canister mounting
bolts (1) on the condenser .
13828R1
Remove the dehydration canister .

Plug all openings to avoid humidity entering the
assembly.
62-15
AIR CONDITIONING
Connector pipes
62

LOW PRESSURE PIPE
REFITTING
REMOVAL
Remove the mounting bolt on the pressure relief

valve .

Plug the pressure relief valve and the pipe.
When replacing a pipe, add 10 ml of SP 10 oil

or add 100 ml when a pipe breaks (rapid leak).
Remove the mounting bolt on the compressor .

NOTE:
- Pipe mounting bolt on the
compressor :
- Pipe mounting nut on the pressure
relief valve :
- Pipe mounting bolt on the
condenser :
Plug the compressor and the pipe.

Slacken the pipe retaining bracket.
Remove the low pressure pipe.
2.1 daN.m
0.8 daN.m
0.8 daN.m
PRO62.4
62-16
AIR CONDITIONING
Connector pipes
62

COMPRESSOR - CONDENSER
PIPE
HIGH
PRESSURE
REFITTING

REMOVAL
NOTE: when refitting the connector pipe on the
compressor; all bolts MUST be replaced, then
hand tighten them before tightening to the recommended torque. The aim is to ensure the correct positioning of the pipe so that it is not damaged at the "damper" (1).
Remove the mounting bolt on the condenser .

Plug the compressor and the pipe.
Remove the condenser mounting bolt.
Remove the pipe.

Plug the condenser and the pipe.

When replacing a pipe, add 10 ml of SP 10 oil or
add 100 ml when a pipe breaks (rapid leak).
PRO62.5
62-17
AIR CONDITIONING
Connector pipes
62

HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTOR PIPE BETWEEN THE

DEHYDRATION CANISTER AND THE PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
REFITTING
REMOVAL

Disconnect the pipe from its mountings.

When replacing a pipe, add 10 ml of SP 10 oil
or add 100 ml when a pipe breaks (rapid leak).
Disconnect the pressure sensor connector.

Remove the pressure relief valve mounting bolt.
NOTE:
- Pipe mounting bolt on the dehydration
canister :
0.8 daN.m
- Pipe mounting nut on the pressure relief
valve :
0.8 daN.m
Plug the pressure relief valve and the pipe.

Remove the dehydration canister mounting bolt .
Plug the dehydration canister and the pipe.
Remove the pipe.
PRO62.6
62-18
AIR CONDITIONING
Electric control
62
EVAPORATOR SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
The pressure sensor (1) is located beside the

condenser on the high pressure pipe between the
pressure relief valve and the dehydration canister .

Remove:
- the evaporator protector in the plenum chamber.
Disconnect the evaporator sensor connector .
Remove the evaporator sensor .
REFITTING

Ensure the sensor is correctly positioned in its
place on the evaporator .
0.23 RESISTANCE (2) FOR ENGINE COOLING
FAN SPEED
It is mounted on the engine cooling fan mounting.
13827R
RECYCLING MOTOR
Access to the recycling motor is only possible after
removal of the fan.
All operations can be carried out on the sensor without draining the refrigerant from the circuit; it
is mounted on a "SCHRADER" valve.
Remove the two mounting bolts on the recycling

unit.
Tightening torque : 0.8 daN.m.
New motors are delivered with the flap set half

open and refitting does not require any specific
precautions.
This pressure sensor is fitted with a seal so, when

refitting, ensure that it is in good condition and
lubricate it with P.A.G. SP 10 oil.
Check correct operation.
62-19
AIR CONDITIONING
Electrical control
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
62
FAN SPEED RESISTOR UNIT
CONVENTIONAL HEATING VERSION
AIR CONDITIONING AND PARTICLE FILTER

VERSION
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
Remove the right hand scuttle panel half grille.

Remove the right hand scuttle panel half grille.
From behind the engine cooling fan assembly
block, remove the bolt (1).
Disconnect the electrical connections.
Remove the resistor unit.
Remove the bolt (1).
Disconnect the connector (2).
Remove the resistor unit.
PRO62.7
PRO62.8
REFITTING
REFITTING
62-20
AIR CONDITIONING
Computer
62
13825R
15 Track connector (A)

Track
Description
Not used
Air conditioning operation information
Recycling on/off
Air conditioning computer earth
+ 12 V accessories (engine cooling fan

assembly fuse)
+ 12 V after ignition feed (stop fuse)
Air conditioning operation warning light
Recycling operation warning light
+ side lights
10
Heated rear screen control
11
Heated rear screen operation warning

light
12
Not used
13
Not used
14
Not used
15
Not used
62-21
AIR CONDITIONING
Computer
30 track connector ( B)
Track
Description
Compressor control
Diagnostic information L
Engine cooling fan voltage information
Not used
Diagnostic information K
Not used
TDC information
Refrigerant pressure sensor
10
Refrigerant pressure sensor
11
Refrigerant pressure sensor signal
12
Evaporator sensor
13
Power absorbed information
14
Not used
15
Not used
16
17
Compressor control
18
Air conditioning cut-out information
19
Not used
20
Not used
21
Fast idle connection
22
Engine cooling fan assembly low speed

control
23
Engine cooling fan assembly high speed

control
24
Heated rear screen control
25
Not used
26
Air conditioning recycling motor
27
Air conditioning recycling motor
28
Not used
29
Evaporator sensor
30
Not used
62-22
62
Sealing and Soundproofing
WINDOW SEALING

77 11 197 316
DECEMBER 1997
Edition Anglaise

Renault.

Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH6001
Sealing and
Soundproofing
Contents
Page
66 WINDOW SEALING
A
B
C
D
Front door exterior weatherstrip

Front door window guide
Rear door window guide
Fixed window frame
66-1
66-2
66-4
66-6
WINDOW SEALING
Front door exterior weatherstrip
REMOVAL
66 A
REFITTING
99207-2R
Fit the weatherstrip at the rear of the front door

and push it towards the rear (1).
14156S
Lower the weatherstrip towards the front and fit

is as you go along all along its length (2).
Remove the exterior rear view mirror (see 56-B).

Open the window.
Never bend the weatherstrip to fit it into position

as this will damage it.
IMPORTANT: The weatherstrip is fragile. Use an

extra flat chisel, protected with a cloth or a strip
of masking tape and lift the weatherstrip every
10 cm.
Tool Car. 1363 may also be used (see 50-B) for this
operation.
66-1
WINDOW SEALING
66
Release the window pad from the guide (1).
REMOVAL
Remove the window (2) after releasing the drive

pin from the winder.
IMPORTANT: remove the guide with care, beginning by releasing the two vertical parts.
REFITTING
PRH6601
Remove:
- the front door lining (see 72-A),
- the exterior rear view mirror (see 56-B)
- the front door exterior weatherstrip (see 66A),
- the front door interior weatherstrip .
14155R
Insert the rear vertical section of the guide into

the door box section.
Offer up and fit the moulded corner (3) without
forcing it , with reference to the outside of the vehicle.
14188R
66-2
WINDOW SEALING
14154R
Fit the rest of the guide at (4), (5) and (6).

NOTE : section (4) of the guide for a 3 door ver-
sion vehicle is very fragile. It contains a metal core

which can be deformed if the guide is bent during
the refitting operation.
66-3
66
WINDOW SEALING
REMOVAL
66
REFITTING
PRH6602
Remove:
- the rear door lining (see 72-B),
- the sliding window exterior weatherstrip
(using tool Car. 1363, see section 50-B),
- the rear door interior weatherstrip,
- the sliding window (see section 54-D), and allow it to rest on the bottom of the door box
section.
14152R
Insert the two vertical sections in the door box section.

Offer up and fit the corner (1) without forcing it,
with reference to the fixed window frame at the
fixed pillar, to ensure the continuity between
these two parts.
NOTE : the sliding window exterior weatherstrip
is an integral part of the fixed window frame. To

renew it the fixed window frame must be removed (see section 66-D).
Fit the moulded corner (2).

IMPORTANT: remove the guide with care, beginning with the two vertical sections.
66-4
WINDOW SEALING
66
14151R
Fit the rest of the guide at (3) and (4).

Refit:
- the weatherstrips and the sliding window,
- the door lining.
66-5
WINDOW SEALING
Fixed window frame
66 D
Remove the rear door window guide (see section

66-C).
REMOVAL
Remove the fixed pillar (see section 54-D).

Release the fixed window frame from its location
on the door.
IMPORTANT: remove the guide with care, beginning with the two vertical sections.
REFITTING
PRH6603
Remove:
- the rear door lining (see 72-B),
- the sliding window exterior weatherstrip
(using tool Car. 1363, see section 50-B),
- the rear door interior weatherstrip,
- the sliding window (see section 54-D), and allow it to rest on the bottom of the door box
section.
NOTE : the sliding window exterior weatherstrip
is an integral part of the fixed window frame.
14153S
Before fitting the frame, ensure that the fixed

window is correctly fitted.
Offer up the frame and slide it until it reaches the
stop on the rear pillar of the door.
14152S1
66-6
Trim and Upholstery

INTERIOR BODY TRIM
SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS TRIM
NON-SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS TRIM
TRAYS AND REAR SHELF
FRONT SEAT FRAMES AND RUNNERS
REAR SEAT FRAMES AND RUNNERS
FRONT SEAT TRIM
REAR SEAT TRIM
SEAT ACCESSORIES

77 11 197 402
DECEMBER 1997

Renault.

Edition Anglaise
Renault 1997
EXPLODED VIEW
PRH7002
Trim and upholstery
Contents
Page
75
71 INTERIOR BODY TRIM

A
B
C
D
E
F
Windscreen pillar trim

Rear door inner sill lining
Centre pillar and rear quarter panel
lower lining
Centre pillar upper lining
Wheel arch lining
Page
71-1
71-2
71-3
71-4
71-5
71-6
A
B
C
D
FRONT SEAT FRAMES AND

RUNNERS
Complete seat
Runners
Adjusting base and seat frame
Seatback lumbar adjustment system
75-1
75-2
75-5
75-6
76 REAR SEAT FRAMES AND

RUNNERS
72 SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS TRIM

A
B
Front door lining

Rear door lining
A
B
Complete seatback
Seatback frame 1/3 - 2/3
76-1
76-3
72-1
72-4
77 FRONT SEAT TRIM

A
B
73 NON-SIDE OPENING
ELEMENTS TRIM
A
B
Bonnet lining
Tailgate lining
73-1
73-2
Seatback trim
Seat squab trim
77-1
77-4
78 REAR SEAT TRIM

A
Seatback trim 1/3 - 2/3
78-1
74 TRAYS AND REAR SHELF

A
Side shelf
74-1
79 SEAT ACCESSORIES
A
Head restraint guides
79-1
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Windscreen pillar trim
71 A
PRH7101
REMOVAL
14094R1
Partially remove the door seal in the area where it

touches the trim.
Gently separate the trim at the top so that the retaining clip (A) can be pressed.
Release the trim (1).
Release the trim from its position on the dashboard (2).
71-1
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Rear door inner sill lining
PRH7102
REMOVAL
14087R
Remove :
- part of the rear door seal,
- the lower mounting for the front seat belt
strap,
- the lower mounting of the rear seat belt strap,
- the screwed retaining clip (A).
Unclip the lining (1) and (2).
Remove the lining.
71-2
71
5 DOOR
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

71
Remove the height adjusting bracket for the front

seat belt strap.
Using a small flat blade screwdriver, remove the
centre part of the bracket at the front to remove
it.
PRH7103
REMOVAL
14086R1
Partially unclip the front door inner sill lining (1),

(see previous diagram).
Remove the lower mounting bolt (A).
Release the lining (2).
At (3), remove the strap guide and press the two
lugs on the retaining clip to release it from the pillar lining.
Lift the trim (4) to release it from the lining.
14087R1
Remove :
- part of the rear and front door seals,
- the lower mounting for the front seat belt
strap,
- the lower mounting of the rear seat belt strap,
- the upper mounting for the front seat belt
strap and its cover,
- the rear door inner sill lining (see section 71B).
71-3
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Centre pillar and rear quarter panel lower lining
3 DOOR
71 D
PRH7205
REMOVAL
14079R
Unclip the lining (2), (3) and (4).

Lift it to release it (5).
Remove the lining.
14078R
Remove:
- part of the door seal,
- the lower mounting for the rear seat belt
strap,
- the front seat belt retaining rail (1).
71-4
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Centre pillar upper lining
3 DOOR
71
Using unpicking pliers, unclip the rear quarter panel upper lining (1).
PRH7104
REMOVAL
14082R

Unclip the lining (2).
14080R
Remove:
- part of the door seal,
strap,
- the front seat belt retaining rail (A),
- the upper mounting for the front seat belt,
- the height adjustment bracket for the front
seat belt strap: using a small flat blade
screwdriver remove the centre part of the
bracket at the front to remove it,
lining (see section 71-D).
71-5
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Wheel arch lining
71
PRH7105
REMOVAL
14084S
Remove the rear seatback retaining pin from its

location on the body side.
13981S
Unclip the lining from the luggage compartment

reinforcement bar.
71-6
INTERIOR BODY TRIM

Wheel arch lining
71
14089R1
Remove:
- the lower centre pillar lining (3 doors) (see
section 71-D).
- the side shelf (see section 74-A),
- the lower mounting for the rear seat belt,
- the rear shock absorber upper mounting
cover,
- the seatback side anchor point trim (three
clips (1)),
- the rear end panel lining:
.
remove the three bolts (A),
.
lift the trim to remove the lower retaining
clips (2) from the end panel lining,
.
lift the luggage compartment carpet and
remove the lining.
Move the inner sill lining to one side to release the
wheel arch lining towards the front (3).
71-7

Front door lining
REMOVAL
72 A
REMOVAL
PRH7201
14169R
Remove:
- the door closing handle,
- the handle mounting bolt on the door box
section.
Remove:
- the control cable sleeve stop (B) ,
- the end of the cable from the handle (C).
14196R
Remove:
- the rear view mirror bolt cover (A),
- the speaker grille.
72-1

Front door lining
72 A
14194R
14192S
NOTE : on the E version, to reach the supply
Remove the door closing handle mounting bolt.
connectors for the rear view mirror controls, just

remove the speaker grille.
Lift and pull the handle backwards to release it

from its location in the lining.
Disconnect the supply connectors to the rear view
mirror controls.
Remove:
- the three lower mounting bolts (D),
- the four speaker mounting bolts (E).
Using unpicking pliers, unclip (1) the lining (F) and
remove the manual window winder (if necessary).
Lift the lining (2) to remove it from its location on
the inner door weatherstrip.
72-2

Front door lining
SPECIAL NOTES FOR 3 DOOR VERSIONS
14170R
Before removing the door lining, unclip the lining

(1) from the door pillar (G) and lift it (2) to unclip
it at (H).
When removing the lining or replacing the door,

preformed sealing mastic must be inserted between the door box section and the lining.
When replacing a door, use the kit of special door
clips (see Technical Note 384).
72-3
72 A

Rear door lining
72
Lift the lining (2) to release it from its location on

the inner door weatherstrip and the retaining clip
(B).
When removing the lining or replacing the door,
preformed sealing mastic must be inserted between the door box section and the lining.
When replacing a door, use the kit of special door
clips (see Technical Note 384).
PRH7202
REMOVAL
14243R
Remove:
- the mounting bolt for the door closing handle,
- the door opening handle.
Using unpicking pliers, unclip (1) the lining (A)
and remove the manual window winder.
72-4

Bonnet lining
REMOVAL
14072R
Using unpicking pliers, remove the retaining clips

(A).
Remove the lining.
73-1
73 A

Tailgate lining
PRH7203
REMOVAL
14161R

Using unpicking pliers, unclip the lining (B).
Remove the lining.
73-2
73

Side shelf
74 A
Disconnect the luggage compartment light and

the door switch (left hand side).
Unclip the lining (2) and release it (3) to release
the rear seat anchor bracket.
Remove the strap guide (B) from the lining and release the strap from the lining.
Remove the lining.
PRH7204
REMOVAL
14088R1
Remove:
- part of the rear door seal,
- part of the luggage compartment seal to release the retaining brackets (A),
strap,
- part of the rear door inner sill lining (1),
- the mounting bolts (B) and (C).
74-1

Side shelf
74 A
SPECIAL NOTES FOR 3 DOOR VERSIONS
14081R1
14080R
Remove bolts (A) and (B).

The remainder of the operations are identical to
those for the 5 door version (see previous page).
Remove:
- the upper rear quarter panel lining.
Using unpicking pliers, unclip the lining (1).
74-2

Complete seat
75 A
REMOVAL
Photo 14 405-1
Photo 14 413
14405-1S
14413S
Disconnect the various wiring looms under the

seat squab.
REFITTING
14074R
Put the vehicle on a lift.

Remove the four mountings under the body.
14073R
Before refitting the seat, ensure the spacers (A)

are present.
75-1

Runners
75
PRH7503
Remove the seat (see section 75-A).

REMOVAL
Photo 14 404
Photo 14 394
Inner side:
Remove:
- the runner cover (bolt (A)),
Remove the three runner mounting nuts.
75-2
the seat belt pretensioner.

Runners
Photo 14 396-1
75
Photo 14 397
Outer side:
REMOVING THE UNIT (E) AND THE RUNNER

RELEASE CONTROL CABLE
Remove the runner cover.

Remove the control cable as described above.
Remove (if fitted) the runner release control
cable.
Remove the seatback trim (see section 77-A).
Remove:
- the cable sleeve stop from the retaining
bracket on the runner (B),
- the end of the cable from the runner control
hook (C),
- the two nuts mounting the runner on the adjusting base,
- the rivet from the upper mounting bracket for
the cable sleeve(D) (see previous page).
Remove the two mounting rivets and unclip the

unit from the seatback frame.
75-3

Runners
REFITTING
Photo 14 396
Ensure that the control cable is located in the

groove on the plastic return bracket before refitting the seatback trim.
75-4
75

Adjusting base and seat frame
PRH7501
Remove:
- the seat (see section 75-A),
- the runner cover,
- the runners and the release control cable (if
fitted) (see section 75-B),
- the seat squab trim (see section 77-B),
Photo 14 395
the mounting bolts for the seatback frame on

the adjusting seat base.
Remove it.
75-5
75

Seatback lumbar adjustment system
PRH7502
Remove:
- the seatback trim (see section 77-A).
Photo 14 398
Remove:
- handle (A) from the seatback frame metal
mesh,
- the mounting rivet from the control unit and
unclip it.
75-6
75 D

Complete seatback
76 A
PRH7601
REMOVAL
13981S
14084S
Remove the lining from the luggage compartment reinforcement bar.
On each side, remove the seatback retaining pin

from its location on the wheel arch.
76-1

Complete seatback
14083R
Remove the mounting bolt from the centre clevice

(A) and release the clevice (1) from pin (B) mounted on the floor.
Remove the seatback from the bench seat.
76-2
76 A

76
PRH7602
REMOVAL
the two mounting nuts (A) so that the two

parts of the seatback may be separated,
Remove:
- the seatback from the bench seat (see section
76-A),
- the rear head restraints,
Photo 14 400
Photo 14 399
76-3
nut (B) mounting the clevice on the seatback

frame.

76
Remove the seatback trim (see section 78-A).
Photo 14403
Photo 14 401
Remove the frame from its location on the seatback foam.

NOTE : the seatback frame of a 2/3 - 1/3 seat and
REMOVING THE SEATBACK RELEASE BUTTON

GUIDES
of a 1/1 seat is removed in the same manner.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, remove the two retaining clips (C) (see diagram below).
Remove the guides.
Photo 14 402
Guide retaining clip (C) on the seatback frame.
76-4
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seatback trim
77 A
Remove:
- the seatback lumbar adjustment handle.
For this handle, remove the clip in the centre of
the handle using a small flat blade screwdriver, taking care to fit the tool into the special slot for
this purpose.
Photo 14 405
PRH7701
INTRODUCTION
NOTE : the seatback trim is thermo-bonded on the
seat foam so if the seatback trim is to be replaced,

the trim / foam assembly for the seatback must be
systematically renewed.
REMOVAL
Remove the seat tilt angle handle (if fitted) in the

same manner as for the lumbar adjustment handle.
Photo 14 404-1
77-1
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seatback trim
Photo 14406
77 A
Photo 14 408
Remove the two rubber straps retaining the trim

on the seatback frame metal mesh.
Remove the trim from the two retaining brackets

on each head restraint guide.
Photo 14 407
Photo 14 409
Remove the head restraint and the upper covers

for the head restraint guides.
Pass the retaining strip for the front of the seatback between the seat squab trim and the seatback.
77-2
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seatback trim
77 A
REFITTING
Photo 14 410
Photo 14 418
Remove the three clips mounting the seatback

foam on the metal mesh.
When refitting the trim, ensure the cloth protector for the head restraint guides remains in position during the operation.
Lift the trim to remove it from the seatback frame
NOTE : when removing, take care not to tear the
foam at the head restraint guides.
77-3
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seat squab trim
77
For this handle, remove the clip in the centre of

the handle using a small flat blade screwdriver, taking care to fit the tool into the special slot for
this purpose.
PRH7702
Photo 14 406
INTRODUCTION
NOTE : the seat squab trim is thermo-bonded on
the seat foam so if the seat squab trim is to be replaced, the trim / foam assembly for the seat
squab must be systematically renewed.
REMOVAL
Remove the two rubber straps retaining the trim

on the seat squab frame metal mesh.
Photo 14 404
Remove:
- the two runner covers,
- the handle for adjusting the seatback tilt angle.
77-4
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seat squab trim
Photo 14 409
77
Photo 14 411
Pass the retaining strip for the front of the seatback between the seat squab trim and the seatback.
Cut the clip on each side of the seat squab.
Photo 14 410-1
Photo 14 412
Lift the retaining strip for the rear of the seatback

trim to reach the clip mounting the two sides of
the seat squab trim (see next diagram).
Using unpicking pliers, remove the trim retaining

clips at the rear of the seat.
Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the
trim retaining cord tensioner.
Release the automatic locking strap from the tensioner.
77-5
FRONT SEAT TRIM

Seat squab trim
Photo 14 413
Remove the lower part of the trim at the front of

the seat squab from the two plastic handles for
the connector mounting.
Photo 14 414
Remove the wings of the trim at the rear of the

seat squab from their location on the seat squab
frame.
Lift the seat height adjustment control bar and remove the trim / foam assembly for the seat squab.
77-6
77
REAR SEAT TRIM

78 A
PRH7601
INTRODUCTION
NOTE : the seatback trim is thermo-bonded on the seat foam so if the seat-
back trim is to be replaced, the trim / foam assembly for the seatback must
be systematically renewed.
Trim is removed from the 1/3, 2/3 and 1/1 seatbacks in the same manner.
78-1
REAR SEAT TRIM

78 A
REMOVAL
Photo 14 415
Photo 14399
At the rear of the seatback, remove the two slide

closures and open them.
Remove:
- the bench seat (see section 76-A),
- the head restraints,
- the two nuts mountings the centre clevice so
the two sections of the seatback may be separated,
Photo 14 416
Photo 14 400
Remove the trim from the side anchor pin.

Remove the clip using unpicking pliers.
the mounting nut for the clevice on the seatback frame.
78-2
REAR SEAT TRIM

Photo 14 417
78 A
Photo 14 403
Remove the clips on the frame.
Photo 14 420
Photo 14 401
Remove the seatback release button and the seatback frame (follow the method described in section 76-B).
78-3
REAR SEAT TRIM

REMOVING THE 1/1 BENCH SEAT
Remove the bench seat (see section 76-A).

Remove the two slide closures.
Remove the rear part of the trim and the seatback
locking buttons in the same way as for the 2/3 1/3 seatback.
Photo 14 421
Remove the clips on the frame.
REFITTING
The clip mounting the rear part of the trim cannot

be retained.
It must be renewed each time the trim is removed
/ refitted.
78-4
78 A
SEAT ACCESSORIES
79 A
Photo 14 419
PRH7901
REMOVAL
Remove:
- the seatback trim (see section 77-A),
- the head restraints.
Push the two retaining brackets (A), see the

diagram on the following page, to release each
head restraint guide upwards.
Photo 14 418
Remove the two clips mounting the protective

cloth strip.
79-1
SEAT ACCESSORIES
79 A
REFITTING
14444R
When refitting the head restraint guides, ensure

that the metal linkages are correctly located (B)
behind the retaining brackets (C).
Ensure the guides are correctly clipped (A) on the
metal frame sleeves, before refitting the seatback
trim.
79-2

VNX - Su Clio 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

VNX - Su Clio 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

VNX - Su Clio 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

General

BB0A - BB0C - BB0D - BB0E - CB0A - CB0C - CB0D - CB0E

All copyrights reserved by Renault.

The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the

07 VALUES AND SETTINGS

All dimensions are given in millimetres (mm) unless otherwise indicated.

EQUIPMENT AND TOOLING

200 CPOV 3500

200 CPOV 3250

Manual gearbox type

LOCATION OF VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

1 The type mines of the vehicle and the serial

The technical features of the vehicle

Safety symbol (special precautions to be taken when carrying out operations).

SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED

Cha. 280 -02

Adaptable cross piece for trolley jack

If a trolley jack is used, appropriate axle

When putting the vehicle on axle stands, they

It is forbidden to lift the vehicle by supporting its

The axle stands are positioned at the rear by

Depending on the type of trolley jack, use sockets

TROLLEY JACK AT THE SIDE

Use the cross piece Cha. 280-02.

Various cases may be considered:

2 - REMOVING - REFITTING THE ENGINE AND

In these cases, the vehicle body must be secured to

These must be placed underneath the vehicle

MOLYKOTE "33 Medium"

"MOBIL CVJ" 825 Black star

for driveshaft joints

HARDENER KIT (RHODORSEAL 5661)

AUTO joint blue

LUBRICANT CLEANING AGENTS

Super concentrated unseizing agent

0.5 litre bottle DOT4

Engine drain plug spanner

DRAINING: plug (1)

FILLING: plug (2)

E7J and K7M ENGINES

FILLING : plug (2)

DRAINING: plug (1)

E7J and K7M ENGINES

CHECKING THE LEVEL

For topping up or filling, use ELF RENAULTMATIC

D7F - E7J - K7M and F8Q ENGINES

F8Q ENGINE with air conditioning

VALUES AND SETTINGS

VALUES AND SETTINGS

ACEA A1-98 standard

+10 C +20 C +30 C

Oil for fuel economy:

* Check with the dipstick

VALUES AND SETTINGS

0 C +10 C +20 C +30 C

ACEA B1 oils must never be used for diesel

+10 C +20 C +30 C

* Check with the dipstick

VALUES AND SETTINGS

All countries: TRANSELF TRX 75 W 80 W

Brake fluids must be approved by the Technical

ELF RENAULT MATIC D2

MOBIL ATF 220